North Texas Mail-SP 880722 DEC 2
L
1988
United States
Post Office,
North Texas
Mall I~rocesslng
Center & Vehicle
Maintenance
Facility
United States
Postal Service
Facilities Service
Center
1407 Union Avenue
Memphis, TN. 38166-0310
USPS Proj. No. 3AA617
USPS Dwg. No. FSC--603
Technical
Specifications
Vol. II
Div. 2-14
July 22, 1988
HDR
Henningson, Durham
& Richard,on Inc.
A Centerra Company
UNITED STATES POST OFFICE
NORTH TEXAS
MAIL PROCESSING cENTER
AND
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE FA(
)ILITY
4,8274
Henningson. Durham
& Richardson, Inc.
A Centerra Company
MSQ MSQ ENGINEERING. INC.
rrE CONSULTING ENGINEERS
5495 BELT LINE RD.. SU 380 · DALLAS, TX 75240. (214} 233- ~ .~')0
02
03
07
10
11
13
14
16
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
8G20
VOLUME I
DIVISION
00220
00440
DIVISION
01010
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, cONTRACT FORMS,
AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA
SUBSTITUTIONS
1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Location of Work
S~ope
Options
Postal Service-Furnished Property
Attachment A (4 Pages)
01020 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
General
Contract Documents Furnished
Drawing List
Definition of Terms
Standard Abbreviations
Attachment B (15 Pages)
01013 SCHEDULING AND PROGRESS
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
Commencement, Prosecution and Completion
Commencement Activity
Exceptions
Liquidated Damages
Contractor-Prepared Network Analysis
Utilities
Demolition Scheduling
01040 SUBMITTALS
1.01 Schedules of Submittals
1.02 Shop Drawings
1.03 Equipment Room Layouts
1.04 Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists
1.05 Certificates of Compliance ·
1.06 A/E Review of Submittals
1.07 Spare Parts Data
1.08 Construction Cost Estimate
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
TOC-1
02
03
O7
10
11
13
14
16
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
O1
O2
03
O5
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
21
22
23
25
27
28
29
31
33
34
35
36
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
TOC-2
1.09
1.10
Samples
Coordination Drawings
Attachment C (6 Pages)
01050 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
General
Project Sign
Bulletin Board
Construction-Use Facilities
Temporary Electricity
Temporary Heating and Ventilation
Temporary Water
Sanitary Provision
Ingress and Egress
1.10 USPS Field Office
Attachment D (1 Page)
01060 EXECUTION OF WORK
1.01
1 °02
1.03
Layout of Work
Superintendence of Subcontractors
Use of Facilities and Equipment
01070 QUALITY CONTROL
1.01 Contractor Qualit~ Control.
1.02 Posted Operating Instructions
1.03 Quality Control Testing
01080 MANUALS AND TRAINING
1.01 Manuals
1.02 Posted Operating Instructions
1.03 Training
Attachment E (1 Page)
01090 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
1.01 Scope
1.O2 Applicable Regulations
1.03 Notification
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1o10
1.11
1,12
1,13
1,14
Subcontractors
Implementation
Protection of Land Resources
Historical and Archeological Finds
Protection of Water Resources
Protection of Fish and Wildlife
Janitorial Services
Disposal of Cleared Material
Dust Control
Pollution Control
Job Safety Program
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
21
22
23
25
27
28
29
31
33
34
35
36
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
O! 01100
03 1.01
04 1.02
05 1.03
06 1.04
07 1.05
08 1.06
09 1.07
10 1.08
11 1.09
14 VOLUME II
MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
Payment and Performance Bonds
Status of USPS.
Ground Breaking Ceremonies
Requirements of General Contractor
Site Visits
Fuel Storage Tanks
Mechanization
Miscellaneous Contract Expenses
U,S,D,A, Quarantined Areas
17 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
19 02150
20 02221
21
22' 02222
23 02244
24 02245
25 02281
26 02372
27 02503
28 02514
29 02580
30 02732
31 02800
32 02810
33 02820
34 02830
35
36 02920
37 02930
38 02932
39 02935
40 02950
41 02952
BORING & JACKING
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR
UTILITIES
BUILDING EXCAVATION, FILLING, AND BACKFILLING
LIME STABILIZATION
CEMENT MODIFIED SUBGRADE
TERMITE CONTROL
DRILLED PIERS
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE WALKS
CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS
PAVING STRIPING AND MARKING
SANITARY SEWERS
MISCELLANEOUS SITE IMPROVEMENTS
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
FOUNTAIN
CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES
(PVC - COATED OR GALVANIZED)
TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING
HYDROMULCHING
NATIVE GRASS SEEDING
SODDING
PLANTS AND PLANTING
INTERIOR PLANTSCAPING
43 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE
45 03000
46 03001
47 03100
48 03200
49 03300
50 03310
51 03312
52 03350
53 03430
54 03450
CONCRETE - GENERAL
CONCRETE TESTING AND EVALUATION
CONCRETE FORMWORK
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING
CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING AND CURING
CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECT~
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
CONCRETE TILT UP W~LL pANELs
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
U,S,P,S, - N, Texas/N, .Georgia G,M,F, & V.M,F,
TOC-3
01
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
14
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
TOC-4
02 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04 04050
05 04110
06 04150
07 04220
08 04510
COLD WT~ATHER MASONRY PROCEDURES
CEMENT AND LIME MORTARS
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
CONCRETE MASONRY
MASONRY CLEANING
10 DIVISION 5 - METALS
12 05120
13 05RlO
14 05305
15 05310
16 05321
17 05500
STRUCTURAL STEEL
STEEL JOISTS
ACOUSTIC METAL DECK (MTL)
METAL ROOF DECKING
COMPOSITE METAL FORM DECK
METAL FABRICATIONS
1:9 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
21 06000
22 06410
CARPENTRY
ARCHITECTURAL CABINETWORK
24 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
26 07162
27 07176
28 07190
29 07210
30 07270
31 07411
32 07413
33 07533
34 07600
35 07605
36 07727
37 07813
38 07900
DAMPPROOFING
WATE~REPELLENT COATING (CC)
UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
BUILDING INSULATION
FIPdgSTOPPING
PREFORMED WALL PANELS
PREFORMED METAL SIDING (P.M.S.)
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
METAL ROOFING
ROOF HATCH
SKYLIGHT
JOINT SEALANTS
40 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
42 08000
43 08100
44 08211
45 08333
46 08340
47 08356
48 08362
49
50 08363
51
52 08400
53 08410
54 08521
DOOR SCHEDULE
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
COUNTER SHUTTER
COILING GRILLE
IMPACT DOOR
OVERHEAD DOOR
(Type 4 - Coiling Steel)
OVER/lEAD DOOR
(Type 1, 2, & 3 - Sectional Steel)
MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS
STOREFRONT
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02
04
O5
O6
07
O8
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
21
22
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
O1 08700
02 08720
03 08800
FINISH HARDWARE
AUTOMATIC DOOR EQUIPMENT
GLASS AND GLAZING
05 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
07 09000
08 09110'
09 09201
10 09220
1! 09250
12 09310
13 09330
14 09334
15 09510
16 09660
17 09680
18 09761
19 09815
20 09835
21 09836
22 09900
23 09958
24
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS (PARTITION
METAL FURRING AND LATHING
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
GYPSUM VALLBOARD (GVB)
CERAMIC TILE (CT)
QUARRY TILE (QT)
ASPHALT PLANK FLOORING (AP)
ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS (AM)
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE (EVT)
CARPET
SPECIAL FLOOR TREATMENT (CS)
HIGH BUILD GLAZED COATINGS (EPOXY)
TEXTURED PLASTIC COATING (SC)
TEXTURED FINISH (TF)
PAINTING
WALL COVERING
(we-1 & WC-2)
26 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
28 10i00
29 10165
30 10191
31 10200
32 10350
33 10444
34 10445
35 10450
36 10500
37 10520
38 10605
39 10615
40 10800
41 10880
42 10990
CHALKBOARD, TACKBOARDS AND BULLETIN BOARDS
TOILET PARTITIONS
CUBICLE TRACKS AND CURTAINS
LOUVERS AND VENTS
FLAGPOLE ,
SIGNS
SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
SECURITY TURNSTILES
LOCKER BENCHES
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM (ALUM)
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
P.A.U. SCALE
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
44 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
46 llOZ1
47 11140
48 11141
49 11142
50 11143
51 11144
52 '11146
53 11147
54 11148
VAULT DOOR
UNDERGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS
VEHICLE LIFTS
FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
FUEL ISLAND EQUIPMENT
PAINT SPRAY BOOTH
GASOLINE AND DIESEL FUEL PIPING SYSTEMS
LUBE HANDLING SYSTEM
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
s)
TQC-5
01
02
03
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
TOC-6
O1 11150
02 11161
03 11163
04 11164
05 11400
PARKING EQUIPMENT
DOCK LEVELERS
SCISSORS LIFT
DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
07 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
09 12340 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CASEWORK (PLC)
10 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
12 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
14 13070 INTEGRATEDCEILINGS (IC)
15 13100 LOOKOUT GALLERY (L.O.G.)
17 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
19 14600 CRANES AND HOISTS
22 VOLUME III
25 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
27 15010
28 15020
29 15060
30 15100
31 15120
32 15140
33 15166
34 15190
35 15240
36 15250
37 15300
38 15410
39 15440
40 15481
41 15483
42 15510
43 15530
44 15540
45 15550
46 15557
47 ]5575
48 15590
49 15670
50 15684
51 15713
52 15720
53 15781
54 15815
SPECIkL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
OUTSIDE UTILITIES
PIPE AND FITTINGS
MANUAL VALVES
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PIPING SUPPORTS, SLEEVES AND SEALS
DUPLEX SEWAGE PUMPING STATION
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PLUMBING PIPING
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEMS
REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
[iVAC PUMPS
HEAT GENERATION SYSTEM
BOILER
STACK AND BREECHING
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT
CENTRIFUGAL CHILLER
COOLING TOWER
COOLING TOWER WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
CARBON MONOXIDE EXHAUST SYSTEM
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
Ol
O2
03
O4
O5
07
09
10
12
14
15
17
19
22
25
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35"
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
01 15856
02 15857
03 15870
04 15875
05 15880
06 15900
07 15930
08 15978
09 15990
PACKAGE AIR HANDLING UNITS
MAKEUP AIR HANDLING UNITS
EXHAUST AND VENTILATING FANS
AIR CURTAINS
AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
VARIABLE FRE@UENCY DRIVES (VFD)
TESTING AND BALANCING
11 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
13 16010
14 16013
15 16110
16 16120
17 16130
18 16140
19 16141
20 16375
21 16425
22 16426
23 16440
24 16450
25 16460
26 16465
27 16470
28 16475
29 16480
30 16510
31 16511
32 16530
33 16670
34 16700
35 16710
36 16720
37 16740
38 16741
39 16743
40 16760
41 16770
42 16780
43 16791
46 VOLUME IV
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
WIRING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
RACEWAYS
WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT AND BELOW
BOXES AND FITTINGS
WIRING DEVICES
MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS
UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION
MAIN SWITCHBOARDS (600 V AND BELOW)
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS (600 V AND BELOW)
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
GROUNDING
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
BUS DUCT
PANEL~OARDS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
INTERIOR LIGHTING
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
TELEPHONE CONDUIT SYSTEM
EMPTY CONDUIT AND OUTLET BOXES
POSTAL SOURCE DATA SYSTEM
INTERCOM SYSTEM
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
CONTROL CONSOLES
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
49 DIVISION 17 - MECHANIZATION (REFER TO VOLUME 4)
51 17-5.
52 17-6
53 17-7
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANIZATION
SYSTEM OPERATING DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
TOC-7
01
O2
03
04
05
06
07
O8
09
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
46
49
51
52
53
02
TOC-8
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
02
VOLUME 1:
0-0
CIVIL
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-8
¢-9
C-10
C-II
C-12
C-13
C-14
C-15
C-16
C-17
C-18
C-19
C-20
C-21
C-22
C-23
C-24
C-25
C-26
C-27
C-28
C-29
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
COVER SHEET
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
GENERAL NOTES AND LEGEND
SITE UTILIZATION PLAN
SITE PLAN - I OF 4
SITE PLAN- 2 OF 4
SITE PLAN - 3 OF 4
SITE PLAN - 4 OF 4
OVERALL GRADING AND DRAINAGE PLAN
GRADING AND DRAINAGE PLAN - 1 OF ~
GRADING AND DRAINAGE PLAN - 2 OF a
GRADING AND DRAINAGE PLAN - 3 OF 4
GRADING AND DRAINAGE PLAN - 4 OF 4
SITE UTILITY PLAN
UTILITY PLAN - 1 OF 4
UTILITY PLAN- 2 OF ~
UTILITY PLAN - 3 OF ~
UTILITY PLAN - 4 OF 4
DRAINAGE AREA MAP
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN
EROSION CONTROL DETAILS
SANITARY AND STORM WATER SEWER TABLES
TRENCH DRAIN PROFILES
PAVEMENT JOINTING PLAN - 1 OF 2
pAVEMENT JOINTING PLAN - 2 OF 2
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION
LI-O
LI-1
L1-2
L1-3
L1-4
L1-5
L1-6
L1-7
L1-8
L1-9
Li-IO
LANDSCAPE ORIENTATION PLAN
LANDSCAPE PLAN - AREA 1
LANDSCAPE PLAN - AREA 2
LANDSCAPE PLAN - AREA 3
LA};DSCAPE PLA~; - AREA 4
ENLARGED LANDSCAPE PLAN - CUSTOMERS ENTRANC!
PLANT LIST AND DETAILS
OUTDOOR GARDENS "A" AND "C" - GRADING, STON!
OUTDOOR GARDENS "A" AND "C" - LANDSCAPE
COURTYARD AREA - GRADING, STONE WALLS, AND
COURTYARD AREA - LANDSCAPE PLAN
L2-0
L2-1
L2-2
L2-3
L2-4
L2-5
L2-6
L2-7
IRRIGATION ORIENTATION PLAN
IRRIGATION PLAN - AREA 1
IRRIGATION PLAN - AREA 2
IRRIGATION PLAN - AREA 3
IRRIGATION PLAN - AREA 4
NOT USED
OUTDOOR GARDENS '"A" AND "C" - IRRIGATION PL
COURTYARD AREA - IRRIGATION PLAN
L3-1
L3-2
INTERIOR GARDENS PLANTSCAPING - PLANT LIST
INTERIOR GARDENS INTERIOR PLANTSCAPING
WALLS
S
'ONDS
NS
ARCHITECTURAL
A0-1
A0-2
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS A~;D GENERAL NOTES
BUILDING AREA TABULATIONS
Al-0
Al-1
Al-2
Al-3
Al-4
Al-5
Al-6
Al-?
Al-8
Al-9
Al-lO
Al-II
Al-12
Al-13
Al-14
Al-15
Al-16
Al-l?
Al-18
Al-19
Al-20
Al-21
A1-22
A1-23
A1-2a
A1-25
A1-26
A1-27
A1-28
A1-29
Al-30
Al-31
A1-32
A1-33
A1-3a
A1-35
A1-36
Al-3?
ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN
G.M.F. - LEVEL ONE COMPOSITE PLAN
G.M.F. -
G .M.F. -
G.MF. -
G.MF. -
G.MF -
G.MF -
G.M F -
G.M F -
G.M.F -
GoM.F -
G.M.F -
G.M.F -
G.M.F -
G.M.F -
G.M.F. -
GoM.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G .M.F. -
G .M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
NOT USED
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
V.M.F. -
AREA A
AREA B
AREA C
AREA D
AREA E
AREA F
AREA G
AREA H
AREA J
AREA K
AREA L
AREA M
AREA N
AREA P
AREA Q
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
GROUND LEVEL PLAN
AREA R GROUND LEVEL PLAN
LEVEL TWO COMPOSITE PLAN
AREA A LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA B LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA C LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA D LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA E LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA F LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA G LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA H LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA J LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA K LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA L LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA M LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA N LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA P LEVEL TWO PLAN
AREA Q LEVEL TWO PLAN
LEVEL THREE COMPOSITE PLAN
LEVEL THREE ENLARGED PLANS
FLOOR PLAN
A1-38
A1-39
Al-a0
Al-al
Al-~2
Al-a3
Al-a4
ENLARGED
ENLARGED
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
TOILET PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
AREA 1 ROOF PLAN
AREA 2 ROOF PLAN
AREA 3 ROOF PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA 4 ROOF PLAN
ROOF PLAN - V.M.F.
A2-1
A2-2
A2-3
A2-4
A2-5
A3-1
A3-2
A3-3
A3-4
A3-5
A3-6
A3-7
A3-?A
A3-8
A3-9
A4-1
A4-2
A4-3
A4-4
A4-5
A4-6
A4-?
A4-8
A4-9
A4-10
A4-11
A4-12
A4-13
A4-14
A4-15
A4-16
A4-17
A4-18
A4-19
A4-20
A4-21
A4-22
A5-1
A5-2
A5-3
A5-4
A5-5
A5-6
AS-?
AS-?A
A5-8
A5-9
AS-lO
G.M.F~ - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
G.M.F. - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
G.M.F. - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
V.M.F. - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
G.M.F. - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
WIRE MESH PARTITION ELEVATIONS
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS/INTERIOR ALUMIN~
ELEVATIONS
PMS GLAZING ELEVATIONS
HOLLOW METAL WINDOW ELEVATIONS
DOOR AND FRAME ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS
DETAILS
INTERIOR PARTITION TYPES
INTERIOR PARTITION TYPES
SECTIONS
SECTIONS
SECTIONS
SECTIONS
SECTIONS
SECTIONS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
DETAILS
STAIR PLANS
STAIR SECTIONS AND DETAILS
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
L.O.G. - PLANS AND SECTIONS
L.O.G. - PLANS AND SECTIONS
L.O.G. - PLANS AND SECTIONS
LoO.G~ - PLANS AND SECTIONS
DETAILS
DETAILS
MILLWORK PLANS AND SECTIONS
MILLWORK PLANS AND SECTIONS
3M FRAMING
A5-11
A5-12
A5-13
A5-14
A6-1
A6-2
A6-3
A6-4
A6-5
A6-6
A6-?
A6-8
A6-9
A6-10
A6-11
A6-12
A6-13
A6-14
A6-15
A6-16
A6-17
A7-1
A7-2
A7-3
FP-1
FP-2
EXTERIOR STAIRS
EXTERIOR STAIRS
GUARD HOUSE A~D SIGN
COOLING TOWER
G.M.F. - AREA A - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA B - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA C - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA D - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA E - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA F - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA G - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA H - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA J - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA K - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA L - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA M - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA N - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA P - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA Q - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA R - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
V.M.F. - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
COURTYARD DETAILS
GARDEN DETAILS
P.O. BOX LOBBY~DETAILS
G:M.F. - FIRE PROTECTION PLAN
V.M.F. - FIRE PROTECTION PLAN
STRUCTURAL
Sl-1
S1-2
Sl-3
S1-4
S1-5
Sl-6
Sl-?
S1-8
S1-9
Sl-lO
Sl-ll
S1-12
Sl-13
Sl-14
S1-15
S1-16
Sl-17
Sl-18
S1-19
Sl-20
Sl-21
Sl-22
Sl-23
Sl-24
S1-25
Sl-26
Sl-27
Sl-28
S1-29
Sl-30
Sl-31
S1-32
Sl-33
Sl-34
Sl-35
Sl-36
Sl-37
S1-38
G.M,F. - AREA A FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA B FOUNDATION PLAN
G,M.F. - AREA C FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F - AREA D FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F - AREA E FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F - AREA F FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F, - AREA G FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F, - AREA H FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F~ - AREA J FOUNDATION PLAN
G.MoF, - AREA K FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F - AREA L FOUNDATION PLAN
G.MoF. - AREA M FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA N FOUNDATION PLAN
G.MoF. - AREA P FOUNDATION PLAN
G oM oF. - AREA Q FOUNDATION PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA R FOUNDATION PLAN
V oM.F. - FOUNDATION PLAN
G.MoF. - AREA A ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA B ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.MoF~ - AREA C ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F, - AREA D ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G oM~Fo - AREA E ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G oM.F. - AREA F ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F..- AREA G ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G°M.F. - AREA H ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F. - AREA J ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA K ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA L ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M°F - AREA M ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA N ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA P ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F - AREA Q ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G oM.F. - AREA R ROOF FRAMING PLAN
V.M.V. - ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G oM.F. - HIGH ROOF FRAMING PLAN
G.M.F. - L.O.G. PLAN
L.O.G. PLANS
MEZZANINE FRAMING PLANS
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
RETAINING WALL DETAILS
DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS
JOIST GIRDER ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS
S3-1
S3-2
TYPICAL CONCRETE DETAILS AND GENERAL NOTES
TYPICAL STEEL DETAILS
S4-1
S4-2
S~-3
S4-4
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
S4-5
S4-6
S4-7
S4-8
S4-9
S5-1
S5-2
S5-3
S5-4
S5-5
S6-1
S6-2
S6-3
S6-4
S6-5
S6-6
S6-7
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
COOLING TOWER DETAILS
COOLING TOWER FOUNDATION DETAILS
COOLING TOWER FOUNDATION DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS
PANEL ELEVATIONS
PANEL ELEVATIONS
PANEL ELEVATIONS
PANEL ELEVATIONS
PANEL ELEVATIONS
PANEL ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS
PANEL NOTES AND DETAILS
VOLUME 2
0-0
MECHANICAL
M0-1
MI-1
M1-2
M1-3
M1-4
M1-5
M1-6
M1-7
M1-8
M1-9
Mi-iO
MI-ll
Ml-12
Ml-13
Ml-14
Ml-15
Ml-16
Ml-17
COVER SHEET
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
MECHANICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA A HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA B HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA C HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA D HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA E HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA F HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA G HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA H HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA J HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA K HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA L HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA M HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA N HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA P RVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA Q HVAC
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA R HVAC
V.M.F. - HVAC PLAN
M2-1
M2-2
M2-3
M2-4
M2-5
M2-6
M2-7
M2-8
M2-9
M2-10
M2-11
M2-12
G.M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA A PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA B PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA C PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA D PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA E PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.F, - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA F PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA G PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA H PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G,M.F. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA J PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION,
GoM.Fo - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA K PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.M.Fo - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA L PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION
G.MoF. - FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA M PLUMBING AND FIRE
PROTECTION '
M2-13
M2-14
M2-15
M2-16
M2-17
M2-18
M2-19
M2-20
M3-1
M3-2
M3-3
M3-4
M3-5
M3-6
M3-7
M3-8
M3-9
M3-10
M3-11
M3-12
M3-13
M3-14
M3-15
M3-16
M3-17
}{4-1
M4-2
M5-1
M5-2
l{5-3
M5-4
M5-5
M5-6
M5-7
M5-8
M5-9
MS-10
MS-11
M5-12
1{5-13
1{5-14
M5-15
M5-16
M5-17
G.M.F - FIRST
PROTECTION
G.M.F - FIRST
PROTECTION
G.M.F - FIRST
PROTECTION
G.M.F - FIRST
PROTECTION
V.M.F - FLOOR
FLOOR PLAN - AREA N PLUMBING
FLOOR PLAN - AREA P PLUMBING
FLOOR PLAN - AREA Q PLUMBING
FL6OR PLAN - AREA R PLUMBING
PLAN - UNDER FLOOR PLUMBING
V.M.F - FLOOR FLAN - PLUMBING AND FIRE PROT
PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS
PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS
GoM.F -
G.M.F -
G.M.F -
G.M.F -
G .M.F -
G .M.F -
G.M.F -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.~{ F -
G.M F -
G.M F -
G.MF -
G.M F -
G.M F -
G.M F -
V.M F. -
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA A MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA B MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA C MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA D MISCELLA/q]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA E MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA F MISCELLAN1
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA G MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA H MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA J MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA K MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA L MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA M MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA N MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA P MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AREA Q MISCELLAN]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN - AR'EA R MISCELLAN]
PLAN - MISCELLANEOUS PIPING
FIRE PROTECTION ZONING PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
CHILLED WATER SCHEMATIC PIPING DIAGRAM
HOT WATER SCHEMATIC PIPING DIAGRAM
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAGRAMS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAGRAMS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAGRAMS
CENTRAL PLANT PLAN
CENTRAL PLANT SECTIONS
CENTRAL PLANT SECTIONS
MECHANICAL MEZZANINE NO
MECHANICAL MEZZANINE NO
MECHANICAL MEZZANINE NO
MECHANICAL MEZZANINE NO
MECHANICAL MEZZANINE NO
MECHANICAL MEZZANINE NO
V.M.F. MECHANICAL ROOM
COOLING TOWER
BUILDING SECTIONS
1 - PLAN AND SECTIO
2 - PLAN AND SECTIO
3 - PLAN
3 - SECTIONS
? - PLAN AND SECTIO
8 - PLAN AND SECTIO
'LAN AND FOUNTAIN DET
~ND FIRE
FIRE
FIRE
~ND FIRE
~CTION
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
iOUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS P~PING
IOUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~OUS PIPING
~qS
~ILS
M$-18
M$-19
M5-20
M6-1
M6-2
M6-3
M6-4
M6-5
M6-6
M6-7
M6-8
M6-9
M6-10
M7-1
M7-2
M7-3
M7-4
HVAC SECTIONS
HVAC SECTIONS
HVAC SECTIONS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
ELECTRICAL
EO-1
E0-2
EO-3
E0-4
EO-5
SO-6
EO-?
EO-8
El-1
El-2
El-3
EI-~
El-5
El-6
El-7
El-8
El-9
El-lO
EI-ll
El-12
El-13
El-14
El-15
El.-16
El-l?
El-18
El-19
El-20
El-21
E1-22
E1-23
E1-24
E1-25
E1-26
E1-27
E1-28
E1-29
ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
ELECTRICAL PARTIAL SITE PLAN
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN DETAILS
G.M.F. - GROUNDING PLAN
G.M.F. - GROUNDING DETAILS
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
GM.F.
GM.F.
GM.F.
GM.F.
GMoF.
GM.F.
G.M.F.
G.M.F.
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
GoM.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.~.F. -
G.M.F. -
G.M.F. -
NOT USED
G .M.F. -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F. -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F. ~-
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
G.MoF -
SYSTEMS
G.M.F -
SYSTEMS
- AREA
- AREA
- AREA
- AREA
- AREA
- AREA
- AREA
- AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
AREA
A GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
B GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
C GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
D GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
E GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
F GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
G GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
H GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
J GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
K GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
L GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
M GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
N GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
P GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
Q GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
R GROUND LEVEL PLAN - LIGHTING
C LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
D LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
E LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
F LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING POWER AND
G LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING POWER AND
H LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING POWER AND
J LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
K LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
L LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
M LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
N LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
P'LEVEL TWO PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER AND
E5-1
E5-2
E5-3
E5-~
E6-1
E6-2
G.M.F. - ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PLA~;
ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAMS
ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAMS AND MCC ELEVATIONS
SWITCHBOARD ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS (SYSTEMS)
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS (SYSTEMS)
VOLUME 3:
0-0
COVER SHEET
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
MECHANIZATION
ME-1
ME-2
ME-3
ME-4
ME-5
ME-6
ME-7
ME-8
ME-9
ME-10
ME-il
ME-12
ME-13
ME-14
ME-15
ME-16
ME-17
ME-18
ME-19
ME-20
ME-21
ME-22
ME-23
ME-24
ME-25
ME-26
ME-27
ME-28
ME-29
ME-30
ME-31
ME-32
ME-33
ME-34
ME-35
ME-36
ME-37
ME-38
ME-39
ME-40
ME-41
ME-~2
ME-43
ME-44
ME-45
CONVEYOR SCHEDULE BULK MAIL AND DRAWING INDEX
CONVEYOR SCHEDULE LOOSE MAIL
CONVEYOR SCHEDULE TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR SCHEDULE TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR SCHEDULE TRAYED MAIL
PLAN VIEW COMPOSITE
PLAN VIEW PART "F"
PLAN VIEW PART "G"
PLAN VIEW PART "H"
PLAN VIEW PART "J"
PLAN VIEW PART "K"
PLAN VIEW PART "L"
PLAN VIEW PART "M"
PLAN VIEW PART "N"
PLAN VIEW PART "P"
PLAN VIEW PART "Q"
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - BULK MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - BULK MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - BULK MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - LOOSE'MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - LOOSE MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - LOOSE MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - LOOSE MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - LOOSE MAIL
NOT USED
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
CONVEYOR ELEVATIONS - TRAYED MAIL
DETAILS - SSM-1 INDUCTION
SECTIONS AND DETAILS - SSM-1 INDUCTION
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
NOT USED
ME-46
ME-4 ?
nE- 48
ME-49
ME-50
ME-51
ME-52
ME-53
ME-54
ME-55
ME-56
ME-57
ME-58
ME-59
ME-60
ME-61
ME-62
ME-63
ME-64
ME-65
ME-66
ME-6 ?
ME-68
ME-69
ME-70
ME-71
ME-72
ME-73
ME-?4
ME-?5
ME-76
404-1
404-2
404-3
404-4
404-5
404-6
404-7
420-1
420-2
420-3
OCR-BCS TRAY RACKS
OCR-BCS TRAY RACKS
OCR-BCS TRAY RACKS
FIXED BASE TELESCOPING CONVEYOR
FIXED BASE TELESCOPING CONVEYOR
PLAN VIEW PART "F" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "G" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "H" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "J" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "K" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "L" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "M" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "N" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "P" BUILDING LOADS
PLAN VIEW PART "Q" BUILDING LOADS
LEGEND, NOTES AND CONTROL STATIONS
CONTROL LAYOUT, BULK MAIL.SYSTEMS
CONTROL LAYOUT, LOOSE MAIL SYSTEMS
CONTROL LAYOUT, TRAYED MAIL, TAKEAWAY SERIES
CONTROL LAYOUT, TRAYED MAIL, FLATS AND LETTER MAIL FEED
SYSTEMS
CONTROL CONSOLES
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS
BUL~ MAIL, GRAPHIC DISPLAY
LOOSE MAIL, GRAPHIC DISPLAY .
TRAYED MAIL, TAKEAWAY SYSTEMS, GRAPHIC DISPLAY
TRAYED MAIL, FLATS AND LETTER MAIL FEED SYSTEMS, GRAPHIC
DISPLAY
NOT USED
IN MOTION SCALE PANEL
TRAY LABELING, SCANNING AND FORMATS
KEY STATION AND STAND
CONTROL DETAILS - LOOSE MAIL
ASSEMBLY-45' EXTENDIBLE CONVEYOR
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS, 45' EXTENDIBLE CONVEYOR
STRUCTURAL ASSEMBLY, 45' EXTENDIBLE CONVEYOR
STRUCTURAL DETAILS, 45' EXTENDIBLE CONVEYOR
TAIL END CONFIGURATION - EXTENDIBLE CONVEYOR
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS - EXTENDIBLE CONVEYOR
EXTENDIBLE CONVEYOR, SAFETY BRAKE
CLEATED BELT SACK LOADER, GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
CLEATED BELT SACK LOADER, SECTIONS
CLEATED BELT SACK LOADER, SECTIONS AND DETAILS
END OF INDEX DRAWINGS
01
03
6D18, 7L07
SECTION 02150
BORING & JACKING
02150-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
services, all boring and jacking as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Sanitary sewers: Section 02732~
2. Trenching, backfilling, and compacting for utilities:
Section 02221.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
28
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
52
A. Contractor qualifications:
1. Contracto~ must be well experienced in operations of similar
magnitude and condition under transportation arteries and
surface areas which cannot be disturbed.
B. Design criteria:
1. Pipe and joints of leakproof construction, designed for
earth and other pressures present, with associated
recommended impact loading.
2. Design bracing, backstops, and use jacks of sufficient
rating so that jacking can proceed without stoppage, except
for adding pipe sections and as conditions permit, to
minimize tendency of ground material to "freeze" around
casing pipe.
C. Allowable tolerances:
1. Do not overcut excavation by more than 1 IN greater than
outside diameter of casing pipe.
2. Install casing pipe with determined vertical and horizontal
alignment prior to installation of carrier pipe.
D. Reference codes and specifications:
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
04
O5
06
02150-2
1. Comply with applicable federal, state and local ordinances,
codes, statutes, rules and regulations, and affected
jurisdictional bodies.
2. Texas State Department of Highways and Public
Transportation, "Standard Specifications for Construction of
Highways, Streets and Bridges", 1982,.as amended to date.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
09 1.03 SUBMITTALS
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A. Project information:
1. Submit description of proposed construction methods,
including methods to establish and maintain vertical and
horizontal alignment.
2. Submit data on proposed method of installing carrier pipe in
casing for review prior to construction.
3. Submit shoring plans and details in accordance with Section
02221 3.03.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
22 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
22
25
26
27
28
30
31
A. Conduct operations so as not to interfere with, interrupt,
damage, destroy, or endanger integrity of surface or subsurface
structures or utilities, and landscape in immediate or adjacent
areas.
B. If boring is obstructed, relocate crossing as approved by
qontracttng Officer.
25
26
27
28
30
31
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
38 2.01 STEEL CASING PIPE
38
41
45
46
A. ASTM A53; 35,000 PSI minimum yield strength.
B. Full circumference welded joints.
c. Diameter of pipe: Outside diameter of bell of carrier pipe plus
2 IN.
41
45
46
49 2.02 CARRIER PIPE
49
52
A. PVC pipe, size as shown on plans.
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1 2.03 TIMBER SKIDS
04
'05
06
07
08
A. Pressure treated, cut to a cross-sectional size to allow
placement of carrier pipe in casing and to support barrel of
carrier pipe.
1. Provided with notches to accommodate fastening. Treat
notches at time of pipe installation.
02150-3
10 B. Creosoting: AASHTO M133.
O1
04
O5
O6
07
O8
10
13 2.04 STEEL STRAPPING
13
16 A. ASTM A36o
16
19 2.05 SAND (Pine aggregate)
19
22 A. ASTM C-144.
22
25 2.06 GROUT
28 A. One part Portland cement (ASTM C150), and six parts mortar sand
29 mixed with water to a consistency applicable-for pressure
30 grouting.
25
28
29
30
34 PAl~T 3 -
34
37 3.01 APPROACH TRENCH
37
4O
41
43
46
47
49
A. Excavate approach trench using methods as site conditions
require.
B. Ensure pipe~entrance face is as near perpendicular to alignment
as conditions permit.
C. Establish a vertical entrance face at least 1FT above top of
casing or tunnel lining.
D. Install excavation shoring as specified in Section 02221 3.03.
4O
41
43
44
46
47
49
52 3.02 CASING PIPE INSTALLATION METHODS
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
021.50-4
A. Boring:
1. Push pipe into ground with a boring auger rotating within~
pipe to remove soil. Do not advance cutting head ahead of
casing pipe except for that distance necessary to permit
cutting teeth to cut clearance for pipe. Make machine bore
and cutting head arrangement removable from within pipe.
Arrange face of cutting head to provide a barrier to free
flow of soft material.
2. If unstable soil is encountered during boring, retract
cutting head into casing to permit a balance between pushing
pressure and ra'tio of pipe advancement to quantity of soil.
3. If voids should develop greater than outside diameter of
pipe by approximately 1 IN, grout to fill voids.
4. Grouting to fill voids at expense of Contractor.
B. Jacking:
1. Construct adequate thrust wall normal to proposed line of
thrust.
2. Impact thrust load to pipe through a suitable thrust ring
sufficiently rigid to ensure distribution of thrust load on
pipe.
01
02
03
O4
O5
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 3.03 DEWATERING
24
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
36
A. Intercept and divert surface drainage precipitation and
groundwater away from excavation through use of dikes, curb
walls, ditches, pipes, sumps or other means.
B. Develop a substantially dry subgrade for prosecution of
subsequent operations.
C. Comply with Federal and State requirements of dewatering to any
watercourse, prevention of stream degradation, and erosion and
sediment control.
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
36
39 3.04 PRESSURE GROUTING
39
42
43
A. Pressure grout annular space between casing pipe and
sorrounding earth.
42
43
46 3.05 CARRIER PIPE INSTALLATION
46
49
5O
52
53
A. All provisions regarding cleaning, inspection and handling
specified under pipe material sections apply to this work.
B. Exercise care to preven-t damage to pipe joints when carrier
pipe is placed in casing.
49
5O
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
04
O5
07
08
09
11
13
02150-5
C. Support pipeline within casing so that no external loads are
transmitted to carrier pipe.
D. Attach wooden skids to barrel of carrier pipe; do not rest
carrier pipe on bells.-
g. Provide positive means to prevent flotation.
1. Inject sand between casing and carrier pipe, or 2. Provide
blocks on carrier pipe.
F. Close ends of casing.
END OF SECTION
O1
O2
04
O5
07
08
09
11
13
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
4E04, 8G14 SECTION 02221
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
02221-1
O1
03
06 PA~T 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for excavation, trenching, backfilling and compacting for
all underground utilities as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
~sound, secure, complete and compatible installation.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Sanitary sewers: Section 02732.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
27 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
3O
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
43
A. Compaction density test: ASTM D698.
B. Contractor hire an independent soils laboratory (approved by
Contracting Officer) to conduct in place moisture density
tests.
1. The minimum frequency of testing is one test per lift per
1000 linear feet of trench.
2. Test locations to be staggered along trench for each
successive lift.
C. Comply with all aspects of "Safety Rules & Regulations for
Excavation" as promulgated by State of Texas.
D. Submit shoring plans and details in accordance with Paragraph
3.03 this section.
27
3O
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
43
47 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
47
50
51
52
53
54
A. Verify location and existence of all underground utilities.
1. Omission or inclusion of located utility items on drawings
does not constitute non-existence or definite location.
2. Secure and examine local utility surveyor records for
available location data.
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02
03
04
06
07
O8
09
10
12
13
14
16
02221-2
B. Protect existing utilities from damage due to any con
activity.
1. Repair all damages to utility items.
C. Avoid overloading. Keep surcharge sufficient dista~c
from edge of excavation to prevent slides or caving.
and trim excavated materials in such a manner to be a
inconvenience as possible to public and adjoining pro
owners.
D. Provide full access to public and private premises, t
hydrants, at street crossings, sidewalks and other po
prevent serious interruption of travel.
E. All excavation is unclassified.
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23 2.01 MATERIALS
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
A. Backfill material: As approved by Contracting Office
1. Free of rock cobbles, roots, sod or other organic
2. Moisture content at time of placement: 3 percent
of optimum moisture content, as specified in accor
ASTM D698.
B. Embedment materials: As shown on plans.
1. Plans refer to materials defined in "Standard Spec
for Public Works Construction, North Central Texae
of Governments.
39 PART 3 - x~xCUTION
42 3.01 GENERAL
45
46
48
A. Remove and dispose of materials determined by Contra¢
Officer to be unsuitable.
B. Trench, backfill and compact for all underground uti]
51 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION
U.S.P.S. -.N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
truction
back
Maintain
s little
)erty
fire
ints to
re
mattel.
plus/minus
d wi th
ifications
, Council
ting
ities.
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
16
2O
23
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
39
42
45
46
48
51
01
02
04
05
06
07
O9
10
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
29
02221-3
A. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth indicated and
necessary to accommodate the work.
B. Open no more than 300 LF (90 M) of trench at one time, or less,
as required by Contracting Officer. Failure to comply may
necessitate shutdown of entire project until backfilling is
performed.
C. Avoid over excavating below indicated grades Unless required to
remove unsuitable material.
D. Backfill over excavations in firmly compacted 6 IN (150 mm)
lifts.
E. Trench size: Excavate only sufficient width to accommodate
free working space.
1. Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to top of
pipe, conduit, or utility service.
2. Trench width at top of pipe or conduit may not exceed
outside diameter of utility service by more than following
dimensions:
Overall Diameter
of Utility Service
33 IN (840 mm) and less
more than 33 IN (840 mm)
Excess Dimension
16 IN (400 mm)
24 IN (600 mm)
F. Keep trenches free of water.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
12
13
15
'16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
29
32 3.03 SPECIFIC TRENCHING REQUIREMENTS
32
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Banks more than 5 FT high shall be shored, laid back to a
stable slope, or some other equivalent means of protection
provided where employees may be exposed to moving ground or
cave-ins. Refer to Table P-1 as a guide in sloping of banks.
Trenches less than 5 FT in depth shall also be effectively
protected when examinations of ground indicates hazardous
ground movement may be expected.
B. S~des of trenches in unstable or soft material, 5 FT or more in
depth shall be shored, sheeted, braced, sloped or otherwise
supported by means of sufficient strength to protect employees
working within them. See Tables P-i, P-2.
C. Sides of trenches in hard or compact soil, including
embankments, shall be shored or otherwise supported when trench
is more than 5 FT in depth and 8 FT or more in length. In lieu
of shoring, sides of trench above 5 FT level may be sloped to
preclude collapse, but. shall not be steeper than indicated in
Table P-1.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
52
53
54
02221-4
Materials used for sheeting and sheet piling, bracing~
and underpinning shall be in good serviceable conditi¢
Timbers used shall be sound and free from large or loc
and shall be designed and installed so as to be effec~
bottom of excavation.
Additional precautions by way of shoring and bracing
taken to prevent slides or cave-ins when excavations
trenches are made in locations adjacent to backfilled
excavations, or where excavations are subjected to vil
from railroad or highway traffic, operation of machim
other source.
F. Submit shoring plans and details, signed and sealed b'
engineering registered in State of Texas that meet or'
shoring requirements of this section.
Ge
Minimum requirements for trench timbering shall be in
accordance with Table
1. Braces and diagonal shores in a wood shoring syste~
not be subjected to cQmpressive stress in excess o
given by following formula:
Where:
S=1300 - (20 L/D)
L/D = 50 Maximum
L=length, unsupported, in in
D=least side of timber in in
S=allowable stress in pounds
square inch of cross-secti
When employees are required to be in trenches 4 FT de
more, an adequate means of exit, such as a ladder or
shall be provided and located so as to require no mot
FT of lateral travel.
I. Bracing or shoring of trenches shall be carried along
excavation.
Cross braces or trench jacks shall be placed in true
position, be spaced vertically and be secured to prey
sliding, falling or kickouts.
be
Portable trench boxes or sliding trench shields may
protection of personnel in lieu of a shoring system
Where such trench boxes or shields are used, they sh
designed, constructed and maintained in a manner whic
provide protection equal to or greater than sheeting
required for trench.
Backfilling and removal of trench supports shall prog
together from bottom of trench. Jacks or braces sha]
released slowly and in.unstable soil, ropes shall be
pull out jacks or braces from above after employees
cleared trench.
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
shoring
,se knots
:ive to
lhall be
)rations
:fy or any
civil
exceed
shall
values
hes
hes '
per
~p or
steps,
e than 25
with
horizontal
ent
e used for
r sloping.
11 be
h will
or shoring
'ress
1 be
used to
,ave
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
02221-5
03 3.04 PREPARATION FOR PIPE LAYING
O3
06
07
09
10
11
13
15
17
18
A. See drawings and specific pipe material sections for embedment
requirements.
B. When discrepancy exists between those requirements and these
specifications, provide type of embedment which provides
greatest load factor.
C. Types of embedment: See details on plans.
D. Provide trench embedment conditions shown on plans.
E. Form bell holes in trenches such that only barrel of pipe is
firmly supported by bedding material.
O6
07
09
10
11
13
15
17
18
21 3.05 BACKFILLING
21
24
25
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
A. Do not backfill until all tests are performed on system, and
system complies with specified'requirements.
B. Hand or pneumatic tamp backfill around and over pipe in lt~ts
not exceeding 8 IN (200 mm) loose thickness.
C. Compact to density specified on embedment details shown on
drawings.
D. Exercise care in backfilling operations to avoid displacing
pipe joints either horizontally or vertically and to avoid
breaking pipe.
E. Do not water flush for consolidation.
24
25
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
40 3.06 COMPACTION
4O
43
44
46
47
49
51
A. Compact all trench backfill in paved areas to at least 95
percent of maximum dry density.
B. In locations where trench will not be under paved areas,
compact backfill to minimum 90 percent of maximum dry dansity.
c. Test compaction as required in paragraph 1.02 B, this section.
END OF SECTION
43
44
46
47
49
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
5C14, 8G20 SECTION 02222
BUILDING EXCAVATION, FILLING, AND BACKFILLING
02222-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all excavating, filling, and backfilling for building
construction, as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for utilities:
Division 15 and 16.
2. Finish grading and topsoiling: Section 02920.
C. Definition:
1. Maximum Density (Max. Den.): Maximum density determined by
ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor).
2. Unsuitable material: Debris and/or soil material Judged
unsuitable for support of slabs and foundations or for use
as a fill or backfill material. Unsuitable material shall
be removed and replaced with compact backfill as directed by
the Contracting Officer. Dispose unsuitable material on or
off site as directed.
3. Independent Soils Laboratory: Independent soils laboratory
with geotechnical engineer hired by Contractor and approved
by Contracting Officer.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
46
47
48
49
50
51
A. Subsurface soils investigations have been made at project site. 1. Soils information was obtained for use in preparing
foundation design.
2. Borings Log is included in specifications,
3. Examine site and Borings Log and determine character of
materials to be encountered.
46
47
48
49
50
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
02222-2
B. Contractor hire an independent soils laboratory (approved by
Contracting Officer) to conduct in-place moisture tests of
existing building pads.
1. Testing requirements are as follows: Contractor's
geotechnical engineer may perform additional testing as
needed for proper recommendations of conformance.
a. Testing of moisture content: One boring per 20,000
square feet. Depth of boring shall be 10 FT, Take tube
samples continuously and moisture determined on l FT
intervals,
C. Contractor hire an Independent Soils Laboratory (approved by
Contracting Officer) to conduct in-place compaction moisture
density tests in conjunction with regrading of building pads.
1. If initial test fails, further testing shall be required.
2. Minimum testing requirements are as follows: Contractors,
Independent Soils Laboratory may perform additional testing
as needed for proper recommendations of conformance.
a. In place compaction moisture density testing: One test
per lift per 5,000 square feet.
b. Testing of moisture content: One boring per 20,000
square feet. Depth of boring shall be equal to depth of
disturbed soil. Take tube samples continuously and
moisture determined on 1FT intervals.
O1
02
03
04
05
06'
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
27 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
30
31
32
34
36
37
A. Product data: 1. MaximUm Density curves for fill and backfill material.
2. Sieve analysis for granular fill.
B. Samples: As required for product data.
C. Project information: Independent Soils Laboratory test
results.
· 27
30
31
32
34
36
37
40 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
4O
43
44
46
47
48
5O
A. Carefully maintain all bench marks, monuments and other
reference points and replace if disturbed or destroyed.
B. Comply with rules and regulations governing respective
utilities. Protect active utilities from damage; remove and
relocate only as indicated.
Co Carefully maintain building pad prepared by previous contract°
43
44
46
47
48
5O
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01 1.05 EXTRA ~ORK
O4
O5
O6
O8
O9
10
02222-3
A. Unsuitable material: Removal and replacement of unsuitable
material as directed by the Contracting Officer will be extra
work.
B. Payment volumes: Volumes of unsuitable materials excavation for
determining payment will be estimated by the Independent Soils
Laboratory and verified by the Contracting Officer.
01
O4
O5
O6
08
09
10
13 1.06 BASE BID PRICE ADJUSTMENT
13
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
25
26
27
A. Adjustment of contract price will be made on basis of unit
price included on proposal form times area of building pad
failing to meet moisture content requirements times number of
water injection passes required to raise moisture content to
required levels.
B. This portion of work viii only be undertaken by Contractor upon
instruction by Contracting Officer.
C. Unit price to include additional testing by Independent Soils
Laboratory and all costs associated with water injection
process per these specifications. '
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
25
26
27
31 PART 2 - PRODUC~S
34 2.01 MATERIALS
31
34
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
A. Fill and backfill material: Clean selected materials, approved
by Contracting Officer, from site excavation or from off-site
borrow areas. Submit Maximum Density curves for each source of
fill or backfill material.
B. Granular fill: Clean, crushed, non-porous rock, crushed or
uncrushed gravel. Submit sieve analysis verifying following
gradation.
1. 100 percent passing 1-1/4 IN (30 mm) sieve.
2. 100 percent retained on No.4 sieve (6 mm).
C. Select fill: Very sandy clay to clayey sand with a liquid
limit less than 30 and plasticity index between 4 and 12 SC
per Unified System Classification of soils.
37
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
U.S.P.S.'- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02222-4
PART 3 -gXgCUTION
04 3.01 EXCAVATION - GENERAL
01
O4
O7
09
10
11
13
14
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
A. Do not perform any blasting.
B. Excavate to dimensions and elevations indicated regardless of
the materials encountered. Allow additional space as required
for construction operations and inspection of foundations.
C. If unsuitable material is encountered during excavation, remove
and replace material as directed by Contracting Officer.
D. Properly level off bottoms of all excavations.
When prepared pad is disturbed by frost, moisture, or
construction operations, replace and compact as directed by
Testing Laboratory and Contracting Officer.
F. Contractor is responsible for shoring and bracing excavations
as required to protect utilities, existing construction and new
work. Remove shoring as backfilling progresses, but only when
excavations are safe.
G. Control grading around building. '
1. Pitch earth to prevent water from running into excavated
areas or damaging structure.
2. Maintain all pits and trenches free of water at all times.
3. Provide all pumping required to keep excavated spaces clear
of water during construction.
4. When springs or running water are encountered, notify
Contracting Officer, provide free discharge of water by
trenches or pumps, and drain to appropriate point of
disposal as directed.
07
O9
10
11
13
14
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28 ~
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39 3.02 LIME SLURRY PRESSURE INJECTION
39
42
43
44
46
47
48
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Injection process shall be observed on a full time basis by a
qualified technician under direction of Contractor's
Independent Soils Laboratory.
B. Injection pressures shall be adjusted to disperse as large a
volume of lime slurry as possible within a pressure range of 50
to 200 LBS per square inch.
C. Injection pipe shall be forced downward (not jetted or washed)
in 12 to 18 IN intervals, injecting to refusal at each interval
(minimum of four intervals) for a total depth of 7 FT or 10 PT,
see plan for location. Refusal will be determined on site by
Geotechnical Engineer.
42
43
44
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
02222-5
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
D. The lower portion of injection nozzle shall consist of a hole
pattern that will uniformly disperse lime slurry throughout
entire depth.
E. Spacing for injections shall not exceed 5 FT on center each
way, and injections shall be carried at least 5 FT outside
building lines. Subsequent injections shall be offset from
initial locations in a.pattern that maximizes distribution of
slurry.
F. After each injection, moisture content of soils shall be
evaluated by Contractor's Independent Soils Laboratory on basis
of laboratory tests on tube samples (not cuttings) obtained
from shallow borings under his supervision after each injection
pass (or passes) following a 24 hour curing period.
Contracting Officer shall develop recommendations on need for
additional injections.
G. In the event that more than three injection passes are
required, surface of injected area shall be scarified to a
depth of at least eight inches and recompacted prior to next
injection.
02
03
04
O6
O7
O8
O9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
26 3.03 FILLING AND BACKFILLING - INSIDE BUILDING
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
39
40
42
44
45
46
48
49
51
52
53
A. Remove all rocks, lumps, frozen ground, soft or wet material,
vegetation, and other foreign material upon which fill is to be
placed.
B. Scarify top 8 IN (200 mm) of earth and compact to 95 percent of
max.den.
C. Place fill material in 6 IN (150 mm) lifts and compact each
lift to 95 percent max.den.
D. Maintain moisture between 0 and 3 percent above optimum during
compaction.
E. Compact fill and backfill using suitable mechanical tamping
equipment to obtain specified density.
1. Use mechanical hand tampers for filling and backfilling next
to walls.
2. Compact granular fill using vibratory methods.
F. Before placing fills on subgrade, obtain approval of Testing
Laboratory.
G. Where existing ground surface is steeper than one vertical to
four horizontal, step surface with steps not exceeding 12 IN
(300 mm) or slope surface not exceeding 2 percent.
26
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
'51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02222-6
01 H. Correct and recompact any compacted material not meeting
02 specified compaction requirements. Continue corrective
03 measures until required compaction has been attained.
O1
02
03
06 3.04 PILLING AND BACKFILLING - OUTSIDE BUILDING
06
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
A. Requirementsfor filling and backfilling inside building apply
to all filling and backfilling outside building.
B. Do not backfill against any part of walls, piers, or columns
until each part has reached design strength and has been
inspected by Contracting Officer who must authorize
backfilling.
1. Do not place fills against walls until roof and floor slabs
at top and bottom of walls are in place.
2. Bring backfill up uniformly around building and individual
wall units.
C. Do not backfill against foundations, walls, curbs, footings,
and areaways until concrete forms have been removed, and
concrete finishing, dampproofing, has been completed.
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
26 3.05 GRADING NEXT TO BUILDING
26
29
3O
A. Evenly slope finished grade away from building walls at slopes
not less than I in 100 to provide drainage.
29
30
33 3.06 GRANULAR PILL UNDER SLABS ON GRADE
33
36
37
A. Place granular fill under slabs on grade as required for
leveling.
36
37
40 3.07 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
40
43
46
A. Obtain Testing Laboratory's and approval of excavations before
starting any construction.
B. Notify Testing Laboratory and when excavations are ready for
inspection.
49 END OF SECTION
43
44
46
47
49
U.S.P.So N. Texas/N. Georgia'G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
5A25, 7L07
SECTION 02244
LIME STABILIZATION
02244-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all lime stabilization as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation~
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
23
24
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Concrete pavement and curbs: Section 02514.
26
27
28
29
30
31
C. Description of system:
1. Method of securing a completed course of treated materi~l
containing a uniform lime mixture.
2. Compacted material free from loose or segregated areas of
uniform density, with smooth top surface, ready to receive
subsequent work.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
34 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
A. Compaction density test: 95 percent density in accord with ASTM
D698.
B. Testing agency:
1. Hired by Contractor (and approved by Contracting Officer) to
perform soil testing and evaluation.
2. A member of American Council of Independent Laboratories and
meet their qualifications.
C. Testing frequency: 1. One density test per 1000 square yards of subgrade.
2. One set of Atterberg Limits Tests per 10,000 square yards of
subgrade. Plasticity index to be 15 or less.
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
52
1.03
SUBMITTALS
(See Division 1)
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02244-2
O1 A. Test reports.
03 B. Certificates.
O!
03
06 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
O6
09
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
A. Existing conditions: 1. Accept existing soil conditions.
2. Make all required corrections to substrate.
B. Environmental requirements:
1. Comply with EPA requirements.
C. Protection: 1. During and after work perform all required actions to
maintain lime stabilized areas at optimum compaction.
2. Maintain until subsequent operations are begun.
09
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
26 2.01 MATERIALS
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. Hydrated lime slurry:
1. Pumpable suspension of solids in water.
2. Solids content consisting of hydrated lime conforming to
ASTM C977.
3. Chemical composition:
a. Minimum hydrate alkalinity Ca(OH)2 of 90 percent by
weight.
b. Fineness residue:
1) 100 percent passing No. 6 sieve.
2) Maximum 1 percent retained on No. 10 sieve.
3) Maximum 2.5 percent retained on No. 30 sieve.
41 B. Water:
42 1. Grade 1:
43 weight.
44 2. Grade 2:
45 weight.
46 3. Grade 3:
47 weight.
Type B slurry conforming to one of 3 following grades.
Minimum dry solids content of 31 percent by
Minimum dry solids content of 35 percent by
Minimum dry solids content of 46 percent by
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50 2.02 MIXING
5O
53
54
A. Mix with pulverizing machine until a homogeneous friable
mixture of material and lime is obtained.
53
54
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02244-3
02
O4
B. Mixture to be free of all clods and lumps.
C. Percentage of lime required is shown on drawings.
02
O4
08' PART 3 - m~CIJTION
O8
11' 3.01 INSPECTION
11
14
16
17
19
A. Examine existing conditions; correct unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Start of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and
responsibility for performance.
C. Construct subsurface to typical contours indicated.
14
16
17
19
22 3.02 INTENT
22
25
26
27
29
31
33
A. Primary requirement is to secure a completed base of treated
material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or
segregated areas. '
B. Assure uniform density and moisture content.
C. Leave surface smooth for subsequent courses.
D. Sequence work, regulat~ lime and moisture, ~ework as necessary.
25
26
27
29
31
33
36 3.03 INSTALLATION
36
39
40
42
44
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
A. Prepare secondary grade (bottom of treated level) to remove
wet, unstable and unacceptable materials.
B. Modify secondary grade as necessary to obtain required bearing.
C. Apply lime only to as much of area as can be worked in one day.
D. Perform operations by slurry placing.
E. Slurry placing: 1. Mix lime with water in trucks or distributors.
2. Apply as a thin water suspension or slurry.
3. Apply with lime percentage at least as much as indicated.
4. Assure correct amouqts by application in multiple passes.
F. Treatment:
39
40
42
44
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
02244-4
1. Thoroughly mix using equipment to achieve a homogeneous
friable mixture of material and lime.
2. Assure that mixture is free of clods and lumps.
3. Mix materials, like plastic clays, which do not readily mix
with lime, as thoroughly as possible.
4. Bring to proper moisture, and seal in place.
5. Cure in place materials for 3 or 4 days, maintaining
moisture content.
6. After curing, mix uniformly.
7. Remove all clods and contaminants.
8. Final sieve analysis:
a. Minimum 100 percent passing 1-3/4 IN sieve.
b. Minimum 60 percent passing No. 4 sieve.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
06
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
16 3.04 COMPACTION
16
19
21
23
25
27
28
3O
A. Start within 3 days after mixing.
B. Aerate and sprinkle as required to maintain optimum moisture.
C. Compact entire depth in maximum 8 IN lifts.
D. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density.
E. During and after compaction, Testing Agency verify density'and
Atterberg Limits.
F. Rework and retest failed areas at no expense to Owner.
19
21
23
25
27
28
3O
33 3.05 FINISHING AND CURING
33
36
38
4O
42
44
46
47
49
A. Shape surface to required line and grade after compaction.
B. Roll as required to eliminate cracking.
C. Moisture cure minimum 7 days.
D. Keep traffic off during cure period.
E. Keep surface moist until subsequent construction is installed.
F. If curing seal is used, apply immediately after final rolling
at 0.10-0.20 GSY (0.5-1.0 LSM).
G. Keep traffic off seal for minimum 72 hours.
36
38
4O
42
44
46
47
49
52 3.06 MAINTENANCE
52
UoS.P.So - N, Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
O4
06
07
09
02244-5
A. Maintain completed work in optimum condition until subsequent
construction is started.
B. Repair all irregularities and defects immediately.
C.' Perform all repairs and moisture modifications as directed by
Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
01
O2
O4
06
07
09
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
5A25, 7L16
SECTION 02245
CEMENT MODIFIED SUBGRADE
02245-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GEI~,RAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all cement modified subgrade as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Concrete pavement and curbs: Section 02514.
C. Description of system:
1. Method of securing a completed course of treated material
containing a uniform mixture.
2. Compacted material free from loose or segregated areas of
uniform density, with smooth top surface, ready to receive
subsequent work.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
34 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
37
38
4O
46
47
48
49
A. Compaction density test: 95 percent density in accord with ASTM
D698.
B. Testing agency:
1. Hired by Contractor (and approved by Contracting Officer) to
perform soil testing and evaluation.
2. A member of American Council of Independent Laboratories and
meet their qualifications.
C. Testing frequency: 1. One density test per 1000 square yards of subgrade.
2. One set of Atterberg Limits Tests per 10,000 square yards of
subgrade. Plasticity index to be 15 or less.
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
52
1.03
SUBMITTALS
(See Division 1)
52
U.S.P.S. 7 N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02245-2
O1 A. Test reports.
03 Bo Certificates.
01
O3
06 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
O6
09
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
A. Existing conditions: 1o Accept existing soil conditions.
2. Make all required corrections to substrate.
B. Environmental requirements:
1. Comply with EPA requirements.
C. Protection: 1. During and after work perform all required actions to
maintain cement modified subgrade at optimum compaction.
2. Maintain until subsequent operations are begun.
09
10
11
13
14
16
17
~18
19
23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
26 2.01 MATERIALS
26
29
30
.32
33
A. Portland cement:
1. Type I or III Portland cement, ASTM C150.
B. Water: Clean and free of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or
other deleterious material.
29
30
32
33
36 2.02 MIXING
36
39
40
42
44
A. Mix with pulverizing machine until a homogeneous friable
mixture of material and cement is obtained.
B. Mixture to be free of all clods and lumps.
C. Percentage of cement required is shown on drawings.
39
40
42
44
48 PART 3 - EX]~CUTION
48
51 3.01 INSPECTION
54 A. Examine existing conditions; correct unsatisfactory conditions.
51
54
U.S.P.S. 7 N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
02245-3
02
03
05
B. Start of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and
responsibility for performance.
C. Construct subsurface to typical contours indicated.
02
03
05
08 3.02 INTENT
O8
11
12
13
15
17
19
20
A.'Primary requirement is to secure a completed base of treated
material containing a uniform mixture, free from loose or
segregated areas.
B. Assure uniform density and moisture content.
C. Leave surface smooth for subsequent courses.
D. Sequence work, regulate cement and moisture, rework as
necessary.
11
12
13
15
17
19
20
23 3.03 INSTALLATION
23
26
27
29
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Prepare secondary grade (bottom of treated level) to remove
wet, unstable and unacceptable materials.
B. Modify secondary grade as necessary to obtain required bearing.
C. Apply cement only to as much of area as can be worked in one
day.
D. Perform operations by slurry placing.
E. Slurry placing: 1. Mix cement with water in trucks or distributors.
2. Apply as a thin water suspension or slurry.
3. Apply with cement percentage at least as much as indicated.
4. Assure correct amounts by application in multiple passes.
F. Treatment: 1. Thoroughly mix using equipment to achieve a homogeneous
friable mixture of material and cement.
2. Assure that mixture is free of clods and lumps.
3. Mix'materials, like plastic clays, which do not readily mix
with cement, as thoroughly as possible.
4. Bring to proper moisture, and seal in place.
5. Remove all clods and contaminants.
6. Final sieve analysis:
a. Minimum 100 percent passing 1 IN sieve.
b. Minimum 70 percent passing 1/2 IN sieve.
c. Minimum 45 percent passing No. 4 sieve.
26
27
29
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
4O
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O4
06
07
09
11
13
14
16
02245-4
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Start immediately after final mixing.
B. Aerate and sprinkle as required to maintain optimum moisture.
Moisture tolerance is within 2.5 percent of optimum.
C. Compact entire depth in maximum 8 IN lifts.
Do Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density.
g. During and after compaction, Testing Agency to verify density
and Atterberg Limits.
Fo Rework and retest failed areas at no expense to Owner.
19 3.05 FINISHING AND CURING
22
24
26
28
3O
31
33
A. Shape surface to required line and grade after compaction.
B. Roll as required to prevent cracking.
C. Final surfacing may begin immediately.
D. Keep surface moist until subsequent construction is installed.
E. If curing seal is used, apply immediately after final rolling
at 0.10-0.20 GSY (0.5-1.0 LSM).
F. Keep traffic off seal for minimum 72 hours.
36 3.06 MAINTENANCE
39
4O
42
44
45
47
A. Maintain completed work in optimum condition un~il subsequent
construction is started.
B. Repair all irregularities and defects immediately.
C. Perform all repairs and moisture modifications as directed by
Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
O1
04
06
07.
O9
11
13
14
16
19
22
24
26
28
30
31
33
36
39
4O
42
44
45
47
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O3
4D20, 8C21
SECTION 02281
TERMITE CONTROL
02281-1
01
03
' 06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all termite control as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, provide
all supplementary or miscellaneous materials and items
incidental to or necessary for a complete application.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
23 1.02 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS
23
26
27
28
29
30
A. Employ and pay for services of an organization to perform all
soil poisoning work for termite control, registered and
licensed by State. Organization must have experience,
facilities, equipment, and personnel necessary to complete work
promptly and in a manner that will provide required results.
26
27
28
29
30
33 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
33
36
37
A. Project information:
1. Warranty.
36
37
40 1.04 WARRANTY
4O
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
A. Written warranty stating:
1. Application was made at concentration, rate~ and methods in
compliance with specifications.
2. Warranty effectiveness of soil treatment against
subterranean termite infestation for a period not less than
5 years from date of treatment.
3. Any evidence of infestation or damage caused by termites
within warranty period will be treated and repaired at no
additional cost to Owner.
B. Warranty shall be drawn in favor of Owner, delivered to
Contracting Office~.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02281-2
03 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
O3
06
07
O8
10
11
13
14
16
A. Do. not start work until excavation, filling and'grading
operations are reasonably complete, and preparations for slab
placement have been completed.
B. Do not apply solution when surface water is present'or when
earth is excessively Wet.
C. Remove foreign matter detrimental to effectiveness of
treatment.
D. Perform work during regular working hours.
06
07
O8
10
11
13
14
16
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2O
23 2.01 MATERIALS
23 .
26
27
28
29
30
A. Terminate control chemicals: Comply with State laws, rules,
and regulations for termite control.
1. Use only water-based emulsion soil chemicals.
2. Use working solutions containing chemicals as permitted by
Federal controls.
26
27
28
29
30
34 PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
37 3.01 INSPECTION
37
4O
41
43
A. Examine conditions under which work is to be performed for
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
4O
41
43
44
47 3.02 APPLICATION
47
5O
51
Apply at minimum rate of 0ol GAL/SF (2 L/SM) under foundations,
footings, and floor slabs on grade or fill.
50
51
UoS.PoS.~- N, Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
02281-3
B. Apply at minimum rate of 0.15 GAL/SF (3 L/SM) under walks or
slabs abutting building and for a distance of not less than 5
FT out from building.~
C. Apply at minimum rate of 0.4 GAL/LF (4 L/M) along both sides of
foundation walls, along inside of exterior walls, immediately
below all expansion or cold joints and around plumbing,
electrical conduits, bases, etc., where slabs or foundation
walls are penetrated by such work.
O1
02
03
05
O6
07
O8
O9
12 3.03 PROTECTION AND REPAIR
12
15
16
17
19
21
23
24
26
A. Unless treated areas are immediately covered, take all
precautions to prevent disturbance of treated areas by human or
animal contact with treated soil.
B. Post signs warning that soil poison has been applied.
C. Remove signs when areas are covered by other work.
D. Retreat-disturbed areas using same materials, concentrations
and application rate as original application.
END OF SECTION
15
16
17
19
21
23
24
26
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
7F19, 7K24
SECTION 02372
DRILLED PIERS
02372-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18~
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, casing, tools, equipment, and
services, for all drilled piers as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Definitions: '
1. Testing Laboratory: Independent soils laboratory with
geotechnical engineer hired by Contractor and approved by
Contracting Officer to inspect pier installation.
2. Obstruction: Unanticipated, unnatural, man-made object
projecting within pier shaft, greater than 1CU FT in size,
which cannot be drilled by use of normal earth drilling
techniques and tools; however, an obstruction shall not
include cobbles, boulders, bedrock seams or any naturally
deposited material which may require a rock auger for
removal.
3. Rock excavation: Removal of natural material which has a
production rate less than 2 FT per HR with an earth auger in
good condition using a drill rig with a rated positive crowd
force of 37,000 LB and a continuous torque rating of 25,000
foot pounds (Hughes-LDH).
4. Caisson: The terms caisson .and drilled pier'are intended to
mean one and the same and may be used interchangeably
herein.
5. Bearing strata: Bearing layer, material or zone identified
in the soils report as capable of providing the stated
bearing capacities. The Testing Laboratory shall be the
sole judge as to when the bearing strata is reached.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2i
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
48 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
48
51
52
53
54
A. Subsoil information: See Section 00220.
1. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may
be made, provided such operations are acceptable to
Contracting Officer.
51
52
53
54
U,S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02372-2
02
03
04
O6
07
08
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
B. Installer qualifications: Minimum of 3 years experience in
drilled pier work, including experience with similar work and
similar sub-surface conditions.
C. LayoUt and measurement of piers, required for the work and for
specified reports, shall be performed by a licensed surveyor
employed by Contractor.
D. Facilitate inspection by Testing Laboratory of pier excavation
prior to concrete placement.
E. Minimum bearing value of material at bottom of piers: 20,000
PSF; bearing stratum: Unweathered dark gray Eagle Ford shales.
F. Testing:
1. Ail testing shall be paid for by Contractor.
2. Routine testing of concrete for compliance with Contract
Documents.
3. As necessary to secure initial materials and mix design.
approval.
4~ Provide sufficient notification of concrete placement,
access for testing agency,'concrete for testing and adequate
storage facilities for test cylinders.
5. Pay for additional testing required by Contracting Officer
in order to evaluate piers failing to meet requirements of
Contract Documents.
G. Tolerances:
1. Plumbness: Measured from center of hole: Not more than 1
percent of shaft length, or 12-1/2 percent of shaft-
diameter, whichever is less.
2. Location of shaft at cut-off elevation: Not more than 2 IN
(50 mm).
3. Diameter: Not less than indicated.
02
03
04
06
07
08
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
38 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Project information:
1. Names of three (3) past successful installations under
similar conditions.
2. Concrete: Comply with Section 03300.
3. Report for each pier:
a. Pier location by column grid lines.
b. Bottom elevation of pier.
c. Cut-off elevation of pier.
d. Total length of pier from bottom to cut-off elevation.
e. Depth drilled into bearing stratum.
f. Diameter of pier shaft.
g. Signature of representative of Testing Laboratory that
excavation was inspected and approved for concrete
placement.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O2
03
02372-3
h. Corresponding concrete test 6ylinder numbers (obtain from
testing agency).
i. Any unusual conditions encountered.
O1
02
03
06 1.04 BASE BID PRICE ADJUSTMENT
O6
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
A. Adjustment of contract price will be made on basis of unit
prices included on the proposal form times the variation
between the total accumulated installed length and the base bld
length of piers as scheduled on plans for each diameter and
material. No adjustments will be made for variation in lengths
of individual piers. Base bid shall anticipate and include any
and all drilling required above the top of caisson elevation.
No adjustment of contract price will be made for variations in
type or length of material encountered above top of caisson.
No adjustment of contract price will be made for frequency of
auger and bit changes requtrgd for changes in material.
B. Measurement of length:
1. Measure lengths between bottom and top of caisson as
detailed and defined on plans.
2. Measure length of rock drilling and earth drilling as
identified herein and established by the Testing Laboratory
in field.
3. Do not include volume resulting from overdrilling or
correction for plumbness.
4. Do not include rejected piers.
5. Include obstructed piers and replacement piers for
obstructed piers.
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
38 2.01 MATERIALS
38
41
42
44
45
47
48
49
51
52
54
A. Concrete: 3000 PSI. Conform to Section 03300, Concrete
Materials and Proportioning.
1. Maximum slump 6 IN (10 mm).
2. Do not use concrete which has had water added more than one
hour before placement.
B. Reinforcing steel: Conform to Section 03200, Concrete
Reinforcement.
1. Dimensions as indicated.
C. Concrete admixtures: As permitted in Section 03300, Concrete
Materials and Proportioning.
D. Casings (when required): Steel cylinders.
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O2
O3
02372-4
1. Wall thickness as required for loads.
2. Weld sections together, watertight.
3. Loose section for cleaning and inspection of pier
07 PART 3 - EX~CIITION
10 3.01 LAYOUT
13
A. Locate piers as indicated.
16 3.02 INSTALLATION
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
A. Both excavation and concrete placement for a pier sba
same day.
B. Perform work with heavy-duty pier drilling rig, maint
satisfactory working condition, operated by competent
experienced person.
1. Provide qualified, experienced, and direct supervi
field for all pier drilling, and concrete filling
2. Use loose safety casing whenever man is in hole.
C. Provide piers with straight shaft. 1. Size and cut to accurate dimensions according to s
elevations indicated.
2. Hand clean-shaft to satisfaction of Testing Labora
3. Cover excavation between operations.
4. Remove foreign and loose material from approved ex
D. Approximate pier bottom elevations may be indicated a
for Contractor. Actual depth of pier shall be determ
time of drilling by Testing Laboratory.
E. Report underground obstructions to Contracting Office
Testing Laboratory.
1. When directed by Contracting Officer, remove obstr
extra work.
2. Fill shaft with concrete when Testing Laboratory d
obstruction cannot be removed.
3. Provide replacement pier or piers as directed by C
Officer.
At no additional cost, case pier shafts as necessary,
prevent caving and to shut off flow of ground water.
shall be seated in the gray shales and loose material
water removed prior to beginning the design penetratt
shafts must be dry while drilling the scheduled penet
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
bottom.
11 be done
ained tn
and
sion in
of piers.
izes and
tory.
cavation.
s a guide
tned at
r and
action as
etermtnes
vntracting
to
Casing
and all
)n. The
~atton.
01
O2
O3
O7
10
13
16
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
O1
02
04
05
O7
02372-5
G. Maintain excavations in essentially dry condition, using pumps
where necessary.
H. Have pier inspected by Testing Laboratory prior to placing
concrete.
I. Provide safety casing for cleaning and inspection.
-01
02
04
O5
O7
10 3.03 REINFORCEMENT
10
13
14
16
17
19
2O
A. Place steel reinforcing cage in pier hole after inspection and
approval of excavation and subgrade.
B. Adequately support reinforcement to assure concentric alignment
and adequate concrete cover over reinforcing.
C. Place all dowels and/or anchor bolts extending from top of pier
immediately prior to concrete shaft being fully placed.
13
14
16
17
19
20
23 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
23
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
A. After approval and placement of reinforcing steel, place
concrete as soon as possible. '
1. Place in manner that will preclude segregation, infiltration
of water, or any other occurrence which would tend to
decrease strength of concrete or supporting capacity of
finished foundation~
B. Place concrete in such a manner so as to limit free fall to 4
FT (1200 mm), unless it can be satisfactorily demonstrated that
concrete may free fall without segregation and/or striking side
of excavation or reinforcing.
1. If excavation contains more than 6 IN (150 mm) of water, use
tremie method to place concrete.
2. Use tremie between 8 and 12 IN (200 - 300 mm) diameter.
3. Provide positive control to insure that bottom of tremie
pipe is at all times at or below concrete surface.
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
44 3.05. WITHDRAWAL OF CASING
44
47
48
49
50
51
52
A. When pulling casing, maintain a level of concrete above bottom
of casing greater or equal to the level of ground water.
1. Keep bottom of liner at least 10 FT (3 M) below top of
concrete.
2. Prevent in-site materials from falling into and mixing with
concrete.
47
48
49
50
51
52
U.S.PoS. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
O6
07
02372-6
Bo Pull casing in short slow vertical lifts (essentially
continuous), maintaining plumb, and sufficient head of
concrete. Allow continuous observation of interior level of
concrete.
C. Vibrate full height of reinforcing or 15 FT (4.5 M), whichever
is greater.
O1
02
03
04
O6
07
10 3.06 REJgCTED PIERS
10
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
25
A. Replace rejected piers.
B. Piers may be rejected for following reasons: 1. Concrete not reaching minimum 28-day design strength.
2. Piers out of horizontal and vertical alignment, in excess of
tolerances indicated.
3. Piers of improper size and depth.
4. Installation not complying with specifications.'
C. Pay for additional engineering work required for redesign due
to rejected piers.
END OF SECTION
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
25
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1'
03
5H02, 8C16
SECTION 02503
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE WALKS
02503-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all exposed aggregate concrete walks as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
A. Construction standards: Texas State Department of Highways'and
Public Transportation, "Standard Specifications for
Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges", 1982, as
amended to date.
B. Tolerances: 1. Finish sub-base elevations: 0.05 FT (15 mm), max., above or
below elevations indicated.
2. Alignment of top of form units: 1 in 100, max.
3. Vertical face of form units: Lengthwise, 1 in 50, max.
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
39 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
39
42
44
46
47
48
49
51
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: 1. 24 IN (600 mm) square' by 2 IN (50 mm) thick finish sample of
exposed aggregate concrete walk.
2. Sealant for color selection.
D. Project information: Not required.
42
44
46
47
48
49
51
U.S.P.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02503-2
O1 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
O1
04
O5
07
O8
10
A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic required
for other construction operations.
B. Provide traffic controls as necessary to prevent interruption
of the work and to protect finished work.
C. Establish and maintain indicated lines and grades.
04
O5
07
O8
10
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
14
17 2.01 MATERIALS
17
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
39
40
42
45
46
47
49
5O
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Materials listed:
a. Base: As noted.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Forms: Steel or wood.
1. Of size and strength to resist movement during concrete'
placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment.
2. Use forms free of distortion and defects.
3.-Extend forms full depth of concrete.'
4. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form
radius bends.
C. Dowels, load transfer devices, tie bars, etc.: ASTM A615,
Grade 60.
D. Concrete: Class "A", air-entrained.
E. Selected aggregate (for exposed aggregate surface): "Tejas
black" decorative aggregate; 1/2 to 3/4 IN size; crushed.
F. Expansion joint filler: ASTM D545, flexible foam, 1/2 IN
thick; Sonneborn "Sonoflex F" or W.R.Meadows "Ceramar".
G. Sealant: F.S.TT-S-00227E, type 1, class A, polyurethane type:
Use self-leveling type for horizontal joints.
1. Color as selected by Architect.
H. Bond breaker: Liquid membrane, plastic film or asphalt
saturated felt or paper.
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
39
4O
42
45
46
47
49
5O
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01 PART 3 - ~'~TION
04 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
02503-3
O1
04
O7
O8
10
11
13
14
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface
immediately before placing concrete.
B. Proof roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas
and need for additional compaction.
C. Do not begin concrete work until conditions have been corrected
and are ready to receive concrete.
07
O8
10
11
13
14
17 3.02 FORMS
17
20
21
23
24
26
27
29
31
32
A. Set forms to requfred grades and lines, rigidly brace and
secure with stakes.
B. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous
progress of work.
C. Leave forms in place at least 24 hours after concrete
placement.
D. Clean forms after each use.
E. Coat with nonstaining form oil as required to ensure separation
from concrete without damage.
20
21
23
24
26
27
29
31
32
35 3.03 REINFORCEMENT
35
38
A. Locate, place, and support reinforcement in concrete.
38
41 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
41
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
A. General: See State Specifications for mixing and placing
concrete.
B. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been'
checked for line and grade.
1. Do not place concrete around structures or frames, if any,
until they have been brought to required grade and
alignment.
C. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened
condition at time concrete is placed.
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02503 -4
O2
03
O4
O5
06
07
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
30.
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
D. On properly compacted subgrade, install 4 IN (100 mm) layer of
concrete with reinforcement centered in layer.
1. Finished surface of exposed aggregate concrete walk to be
1/4 IN (6 mm) above top of curb.
2. Slope finished surface at 1/4 IN per FT (1:50) transversely
toward curb.
E. Provide bond breaker between exposed aggregate concrete walk
and back of curb.
F. Spread concrete as soon as it is deposited, using methods which
prevent segregation of mix, and with as little rehandling as
possible.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to
transverse joints with an internal vibrator.
2. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or
side forms.
3. Use 9nly square faced shovels for hand spreading and
consolidation.
4. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing
and joint materials.
G. Screed concrete to approximate required level and slope.
1. Strike off and screed to level surface sufficiently below
finished surface to allow for volume_change-due to addition
of selected finish aggregate and to produce finished exposed
aggregate surface at correct finished grade.
H. Carefully and uniformly seed one layer of selected aggregate
over surface.
1. Firmly embed aggregate in place with wood float.
2. Do not over embed aggregate or deform finish surface.
I. After concrete is hard enough to retain selected aggregate and
while mortar is still soft enough to be removed by brushing,
brush and flush surface with water.
1. Continue exposing operation of washing and scrubbing with a
stiff bristle brush until water is clear and there is no
noticeable cement film on aggregate.
2. Do not loosen or over expose aggregate during washing
operation.
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
45 3.05 JOINTS
45
48
49
5O
51
53
A. Provide expansion joints where indicated and where walks meet'
other structures.
1. Set joint filler to within 1/2 IN (12 mm) of surface.
2. Seal all joints.
Bo Contraction Joints:
48
49
5O
51
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
O6
07
O8
09
10
12
02503-5
1. Construct to a depth equal to at least 1/4 walkway
thickness.
2. Form in fresh concrete by groovlng top portion of slabs with
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
C. Construction jolnts:
1. Place at end of each placement and at locations where
placement operations are stopped for a perlod of more than ·
1/2 hour, except where termination is expansion joints.
2. Use standard metal keyway section forms.
END OF SECTION
01
O2
03
O4
06
07
O8
09
10
12
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
6G25~ 8B14
SECTION 02514
CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS
02514-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GIINgRAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for concrete paving and curbs, as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Lime stabilization: Section 02244.
2. Cement modified subgrade: Section 02245.
3. Exposed aggregate concrete walks: Section 02503.
29 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
29
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
A. Construction minimum standards: Texas State Department of
Highways and Public Transportation, "Standard Specifications
for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges", 1982, as
amended to date.
B. Should conflicts arise between standard specifications of
government agencies mentioned herein and Contract Documents,
Contract Documents shall govern.
C. Where a particular type of material or method is specified, no
other type of material or method will be permitted, except as
described in Section 00440.
D. Balance of State Specifications shall apply.
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
48 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
48
51
52
A. Product data:
1. Concrete mix design.
51
52
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02§14-2
PART 2 - PRODU~S
04 2.01 MATERIALS
01
O4
O7
09
10
11
12
14
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
A. Concrete (air-entrained): Class "A".
B. Expansion joint filler: ASTM D545, flexible foam, Sonneborn
"Sonoflex F" or W.RoMeadows "Ceramar".
1. Vehicular paving and curbs: 3/4 IN thick.
2. Walks: 1/2 IN thick.
C. Reinforcement: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
D. Dowels, load transfer devices, tie bars, etc.: ASTM A615,
Grade 60.
E. Sealant: F.S.TT-S-OO227E, type 1, class A, polyurethane type:
Use self-leveling type for horizontal Joints and gun-grade,
non-sag type for horizontal and vertical Joints.
F. Bond breaker: Liquid membrane, plastic film or asphalt
saturated felt or paper.
O7
09
10
11
12
14
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
28 PART 3 - R'~CUTION
28
31 3.01 CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
31
34
35
A. Construct to line and grade indicated. Construct in accord
with State specifications.
34
35
38 3.02 CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING WITH INTEGRAL CURB
38
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
A. On properly prepared sub-grade, install layer of concrete to
thickness shown on drawings with reinforcement centered in
layer; finish with wood float, non-directional pattern.
B. Provide longitudinal and transverse control joints in locations
indicated on drawings.
1. 1/2 IN (12 mm) wide by 1/4 depth with 1/4 IN (6 mm) radius
edges at top, or:
2. Saw cut, 1/8 IN (3 mm) by 1/4 depth minimum.
3. Fill with sealant.
C. Provide expansion joints in locations indicate~ on drawings.
1o 3/4 IN (18 mm) wide by full depth of the pavement with 1/4
IN (6 mm) radius edges at top.
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54 _
U.S.P.So ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
02514-3
2. Provide 3/4 IN (18 mm) diameter by 24 IN (600 mm) long dowel
bars 2 FT (600 mm) on center, centered in pavement
perpendicular to joint.
3. Provide expansion cap at one end of dowel bar and lubricate
that portion of dowel.
4. Provide expansion joints without dowels where paving abuts
other structures.
5. Set joint filler'to 1 IN (25 mm) of top.
6. Seal with sealant.
D. Provide construction joints at end of each day's work and
whenever necessary to suspend work for a period of more than 30
minutes.
1. Key joints with 2 IN (50 mm) by 1 IN (25 mm) key.
2. Provide 3/8 IN (9 mm) diameter by 30 IN (750 mm) long
deformed tie bars at 24 IN (600 mm) on center centered in
pavement perpendicular to Joint.
3. Saw cut 1/2 IN (12 mm) wide by 1 IN (25 mm) deep joint.
4. Fill with sealant.
Integral curb:
1. 6 IN (150 mm) high with 1:3 batter back from bottom to top.
2. Radius at bottom and top face of curb as shown on drawings.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
26 3.03 CONCRETE WALK PAVING
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
51
53
A. On properly prepared sub-grade, install 4 IN (100 mm) layer of
concrete.
1. Place walk paving 1/4 IN (6 mm) above top of curb.
2. Slope surface at 1/4 IN per FT (1:50) transversely toward
curb or as shown on drawings.
3. Finish: Wood float, non-directional, uniform granular or
sandy texture.
B. Provide bond breaker between walk paving and back of curb.
C. Provide contraction joints: 1. Construct tooled (dummy) joints°
2. Keep joints straight and perpendicular to edge of walk
unless otherwise shown.
3. Locate joints as shown on drawings.
D. Provide expansion joints where indicated and where walks meet
other structures.
1. Expansion joints at 25 FT on center maximum.
2. Set joint filler to within 1/2 IN (12 mm) of surface.
3. Locate expansion joints as shown on drawings.
E. Construct curb'ramps.
F. For "exposed aggregate concrete walk", see Section 02503.
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
51
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
0!
02514-4
END OF SECTION
01
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
6D18, 8C14
SECTION 02580
PAVING STRIPING AND MARKING
02580-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all paving striping and marking as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Concrete paving: Section 02514.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
3O
Standards: City of Coppell regulations for fire lane markings.
27
30'
33 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
33
36
37
39
4O
41
A. Do not paint when surface is wet, during, wet or damp weather
or when temperature is below 40 degF.
B. Equipment: Self contained and self propelled striping machine. 1. Capable of painting line 4 IN wide with spray nozzle.
2. Paint kept in constant agitation and under pressure.
36
37
39
40
41
45 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
45
48 2.01 MATERIALS
48
51
52
53
A. Paint: Reflective paint conforming to F.S.TT-P-115E. 1. Parking stall stripes and other rOadway markings:
2. Fire lane markings: Red and white.
White.
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02580-2
03 PART 3 - EXECDTION
O3
06 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
06
09
10
12
A. Do not paint until a minimum of 5 days has elapsed from time
surface is completed or cured.
B. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive striping Or marking.
C. Surface to be completely dry.
09
10
12
14
17 3.02 PAINTING
17
20
21
22
24
26
27
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
A. Mark and stripe in accord with applicable drawings and City of
Coppell regulations with approved striping machine. Width of
painted lines: 4 IN.
B. Use a guide to form markings true to line and width.
C. Keep paints thoroughly stirred and of uniform consistency
during application. '
D. Do not thin in excess of manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Use rates of application sufficient to produce complete
coverage without voids or thin spots.
1. Overpaint unsatisfactory markings as directed by Contracting
Officer.
F. Protect all marking from traffic until paint has dried to
prevent tracking.
20
21
22
24
26
27
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
40 3.03 CLEANING UP
4O
43
44
46
48
50
52
A. Place all rags and waste which might constitute a fire hazard
in metal containers or destroy at end of. each work day.
B. Remove all containers from site.
C. Remove paint spots or stains on adjacent surfaces.
D. Leave job clean and acceptable to Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
43
44
46
48
50
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6K26, 7L07
SECTION 02732
SANITARY SEWERS
02732-1
O1
03
06 FART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
28
30
31
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all sanitary sewers as Indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for utilities:
Section 02221.
2. Boring and Jacking: Section 02150.
C. All excavation is unclassified.
D. Definitions:
1. Unclassified excavation: Excavate and grade all materials.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
28
30
31
34 1.02 QUALITY ASSUI~CE
34
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
46
47
49
51
52
53
A. Sanitary sewer systems standards: Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction, North Central Texas Council of
Governments, as amended to date.
B. Should conflicts arise between standard specifications of
government agencies mentioned herein and Contract Documents,
the Contract Documents shall govern.
C. Where a particular type of material or method is specified, no
other material or method will be permitted except as described
in Section 00440.
D. Compaction density test: Standard Proctor ASTM D698.
E. Contractor hire an independent soils laboratory (approved by
Contracting Officer) to conduct in place moisture and density
tests.
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
46
47
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02732-2
1o03 JOB CONDITIONS
O1
O4
O6
O8
10
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
A. Verify locations of existing and new underground utilities.
B. Protect existing structures and utilities from damage.
Co Repair if damaged by this work.
D. Lengths indicated on drawings are for information only.
E. Furnish lengths as required.
F. Perform no pipe work in fill areas until embankment or fill has
been completed to at least 2 FT (600 mm) above top of pipe and
has been properly compacted.
G. Verification of existing utilities and structures. 1. Plans indicate existing utilities indicated on site survey.
2. Verify accuracy, location and depth of each utility prior to
trenching or tunneling.
3. If pipe adjustment is necessary due to location of other
utilities, secure approval from Contracting Officer.
H. Revisions to Contract Drawings.
1. If it becomes necessary to change location of sanitary sewer
lines secure prior written approval from Contracting
Officer.
2. If Contractor initiated, make approved changes without added
cost to Owner.
I. Do not change pipe sizes without securing prior written
approval from Contracting Officer.
04
O6
O8
10
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
36 1.04 SUBMITTALS
36
39
4O
A. Project information:
1. Test reports for low pressure air test.
39
4O
44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
47 2.01 MATERIALS
47
50
51
53
54
A. PVC sewer pipe and fittings: ASTM D2241, SDR-21.
1. Joint material: ASTM D1869.
B. Air valves: Types and sizes as shown on plans.
1. Body: Stainless steel.
U.S.P.S.
N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M~F. & V.M.F.
50
51
53
54
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
06
O8
2. Fulcrum levers and links: Stainless steel.
3. Ball floats and pins: Stainless steel.
4. Seats: Buna-N synthetic rubber.
5. Inlets: Threaded.
6. Operating pressure: 200 psi.
7. Test pressure: 300 psi.
C. Thrust bl~cks: Class "A" concrete.
02732-3
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
O8
12 PART 3 - RIt'RCIITION
12
15 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION
15
18
20
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Thrust blocks are required at all bends.
18
20
23 3.02 JOINTING
23
26
A. Per manufacturer's instructions.
29 3.03 AIR VALVES
32
34
A. Provide air valves as shown on drawings.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
26
29
32
34
37 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
37
4O
42
43
45
46
47
49
A. Perform all tests and inspection before backfilling.
B. Permit Contracting Officer to check each pipe for line, grade
and workmanship.
C. Perform hydrostatic pressure test according to procedures for
water conduit installation in referenced "Standard
Specifications", paragraph 1.02 A, this section.
END OF SECTION
4O
42
43
45
46
47
49
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
03
4HO1, 8C16
SECTION 02800
MISCELLANEOUS SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800-1
O1
O3
06 PART
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for miscellaneous site improvements, as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
24
27
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
47
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer's specifications for all materials.
C. Samples:
1. Stone for stonewalls: Deliver one stone (representative of
mid-range size to be used) to site for approval of quality
and colo6ation.
2. Decorative aggregate: Submit ten (10) pounds of type to be
used.
3. Stone for stepping stones: Deliver one stone to site for
approval of quality size and coloration.
4. Boulders for pond edge treatment: Deliver one boulder
(representative of mid-range size to be used) to site for
approval of quality and coloration.
5. Stones for pond bottom: Deliver one stone (representative
of size to be used) to site for approval of quality and
coloration.
D. Project information: Not required.
27
29
3O
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
47
51 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
51
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
18
19
21
22
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
51
53
02800-2
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stone for stone walls: "Silvermist Builders" building stone;
deep gray to black with silver sparkles.
1. Sizes:
a. Capstone and stones: 12 IN depth (minimum);
(minimum); 18 IN to 42 IN length.
b. Foundation stones: 24 IN depth (minimum);
(minimum); 18 IN to 42 IN length.
2. Each load of stone to be reasonably well-graded from
smallest to largest stone specified.
3. Spalls and stones smaller than 10 percent of specified size
not to exceed 10 percent by weight of each load delivered.
12 IN width
24 IN width
B. Filter fabric: Non-woven geotextile fabric.
C. Gravel backfill: Washed, clean well-graded gravel, crushed
gravel or crushed stone; 3/4 to 1-1/2 IN size.
D. Decorative aggregate: "TeJas Black" decorative aggregate; 1/2
IN to 3/4 IN size; black crushed aggregate.
E~ Steel edging: 1/8 IN x 4 IN, 16 IN tapered steel stakes.
F. Stone for stepping stones: "Silvermist Flag"
flagstone/ledgestone; 1-1/2 IN to 2-1/2 IN depth; approximately
18 IN x 18 IN size; dark gray/black with silver sparkles.
G. Boulders for pond edge treatment: "Silvermist Builders"
building stone (somewhat uncut; without machine cut faces);
deep gray to black with silver sparkles.
1. Size: 24 IN depth (minimum); 24 IN width (minimum); and 30
IN to 48 IN length.
2f Each load of boulders to be reasonably well graded from
smallest to largest stone specified.
3. Boulders smaller than 10 percent of specified size not to
exceed 10 percent by weight of each load delivered.
H. Setting bed: Section 04110.
I. Accent boulders: Featherock boulders; lightweight; black or
charcoal; size similar to boulders for pond edge treatment.
J. Stones for pond bottom: "Colorado River Rock" large decorative
aggregate; 4 IN to 8 IN size; light gray with dark speckles.
K. Concrete (air-entrained): Class "A" (as per Texas State
Department of Highways and Public Transportation, "Standard
Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and
Bridges").
L. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185 or A497; 6 x 6 W2.6 x W2o6.
01
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
18
19
21
22
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
51
53
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
02800-3
M. Trash receptacles (for interior gardens):
1. A205.2230, ashtray/trash receptacle: Model 205, size 22 IN
diameter x 30 IN high, 46 gallon capacity, with sand
depression; color: white.
2. As manufactured by KADEE Industries, Inc., Fibermart
Designs, P.O. Box 39693, Solon, Ohio 44139, (800) 321-3827,
or approved equal.
O1
02
03
04
O5
06
07
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION
11
14 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
14
17
18
A. Install as indicated and in accord with manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
17
18
21 3.02 STONE WALLS
21
24
25
26
28
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
40
41
A. On properly compacted subgrade, and to line and grade
indicated, install foundation stones. Place on level, benched
subgrade.
B. Install filter fabric and gravel backfill as detailed on
drawings.
C. Place stone by hand and/or machine utilizing "pick holes"
provided in stone ends. No "pick holes" exposed.
D. All face and joint course stones to be trimmed with bevel edged
stone hammers to attain correct fit and placement.
E. Wall face to have 1 to 12 batter; face stones to align plus or
minus 2 IN.
F. Ail face stones set level, touching every stone around and
fitting into a one-over two, two-over one pattern.
24
25
26
28
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
40
41
44 3.03 DECORATIVE AGGREGATE BEDS
44
47
A. Install as indicated and detailed on drawings.
47
50 3.04 STEPPING STONES
5O
53
A. Install as indicated ~nd detailed on drawings.
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
14
15
17
02800-4
3.05 POND EDGE TREATMENT
A. On properly compacted subgrade, and to line and grade
indicated, install 4 IN (100 mm) layer of concrete with
continuous welded wire fabric centered in layer. Provide rough
finish for bonding of setting bed and pond bottom concrete.
B. On properly installed concrete base, place boulders where
indicated on drawings to form a continuous pond edge treatment.
Set boulders in 1 IN (25 mm) thick setting bed over concrete
base.
C. Place boulders so as to produce a compact and graded mass of
boulders with maximum interlocking and minimum voids.
D. Coordinate work with pond bottom construction.
01
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
11
12
14
15
17
20 3.06 ACCENT BOULDERS
2O
23 A. Install as indicated and detailed on drawings.
23
26 3.07 POND BOTTOM
29
30
32
34
35
37
38
A. On properly installed concrete base, install 3 IN (75 mm) layer
of concrete. Provide brushed finish.
B. Coordinate work with pond edge treatment boulders placement.
C. Coordinate work with installation of fountain equipment and
piping as specified in Section 02820.
D. Coordinate work with waterproofing as specified in Section
02820 and 07120.
26
29
30
32
34
35
37
38
41 3.08 STONES FOR POND BOTTOM
41
44
45
A. Install loose. Minimum cover of one stone thick to provide a
continuous layer on pond bottom.
44
45
48 3.09 TRASH RECEPTACLES
48
51
53
A. Provide and install where indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION
51
53
UoS.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & VoM.F.
01
03
6L23, 8G14
SECTION 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
o2 1o-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for irrigation system system as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Plant and planting: Section 02950.
2. Electrical connection to building system: Division 16.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
28
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
44
A. Locate sprinklers as indicated.
1. Provide minimum of 1.0 IN of precipitation per week to all
lawn and shrub areas.
2. Provide minimum of 35 PSI water pressure at base of all
rotating sprinklers and 25 PSI water pressure for fixed
spray sprinklers.
3. Design for prevailing wind of 5 MPH and silty clay soil.
Adjust sprinkling time to soil type to reduce water runoff.
4. Ideal watering time: Between 1 AM and 10 AM.
B. Installer qualifications: Personnel experienced in this work
and engaged in this type of work for at least 2 years.
C. Locate sprinklers as indicated.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
44
47 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
47
5O
52
53
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: .
1. Manufacturer's specifications for all materials.
5O
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
02810-2
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: 1. Warranty.
2. Test report.
3. Operating and maintenance data: See Division 1.
4. Owner instruction reports: See Division 1.
01
03
04
05
06
07
10 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
10
13
14
16
17
A. Verify location of all existing utilities and structures and
underground utilities.
B. Protect existing utilities and structures and replace if
damaged.
13
14
16
17
20 1.05 WARRANTY
2O
23
24
A. Written warranty for one year from substantial completion.
Repair or replace all defective parts or operation.
23
24
28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
31 2.01 MATERIALS
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Sprinkler heads and nozzles, controllers, and valves:
a. Base: Toro and Rain Bird.
bo Optional: Buckner and Weathermatic, where applicable.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
34
35
36
37
38
39
42 2.02 PIPING AND WIRING
42
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. PVC plastic pipe:
1. PVC pipe:
a. 3 IN and larger: Bell and Spigot, ASTM D1783, ASTM
D3139, Schedule 40, except for 4 IN inside 6 IN sleeves,
which is to be solvent welded fittings.
b. 2-1/2 IN and smaller: Solvent weld, ASTM D2241, Class
200, SDR 21.
c. Mark pipe continuously and permanently with manufacturers
name and trademark, size~ schedule, type of pipe and
working pressure.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
02
03
04
O5
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
02810-3
2. Pipe connections:
a. Solvent welded socket type: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40.
3. Sprinkler head connections:
a. PVC plastic threaded fittings ASTM D2464, Schedule 40.
b. Threaded nipples. ASTM D1785, Schedule 40.
B. Polyethylene pipe:
1. Sprinkler head fittings:
a. Polyethylene adjustable length cut off risers.
C. Riser assembly:
1. Ail rotating pop-up sprinkler or quick coupling valves to
have an adjustable riser assembly (triple swing joint riser)
assembled by the use of three (3) standard 90 degree ells as
recommended by the sprinkler manufacturer. The swing joint
riser to be the same size as the inlet to the sprinkler
head.
2. Ail risers for shrub spray heads that are in shrub beds
areas to be schedule 40 PVC threaded pipe, if head is
installed entirely above finished grade.
3. Risers to be of sufficient height as may be required so as
not to cause any interruption of the stream from the
sprinkler nozzle when the plant material has reached its
optimum growth.
D. Sleeves for control wiring and piping: 1. ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 PVC.
2. Install under all walks and paving where indicated, prior to
installation of walks and paving.
3. PVC plastic pipe (4 IN) inside 6 IN sleeves to be solvent
welded fittings in lieu of bell and spigot.
E. Valve boxes: Molded polyfiber, with green colored, non-hinged,
bolted cover.
Ii Ametek models 10-182-001, 10-170-001, or 10-190-001.
2. Carson Industries models 910, 1419 or 1419E.
F. Jointing materials: 1. Solvent cement:
2. Rubber gaskets:
ASTM D2564.
AW~/A Clll.
G. Electrical wiring: 1. Type "UF", 600 volt, stranded or solid copper, single
conductor wire with PVC insulation, UL labeled for direct
underground burial.
2. Conductors not smaller than No.14 AWG.
3. Insulation: lf16 IN thick minimum covering of ICC-100
compound for positive waterproofing protection.
4. Sizes 14, 12, 10 and 8: Single conductor solid copper wire;
sizes 6 and 4: Stranded copper wire.
5. Ail control or "hot" wires orange or red; all common or
ground wires white..
6. Wire types and installation conform to local codes.
7. Provide expansion coils as required.
O1
02
03
04
05
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
02810-4
8. Size conductors to provide sufficient voltage at valve
solenoids for proper operation.
9. Provide all wiring from control valves to controllers.
H. Thrust blocking: Sufficient mass of concrete, bearing on solid
undisturbed ground, to resist hydraulic thrust at maximum
pressures pipe will be subjected to.
01
02
03
05
O6
07
10 2.03 VALVES
10
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
A. Manual circuit valves: Brass gate valve, key operated with
non-rising stem.
1. Provide 2 gate valve keys, 3 FT long.
2. Locate in valve boxes.
B. Manual drain valves: Brass angle valve, key operated with
non-rising stem.
1. Provide 2 IN PVC sleeve from valve to valve marker.
2. Provide 2 drain valve keys, 3 FT long.
C. Quick-coupling valves: 1o Bronze or brass, two piece, cast body.
2. Valve seat and throat with replaceable seals.
3. Bronze cover.
4. Size: 3/4 IN double slot, with 3/4 IN valve key and ho~e
swivel for 3/4 IN hoses.
D. Remote control valves: 1. 15-100 PSI brass, cycolac or nylon body and bonnet.
2. Normally closed, electrically operated.
3. 24 VAC solenoid.
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
36 2.04 SPRINKLER CONTROLLER
36
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
A. Sprinkler controller: 1. Dual/Multiple programming per station.
2. 24 HR watering cycle programmable for 7 or 14 days, with
capability to skip any day in watering period.
3. 0 to 60 minutes timing per station.
4. Rainy weather on/off switch.
5. Master valve/pump switch.
6. Locking cabinet with keys.
7. Manual or automatic operation without disturbing preset
automatic operation.
8. 115-120 VAC, with internal hard wired transformer.
9. Batter back-up to maintain programs up to 24 hours.
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.H.F.
O1
2.05
O4
O5
O6
08
O9
10
11
12
SPRINKLER HEAD AND NOZZLES
02810-5
A. Toro:
1. Rotating spray sprinklers: Series S606 gear driven
sprinklers.
B. Rainbird:
1. Fixed spray sprinklers: Series 1800 pop-up spray sprinklers
and related nozzles.
2. Sprinkler nozzles with shrub adapter: MPR plastic with
plastic shrub adapter.
01
O4
O5
O6
O8
09
10
11
12
16 PA~T 3 - ~"x~LNFI'IO~
16
19 3.01 PREPARATION
19
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
A. Stake out location of each run of pipe and all sprinkler heads
and valve locations prior to ditching.
1. Design location of heads is approximate.
2. Modify location in field to obtain best coverage possible.
B. Excavate trenches for PVC pipe to required depth and width to
permit proper handling and installation of pipe and fittings.
1. Compact backfill thoroughly, in 8 IN lifts, evened off with
adjacent soil level.
2. Hand rake smooth.
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
3O
31
34 3.02 INSTALLATION
34
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
51
53
A. Lay piping at sloped grade so that entire system of piping will
completely drain to low point.
1. Install manual drain valves at all low points along trunk
line.
2. Install manual circuit valves where indicated.
B. Carefully place all pipe, fittings and valves. 1. Keep interior of pipes free of dirt and debris.
2. Close or cap all open ends of pipe when laying is not in
progress.
C. Install sprinkler heads and valves to finish grade. Readjust
any setting not at proper level.
D. Install PVC main lines 12 IN minimum below finished grade.
E. Install PVC circuit l~nes 8 to 12 IN below finished grade.
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
51
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
O8
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
38
02810-6
F. Install pipe under concrete pavement by jacking, boring or
hydraulic driving.
1. Where cutting or breaking of sidewalks, concrete work and/or
asphalt is necessary, remove and replace to original
pavement section.
2. Replace full panels of concrete sidewalk.
G. Set all heads perpendicular to finished grades.
H. Snake all plastic pipe in trench to provide for expansion and
contraction as recommended by manufacturer.
I. Cut plastic pipe with hacksaw and square or sawing vise to
ensure square cut.
1. Remove burrs at cut ends prior to installation.
2. Solvent weld all plastic to plastic joints.
3o Use only solvent recommended by manufacturer.
4o For plastic to metal joints, use plastic male adaptors.
5. Allow Joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is
applied to PVC pipe system.
J. Provide manufacturer's standard riser assembly.
K. Install electric wiring in pipe trenches where possible.
1. Backfill pipe trench 3 to 4 IN above top of pipe before
installing wire.
2. Snake wire in trench as much as possible to allow for
expansion and contraction.
3. If wire is run in separate trench, provide 12 IN of cover.
4. Provide sufficient wire at remote control valves so that, in
case of repair, valve bonnet or splice may be brought to
· surface without disconnecting wire.
L. Install controllers where indicated.
1. Connect all remote control valves of one controller to that
controller's common ground wire system.
M. Restore all improvements damaged as a result of this work.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
O8
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
38
41 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
41
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
A. Upon completion of trunk lines, hydrostatically test to
pressure not less than 50 percent more than maximum operating
pressure, but in 7o case less than 100 PSI.
1~ Maintain this pressure for 30 minutes.
2. Repair or replace any leaks or defective pipe and repeat
tests until all test requirements are met.
Bo Do not backfill or conceal any pipe until system has been
successfully tested to satisfaction of Contracting Officer.
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
UoS.P.S. n N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
02
03
04
05
06
02810-7
C. After all sprinkler piping, risers and heads are in place and
connected, open all control valves and flush out system with
full head of water.
1. Remove and clean internal parts of vertical valves.
2. Repeat as many times as necessary to insure a completely
flushed system.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
09 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
O9
12
13
15
16
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
31
33
35
A. Adjust nozzles of all sprinklers as necessary for proper and
adequate distribution of water.
B. Adjust sprinklers having an adjusting screw or adjusting stem
for proper arc of coverage, radius, and/or gallonage discharge.
C. Adjust automatic control valves to correct operating pressure
for specific sprinkler heads downstream of valve.
D. Thoroughly clean all parts, equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves
and fittings of grease, plastic cuttings and sludge.
E. Prior to final acceptance, inspect and test operation of each
piece of equipment and system to satisfaction of Contracting
Officer.
F. Adjust system to provide uniform coverage, insofar as
practical.
G. Remove all debris produced as a result of the work.
H. Provide Owner instruction: See Division 1.
END OF SECTION'
12
13
15
16
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
31
33
35
U.S.P.S. = N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6D18, 8G14
SECTION 02820
FOUNTAIN
02820-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all fountain equipment as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Miscellaneous site improvements: Section 02800.~
2. Waterproofing: Section 07120.
3. Piping rough-ins and hook-up: Division 15.
4. Electrical hook-up: Division 16.
30 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
3O
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
43
A. Design criteria: Produce following water effects:
1. Two interconnected ponds to each have a single jet in the
upper level producing a highly aerated mound of water to a
12 IN height. This water to flow over and between rocks to
the lower pool for recirculation by a submersible pump.
2. Filtration system for maintaining clear water.
B. Standards for design, materials and installation.
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. Installer qualifications: Personnel experienced in this work
and engaged in this type of work for at least 2 years.
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
43
47 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
47
5O
52
54
A. Verify locations of underground utilities.
B. Protect utilities and structures and replace if damaged.
C. Revisions to Contract Drawings:
5O
52'
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
02820-2
1. If it becomes necessary to change location of equipment or
piping due to other construction, secure prior written
approval from Contracting Officer.
2. If Contractor initiated, make approved changes without added
cost to Owner.
01
O2
03
O4
05-
08 1.04 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
O8
11
12
13
15
16
18
20
21
22
23
A. Shop drawings: 1. Indicate complete layout of piping and equipment.
2. Location of all other components.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer's specifications for all materials.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data: See Division 1.
2. Owner instruction reports: See Division 1.
3o Warranty.
26 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
29
A. Deliver items required to be built-in in time for installation.
11
12
13
15
16
18
2O
21
22
23
26
32 1.06 WARRANTY
32
35
36
A. Written warranty for one year. Repair or replace all defective
parts or operation.
35
36
40 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4O
43 2.01 MATERIALS
43
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Fountain equipment:
a. Base: Kim Lighting.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Nozzles: Copper and bronze construction.
1. N-50 bubbler jet (2) with close return snorkel and air-water
ratio adjustment valve.
46
47
48
49
50
52
53
54 __
UoSoPoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.Fo
02820-3
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
19
2O
21
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
C. Submersible pump: 2487L-101 1/3 HP bronze submersible fountain
pump (2) with 9 FT of 3-wire submersible cord.
1. Motor rated at 115 volts, 60 Hz, single phase with built-in
thermal overload protection.
2. Special manifold with hose and clamp connection, submersible
regulating valves and check valve, 2487L-102 (2). Copper
and bronze construction.
D. Anti-vortex suction plate: 1. R-80C anti-vortex suction plate (2) with copper sump.
2. Natural finish.
E. Permanent media sand filter: 1/2 horsepower pump, rated at 115
volts, 60 Hz, single phase, No. RJ-65-1 (1). 20 LB silica sand
included.
1. Provide necessary valves for filtration system.
F. Filter surface skimmer: 1. R-30B filter surface skimmer (2).
2. Natural finish cast bronze faceplate.
G. Adjustable "eyeball" filter discharge fittings, R-85B (2),
natural finish.
H. Filter vacuum fitting, R-86B (2), natural finish.
I. Overflow and drain: 1. R-15B 2 IN overflow and drain (2) complete with cast iron
membrane clamping ring and body.
2. Natural finish.
J. Floor drain: 1. 2487L-103 1-1/2 IN floor drain (2).
2. Brass construction with removable plug.
3. Natural finish.
K. Electrical:
1. Control panel:
a. 2487L-104 control panel (1), NEMA I enclosure, coded and
prewired, with submersible pump relays, pilot lights, and
H.O.A. switches, combination water level control panel,
and time clocks.
2. Water level control/low water level cutoff:
a. WLN-1 combination water level control, low water level
cutoff (1).
b. Niche mounte~ cast bronze probe box.
c. 120 volt primary, low voltage to probes.
3. Time clock, T-71 (2), 24 hour dial, 120 volt.
4. Junction box, 2487L-105 (2), with cord compression seal and
re-enterable potting compound.
5. Wiring: Conform to requirements of Division 16.
L. Piping: Conform to requirements of Division 15.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
19
2O
21
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
~2820-4
O2
M. Waterproofing: See Section 07120.
02
06 PART 3 - EXECUTION
06
09 3.01 INSTALLATION
09
12
13
15
17
18
2O
A. Set built-in items in place prior to concrete or boulder/pond
edge treatment work.
B. Set anchor bolts prior to waterproofing.
C. Assure that waterproofing is water tight at penetrations.
Patch as necessary.
D. Install equipment.
12
13
15
17
18
20
23 3.02 TESTING
23
26
28
30
A. Test installation for water tightness. Repair as necessary.
B. Test fountain equipment. Adjust until operating correctly.
END OF SECTION
26
28
30
UoS.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
04
5H02, 8C21
SECTION 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES
(PVC - COATED OR GALVANIZED)
02830-1
01
03
O4
07 PART 1 - GENERAL
O7
10 1.01 DESCRIPTION
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
29
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
services for all chain link fence and gates (PVC - coated
or galvanized) as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Topsoiling and finished grading:
Section 02920.
1.02 QUALITY ASSb-RANCE
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
29
32
33
34
36
37
39
40
42
43
45
46
48
49
A. Material standards: Chain Link Manufacturers Institute
"Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric" and "Industrial
Steel Specifications for Fence Posts, Gates and Accessories".
B. Test of galvanized coating: ASTM A239-73 (83), 12 one-minute
immersions.
C. Fencing, wire and post, metal (and gates, chain link fence
fabric, and accessories): Federal Specification FS-RR-F-191.
D. Standard specification for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated
steel chain link fence fabric, ASTM F668-83.
E. Installer qualifications: Skilled and experienced mechanics,
minimum of two years experience installing similar fencing.
F. Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence, ASTM
F567-78(83).
32
33
34
36
37
39
4O
42
43
45
46
48
49
52
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)'
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.H.F.
06'
07
08
09
02830-2
01 A. Shop drawings: Show fence layout, post locations, gates,
02 details illustrating fence height, location and size of posts,
03 rails, braces, footings, hardware list and erection
04 procedures.
B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications for all materials.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions and procedures,
including standard details of fence and gate installation.
11 C. Samples: Not required.
13 D. Project information: Not required.
01
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
il
13
17 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
17
20 2.01 MATERIALS
2O
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Page-Wilson Corporation, Page Fence Division; Armco, linc.,
Eastern Steel Division; United States Steel Corporation,
Cyclone Fence Division; Anchor Fence, Inc.; and Brighton
by Semmerling Manufacturing Corporation.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval, comply with Section
00440.
B. General:
1. Pipe sizes indicated are commercial pipe sizes.
2. Tube sizes indicated are nominal flange dimensions.
3. Roll form section sizes are nominal outside dimensions.
4. Open seam material not allowed.
5. Hot-dip galvanizing for iron or steel components:
a. On pipe: ASTM A120-83, 1.80Z/SF, minimum.
b. On square tubing: ASTM A123, 20Z/SF.
c. On roll formed sections: ASTM Al20, 1.80Z/SF minimum.
d. On hardware and accessories: ASTM A153-82, 1.40Z/SF.
e. On fabric: ASTM A392-81, Class 2, 20Z/SF, and
withstand test of coating, as specified.
f. On barbed wire: ASTM A585, Type I.
g. On miscellaneous items: ASTM Al20, 1.8 0Z/SF, minimum.
6. PVC coating for "PVC coated" components: Black, per Federal
Color Chart PR-4, Department of Transportation; minimum 15
mils PVC coating over 0.30 ounce zinc substrate; color
coating to be matched for both fabric and framework
materials.
C. Fence height: 8.FT, nominal.
D. Chain link fabric: Woven 2 IN mesh of 9 GA wire.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
2O
21
22
23
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
4O
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
02830-3
1. Steel wire; minimum tensile strength after Coating: 90,000
PSI.
2. Twisted and barbed at top and bottom selvages.
3. One piece wide fabric.
E. Line posts: 2-1/2 IN OD steel pipe', 3.65 PLF, or 2-1/2 IN
square steel tubing, 4.1PLF, or steel "C" section 2.25 x 1.70
IN, 2.72 PLF.
1. Of sufficient length to permit setting in concrete footing
to within 3 IN of bottom.
F. Top, center and bottom rails: 1-5/8 IN OD steel pipe, 2.27
PLF, or 1-5/8 x 1-1/4 IN steel roll form section.
1. Fit top rails with expansion couplings of outside sleeve
type which provide rigid attachment.
2. Top rails continuous for full length of fence.
G. Terminal and corner posts: 3 IN, 0.40 pipe, 5.79 PLF or 2-1/2
IN square steel tube, 5.79 PLF, or 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 IN steel roll
form section.
1. Including pull posts.
2. Length to permit setting in concrete footing to within 3 IN
of bottom.
H. Bracing: Compression and tension members. 1. Compression: 1-5/8 IN OD steel pipe, 2.27 PLF.
2. Tension: 3/8 IN truss rod with turnbuckles.
I. Gate posts: Round steel pipe. 1. For vehicular gates: 4 IN OD, 9.11PLF.
2. For other gate~: 3 IN OD, 5,79 PLF.
3. Square tube of same or greater weight may be used in lieu
of round pipe.
4. Length. to permit 36 IN to be set in concrete to within 3 IN
of bottom.
J. Tension bars: 3/16 x 3/4 IN, min., steel; one piece for full
height of fabric.
K. Bottom tension wire: 7 GA coated spring coil tension wire.
L. Stretcher bars and bands: 1/8 x 1 IN.
1. Thread through fabric and secure to posts with metal bands
spaced not greater than 15 IN OC.
M. Tie bands: 1. For securing fabric to line posts, rails and tension wire:
9 GA aluminum wire or aluminum straps.
2. For securing fabric to terminal posts: Aluminum straps.
N. Gate frames: 2 IN OD steel pipe, 2.72 PLF, or 2 IN square
tubing, 3.65 PLF.
1. Provide necessary horizontal and/or vertical bracing.
O1
O2
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
4O
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
06
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
39
02830-4
O. Cantilever slide gates: Aluminum frame, PVC coated, enclosed
truck assembly; one piece combination track/frame member;
anti-friction factory lubricated and sealed roller bearing
truck assembly.
P. Gate hardware: Ail items to suit Kate and post sizes.
1. Hinges: Pressed of forged steel or malleable iron.
a. Non-removable heavy duty type.
b. Offset to permit 180 deKree Kate opening.
c. Provide 1-1/2 pair for each leaf over 6 FT nominal
height.
2. Latches: Heavy duty automatic engaging and lockable.
a. For double gates: Automatic engaging, lockable on one
leaf and drop rod on other leaf.
b. Furnish suitable casting set in concrete to hold gate
leaf in place when drop rod is enKaKed.
3. Keepers: Automatically engage Kate and hold it open until
manually released.
Concrete: 2500 PSI 28 day compressive strength, 3 IN slump,
2-4 percent entrained air.
1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 1 IN max.
Post tops: Steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron,
weathertight closure cap.
1. One cap per post.
S. Combination post top cap and barbed wire support: 1. Steel, wrought, or malleable iron, with provisions for
anchorage to posts.
2. Provide one cap and arm for each post.
T.. Barbed wire: Two 12-1/2 GA twisted wires with 14 GA 4 point
barbs spaced 5 IN on center.
U. Miscellaneous items and materials: 1. Consistent in quality with materials listed above.
2. Provide as required to complete fence installation.
O1
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
39
43 PART 3 - RXECOTION
43
46 3.01 INSPECTION
46
49
51
52
A. Verify suitability of areas to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
49
51
52
U.SoP.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O4
O5
07
08
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
26
27
29
30
32
34
36
38
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
53
3.02 ERECTION
02830-5
A. Do not start fence installation before final grading is
complete and finish elevations established.
B. Install fence in true and correct alignment with posts
vertical.
C. Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil, not less
than 3 IN deeper than bottom of posts.
D. Set all posts in concrete footings with crowned, steel
troweled tops of following minimum dimensions:
1. Diameter:
a. Line, terminal and corner posts: 4 times post OD.
1) Line posts: 10 IN, minimum.
2) Terminal and corner posts: 12 IN, minimum.
b. Gate posts: 5 times post OD.
2. Depth:
a. Line, terminal and corner posts: 36 IN, minimum.
b. Gate post's: 39 IN, minimum.
g. Install fence tight, free of sags and bulges.
F. Place fence with bottom edge of fabric 1 IN above finished
grade.
G. Correct minor grade irregularities to maintain maximum 2 IN
clearance.
H. Space line posts equidistant, not over 10 FT on center.
I. Install terminal posts at ends of runs.
J. Provide continuous top rail with couplings for full length.
K. Top rail to pass through openings provided in post tops.
L. Provide center and bottom rails. 1. Install in one piece between posts and flush with posts on
fabric side.
2. Use special offget fittings as required.
M. Install bracing assemblies at all terminal and gate posts and
at both sides of corner posts.
1. Locate compression members at mid-height of fabric.
2. Extend diagonal tension members from compression members to
bases of posts.
3. Install so that posts are plumb when under correct tension.
N. Pull fabric taut and secure to posts and rails.
1. Install fabric on outside of fence.
01
04
O5
07
O8
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
26
27
29
3O
32
34
36
38
4O
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
02830-6
11
12
13
14
15
2. Secure so fabric remains in tension after pulling force is
released.
3. Secure to posts with tie bands not over 15 IN OC, and to
rails and tension wire at not over 24 IN OC.
4. Use U-shaped wire conforming to diameter of pipe to which
attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted
at least 2 full turns.
5. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazards to persons or
clothing.
O. Construct gate frames w~th heavy wrought or malleable fittings
or by welding, to produce rigid and weatherproof joints and
rigid nonsagging, nontwisting gate.
1. Coat welds with zinc rich coating.
2. Use fabric same as fence fabric, similarly attached.
17
18
19
P. Install barbed wire as indicated: 1. Install 3 rows to arm.
2. Install barbed wire on fence and gates.
21
22
23
24
25.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Q. Electrical grounding:
1o Whenever power line passes over fence~ install 2 ground
rods, 50 FT on either side of power line.
2. Use 5-8 IN x 8 FT copper clad steel rods.
3. Drive rod vertically until top of rod is approximately 6 IN
below finished grade.
4. Connect fabric to rods with No.6 solid bare copper wipe and
bronze clad clamp and bronze or stainless steel washers and
batts.
5. Install ground rods along fence at 500 FT intervals when
power line parallels and is over or adjacent to fence.
a. Ground each component of fence.
34
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
17'
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F~ & V.M.F.
O1 4D20, 7L16
03
SECTION 02920
TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING
02920-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.0! DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all topsoiling and finished grading, as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate'with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Hydromulching: Section 02930.
2. Native grass seeding: Section 02932.
3. Sodding: Section 02935.
4. Plants and planting: Section 02950.
C. Location of work: Ail areas within limits of grading and all
areas outside limits of grading which are disturbed in the
course of the work.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
34 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
37
38
A. Finish grading tolerance: 0.1FT (30 mm) plus/minus from
required elevations.
37
38
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
44
46
48
50
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: Not required.
41
44
46
48
50
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02920-2
O1 i.04 JOB CONDITIONS
O1
O4
A. Determine amount of topsoil necessary to complete work.
04
08 PAKT 2 - PP,0DUCTS
08
11 2.01 MATERIALS
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
A. Topsoil: Original surface soil typical of area, capable of
supporting native plant growth.
1. Use existing topsoil stockpiled on site.
2. If amount of topsoil stockpiled is less than amount
necessary for the work, furnish all additional topsoil
required.
14
15
16
17
18
19
23 PART 3 - R~RCUTION
23
26 3.01 ROUGH GRADE RgVIEW
26
29 A. Rough grading reviewed by Contracting Officer.
29 A
32 3.02 PREPARATION
32
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
44
45
A. Correct, adjust and/or repair rough graded areas. 1. Cut off mounds and ridges.
2. Fill gullies and depressions.
3. Perform other necessary repairs.
4. Bring all sub-grades to specified contours, even and
properly compacted.
B. Loosen surface to depth of 2 IN (50 mm), minimum.
C. Remove all stones and debris over 2 IN (50 mm) in any
dimension.
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
44
45
48 3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL
48
51
52
A. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen
enough to cause clodding.
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F, & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
07
09
10
02920-3
B. Spread topsoil to compacted depth of 4 IN (100 mm) for all
disturbed earth areas.
C. Make finished surface free of stones, sticks, or other material
1 IN (25 mm) or more in any dimension.
D. Make finished surface smooth and true to required grades.
E. Restore areas occupfed by stockpiles to condition of rest of
finished work.
01
02
04
05
07
09
10
13 3.04 ACCEPTANCE
13
16
17
19
20
22
A. Upon completion of topsoiling, obtain Contracting Officer's
acceptance of grade and surface.
B. Make test holes where directed, to verify proper placement and
thickness of topsoil.
END OF SECTION
16
17
19
20
22
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6D18, 7K30
SECTION 02930
HYDROMULCHING
02930-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all hydr°mulching as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
23
24
25
B. Location of work: Establish lawns on all areas indicated as
"hydromulching" which are not occupied by other planting or
construction.
27
28
29
3O
C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Irrigation system: Section 02810.
2. Sodding: Section 02935.
3. Plants and planting: Section 02950.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
33 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
33
36
38
40
42
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: Not required°
36
38
40
42
45 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
45
48
49
51
52
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight,
analysis and name of manufacturer.
B. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while
at site. ~.
48
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
04
O6
02930-2
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Perform hydromulching between March 1 and September 15.
B. Coordinate work with irrigation system installation.
O1
04
06
10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
10
13 2.01 MATERIALS
13
16
17
19
21
22
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
A. Establish a smooth, healthy, uniform, close stand of grass from
specified seed.
B. Grass seed: Hulled, common Bermuda seed.
C. Mulch: Shredded, cellulose fiber (Weyerhauser or Conwed with
green color additive).
D. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer of i6-20-0 analysis, with
trace elements; filler to be sulfur and iron sulfate.
E. Water for planting purposes: 1. Supplied by Owner.
2. Provide all equipment necessary to transport water from
source to required locations.
3. Do not waste water.
16
17
19
21
22
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
35 PA~T 3 - EXECUTION
35
38 3.01 SOIL PREPARATION
38
41
42
44
46
47
49
50
51
52
A. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted soon after
preparation.
B. Loosen surface to minimum depth of 4 IN (100 mm).
C. Remove stones over 1 IN (25 mm) in any dimension, sticks,
roots, rubbish and other extraneous matter.
D. Prior to applying fertilizer, loosen areas to be hydromulched
with double disc or other suitable device if soil has become
hard or compacted. Correct any surface irregularities in order
to prevent pocket or low areas which will allow water to stand.
41
42
44
46
47
49
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
04
O5
O7
O8
02930-3
E. Grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly
fine'texture.
1. Roll and rake, remove ridges and fill depressions, as
required to meet finish grades.
2. Fine grade just prior to hydromulching.
F. Restore lawn areas to specified condition if eroded or
otherwise disturbed between fine grading and hydromulching.
01
02
03
04
05
07
O8
11 3.02 HYDROMULCHING
11
14
15
16
18
20
21
23
24
25
27
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
39
4O
41
A. Hydromulch all areas indicated to insure following coverage: 1. Seed: 2 LB/lO00 SF (0.01 KG/SM).
2. Mulch: 60 LB/lO00 SFo
B. Use approved equipment to apply hydromulch.
C. Take extreme caution not to spray hydromulch material outside
lawn areas.
D. Stop when work extends beyond most favorable planting season or
when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of
drought, high winds excessive moisture, or other factors.
E. Resume work only when favorable condition develops.
F. Fertilize hydromulched areas two times: 1. Once as seed begins to germinate; a second time
approximately three weeks thereafter.
2. Apply at rate of 20 LB/lO00 SF each time.
G. Replant areas not showing sufficient growth at end of three
weeks following initial planting.
Replanting to be identical to original planting.
I. Ail hydromulched areas to have minimum 95 percent coverage,
with no bare spots exceeding 1FT x 1FT at time of substantial
completion.
14
15
16
18
20
21
23
24
'25
27
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
39
4O
41
44 3.03 MAINTENANCE
44
47
48
49
5O
51
A. Maintain hydromulched areas for 90 days following planting.
1. Water, fertilize, weed, mow, trim, roll, regrade, replant as
required.
2. Establish a smooth, healthy, uniform, close stand, free of
eroded or bare areas, weeds and surface irregularities.
47
48
49
50
51
U.S.PoS._- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
10
11
13
02930-4
B. Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses and lawn watering
equipment as required to keep lawn areas uniformly moist for
proper growth.
1. Lay out temporary watering system and arrange watering
schedule to avoid walking over muddy and newly hydromulched
areas.
2. Prevent puddling and water erosion and displacement of seed
and/or mulch.
C. Mow hydromulched areas as soon as there is enough top growth to
cut with mower set at recommended height.'
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
13
UoSoP.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
03
6D18, 8G14
SECTION 02932
NATIVE GRASS SEEDING
02932-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all native grass seeding as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
complete 'installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Location of work: Establish native grasses on all areas
indicated as "native grass seeding", which are not occupied by
other planting or construction.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
28
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
40
41
43
A. Construction standards: Texas State Department of Highways and
Public Transportation, "Standard Specifications for
Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges", 1982, as
amended to date.
B. Should conflicts arise between standard specifications of
government agencies mentioned herein and Contract Documents,
the more stringent to govern.
C. Where a particular type of material or method is specified, no
other type of material or method will be permitted.
D. Balance of State Specifications apply.
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
40
41
43
46 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
46
49
51
53
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required~'
49
51
53.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
02932-2
D. Project'information:
1. Certificates for grass seed mixture, stating botanical and
common name, percentages of purity and germination.
2. Certify that each container of seed delivered is fully
labeled in accord with Texas Seed Law and equals or exceeds
specification requirements.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
09 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O9
12
13
14
15
17
18
A. Deliver seed in standard sealed containers labeled with
producer's name and seed analysis, and in accord with US
Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Texas
Seed Law.
B. Deliver fertilizer in original analysis, labeled with content
analysis.
12
13
14
15
17
18
21 1o05 JOB CONDITIONS
21
24
A. Perform seeding between January 1 and June 1.
24
28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
31 2.01 MATERIALS
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
54
A. Seed: 1. Meet requirements of Texas Seed Law, including labeling
requirements for showing name and type of seed.
2. Previous season's crop and date of analysis shown on each
bag to be within nine months of time of use on project.
3. Each variety of seed to be furnished and delivered in
separate bags or containers.
4. Provide mixture as follows:
Common and Botanical Name
LB PLS/ACRE
Green Sprangletop
(Leptochloa dubia)
1.2
Bermuda Grass (Hulled)
(Cynodon dactylon)
6.9
K.R. Bluestem
(Andropogon tschaemum)
1.O
Buffalograss (treated)
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
10
11
13
15
16
17
18
19
02932-3
(Buchloe dactyloides)
1.2
B. Mulch: 1. Straw mulch of oat, wheat, or rice straw.
2. Hay mulch to be prairie grass, Bermuda grass, or other hay.
3. Mulch to be free of Johnson grass or other noxious weeds and
foreign materials and kept in a dry condition, not molding
or rotten.
C. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer of 16-20-0 analysis, meeting
applicable requirements of Texas Fertilizer Law.
D. Tacking agent: As per State Specifications.
E. Water for planting purposes: 1. Supplied by Owner.
2. Provide all equipment necessary to transport water from
source to required locations.
3. Do not waste water.
01
03
O4
05
06
07
O8
10
11
13
15
16
17
18
19
23 PART 3 - R~RCLrrION
23
26 3.01 SOIL PREPARATION
29
30
32
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
A. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted soon after
preparation.
B. ~oosen surface to minimum depth of 4 IN (100 mm).
C. Distribute fertilizer uniformly over areas to be seeded at rate
of 10 LB/1000 SF (0.05 KG/SM) by using suitable distributor.
Incorporate fertilizer into soil to depth of at least 2 IN (50
mm).
D. Restore areas to be seeded with native grasses to specified
condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed between grading and
seeding.
26
29
30'
32
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
44 3.02 SEEDING
44
47
49
5O
52
53
54
A. Do not use seed which is wet, moldy or otherwise damaged.
B. Use approved mechanical power driven drills or seeders, or
mechanical hand seeders, or other approved equipment.
C. Distribute seed evenly over entire area at rates specified, 50
percent sown in one direction, remainder at right angles to
first sowing.
47
49
5O
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02932-4
O2
03
O4
O5
O7
09
10
11
13
1'4
15
16
17
18
19
D. Stop when work extends beyond most favorable planting season
for species designated, or when satisfactory results cannot be
obtained because of drought, high winds excessive moisture, or
other factors.
E. Resume work only when favorable condition develops.
F. After planting, roll planted areas with corrugated roller of
the "Cultipacker" type. Rolling of slope areas to be along
contour of slope.
G. Protect seeded areas against erosion by mulching.
1. Spread mulch in a continuous blanket using 2 to 2-1/2
TON/ACRE of straw to depth of 4 or 5 straws.
2. Immediately following spreading mulch, secure with tacking
agent.
3. Use appropriate shields to protect adjacent curbs, walks,
etc.
02
03
04
05
O7
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
22 3.03 MAINTENANCE
22
25
26
27
28
30
.31
32
34
35
36
38
4O
A. Maintain seeded areas for 180 days after planting. 1. Water, fertilize, weed, mow, regrade, replant as required.
2. Establish a smooth, healthy, uniform, close stand, free'of
eroded or bare areas, weeds and surface irregularities.
B. Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses and watering
equipment as required to keep seeded areas moist for proper
growth.
C. Remulch with new mulch in areas where mulch has been disturbed
by wind or maintenance operations sufficiently to nullify its
purpose. Anchor as required to prevent displacement.
D. Replant bare areas using same materials specified.
END OF SECTION
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
38
4O
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
6D18, 7L16
SECTION 02935
SODDING
02935-1
01
03
06 PA~T 1 - GI~IERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all sodding as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Location of work: Establish lawns by sodding on all areas
indicated, which are not occupied by other planting or
construction.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Irrigation system: Section 02810.
2..Topsoiling and finished grading: Section 02920.
3. Hydromulching: Section 02930.-
4. Plants and planting: Section 02950.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
34 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
34
37
39
41
43
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: Not required.
37
39
41
43
46 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
46
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Perform sodding during conditions conducive to successful
results.
1. Provide proper and adequate protection.
2. Do not lay when temperature is below 32 degF (0 degC).
3. Do not lay on frozen or dried out soil.
4. Do not place frozen or dried out sod.
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02935-2
04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
04
07 2.01 MATERIALS
O7
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
22
23
24
25
26
A. Establish a smooth, healthy, uniform close stand of sod.
B. Sod: Viable, dense, strongly rooted, not less than 2 years
old.
1. Common Bermuda grass.
2. Free of weeds and undesirable native grasses.
3. Mow prior to stripping from field.
4. Cut so 3/4 IN (18 mm) of soil is firmly attached to roots.
5. Not frozen or dormant.
C. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer of 15-5-10 analysis.
D. Water for planting purposes: 1. Supplied by Owner°
2. Provide all equipment necessary to transport water from
source to required locations.
3. Do not waste water.
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
22
23
24
25
26
30 PART 3 - g~rrIoN
3O
33 3.01 SOIL PREPARATION
33
36
37
39
41
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
52
53
A. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted soon after
preparation.
B. Loosen surface to minimum depth of 4 IN (100 mm).
C. Remove stones and debris over 1 IN (25 mm) in any dimension.
D. Distribute fertilizer uniformly over areas to be sodded at rate
of 10 LB/lO00 SF (0.05 KG/SM).
1. Use suitable distributor.
2. Incorporate fertilizer into soil to depth of at least 2 IN
(50 mm).
E. Clean surface of substances which will interfere with turf
development or subsequent mowing operations.
F. Grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly
fine texture.
36
37
39
41
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
52
53
U,S,P,S, .- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
O5
O6
02935-3
1. Roll and rake, remove ridges and fill depressions, as
required to meet finish grades.
2. Fine grade just prior to planting.
G. Restore lawn areas to specified condition if eroded or
otherwise disturbed between fine grading and planting.
0!
02
03
05
O6
09 3.02 SODDING
O9
12
13
14
16
18
19
21
22
A. Lay to form solid mass with tightly fitted joints. 1. Butt ends and edges; do not overlap.
2. Stagger joints.
B. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure full contact with subgrade.
C. Work sifted soil into minor cracks, avoid smothering adjacent
grass.
D. Peg sod on slopes to prevent slippage.
1. Use sharpened 1 x 1 × 6 IN (25 × 25 x 150 mm) wooden pegs.
12
13
14
16
18
19
21
22
25 3.03 MAINTENANCE
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
44
46
A. Maintain sodded areas for 30 days after planting.
1. Water, fertilize, weed, mow, trim, roll, regrade, replant as
required.
2. Establish a smooth, healthy, uniform, close stand, free of
eroded or bare areas, weeds and surface irregularities.
B. Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses and watering
equipment as required to keep sodded areas uniformly moist for
proper growth.
1. Lay out temporary watering system and arrange watering
schedule to avoid walking over muddy and newly sodded areas.
2. Prevent puddling and water erosion and displacement of sod.
C. Mow sodded areas as soon as there is enough top growth to cut
with mower set at recommended height.
D. Resod bare, dead or dying areas using same materials specified.
END OF SECTION
25
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
44
46
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
03
6D18, 7L16
SECTION 02950
PLUS AND PLYING
02950-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all landscape work as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See-Division 1 for General Requirements.
23
24
B. In event of conflict between quantities of plants indicated on
drawings and in plant list, plant list will govern.
26
27
28
29
30
C. Related work specified elsewhere:. 1. Irrigation system: Section 02810.
2. Topsotling and finished grading:
3. Hydromulching: Section 02930.
4. Sodding: Section 02935.
Section 02920.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
33 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
36
37
39
A. Nursery stock standard: "American Standards for Nursery
Stock", current edition.
B. Work performed by qualified nurseryman or Landscape Contractor.
36
37
39
42 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
42
45
47
48
49
50
52
54
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: 1. Warranty: Submit three copies of written warranty.
2. Manufacturer's literature for weed barrier, soil acidifier
and fertilizer.
C. Samples~ Not required.
D. Project information: Not required.
45
47
48
49
50
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02950-2
03 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING, STORAGE AND DELIVERY
O3
O6
07
O8
10
A. Handle plants at all times so that roots or balls are
adequately protected from breakage of balls, from sun and
drying winds.
Bo Plants with dried out tops or roots will be rejected.
06
07
08
10
13 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
13
16
17
19
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
A. Protect existing improvements.
1. Repair or replace all damaged items~
B. Protect completed work.
-C. Verify location and existence of underground utilities. 1. Protect utilities from damage due to landscape construction
activity.
2. Repair all damage to utility items.
D. If plant locations conflict with existing improvements or rock,
Contracting Officer will select other locatfons.
1. Make changes at no extra cost.
2. Do not change location of plants without permission of
Contracting Officer.
3. Where tree locations fall under overhead wires, adjust
locations as directed by Contracting Officer.
4. Coordinate work with irrigation system installation.
Planting times:
1. Deciduous shade tree,evergreens and shrubs: Any time ground
is suitable.
2. Groundcovers: Between February 15 and May 1.
3. Do not plant when ground is frozen or temperature is below
32 degF (0 degC).
16
17
19
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
43 1.06 WARRANTY
43
46
47
49
51
52
A. Remove and replace all new plants supplied, which are impaired,
dead or dying during one year after substantial completion.
B. Replacement materials and methods identical to original.
C~ Plants replaced under warranty to have a second warranty for
one year from date of ~eplacement.
46
47
49
51
52
U.S.PoS. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
02950-3
D. Every plant to leaf out and be in a healthy condition at
beginning of growing season during one year warranty period.
O1
02
06 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
O6
09 2.01 MATERIALS
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
38
4O
42
43
45
47
49
5O
52
53
54
A. Plant materials - General: Species and size indicated. No
substitutions without written approval of Contracting Officer.
1. Sound, healthy, vigorous, with normal top and root systems.
2. Free from diseases, insect pests or their eggs.
3. Nursery grown stock, freshly dug.
4. No heeled-in, cold storage or collected stock.
5. Grown in same or colder climatic zone as project.
B. Large trees: 1. Single leader, straight trunk (unless specified to be
multi-trunk).
2. Well branched, free of branches up to 5 FT (1.8 M) high
(unless specified otherwise).
3. Symmetrical growth.
C. Balled and burlapped plants (B & B): Firm, natural balls ~f'
soil.
D. Container grown plants (CG): Roots well established in soil,
grown in container for at least one growing season.
E. Bare root plants (BR): Intact root system cleaned of earth,
wrapped immediately in wet straw, moss or other suitable
material.
F. Planting soil: Use one part soil excavated from planting pit
and one part sandy loam and peat moss combination.
G. Mulch: Shredded hardwood chips.
H. Gravel: Washed, clean well-graded gravel, crushed gravel or
crushed stone; 3/4 IN to 1-1/2 IN size.
I. Filter fabric: Non-woven geotextile fabric.
J. Steel edging: 1/8 IN x 4 IN, 16 IN tapered steel stakes.
K. Peat moss: Clean, hypnum peat, or sphagnum moss, free of
noxious weeds and rubble; dark brown in color.
L. Tree wrap: 2 ply asphal{ cemented Kraft crepe paper in strips,
or burlap in striPs. Secure to tree with good quality 6 ply
cotton twine or binder twine.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
38
4O
42
43
45
47
49
5O
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02950-4
02
04
O6
O8
O9
11
12
14
16
17
18
19
2O
M. Tree stakes: 2 x 3 IN x 8 FT wood stakes.
N. Staking wire: Double-strand 12 GA (2.6 mm) galvanized.
0. Reinforced rubber hose: 5/8 or 3/4 IN (15 or 18 mm) diameter.
P. Soil acidifier: "New Life Acid Grow", manufactured by Soil
Building Systems, Inc., Dallas, TX or approved equal.
Q. Fertilizer: Commercial grade, uniform in composition; packet,
tablet or pellet forms of slow release fertilizer.
R. Topsoil: See Section 02920.
S. Water for planting purposes: 1. Supplied by Owner.
2. Provide all equipment necessary to transport water from
source to required locations.
3. Do not waste water.
02
04
06
O9
11
12
14
16
17
18
19
20
23 2.02 PLANT LIST
23
26 A. See drawings for plant list.
26
30 PART 3 - BXEC~Ot~
3O
33 3.01 PREPARATION
33
36 A. Immediately heel-in or plant bare root material.
36
39 3.02 PLANTING PROCEDURE
39
42
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Ail excavation is unclassified, excavate all materials without
additional cost.
B. Loosen bottom of pits prior to planting.
C. Tree pits: Circular, with vertical sides.
1. At least 24 IN (600 mm) greater in diameter than ball
diameter.
2. Sufficient depth to provide 6 IN (150 mm) of planting soil
under ball when set to natural grade.
3. Install tree pit d~ainage at base of hole as detailed on
drawings.
42
43
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
029~0-5
D. Massed planting and groundcover beds:
1. Massed planting beds: Plant shrubs in individual circular
holes at least 12 IN (300 mm) greater in diameter than ball
diameter.
a. Azalea bed preparation: Fill excavated pits with
pre-moistened peat above surrounding finished grade.
b. Roughen balls of azalea plants, prior to placing plants,
to encourage proper root growth.
2. Groundcover beds:
a. Rototill soil to depth of 6 IN (150 mm).
b. Fertilize with commercial fertilzier of 10-10-5 analysis
at rate of 4 LBS per 1,000 SF.
c. Apply soil acidifier at rate prescribed by manufactuer
and incorporate into top 6 IN (150 mm).
E. Set all plants straight or plumb, at such level that after
settlement they bear same relationship to finished grade as
they did in their former setting.
1. Remove burlap, rope, wires, etc., from. top of balls.
2. Do not remove burlap from sides and bottom of balls.
F. Fertilize all tree and shrub pits with commercial fertilizer
tablets of 20-10-5 analysis, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
G. Backfill all plants with planting soil. 1. Tamp under and around balls to eliminate voids.
2. Tamp to one-half depth of pit and thoroughly water and
puddle before backfilling to proper grade.
3. After planting has been completed, flood pit again so that
backfill is thoroughly saturated and settled.
H. Mulch all trees, shrubs, massed plantings and groundcover beds.
1. Mulch to limits of pit and uniformly over groundcover beds
to depth of 3 IN (75 mm).
2. In massed plantings, mulch entire area uniformly to depth of
3 IN (75 mm).
3. If mulching is delayed and soil has dried out, water all
plants thoroughly before spreading mulch.
I. Staking: Stake large trees immediately after planting. 1. Provide as detailed on drawings.
2. See plant list for staking schedule.
J. Tree wrap:
1. Wrap deciduous trees 2 IN (50 mm) or more in caliper by
neatly overlapping wrapping material between ground line and
second branch.
2. Place ties at top and bottom of wrapping material and not
more than 12 IN (300 mm) apart between top and bottom ties°
K. Pruning: *
1. Remove dead or damaged branches.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
05
O6
02950-6
2. Thin deciduous material to about two-thirds of initial
branching.
3. Remove only dead or damaged branches from evergreens.
L. Edging: Install steel edging in accord with manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on drawings.
O1
02
03
O5
06
09 3.03 CLEAN-UP
09
12
13
15
A. Remove all debris and waste materials, and all excess earth
materials. ~
B. Resod any damaged turf areas.
12
13
15
18 3.04 REVIEW FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
18
21
22
24
25
A. At end of planting, Contracting Officer will review and record
acceptability of all plant material.
B. Payment for completed work will be based only on acceptable
plant materials.
28 3.05 MAINTENANCE
21
22
24
25
28
31
32
33
34
35
37
A. Maintain all new materials for one year from substantial
completion.
1. Water if necessary.
2. Remove dead or dying branches, and sprouts.
3. Tighten, repair or replace tree stakes and wrapping.
END OF SECTION
31
32
33
34
35'
37
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
7K30, 8C14
SECTION 02952
INTERIOR PLANTSCAPING
02952-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all interior plantscaping as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
39
40
A. Installer qualifications: Personnel experienced in this woYk
and engaged in this type of work for at least 2 years.
B. Standard plant names: "American Joint Committee on
Horticultural Nomenclature Publication: Second Edition -
C. Nursery plant standards: "Manual of Grades and Standards for
Nursery Plants", Department of Agriculture, State of Florida,
current edition.
D. Peat standard: Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) Q-P-166E.
E. Perlite standard: U.S. Department of Commerce, NBS Voluntary
Product Standard: PS23-70.
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
39
40
43 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
43
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications for all materials.
2. Warranty: Submit three (3) copies of written warranty.
3. Certificates (notarized) attesting that all plant materials
supplied meet the requirements specified.
C. Samples:
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
02952-2
1. Support medium soil mixture: Submit five (5) pounds of type
to be used.
2. Mulch: Submit one (1) pound of type to be used.
O!
02
03
06 1.04 PRODUCT H/~NDLING, STORAGE AND DELIVERY
O6
09
10
12
13
15
16
17
A. Protect plants during delivery to prevent damage to plant
and/or container, and desiccation of leaves.
B. Protect large plants during transport by tying in the branches
and covering all exposed branches.
C. Store plants not installed on the day of arrival at a location
designated by the Contracting Officer. Keep plants in a moist
condition until planted by watering as necessary.
09
10
12
13
15
16
17
20 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
2O
23
24
26
A. Protect all other construction and improvements.
1. Repair or replace all damaged items.
B. Protect completed work.
29 1.06 WARRANTY
23
24
26
32
33
35
A. Remove and replace all new plants supplied, which are impaired,
dead or dying during 90 days from initial acceptance.
B. Replacement materials and methods identical to original.
32
33
35
39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39
42 2.01 MATERIALS
42
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Plant materials:
1. General: Species and size indicated. No substitutions
without written approval of Contracting Officer.
a. Sound, healthy, vigorous foliage plant species with well
shaped, heavily branched, densely foliated systems.
bo Visibly free from pests and pathogens which could, by
their presence,, induce (or contribute to) the decline of
the plant.
c. Furnish in nursery containers.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19'
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
02952-3
d. Plants to be young, and recently achieving specified size
and condition (not old, exceptionally mature plants).
2. Canes, trunks, stems and branches:
a. Reasonably free of conspicuous scarring evidence; scars,
conspicuous or not, to be substantially healed, providing
no point of entry for deleterious pathogens or boring
insects.
b. No splitting of canes or trunks at branching points.
c. Remove dead wood before installation.
d. Ail canes or trunks well formed, sturdy and well rooted,
stable and self-supporting in the growing container.
e. Plant Height-Over-all plant height measured from base of
growing container to mean foliage top.
f. Cane heights: With some plants per pot/cane plant
varieties, quality is determined by height of rooted
canes. Cane heights measured from base of growing
container. Over-all height of the plant measured from
base of growing container to mean foliage top.
3. Foliage:
a. Visibly free of pests and pathogens which could, by their
presence, induce (or contribute to) the decline of the
plant.
b. Reasonably free of chlorosis, yellowing or poor
chlorophyll formation; turgid and substantially erect, as
well as substantially free of blemishes resulting from
mechanical, chemical, pathological or pest induced
damage.
c. Reasonably free of dust, pesticide and water borne
residues.
d. Foliage width and origin measured across mean foliage
width dimension, not including random outstanding
branches. Foliage origin along a main trunk, cane or
stem measured from soil line.
4. Root system and soil mass:
a. Well developed root system and u~on inspection, found to
be visibly free of pests and/or pathogens. Root
development adequate:
1) Well distributed throughout container, such that roots
visibly extend on all sides to inside face of growing
container.
2) Root formation within container not to have developed
to the point where it becomes excessive (i.e.,
"pot-bound") and prohibits water from permeating to
fine water-absorbing root hairs.
3) Afford firm support and insure physical stability of
the plant parts above the soil.
4) Maintain life systems required to produce vigorous,
healthy growth.
b. Growing medium comprised of such constituents as may be
necessary to provide:
1) Thorough drainage and satisfactory aeration of root
zone. Soil mass as uniform as possible.
2) Adequate moisture and nutrient retention as necessary
to promote vigorous but controlled plant growth.
U.S.P.S. ~ N~ Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
~01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
02952-4
07
08
09
10
11
3) Sufficient density in growing container to insure
stability of entire unit, i.e., plant and container.
c. Growing medium visibly free of pests, pathogens and weed.
d. Growing medium free of chemical residues harmful to
consumers.
e. Nursery container sufficiently strong to hold soil mass
shape and protect root mass. Tapered containers
recommended because of ease of soil mass removal with
minimal injury to root system.
5. Plants acclimated to lower light intensity, temperature, and
humidity for at least one month prior to installation.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. Support medium soil mixture:
1. Mixture consisting of 10 percent perlite, 15 percent humus,
and 75 percent bulk peat. Mix, shred, and sterilize
components and remove any large pieces of rock or root.
2. Peat to be a natural product of spaghnum moss peat or peat
reed-sedge peat or peat humus derived from a fresh water
site; shredded and granulated.
3. Humus: Shredded and granulated.
4. Perlite: Conform to NBS PS23.
23 C. Mulch: Shredded cypress mulch.
25 D. Filter fabric: Non-woven geotextile fabric.
27
28
E. Lightweight filler: Styrofoam, either in sheet form or small
particle form.
30
31
32
33
34
F. Water for planting purposes: 1. Supplied by Owner.
2. Provide all equipment necessary to transport water from
source to required locations.
3. Do not waste water.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
1!
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
25
27
28
3O
31
32
33
34
37 2.02 PLANT LIST
37
40 A. See drawings for plant list.
4O
44 PART 3 - ~C~TION
44
47 3.01 INSTALLATION
47
50
51
52
A. Preparation: Prepare planters for setting plants by installing
lightweight filler, soil separator, and support medium soil
mixture as shown and specified.
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
-27
28
29
3O
02952-5
1. Prior to installing lightweight filler, cover weephole
openings with filter fabric or a mesh to keep weephole from
clogging up.
2. Setting plants:
a. Bury nursery containers in support medium soil mixture in
locations shown.
b. Direct plant plants in support medium soil mixture (where
indicated to do so) in locations shown.
c. Set plants plumb and hold in position until sufficient
support medium soil mixture has been firmly placed around
container.
3. Mulch: Spread mulch in areas indicated to a depth of 2 IN.
4. Restoration and clean-up:
a. Remove excess and waste material daily.
b. When planting in an area has been completed, clear the
area of all debris.
5. Maintenance during installation:
a. Maintenance operations begin immediately after each is
planted and continue as required.
b. Keep plants in a healthy, growing condition by pruning,
spraying, and any other necessary operations of
maintenance.
c. Inspect plants once per week during the installation
period and perform needed maintenance promptly.
6. Watering:
a. Start watering immediately.
b. Supervise watering operation to prevent waste and
spillage.
c. Supply all hoses and equipment required.
d. Repair all areas damaged by water operations.
O1
O2
03
O4
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
33 3.02 REVIEW FOR INITIAL ACCEPTANCE
33
36
37
39
4O
A. At end of planting, Contracting Officer will review and record
acceptability of plant material installed.
B. Payment for completed work will be based only on acceptable
plant materials.
36
37
39
4O
43 3.03 MAINTENANCE
43
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
A. Maintain all plant materials for 90 days from initial
acceptance.
1. Water when necessary.
2. Remove dead or dying branches and sprouts.
3. Replace dead or dying plant materials. Replacement
materials and methods identical to original.
END OF SECTION
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
U.S.P.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
4120, 8G14
SECTION 03000
CONCRETE - GENERAL
03000-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GIlNERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all concrete work as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Definition:
1. Concrete work: Cast-in-place structural concrete for use in
buildings, paving, and appurtenances. Specific aspects of
concrete work are specified in other sections:
a. Testing: Section 03001.
b. Formwork: Section 03100.
c. Reinforcement: Section 03200.
d. Materials and proportioning: Section 03300.
e. Mixing, placing, jointing and curing: Section 03310.
f. Finishing and repair of surface defects: Section 03312.
g. Concrete tilt up wall panels: Sections 03430 and 03450.
2. Approved or permitted: Approved or permitted by Contracting
Officer.
3. Exposed construction: Exposed to view.
4. Exposed to public view: Situated so that it can be seen
from eye level from a public location after completion of
building. A public location is accessible to persons not
responsible for operation or maintenance.
5. Normal weight concrete: Concrete for which density is not a
controlling attribute, made with aggregates of types covered
by ASTM C33, usually having unit weights in range of 135 to
160 PCF.
6. Required: Required by Contract Documents.
7. Submitted: Submitted to Contracting Officer for review.
8. Other words and terms used in these specifications: As
defined in ACI SP-19.
C. The provisions of these specifications govern wherever
applicable to conditions and types of work that occur on
particular Job except as otherwise provided in Contract
Documents.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
3I
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O4
O5
06
07
08
03000-2
1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not allow construction loads to exceed superimposed load
which member, with necessary supplemental support, is capable
of carrying safely and without damage. Amount, method of
distributing, and proposed supplemental support of loads during
construction is responsibility of Contractor.
11 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
14
15
A. Project information:
1. Mix designs to be used°
18 1.04 STANDARDS
21
22
24
25
27
28
30
32
33
34
36
38
39
41
42
44
45
47
48
50
52
53
A. American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford Station,
Detroit, Michigan 48219:
SP-15(75) Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Building (ACI Field Reference Manual)
SP-19 Cement and Concrete Terminology (Report o~
Committee 116), 1978
SP-21 Epoxies with Concrete, 1968
ACI 211.1-81 Standard Practice for Selecting
Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and
Mass Concrete
ACI 212.2R-81 Guide for Use of Admixture in Concrete
ACI 214-77 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of
Strength Test Results of Concrete
ACI 302.1R-80 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab
Construction
ACI 304-78 Recommended Practice for Measuring,
Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 304.2R-71 Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods -
Committee Report, 1971, Committee 304.
ACI 308-81 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
ACI 309-82 Standard Practice for Consolidation of
Concrete
O1
04
O5
O6
07
O8
11
14
15
18
21
22
24
25
27
28
30
32.
33
34
36
38
39
41
42
44
45
47
48
50
52
53
U°SoP.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
'01
02
04
Committee
5O3
Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete -
Committee Report, 1973
END OF SECTION
03000-3
O1
02
O4
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
4L27, 8G14
SECTION 03001
CONCRETE TESTING AND EVALUATION
03001-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all concrete testing as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
3. See Section 03000 for general requirements for concrete
work.
B. Test concrete materials and operations and inspect as work
progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material
shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect
is discovered nor shall it obligate Owner for final acceptance.
C. All testing services paid for by Contractor.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
25
28
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
A. Testing standards:
1. ASTM C31-83: Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field.
2. ASTM C39-82: Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
3. ASTM C42-83: Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete.
4. ASTM C143-78: Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
5. ASTM C172-77: Sampling Fresh Concrete.
6. ASTM C173-78: Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
7. ASTM C231-81: Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method.
8. ASTM C567-71(77): Test for Unit Weight of Structural
Lightweight Concrete.
9. ACI 318-77: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete.
10. ASTM E329-77: Inspection and Testing Agencies for
Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in
Construction.
B. Testing agency qualifications: Acceptable to Contracting
Officer; meeting requirements of ASTM E329; provide evidence of
recent inspection by Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03001-2
O1 of National Bureau of Standards and correction of deficiencies
02 noted. Approved testing agency shall be hereafter referred to
03 as "testing agency".
O1
02
03
06 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
O6
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A. Project information: 1. Testing agency qualifications.
2. Production sample test reports: Include same data as for
mix design reports.
3. Reports of Contractor-optional tests.
4. Test reports on in-place testing, if such testing is
performed.
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USI~,D
19
23 PART 3 - x~CUTION
23
26 3o01 ROUTINE TESTING SERVICES
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Following testing services shall be performed by testing
agency:
1. Review and check-test Contractor's proposed materials for
compliance with specifications.
2. Review and check-test Contractor's proposed mix design.
3. Secure production samples of materials at plants or
stock-piles during Course of work and test for compliance
with specifications.
4. Conduct strength tests of concrete during construction in
accord with following procedures:
a. Secure composite samples in accord with ASTM C172.
Obtain each sample from a different batch of concrete on
a random basis. Select test batch at random before
commencement of concrete placement.
b. Mold and cure four specimens from each sample in accord
with ASTM C31. Report any deviations from requirements.
c. Test specimens in accord with ASTM C39. Test one
specimen at 7 days for information and two at 28 days for
acceptance. Acceptance test results shall be average of
strengths of two specimens tested at 28 days. If one
specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper
sampling, molding or testing, dtscard~ strength of
remaining cylinder shall be considered test result.
Should both specimens in a test show any of above
defects, discard entire test.
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N° Georgia G,M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
03001-3
d. Make at least one strength test for each 60 CU YD, or
fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed
in any 1 day. When total quantity of concrete with a
given mix design is less than 15 CU YD, strength tests
may be waived by Contracting Officer.
5. Determine slump of concrete for each strength test and
whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, using ASTM
C143.
6. Determine air content of normal weight concrete for each
strength test in accord with ASTM C231.
7. Determine temperature of concrete for each strength test.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
14 3.02 ADDITIONAL TESTING SERVICES
14
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
A. Following non-routine services shall be performed on occasions
indicated:
1. Additional testing and inspection, whenever changes in
materials or proportions are requested by Contractor.
2. Additional testing of materials or concrete, whenever they
fail by test or inspection, to meet specification
requirements.
3. Other testing services needed or required by Contractor,
such as:
a. Field cured test specimens for determining when concrete
forming or shoring may be removed.
30 3.03 DUTIES AND AUTHORITIES OF DESIGNATED TESTING AGENCY
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
3O
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
A. Inspect, sample and test materials and production of concrete.
When it appears that any material furnished or work performed
by Contractor fails to fulfill specification requirements,
report such deficiency to Contracting Officer and Contractor.
B. Report all test and inspection results to Contracting Officer
and Contractor immediately after they are performed. Include
exact location in the work at which batch represented by a test
was deposited. Reports shall include detailed information on
storage and curing of specimens prior to testing.
C. Testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to
alter any requirement of Contract Documents, nor to approve or
accept any portion of the work.
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
49 3.04 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR
49
52
53
54
A. In addition to testing agency above; Contractor provide
necessary testing services for qualification of proposed
materials and establishment of mix designs.
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03001-4
02
03
O4
O6
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. Use of testing service shall in no way relieve Contractor of
responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full
compliance with Contract Documents.
C. Submit proposed concrete materials and concrete mix designs,
with results of all testing performed to qualify materials and
to establish mix designs. Place no concrete until Contractor
has received approval in writing. See submittals paragraph.
D. To facilitate testing and inspection, Contractor shall:
1. Furnish labor to assist testing agency in obtaining and
handling samples at site or sources of materials.
2. Advise testing agency sufficiently in advance of operations
to allow for completion of quality tests and for assignment
of personnel.
3. Provide and maintain adequate facilities for safe storage
and proper curing of concrete test specimens on site for
first 24 HR as required by ASTM C31.
02
03
04
O6
07
O8
O9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
22 3.05 EVALUATION OF CYLINDER STRENGTH TESTS
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
A. Evaluate test results for standard molded and cured test
cylinders separately for each concrete mix design. Such
evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in
accord with procedures. For evaluation of potential strength
and uniformity, each mix design shall be represented by at
least five tests.
B. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory se
long as averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test
results equal or exceed specified strength (f'c) and no
individual strength test result falls below specified strength
(f'c) by more than 500 PSI.
25
26
27
29
3O
32
33
34
35
36
39 3.06 TESTING IN-PLACE CONCRETE
39
42
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. When strength tests show deficiencies, testing of concrete in
place may be required in order to evaluate actual strength.
Contractor shall pay for all concrete tests and engineering
time and analysis required to evaluate actual in-place concrete
strength made necessary by low strength cylinder tests.
B. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive
device: Such tests shall be used to determine relative
strengths at various locations in structure as an aid for
selecting areas to be cored~ Such tests, unless properly
calibrated and correlated with other test data, will not be
used as a basis for acceptance or rejection.
42
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
03001-5
C. Core tests: Obtain and test largest practical diameter cores (2
IN minimum) in accord with ASTM C42. If concrete in structure
will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores
(temperature 60 to 80 degF, relative humidity less than 60
percent) for 7 days before test. Test dry. If concrete in
structure will be more than superficially wet under service
conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning.
1. Take at least three representatives cores from each member
or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially
deficient. Location determined by Contracting Officer so as
to least impair strength of structure. If, before testing,
one or more of cores shows evidence of having been damaged
subsequent to or during removal from structure, replace it.
2. Concrete in area represented by a core test will be
considered adequate if average strength of cores is equal to
at least 85 percent of and if no single core is less than 75
percent of specified strength (f'c).
3. Fill core holes with low slump concrete or mortar.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21 3.07 ACCEPTANCE OF IN-PLACE CONCRETE
21
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirements
will be accepted without qualification.
1. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more
requirements but which has been repaired in a manner
acceptable to Contracting Officer to bring it into
compliance will be accepted without qualification.
2. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more
requirements and which cannot or has not been brough~ into
compliance will be considered rejected until remedied as
provided in these Contract Documents.
B. Dimensional tolerances:
1. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than
permitted by tolerances are potentially deficient in
strength and subject to provisions of strength requirements.
2. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than
permitted by tolerances may be rejected and excess material
subject to removal. If removal of excess material is
permitted, accomplish in such a manner as to maintain
strength of section and to meet all other applicable
requirements of function and appearance.
3. Concrete members cast in wrong location may be rejected if
strength, appearance or function of structure is adversely
affected or if they interfere with other construction.
4. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding limits of
tolerances and which are exposed to view, may be rejected.
Repair or remove and replace if required.
5. Finished slabs exceeding tolerances may be repaired provided
that strength or appearance is not adversely affected. High
spots may be removed with a terrazzo grinder, low spots
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
03001-6
filled with a patching compound, or other remedial measures
performed as permitted.
C. Appearance:
1. Architectural concrete with surface exceeding limitations
will be rejected.
2. Other concrete exposed to view with defects which adversely
affect appearance of specified finish may be repaired only
by approved methods.
3. Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for
defective appearance.
D. Strength of structure: Strength of structure in place will be
considered potentially deficient if it fails to comply with any
requirements which control strength of structure, including but
not necessarily limited to following:
1. Low concrete strength.
2. Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position, or
arrangement at variance with requirements on reinforcement.
3. Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location
in such a manner as to reduce strength.
4. Curing less than that specified.
5. Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of
temperature during early stages of hardening and strength
development.
6. Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents or
premature removal of formwork likely to result in deficient
strength.
7. Workmanship likely to result in deficient strength.
O1
O2
O4
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32 3.08 REMEDIES FOR REJECTED WORK
32
35
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
5O
51
52
A. Structural analysis and/or additional testing will be required
when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient.
B. Core tests may be required when strength of concrete in place
is considered potentially deficient.
C. If core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if
structural analysis does not confirm safety of structure, at
Contracting Officer's option, load tests may be required and
their results evaluated in accordance with ACI 318.
D. Remove and replace concrete work determined to be deficient by
structural analysis or by results of a load test as directed by
Contracting Officer, at Contractor's expense.
E. At option and direction of Contracting Officer, in lieu of
removal and replacement, reinforce deficient concrete at
Contractor's expense. -
35
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
O5
06
O8
03001-7
F. Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing additional
testing and/or engineering required to remedy potentially
deficient concrete.
G. Repair or replace work rejected for appearance or tolerance
deficiencies, as directed, at no additional expense to Owner.
END OF SECTION
O1
O2
03
05
06
O8
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
5H02, 8G14
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMVORK
03100-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all formwork as required, as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2~ Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3o Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See Section 03000 for general requirements for concrete
work.
B. Use forms, wherever necessary, to confine concrete and shape it
to required dimensions. Use forms of sufficient strength to
withstand pressure resulting from placement and vibration'of
concrete, with sufficient rigidity to maintain specified
tolerances.
C. See concrete, finish requirements in Section 03312.
D. Contractor may use earth side forms for pile caps and
unfinished grade beams where earth can be shaped to a straight
and true surface. Do not use earth cuts as forms for other
vertical surfaces unless permitted. Dimensions shown on
drawings represent concrete which is not earth formed.
Dimensions shall be increased by ! IN at every surface where
earth side forms are used.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
42 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
A. Design and engineering of formwork, as well as its
construction, is responsibility of Contractor.
1. Formwork, shoring and reshoring shall be designed and sealed
by Professional Engineer, currently registered in State of
construction site, and having experience in this work.
2. Design formwork for loads, lateral pressure, and allowable
stresses outlined in ACI 347. Formwork design shall also
satisfy applicable .requirements of local building Code.
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03100-2
01 3. Develop shoring and reshoring pattern and sequence so as not
02 to exceed safe structural capacity of supporting structural
03 systems.
O1
02
03
06 1.03 TOLERANCES
06
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to
tolerance limits listed: All tolerances non-cumulative. Most
restrictive tolerance governs.
1. Deviation from plumb from established position:
a. In lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in
arrises:
1) In any length (1 in 500).
2) Maximum for entire length: Plus or minus 1/2 IN.
b. For exposed columns, control-joint grooves, and other
conspicuous vertical lines:
1) In any length (1 in 1000)o
2) Maximum for entire length: Plus or minus 1/4 IN (12
mm).
2. Deviation from level or from grades specified:
a. In slab soffits and in arrises: 1) In any length (1 in 750).
2) Maximum for entire length: Plus or minus 3/8 IN (12
mm).
b. In exposed horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous'
horizontal lines:
1) In any length (1 in 1000).
2) In any bay 1/4 IN (6 mm) total.
3) Maximum for entire length: plus or minus 1/2 IN (12
mm).
3. Deviations from true plane of concrete surface exposed to
view caused by bulging of form facing material between
supports:
a. 3/16 IN (5 mm) or 1/300 of span between supports
whichever is smaller.
4. Deviation in plan from established position of linear
building lines, columns, walls:
a. In any length (1 in 500).
b. Maximum for entire length: plus or minus 1/2 IN (12 mm).
5. Deviation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings,
and wall openings:
a. Plus or minus: 1/4 IN (6 mm).
6. Deviation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams
and in thickness of slabs and walls:
a. Minus: 1/4 IN (6
b. Plus: 1/2 IN (12 mm).
7. Deviation in steps:
a. In flight of stairs:
1) Rise: 1/8 IN (3 mm) plus or minus.
2) Tread: 1/4 IN (6 mm) plus or minus.
b. In consecutive steps:
1) Rise: 1/16 IN (1.5 mm) plus or minus.
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54 --
U.S.P.S. ? N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
06
07
O8
10
11
12
13
15
16
03100-3
2) Tread: 1/8 IN (3 mm) plus or minus.
8. Deviation of bearing of surface from indicated elevation of
footings, caisson caps and pile caps:
a. Maximum: Plus or minus 1/2 IN (12 mm).
B. Tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to
positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded
items.
C. Establish and maintain in undisturbed condition and until final
completion and acceptance of project, sufficient control points
and bench marks to be used for reference purposes to check
tolerances.
D. Regardless of tolerances listed allow no portion of building to
extend beyond legal boundary of project.
01
O2
03
O4
O6
O7
O8
10
11
12
13
15
16
19 1.04 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
19
22
23
24
25
A. Project information:
1. Certification that forming, shoring and reshoring has been
designed by Professional Engineer, currently licensed in
state of construction site.
22
23
24
25
29 PART 2 - PRODUC'rs
29
32 2.01 MATERIALS
32
35
36
A. Form facing materials: As indicated under description of
finishes required.
35
36
39 2.02 FABRICATION OF FORMS
39
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of cement fines.
Place chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled
edges on permanently exposed surfaces. Interior corners on
such surfaces and edges of formed joints will not require
beveling.
B. To maintain specified finish tolerances, camber formwork to
compensate for anticipated deflections.
C. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of
shores and struts and take up settlement during concrete
placing operation. Securely brace forms against lateral
deflection.
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03100-4
02
O3
O4
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
35
36
37
D. Provide temporary openings at base of column and wall forms and
at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and
observation immediately before concrete is placed.
E. Form accessories to be partially or wholly embedded in
concrete, such as ties and hangers, shall be of a commercially
manufactured type. Do not use nonfabricated wire. Use form
ties constructed so ends or end fasteners can be removed
without causing appreciable spalling of concrete faces. After
ends or end fasteners of form ties have been removed, embedded
portion of ties shall terminate not less than 2 diameters or
twice minimum dimension of tie from formed faces of concrete to
be permanently exposed to view, but in no case less than 3/4 IN
(1H mm). When formed face of concrete is not to be permanently
exposed to view, form ties may be cut off flush with formed
surfaces.
F. At construction joints, contact surface of form sheathing for
flush surfaces exposed to view shall overlap hardened concrete
in previous placement minimum 1 IN (25 mm). Hold forms against
hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at
construction joint and to maintain a true surface.
G. Construct wood forms for wall openings to facilitate loosening,
if necessary, to counteract swelling.
H. Fasten wedges (used for final adjustment of forms prior to
concrete placement) in position after final check.
I. Anchor formwork to shores or other.supporting surfaces or
members so upward or lateral movement of part of formwork
system is prevented during concrete placement.
J. Provide runways for moving' equipment with struts or legs,
supported directly on formwork or structural member without
resting on reinforcing steel.
02
03
04
06
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
2O
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
35
36
37
41 PART 3 - EXECUTION
41
44 3.01 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
44
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
A. Clean form surfaces and embedded materials of mortar, grout and
foreign material before concrete is placed.
B. Unless otherwise specified or approved, treat surfaces of forms
as follows:
1. Before placing of reinforcing steel or concrete, cover
surfaces of forms with approved coating material that will
effectively prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond
47
48
5O
51
52
53
54 --
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
06
03100-5
with concrete, and not stain concrete. A field applied form
release agent or sealer of approved type or factory applied
nonabsorptive liner may be used.
2. Do not allow excess form coating material to stand in
puddles in forms nor in contact with hardened concrete
against which fresh concrete is to be placed.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
06
09 3.02 REMOVAL OF FORMS
O9
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
A. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at
early age, remove forms as soon as concrete has hardened
sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations.
B. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as
concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging.
Perform needed repairs or treatment required on such sloping
surfaces at once, followed by specified curing.
C. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be
accomplished without damage to concrete.
D. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts
not support.ing weight of concrete may be removed as soon as
concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from
removal.
E. Leave forms and shoring, used to support weight of concrete in
beams, slabs and other concrete members, in place until
concrete has attained its specified strength.
F. When shores and other vertical supports are arranged so
non-load-carrying form-facing material may be removed without
loosening or disturbing shores and supports, facing material
may be removed at earlier age as permitted.
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
39 3.03 REMOVAL STRENGTH
39
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. When removal of formwork is based on concrete reaching
specified strength, concrete shall be presumed to have reached
this strength when either of following conditions has been met.
1. When test cylinders, field cured along with concrete they
represent, have reached specified strength.
2. When concrete has been as specified for same length of time
as age at test of laboratory-cured cylinders which reached
specified strength. Determine length of time concrete has
been cured in structure by cumulative number of days or
fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which
temperature of air in contact with concrete is above 50 degF
(10 degC) and concrete has been damp or sealed from
evaporation and loss of moisture.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
03100-6
02
BND OF SECTION
02
U.S.PoS. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
4120, 8G14
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENE~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all concrete reinforcement as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See Section 03000 for general requirements for concrete
work.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
26 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
A. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet following
requirements for fabricating tolerances:
1. Sheared length: Plus or minus 1 IN (25 mm).
2f Depth of truss bars: Plus 0, minus 1/2 IN (12 mm).
3. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties, and spirals: Plus or
minus 1/2 IN (12 mm).
4. Ail other bends: Plus or minus 1 IN (25 mm).
B. Place bars to following tolerances:
1. Clear distance to formed surfaces: Plus or minus 1/4 IN (6
mm).
2. Minimum spacing between bars: Minus 1/4 IN (6 mm).
3. Top bars in slabs and beams:
a. Members 8 IN (200'mm) deep or less: Plus or minus 1/4 IN
(6 mm).
b. Members between 8 IN and 2 FT (200 mm and 600 mm) deep:
Plus or minus 1/2 IN (12 mm).
c. Members more than 2 FT (600 mm) deep: Plus or minus 1 IN
(25 mm).
4. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within 2 IN (50 mm).
5. Lengthwise of members: Plus or minus 2 IN (50 mm).
C. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other
reinforcing steel, coqduits, or embedded items. If moved more
than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed above tolerances,
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.P.
03200-2
01 resulting arrangement of bars subject to approval by
02 Contracting Officer.
04 D. Welding standards: American Welding Society (AWS) D1.4-79
05 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.'
01
O2
04
O5
08 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
O8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
A. Shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings, showing sizes, dimensions and locations of
reinforcing steel and accessories, in sufficient detail to
permit installation of reinforcing without reference to
Contract drawings.
ao Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not
shown on Contract Documents must be in accord with ACI
315.
B. Product data:
1. Certification that all reinforcing to be welded conforms to
ASTM A706.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
21
22
26 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
26¸
29 2.01 MATERIALS
29
32'
33
34
35
37
38
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Reinforcing - General: Grade 60 KSI, conforming to ASTM
A615-82(S1), Standard Specifications for Deformed and Plain
Billet, Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement including
Supplementary Requirements Sl.
B. Welded reinforcing: All reinforcing to be welded shall conform
to ASTM A706-82a.
C. Protected reinforcing shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A153 after fabrication or epoxy coated in accordance with
ASTM A775-8I. Supplier shall certify coating.
D. Welded wire fabric: Conform to gauge and mesh size of plain or
deformed wire indicated, and ASTM A185, except that welded
intersections shall be spaced not farther apart than 12 IN (300
mm) in direction of principal reinforcement.
E. Smooth dowel bars for construction joints: Conform to ASTM
A306, Grade 60. Where indicated, provide a metal dowel cap at
one end of dowel to permit longitudinal movement of dowel
within concrete section. Provide for movement which equals
joint width plus 1/2 IN (12 mm) Unless otherwise indicated, use
5/8 IN (16 mm) diameter dowels spaced 18 IN (450 mm) on center.
32
33
34
35
37
38
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
03200-3
02
A-775-81 Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars
02
06 PART 3 - EXECUTION
06
09 3.01 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Provide minimum concrete covering for reinforcement as follows:
1. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 IN (75 mm).
2. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth:
2 IN (50 mm) for reinforcing bars No.6 or larger; 1-1/2 IN
(37 mm) for reinforcing bars less than No.6.
3. Interior surfaces: 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) for beams 3/4 IN (18 mm)
for slabs and walls with No.ll bars or smaller, and 1-1/2 IN
(37 mm). with No.14 and No.18 bars.
B. Assure that all reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, is
free of materials that may adversely affect or reduce bond.
Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both
will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or
brushing provided dimensions and weights, including heights of
deformations, of a cleaned sample is not less than require~ by
applicable ASTM.
C. Support all reinforcement and fasten together to prevent
displacement by construction loads or placing of concrete
beyond tolerances indicated. On ground, provide supporting
concrete blocks or other approved method. Over formwork, use
concrete, metal, plastic or other approved bar chairs and
spacers. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in
finished structure, furnish all accessories within 1/2 IN (12
mm) of concrete surface of noncorrosive material or protect
against corrosion.
D. Overlap welded wire fabric designated as load-carrying
reinforcement wherever successive mats or rolls are continuous,
in such a way that overlap measured between outermost cross
wires of each fabric sheet is not less than spacing of cross
wi~es plus 2 IN (50 mm) Support as required for reinforcing
bars.
E. Overlap welded wire fabric, not specifically designated as
load-carrying reinforcement, wherever successive mats or rolls
are continuous, in such a way that overlap measured between
outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than 2
IN (50 mm). Extend fabric across supporting beams and walls
and to within 4 IN (10 cm) of concrete edges. It may extend
through contraction joints. Adequately support during placing
of concrete to ensure its proper position in slab either by
methods of paragraph C above or by laying fabric on a layer of
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
06
08
09
10
12
13
15
16
18
03200-4
fresh concrete of correct depth before placing upper layer of
slab.
F. Offset vertical bars in columns at least one bar diameter at
lapped splices. To ensure proper placement, furnish templates
for all column vertical bars and dowels.
G. Ail splices not specifically indicated shall be subject to
approval. Mechanical connectors for reinforcing bars may be
used subject to approval.
H. Unless permitted by Contracting Officer, do not bend
reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete.
I. Unless permitted by Contracting Officer, do not tack weld.
reinforcing.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
04
O5
O6
08
09
10
12
13
15
16
18
UoS.P.S. r N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
03
6K26, 8G14
SECTION 03300
CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING
03300-1
01
O3
06 PART ,1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all concrete materials and proportioning as indicated,
in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installationf
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See Section 03000 for general requirements for concrete
work.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
26 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
1. ASTM C33-82:
2. ASTM C94-83:
3. ASTM C150-83A:
4. ASTM C260-77:
5. ASTM C494-82:
6. ASTM C618-83:
A. Materials standards:
Concrete Aggregates.
Ready-mixed Concrete.
Portland Cement.
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
B. Testing standards: 1. ASTM C39-83A: Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
2. ASTM C109-81: Test for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars.
3. ASTM C138-81: Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete.
4. ASTM C143-78: Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
5. ASTM C173-78: Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
6. ASTM C192-81: Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Laboratory.
7. ASTM C231-82 : Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method.
C. Proportioning standards:
26
'29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03300-2
1. ACI 211.1-81: Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions
for Normal and Heavy weight Concrete.
05 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
01
02
05
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A. Product data:
1. Mix design:
a. Proportioning of all materials.
b. Mill certificates for cement.
Co Slump.
d. Air entrainment.
eo 7 and 28 day compression test results.
f. Unit weights of fresh and dry lightweight concrete.
g. Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates.
h. Test for aggregate organic impurities.
2. Proportioning equipment certificate of calibration within
last year.
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
26 2.01 MATERIALS
26
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
48
49
50
5!
52
A. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150 Type I or III. Cement used
shall correspond to that upon which selection of concrete
proportions was based.
B. Admixtures: Conform to appropriate specifications listed below.
Admixtures used shall be of same composition as used in
establishing required concrete proportions.
1. Calcium chloride and admixtures containing calcium chloride
are not permitted.
2. Air-entraining admixtures: ASTM C260.
3. Water-reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: ASTM
C494. Do not use water-reducing, retarding, or accelerating
admixtures unless specifically approved in writing by
Contracting Officer, and at no cost to Owner.
4. Pozzolanlc admixturesf ASTM C618.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Aggregates:
1o Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33.
2. Regard fine and coarse aggregates as separate ingredients.
Each size of coarse aggregate, as well as combination of
sizes when two or more are used, shall conform to grading
requirements of applicable ASTM specifications.
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
U°S,P,S, -. No Texas/N, Georgia G,M,F. & V,M,F,
01 PART 3 - gX~CDTION
04 3.01 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
03300-3
O1
04
07
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21,
22
23
24
25
26
A. Store cement in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos which
will exclude moisture and contaminants.
B. Arrange aggregate stockpiles and use in a manner to avoid
excessive segregation and to prevent contamination with other
materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. To insure
that this condition is met, perform any test for determining
conformance to requirements for cleanliness and grading on
samples secured from aggregates at point of batching. Do not
use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.
C. Allow sand to drain until it has reached a relatively uniform
moisture content before use.
D. Store admixtures in manner to avoid contamination, evaporation,
or damage. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable
solutions, provide agitating equipment to assure uniform
distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from
freezing and temperature changes which would adversely affect
their characteristics.
29 3.02 PROPORTIONING
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
29
32
33
34
36
37
38
40
41
43
45
47
48
49
51
52
54
A. General: Use concrete of specified quality capable of being
placed without excessive segregation and, when cured, of
developing all characteristics required.
B. Strength: Specified strength (f'c) and type of concrete for
each use in structure is referenced on drawings: Specified
strength is minimum 28 day compressive strength.
TYPE OF SPECIFIED
USE CONCRETE STRENGTH
Drilled Piers Normal Wt. 3000 PSI
Grade Beams Normal Wt. 4000 PSI
Slab on Grade
and Slab on Metal
Deck
Normal Wt. 4000 PSI
Site Cast Cone.
Panel
Normal Wto 4000 PSI
All Other Cone. Normal Wt.
3000 PSI
32
33
34
36
37
38
4O
41
43
45
47
48
49
51
52
54
U.S.P.S._- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03300-4
O2
03
O4
O5
07
08
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
C. Durability:
1. Entrain air in concrete of normal weight to within air
content limits of following Table as measured in accord with
ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138.
TOTAL AIR CONTENT FOR VARIOUS SIZES OF COARSE
AGGREGATE FOR NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE
Nominal maximum size
of coarse aggregate Size
IN (mm) No.
Total air
content, percent
by volume
3/8 (9) 8 6-10
1/2 (12) 7 5-9
3/4 (18) 67 4-8
1 (25) 57 3.5-6.5
1-1/2 (37) 467 3-6
2 (50) 357 2.5-5.5
3 (75) --- 1.5-4.5
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accord with manufacturer's
instructions. Do not use admixtures not approved.
02
03
O4
O5
07
'08
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
26 3.03 SELECTION OF PROPORTIONS
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. General: Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which
will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around
reinforcement by methods of placing and consolidation employed
on work, but without permitting materials to segregate or
excessive free water to collect on surface. Proportion
ingredients to produce proper placeability, durability,
strength, and other required properties.
1. Comply with following MINIMUM cement contents:
SPECIFIED MINIMUM CEMENT
STRENGTH CONTENT SACKS/CY LB/CY
3000 5-1/2 517
4000 6-1/2 611
B. Normal weight concrete: Proportion mixture to provide desired
characteristics using one of following methods for each
specified strength and each type of concrete:
1. Method 1: Use when combination of materials is to be
evaluated and proportions selected is on basis of trial
mixes. Make mixtures having suitable proportions and
consistencies based on ACI 211.1, using at least three
different water-cement ratios which will produce a range of
strengths encompassimg those required. Design trial mixes
to produce a slump within 1 IN (25 mm) of maximum permitted,
and for air-entrained concrete, maximum allowable air
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
41
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
06
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
03300-5
content. Report temperature of concrete used in trial
batches. For each water-cement ratio, make at least three
compression test cylinders for each test age, and cure in
accord with ASTM C192. Test for strength at 28 days or at
earlier or later age in accord with ASTM C39. From results
of these tests plot a curve showing relationship between
water-cement ratio and compressive strength. From this
curve, select water-cement ratio to be used to produce
average strength required as described in Method 2. Use
cement content and mixture proportions such that
water'cement ratio is not exceeded when slump is maximum
permitted. Base field control on maintenance of proper
cement content, slump, and air content.
2. Method 2: In lieu of trial batches to establish required
average strength level, as described above for Method 1,
appropriate field test data for concrete made with similar
ingredients may be used. Proposed mixture proportions
subject to approval by Contracting Officer. Determine
ability to produce required average strength calculated, in
accord with following paragraph, on basis of strength test
record of 30 or more tests made during past year which will
permit establishing, directly or by interpolation,
water-cement ratio corresponding to required average
strength.
a. Required average strength. Where production facility has
a control record, based on at least 30 consecutive
strength tests of a similar mix or mixes obtained within
past year representing similar materials and conditions
to those expected,'average strength used as basis for
selecting proportions shall exceed specified strength
(f'c) by at least:
400 PSI if standard deviation is less than 300 PSI
550 PSI if standard deviation is 300 to 400 PSI
700 PSI of standard deviation is 400 to 500 PSI
900 PSI if standard deviation is 500 to 600 PSI
b. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if a suitable
record of strength test performance is not available,
select proportions to produce an average strength at
least 1200 psi greater than specified strength (f'c).
c. Strength test history used to determine standard
deviation will be considered to comply with above
requirement for 30 consecutive strength tests if tests
represent either a group of 30 consecutive batches of
same class of concrete or statistical average for two
groups totaling 30 or more batches. Tests used in
establishing standard deviation shall represent concrete
produced for a specified strength or strengths within
1000 PSI of that required for proposed work; changes in
materials and proportions within number of background
tests shall not have been more closely restricted than
for proposed work.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03300-6
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
3. Method 3: When test data for materials to be used in
concrete are not available or will not be determined,
proportion so that water-cement ratio does not exceed
appropriate value indicated below.
a. Method 3 is not applicable to:
1) Concrete containing admixtures other than those used
exclusively for entraining air.
2) Concrete designed for specified strengths f'c in
excess of 4000 PSI.
b. Maximum permissible water-cement ratios: Maximum
permissible water-cement ratio by weight, including free
surface moisture on aggregates and liquid admixtures:
14
15
16
Specified
strength,
(f'c) PSI
Non-air-entrained
concrete
Air-entrained
concrete
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
18 4000 0.44 0.35 18
.19 3000 0.58 0.46 19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
C. Concrete for floors: Provide'a trial slab to permit evaluating
finishing properties, hardness, and appearance of concrete
proposed for use. Make with proposed materials and
proportions, using equipment and personnel comparable with
those to be employed on work. Use concrete capable of being
finished to satisfaction of Contracting Officer with slump, not
exceeding that specified.
29
END OF SECTION
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
U.S.P.So = N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6D18, 8G14 SECTION 03310
CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING AND CURING
03310-1
O1
03
06 PART I - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all concrete mixing, placing, jointing and'curing as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See Section 03000 for general requirements for concrete
work.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
26 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
26
A. Materials standards:
1. ASTM C171-82: Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
2. ASTM D1751-78: Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Constructions (Non-extruding
and Resilient Bituminous Types).
3. ASTM D1752-78: Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion
Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Concrete.
(Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
B. Production standards:
1. ASTM C94-83: Ready mixed Concrete.
2. ACI 305R-77: Hot Weather Concreting.
3. ACI 306R-78: Cold Weather Concreting.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
41
44 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
44
47 A. Samples:
48 1. Joint filler.
50
51
B. Project information:
1. Joint filler technical data.
47
48
5O
51
U.S.P.S. t N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03310-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
04 2.01 MATERIALS
O1
04
O7
09
10
12
A. Concrete materials and proportioning: See Section 03300.
B. Expansion joint filler, premolded: Type required, conforming
to ASTM D1751 or D1752.
C. Curing material, sheet: ASTM C171.
O7
O9
10
12
16 PART 3 - ~r~CIITION
16
19 3.01 MIXING AND PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
19
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
A. Batch, mix and transport ready-mixed concrete in accord with
ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to
"Check List for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities" of the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association, 900 Spring Street, Silver Spring, MD 20910.
B. Site batched and mixed concrete will be permitted only after
ability to control quality has been demonstrated to
satisfaction of Contracting Officer.
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
33 3.02 MIXING - CONTROL OF ADMIXTURES
33
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
A. Charge air entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures
into mixer as solutions. Measure by means of an approved
mechanical dispensing device. Liquid added shall be' considered
a part of mixing water. Admixtures that cannot be added in
solution may be weighed or measured by volume if so recommended
by manufacturer.
B. If two or more admixtures are used, add them separately to
avoid possible interaction that might interfere with efficiency
of either admixture, or adversely affect concrete.
C. Complete addition of retarding admixtures within 1 min. after
addition of water to cement has been completed, or prior to
beginning of last three quarters of required mixing, whichever
occurs first.
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1 3.03 MIXING - TEMPERING AND CONTROL OF MIXING WATER
04
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
03310-3
A. Mix concrete only in quantities for immediate use. Discard
concrete which has set.
B. When concrete arrives at project with slump below that suitable
for placing, water may be added only if neither maximum
permissible water-cement ratio nor maximum slump is exceeded.
Incorporate water by additional mixing equal to at least half
of total mixing required. Accomplish addition of water above
that permitted by limitation on water-cement ratio by adding a
quantity of cement sufficient to maintain proper water-cement
ratio, if authorized by Contracting Officer.
01
04
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
17 3.04 MIXING - WEATHER CONDITIONS
17
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
52
A. Cold weather: Comply with ACI 306.
1. In cold weather, temperature of concrete when delivered at
site shall conform to following limitation: Minimum
concrete Temperature, degF (degC)
Air Temperature
degF
for sections
with least
dimension less
than 12 IN
for sections
with least
dimension 1F IN
or greater
At Time of Pour
30 to 45 (-1 to 7)
15 to 30 (-9 to -1)
0 to 15 (-18 to -9)
60 (16) 50 (10)
65 (18) 55 (13)
70 (21) 60 (16)
Within 24 Hours
Below 32 (0) 60 (21) 50 (10)
2. If water or aggregate is heated above 100 degF (37 degC),
combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is
added. Do not mix cement with water or with mixtures of
water and aggregate having a temperature greater than 100
degF (37 degC). Final temperature of combined mix shall not
exceed 90 (32) degrees or be high enough to cause flash set
or loss of slump or workability.
B. Hot weather: Comply with ACI 305. Cool ingredients before
mixing, or add flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that
will melt completely during mixing for all or part of mixing
water if, due to high temperature, Iow slump, flash set or cold
joints are encountered:,
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
3O
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03310-4
01 3.05 PREPARATION BEFORE PLACING
O1
04
05
O6
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
A. Equipment:
1. Remove hardened concrete and .foreign material from inner
surfaces of conveying equipment.
2. Provide spare vibrator on jobsite during all concrete
placing operations.
3. In cold weather, have protective blankets ready and heaters
operational and in-place before placing concrete.
B. Forms:
1. Complete formwork, remove frost, snow, ice, water and
foreign material, secure reinforcement in place, position
expansion Joint material, anchors, and other embedded items
and have entire preparation inspected prior to concrete
placement.
2. In hot weather when temperature of reinforcing or forms is
greater than 120 degF (49 degC) spray forms and
reinforcement with water Just prior to placing concrete.
C. Screeds and edge forms:
1. Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips accurately to
produce designated elevations and contours of finished
surface. Use of "wet screeds" will not he permitted.
Unless formwork is properly cambered, edge forms and
intermediate screeds shall be accurately set high to '
compensate for deflections due to weight of the concrete.
Extra concrete (increased thicknesses) as necessary to
produce finished surfaces within specified tolerances at the
designated elevations and contours shall be provided at no
additional cost to the Owner. Make sufficiently strong to
support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds, if nature
of finish specified requires use of such equipment. Align
concrete surfaces to contours of screed strips by use of
strike-off templates or approved compacting type screeds.
2. When formwork is cambered, set edge forms and screeds to
like chamber to maintain proper concrete thicknesses.
D. Subgrade for slabs on grade:
1. Subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform
loadbearing nature. Keep in-place density of base and fills
at least to minimum indicated.
2. Keep subgrade free of frost before concrete placing begins.
If temperature inside a building where concrete is to be
placed is below freezing, raise temperature and maintain
above 50 degF (10 degC) long enough to remove all frost from
subgrade and reinforcing.
3. Keep subgrade moist at time of concreting. If necessary,
dampen with water in advance of concreting. Allow no free
water standing on subgrade nor any muddy or soft spots when
concrete is placed..
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29 --
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01 3.06 PROTECTION
04
O5
06
08'
09
11
12
13
14
03310-5
A. Unless adequate protection is provided and approval is
obtained, do not place concrete when the temperature is below
freezing or during rain, sleet or snow.
B. Do not allow rainwater to increase mixing water nor to damage
surface finish.
C. Concrete damaged by rain or weather and Judged defective by the
Contracting Officer shall be removed and replaced by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or corrected by
the procedures listed in the Section "Testing and Evaluation".
01
04
O5
O6
O8
09
11
12
13
14
17 3.07 CONVEYING
17
2O
21
22
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly
as practicable by methods which prevent segregation or loss of
ingredients and assure that quality is maintained.
B. Use equipment conforming to ASTM C94.
C. Use horizontal belt' conveyors or mount at a slope which will
not cause excessive segregation or loss of ingredients. '
1. Protect concrete against undue drying or rise in
temperature.
2. Handle to prevent segregation.
3. Do not allow mortar to adhere to belt.
4. Discharge long runs into a hopper or through a baffle.
D. Use metal or metal-lined chutes with slope between 1 vertical
and 2-3 horizontal.
1. Chutes more than 20 FT (6 M) long and chutes not meeting
slope requirements may be used provided they discharge into
a hopper before distribution.
E. Pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall be of suitable
kind with adequate pumping capacity.
1. Control pneumatic placement so that segregation is not
apparent in discharged concrete.
2. Loss of slump in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment
shall not exceed 2 IN (50 mm).
3. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or
aluminum alloy.
20
21
22
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50 3.08 DEPOSITING - IN FORMS
5O
53
54
A. General: Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such
thickness that no concrete is deposited on concrete which has
53
54
U.S.P.S. = N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
O2
03
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
03310-6
hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of
weakness within section. Place at such a rate that concrete
which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.
Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has
been contaminated by foreign materials. Remove temporary
spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached an
elevation rendering their service unnecessary. They may remain
embedded in concrete only if made of metal or concrete and if
prior approval of Contracting Officer has been obtained.
B. Do not start placing concrete in supported elements until
concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer
plastic and has been in place at least two hours.
C. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position
to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not
subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation.
Concrete shall not drop more than 4 FT. For greater heights,
provide chutes, spouts, tremies, or other approved device.
D. Ail concrete buckets shall be equipped with rubber discharge
tubes. The tube size shall be effective in directing the flow
of concrete directly downward between the reinforcing. Unless
it can be demonstrated, no segregation will occur with greater
distances, the maximum free fall distance of concrete below the
flexible tube is limited to 4 FT.
E. Consolidation. Consolidate all concrete by vibration, so that
concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, around
embedded items and into corners of forms eliminating all air or
stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes
of weakness.- Use internal vibrators having a minimum frequency
of 8000 vibrations per minute to consolidate concrete
effectively. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within
forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators at points approximately
18 IN (450 mm) apart. At each insertion allow duration
sufficient to consolidate concrete but not sufficient to cause
segregation; generally from 5 to 15 sec. Where concrete is to
have an as-cast finish, bring a full surface of mortar against
form by vibration process, supplemented if necessary by
spading, to work coarse aggregate back from formed surface.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
44 3.09 SLAB o PLACEMENT
44
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
Ao Coordinate mixing and placing with finishing. Do not place
concrete on subgrade or forms more rapidly than it can be
spread, straightedged, and darbied or bull floated. Perform
these operations before bleeding water has an opportunity to
collect on surface.
Bo To obtain good surfaces and avoid cold joints, plan size of
finishing crews with due regard for effects of concrete
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
U.S.P.So ~ No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
O3
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
03310-7
temperature and atmospheric conditions on rate of hardening of
concrete. If construction joints become necessary, construct
as required under paragraph; Joints and Embedded Items.
C..Jointing: Locate joints in slabs on grade as indicated. Where
saw-cut joints are required, t'ime cutting properly with set of
concrete: Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw.
Complete before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce
cracking.
D. Consolidation: Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs. Use
internal vibration along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Obtain
consolidation of slabs with vibrating sereeds, roller pipe
screeds, internal vibrators, or other approved means.
O1
02
03
05
O6
07
O8
09
10
12
13
14
15
18 3.10 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Joints in slabs-on-grade:
1. Construction joints: Place keyed or dowelled construction
joints as indicated on plans and at locations where a slab
pour is terminated or interrupted. Size of pours and
sequence of slab placement is Contractor's option, except
construction joints shall be located at a control Joint
lOcation. Construction Joints act as control Joints.
2. Control joints: Provide control joints along all column
centerlines and as shown on Contract Documents. Where
column centerline spacing or spacing between column
centerlines and walls exceeds 30 FT, provide an intermediate.
control joint(s) at intervals not exceeding 30 FT. Also
provide control joints where change in slab width occurs,
such as at blockouts, pits, etc. If saw cut control Joints
are used, cut as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently
to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw.
B. Expansion joints: Do not permit reinforcement or other
embedded metal items bonded to concrete (except dowels in
floors bonded on only one side of joints) to extend
continuously through any expansion joint. Locate expansion
joints as indicated.
C. Place all sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items
required for adjoining work or for its support, prior to
concreting.
1. Give all contractors whose work is related to concrete or
supported by it ample notice and opportunity to introduce
and/or furnish embedded items before concrete placement.
2. Position expansion joint material, and other embedded items
accurately and support against displacement. Fill voids in
sleeves, inserts and anchor slots temporarily with readily
removable material to prevent entry of concrete.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03310-8
01 3.11 SLAB FINISHING (See Section 03312)
O1
04 3.12 CURING AND PROTECTION
O4
07
O8
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. General: Beginning immediately after placement, protect
concrete from premature drYing, hot and cold temperatures, and
mechanical injury, and maintain with minimal moisture loss at
relatively constant temperature for period necessary for
hydration and hardening of concrete. Materials and methods of
curing subject to approval of Contracting Officer.
B. Preservation of moisture:
1. For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms apply one of
following procedures immediately after completion of
placement and finishing:
a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling.
b. Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept
continuously wet.
c. Application of sand kept continuously wet.
d. Continuous application of mist spray (not exceeding 150
degF (66 degC)).
e. Application of sheet curing materials.
f. Application of other moisture-retaining covering as
approved.
2. Minimize moisture loss from surfaces placed against woo~en
forms or metal forms exposed to heating by sun by keeping
forms wet until they can be safely removed. After form
removal cure concrete until end of time prescribed.
3. Continue curing Type I concrete for at least 7 days; Type
III concrete at least 3 days. If tests made of cylinders,
kept adjacent to structure and cured by same methods, show
average compressive strength has reached 70 percent of
specified strength, (fc'), moisture retention methods may be
terminated. If one of curing procedures indicated above is
used initially, it may be replaced by one of other
procedures indicated any time after concrete is 1 day old,
provided concrete is not permitted to become surface dry
during transition.
C. Temperature, wind and humidity:
1. Cold weather: When mean daily outdoor temperature is less
than 40 degF (7 degC) maintain temperature of concrete
between 50 and 70 degF (10 and 21 degC) for required curing
period. When necessary make arrangements for heating,
covering, insulating, or housing concrete work adequate to
maintain required temperature without injury. Do not use
combustion heaters during first 24 HR unless precautions are
taken to prevent exposure of concrete to exhaust gases which
contain carbon dioxide.
2. Hot weather: When necessary make provision for windbreaks,
shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering
with a light colored material. Take such protective
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29 -~
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
O2
03
04
O5
O6
07
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
21
03310-9
measures as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing
operations will allow.
3. Rate of temperature change: Keep changes in temperature of
air immediately adjacent to concrete during and immediately
following curing period as uniform as possible. Do not
exceed 5 degF (3 degC) in any'l hour or 50 degF (35 degC) in
any 24 HR period.
D. Protection from mechanical injury: During curing period,
protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as
load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. Protect
all finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction
equipment, materials, or methods, and by rain or running water.
Do not load self-supporting structures in such a way as to
overstress concrete.
E. Protection of slabs-on-grade from frost: Interior slabs
exposed to freezing temperatures shall be adequately protected
so that frost does not develop in supporting subgrade.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
21
UoS.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
O1
O3
4124, 8G14 SECTION 03312
CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
03312-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all concrete finishing and repair of surface defects as
required, as indicated in accord with provisions of Contract
Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See Section 03000 for general requirements for concrete
work.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
27 1.02 0UALITY ASSURANCE
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
A. When finishing is required to match sample furnished to
Contracting Officer,.make a sample finish on an area at least
100 SO FT (IQ SO M) in an inconspicuous location desigmated by
Contracting Officer before proceeding with finish in specified
location.
B. Finishing tolerances: Horizontal finishes will be accepted
provided:
1. Applicable specification requirements are satisfied.
2. Water does not pond in areas sloped to drain.
3. Gap between a 10 FT (3 M) straight edge placed anywhere and
the finished surface do not exceed:
Class A tolerance .................... 1/8 IN (3 mm)
Class B tolerance .................... 1/4 IN (6 mm)
Class C tolerance .................... 1/2 IN (12 mm)
4. Accumulated deviation from intended true plane of finished
surface does not exceed 1/2 IN (12 mm).
5. Accuracy of floor finish does not adversely affect
installation and operation of movable equipment, floor
supported items or items fitted to floor (doors, tracks,
etc.).
27
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
04
06
08
10
03312-2
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: Not required.
01
O4
06
O8
10
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USgD
14
18 PART 3 - ~X~CDTION
18
21 3.01 FINISHING - GENERAL (Except Slabs)
21
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
A. After removal of forms, repair and give surfaces of concrete
the finishes indicated.
B. Unspecified finish: If finish is not designated, use following
finishes as applicable:
1. Ail unpainted concrete surfaces not exposed to public view:
Rough form finish.
2. All unpainted concrete surfaces exposed to public view:
.Smooth form finish..
3. Ail concrete surfaces to receive paint: Grout cleaned
rubbed finish.
4. Unformed surfaces (except slabs): As indicated.
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
38 3.02 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
38
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
A. Repair surface defects immediately after form removal.
B. Repair defective areas: Remove all honeycombed and other
defective concrete down to sound concrete. Chip if necessary
make edges perpendicular to surface or slightly undercut. No
featheredges will be permitted. Dampen area to be patched and
an area at least 6 IN (150 mm) wide surrounding it to prevent
absorption of water from patching mortar. Prepare a bonding
grout of approximately 1 part cement to 1 part fine sand
passing a No.30 mesh sieve. Mix to consistency of thick cream,
and then brush into surface.
C. Make patching mixture of same materials and of approximately
same proportions as used for concrete, except omit coarse
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
04
O5
O6
07
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
03312-3
aggregate. Mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part cement
to 2-1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. Mix white and gray
Portland cement to produce a color matching color of
surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch. Add no
more mixing water than necessary for handling and placing.. Mix
patching mortar in advance and allow to stand with frequent
manipulation; without addition of water, until it has reached
stiffest consistency that will permit placing.
D. After surface water has evaporated from area to be patched,
brush bond coat into surface. When bond coat begins to lose
water sheen, apply patching mortar. Thoroughly consolidate
mortar into place and strike off so as to leave patch slightly
higher than surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage,
leave undisturbed for at least 1 HR before final finish. Keep
patched area damp for 7 days. Do not use metal tools in
finishing a patch which will be exposed.
Fill and finish tie holes: Clean and thoroughly dampen tie
holes; fill solid with patching mortar. Round tie holes less
than 1/4 IN (6 mm) diameter x 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) deep in rough
form finished surfaces need not be filled.
F. Proprietary materials: If permitted or required, proprietary
compounds for adhesion or as patching ingredients may be used
in lieu of or in addition to foregoing patching procedures.
Use such compounds in accord with manufacturer's
recommendations.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
31 3.03 ROUGH FORM FINISH
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. Rough form finish: No selected form facing materials are
specified for rough form finish surfaces. Concrete surfaces
must conform to tolerances in Section 03100 "Concrete
Formwork". Patch defects. Chip or ruboff fins exceeding 1/4
IN (6 mm) in height. Otherwise, leave surfaces with texture
imparted by forms.
34
35
36
37
38
39
42 3.04 SMOOTH FORM FINISH
42
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
· 53
A. Smooth form finish: Use form facing material to produce a
smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. It may be plastic
coated plywood, metal, plastic liners, or other approved
material capable of producing desired finish. Arrange facing
material orderly and symmetrical, with number of seams kept to
practical minimum. Support by studs or other backing capable
of preventing excessive deflection. Do not use material with
raised grain, patches, or other defects which will impair
texture of concrete surface.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
04
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
1!
03312-4
B. Patch tie holes and defects. Remove all fins completely.
C. When surface texture is impaired and form joints misaligned by
more than 1/8 IN (3 mm) grind bushhammer, or correct affected
concrete as directed by Architect. Slurry grout areas
evidencing minor mortar leakage to match adjacent concrete.
Repair major mortar leakage as a defective area. When in
opinion of Architect, workmanship is less than an acceptable
standard for a smooth form finish, provide one of rubbed
finishes selected by the Architect at no additional'cost to
Owner.
O1
O3
04
05
O6
07
08
09
10
11
14 3.05 SPECIAL ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES
14
17
18
A. Produce exposed aggregate finish, in accord with requirements
of Section 03350, Architectural Concrete.
17
18
21 3.06 RUBBED FINISHES
21
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. General: Form and repair concrete surfaces to receive rubbed
finishes, in accordance with the requirements for smooth form
finish. Remove forms and perform necessary patching as soon
after placement as possible without Jeopardizing structure.
B. Smooth: Produce smooth rubbed finish on newly hardened
concrete no later than day following form removal° Wet
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until
uniform color and texture are produced. Use no cement grout
other than cement paste drawn from concrete itself by rubbing
process.
C. Grout cleaned: Undertake no cleaning operations until all
contiguous surfaces are completed and accessible. Mix 1 part
Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water
to produce a grout having consistency of thick paint. Mix
white and gray Portland cement to match color of surrounding
concrete, as determined by a trail patch. Wet surface of
concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from grout
and apply grout uniformly. Immediately after applying grout,
scrub surface vigorously with a cork float or stone to coat
surface and fill all air bubbles and holes. While grout is
still plastic, remove all excess grout by working surface with
a rubber float, sack, or other means. After surface whitens
from drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap. Keep finish
damp for at least 36 HRS after final rubbing.
D. Cork floated: Remove forms at an early stage, within 2 to 3
days of placement where possible. Remove ties. Remove all
burrs and fins. Mix one part Portland cement and one part fine
sand with sufficient water to produce a stiff mortar. Dampen
24
25
26
27
29
3O
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
04
O5
O6
03312-5
wall surface. Apply mortar with firm rubber float or with
trowel, filling all surface voids. Compress mortar into voids.
If mortar surface dries too rapidly to permit proper compaction
and finishing, apply a small amount of water with a fog
sprayer. Produce final texture with a cork float using a
swirling motion.
01
O2
O3
04
O5
O6
09 3.07 FINISHING OF RELATED UNFORMED SURFACES (Except Slabs)
O9
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
A. Strike smooth tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets,
and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed
surfaces after concrete is placed.
B. Float to a texture reasonably consistent with that of formed
surfaces.
C. Continue final treatment on formed surfaces uniformly across
unformed surfaces..
12
13
14
16
17
19
2O
23 3.08 SLAB FINISHING
23
26
27
28
29
30
31
2
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. General:
1. Place slabs to tolerances specified. ·
2. Unspecified slab finish: When type of finish is not
indicated, use following finishes as applicable:
a. Surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious
applications: Scratched finish.
b. Surfaces intended to receive roofing (except future
floors), waterproofing membranes, or sand bed terrazzo:
Floated finish.
c. Floors (and roof surfaces which are future floors
intended as walking surfaces or for reception of floor
coverings): Troweled finish.
d. Sidewalks, garage floors and ramps: Broom or belt
finish.
e. Exterior platforms, steps, and landings, exterior and
interior pedestrian ramps, not covered by other finish
materials: Nonslip finish.
B. Scratched slab finish: After concrete has been placed,
consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class C tolerance,
roughen surface with stiff brushes or rakes before final set.
C. Floated slab finish: After concrete has been placed,
consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do not work further
until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has
disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit
operation. During or after first floating check planeness of
entire surface with a'IO-FT (3 M) straightedge applied at not
less than two different angles. Cut down all high spots and
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
03312-6
fill all low spots during this procedure to produce a surface
within Class B tolerance throughout. Refloat slab immediately
to a uniform sandy texture.
D. Troweled slab finish: First float-finish surface. Next power
trowel, and finally hand trowel. First troweling after power
floating shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively
free of defects but which may still show some trowel marks.
Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has
hardened sufficiently. Final trowel when a ringing sound is
produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly'
consolidate surface by hand troweling. Leave finished surface
essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and
appearance and plane to a Class B tolerance. On surfaces
intended to receive floor coverings, grind off any defects
which would show through floor covering.
E. Broom or belt finish: Immediately after concrete has received
float finish, give it a coarse transverse scored texture by
drawing~a broom or burlap belt across surface.
F. Non-slip slab finish:
1o Aggregate: Crushed ceramically bonded aluminum oxide
particles. Apply at 25 LB per 100 SF (0.7 KSM).
2. Blend aggregate with Portland cement in proportions
recommended by manufacturer of aggregate.
3. Give surface a float finish. '
4. Apply approximately two-thirds of blended material for
required coverage to surface by a method that ensures even
coverage without segregation. Begin floating immediately.
5. After material has been embedded by floating, apply
remainder of blended material to surface at right angles to
previous application. Make second application heavier in
any areas not sufficiently covered by first application.
Follow with second floating immediately.
6. After selected material has been embedded by two floatings,
complete operation with a broomed finish.
O1
02
03
O5
O6
07
OB
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40 3.09 SLAB HARDENER
4O
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
A. Apply chemical hardener floor treatment after finishing
operation to all interior floor slabs which are exposed in
finished work and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Apply chemical hardener in accord with manufacturer's printed
instructions, and after complete curing and drying of concrete
surface. After final coat of chemical hardener solution is
applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and
mopping with water.
C. Chemical hardener: Colorless, aqueous solution containing a
blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
03312-7
with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 LBS
fluosilicate per gallon. Provide materials which do not react
with, inhibit, or otherwise interfere with adhesives and
bonding of future floor finishes. Approved products and
manufacturers are as follows:
1. "Chem-Hard" 'by L&M Construction Chemicals.
2. "Saniseal" by Master Builders Co.
3. "Lapidolith" by Sonneborn-Contech.
4. "Lithoplate" by Protex Industries.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
D. Do not place liquid floor hardener on floor areas scheduled
receive synthetic matrix terrazzo, or setting beds for tile,
terrazzo and like items.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
18 3.10 REPAIR OF REJECTED HORIZONTAL FINISHES
18
21
22
24
25
26
28
A. Unacceptable horizontal finishes shall be replaced or corrected
provided strength and appearance are not adversely affected.
B. High spots may be removed by grinding and/or low spots filled
with a patching compound or other remedial measures performed
or permitted.
END OF SECTION
21
22
24
25
26
28
U,S.P,S. - N, Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M,F.
O1
03
5H02, 8B29
SECTION 03350
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
03350-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all architectural concrete as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See Section 03000 for general requirements for concrete
work.
B. Definitions:
1. Architectural concrete: Concrete which is exposed to view
as an exterior surface in completed structure, and ·
specifically indicated as such.
2. Location: Ail concrete columns at north elevation of
G.M.F., Courtyard 1B022, and V.M.F. Fuel Island Canopy.
12
13
14
15
1.6
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
33 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
33
36
38
A. Concrete tilt up wall panels: Section 03430.
B. Architectural precast concrete: Section 03450.
36
38
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
41
44
45
46
47
49
51
52
53
A. Shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings of forms for all exposed surfaces showing
surface details, jointing of facing panels, locations of
form ties, and any necessary alignment bracing.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples:
1. Field sample: 1 column.
approved field sample.
Final construction to match
44
45
46
47
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03350-2
D. Project information:
05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not required.
O1
O5
08 2.01 MATERIALS
O8
11
13
15
A. Concrete materials: See Section 03300.
B. Reinforcement: See Section 03200.
C. Exposed aggregate: See Section 03430 and 03450.
11
13
15
18 2.02 MIXING - PROPORTIONING (See Section 03300)
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
3O
A. Unless plaster coat finish or final painting of surfaces is
required, maintain designated colors and uniformity of color.
For concrete of a desired color, use same mixture proportions '
throughout. Avoid changes in quantity of cement per CU YD.
Use only: One type and brand of cement from same mill. One
source and maximum size of coarse aggregate. One source qf
fine aggregate. One placing consistency.
B. Air entrain architectural concrete for exterior exposure with a
water-cement ratio not exceeding 0.46 by weight.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
33 2.03 FORM MATERIALS (See Section 03100)
33
36
37
38
39
40
A. Form facing material, smooth: Use smooth forms (faced with
plywood, liner sheets, or prefabricated panels), true to line,
in order that surfaces produced will require little dressing to
arrive at true surfaces. Where any as-cast finish is required,
no dressing shall be permitted in finishing operation.
36
37
38~
39
40
43 2.04 FABRICATION OF FORMS (See Section 03100)
43
46
47
48
49
5O
A. Design forms to produce required finish or finishes. Limit
deflection of facing materials between studs as well as
deflection of studs and walers to 0.0025 times span, or as
otherwise indicated. Design forms to permit easy removal.
not pry against face of concrete. Use only wooden wedges.
Do
46
47
48
49
50
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
01 PART 3 - EXRCUTION
04 3.01 FORM WORK (See Section 03100)
03350-3
O1
O4
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
A. Do not reuse forms if there is any evidence of surface wear or
defect which would impair quality of surface. Thoroughly clean
and properly coat forms before reuse.
B. Observe formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to
see that there are no deviations from desired elevation,
alignment, plumbness, or camber. If, during construction, any
weakness develops'and falsework shows undue settlement or
distortion, stop work, remove affected construction if
permanently damaged. Strengthen falsework.
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
19 3.02 PLACING OF CONCRETE (See Section 03310)
19
22
23
25
26
A. Work coarse aggregate back from forms, leaving a full surface
. of mortar avoiding production of surface voids.
B. Do not allow vibrators to contact formwork for exposed concrete
surfaces.
29 3.03 EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH
22
23
25
26
29
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
A. Expose aggregate 'by a method, approved by Contracting Officer,
such as sandblasting or use of a surface retarder. Produce
surface to match sample panel. (Reference Section 03430,
03450) Submit to Contracting Officer for approval, prior to
placement, intended procedure, such as use of gap-graded
mixtures or. preplaced aggregates or other, by means of which
uniform distribution of exposed aggregate will be achieved.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41 3.04 PATCHING
41
44
45
46
47
A. Patching any finishing process intended to expose aggregate on
surface: Patched areas shall show aggregate faces. Outer 1 IN
(25 mm) of patch shall contain same aggregates as surrounding
concrete.
44
45
46
47
50 3.05 CURING PATCHES
5O
53
54
A. Cure patches in architectural concrete surface for 7 days.
Protect from premature drying.
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03350°4
02
END OF SECTION
02
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
5J28, 8G14
SECTION 03430
CONCRETE TILT UP WALL PANELS
03430-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GEN-E~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all concrete tilt up wall panels including Solid
concrete and insulated wall panels and floor slab units as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for. a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See remainder of Division ~ for additional concrete
requirements.
6. At Contractor's option work included in this section may be
provided by precast concrete manufacturer.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Structural steel: Section 05120.
2. Concrete work: Division 3.
3. Conduit, raceways, and wireways: Section 16110.
4. Boxes and fittings: Section 16111.
5. Masonry and precast dampproofing: Section 07176.
6. Joint sealants: Section 07900.
7. Metal doors and frames: Section 08100.
8. Overhead doors: Section 08362.
9. Elastic sheet roofing system: Section 07533.
10. Flashing and sheet metal: Section 07600.
11. Painting: Section 09900.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
42 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Material standards: 1 ASTM A123-78: Zinc (hot galvanized)
coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and
forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip. 1 ASTM A185-79:
Welded steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.
1. ASTM A496-78: Deformed steel wire for concrete
reinforcement.
2. ASTM A615-82: Deformed and plain billet-steel bars for
concrete reinforcement.
3. ASTM C33-84: Concrete aggregates.
4. ASTM C150-84: Portland Cement.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
03430-2
5. ASTM C260-77: Specifications for air-entraining admixtures
for concrete.
B. Testing standards:
1. ASTM C39-83b: Compressive strength of cylindrical concrete
specimens.
2. ASTM C236-80: Test method for steady-state thermal
performance of building assemblies by means of guarded hot
box.
3. ASTM C231-82: Test for air content of freshly mixed
concrete by the pressure method.
C. Tolerances:
1. Casting tolerances for over-all height and width:
a. Panels 10 FT (3 M) or under, plus or minus 1/8 IN (1 mm).
b. Panels 10 .to 20 FT (3-6 M), plus 1/8 and minus 3/16 IN (3
mm and 4.5 mm).
c. Panels 20 FT or larger, plus 1/8 minus 1/4 IN.
d. Panel thickness, plus 1/4 minus 1/8 IN (6 mm - 3 mm).
e. Openings, cast within one panel, plus or minus 1/4 IN (6
mm).
f. Out of square, diagonal measure, 1/8 IN (3 mm) per 6 FT
(2 M) or 1/4 IN (6 mm) total.
2. Location tolerances for cast-in items:
a. Inserts, pipe sleeves, bolts, etc., plus or minus 3/8 IN
(9 mm).
b. Flashing reglets, at edge of panel, plus or minus 1/4 IN
(6 mm).
c. Electrical outlets, hose bibs, etc., plus or minus 1/2 IN
(12 mm).
3. Installation tolerances:
a. Offsets in alignment of panels 1/~ IN (6 mm) maximum.
b. Plumb within 1 in 1000.
D. Erector/fabricator:
1. Minimum at least 2 years successful experience in
fabrication and erection of similar units on similar
projects.
2. Provide list of successful projects, with names of persons
Contracting Officer can contact.
E. Design: ..
1. Units have been designed for in place loads'only.
2. Design any additional reinforcing required to resist imposed
loads due to stripping, storage, erection and construction.
3. Design inserts for lifting and handling for all imposed
loads.
4. Design tension tie connectors to resist all imposed loads.
5. Design for minimum factors of safety in accordance with
Precast Concrete Institute.
6. Design any connections not specifically shown to support
anticipated loads.
7. Provide engineering design and calculations, performed by a
registered professional engineer, licensed in state of
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
~32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
04
O5
O6
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
03430-3
construction site and'bearing his seal, as part of this
work.
F. Contracting Officer has right to make inspections of
manufacturingprocedures and of units°
1. Provide access and facilities for such inspections.
G. Discontinue manufacture of rejected units until defects in
materials or workmanship have been corrected and approval given
to proceed.
H. Testing: Employ and pay for independent testing laboratory
approved by Contracting Officer to perform tests.
1. Before production of units make, cure, and test one set of
cylinders and cubes for each type of concrete required.
2. Make cylinders of same design mix and materials as proposed
for use in actual production of units.
3. During production of units, make, cure and test one set of
cylinders for each 50 CY of concrete, but not less than one
set for each da~'s pour.
4. Make sets of 3 standard 6 x 12 IN cylinders.
5. Cure cylinders in same manner as units they represent.
6. Test cylinders in accord with ASTM C39. One at 7 days and 2
at 28 days.
7. Test for air content each time cylinders are made, in accord
with ASTM C231.
I. Ouality standards:
1. Fabricate 12 In x 12 IN (300 x 300 mm) samples for finish
selection.
2. Sample panels:
a. After Contracting Officer has approved 12 IN x 12 IN
sample, fabricate full size sample wall panels to match
sample on site for Contracting Officer's approval.
b. Fabricate solid concrete and insulated panels.
c. If not acceptable to Contracting Officer, fabricate
additional panels until approval is received.
d. Sample panels constitute standard of quality for actual
construction.
e. Maintain sample panel at each building constructed of
panels during construction.
f. Remove when directed.
g. Sample panels may be built into permanent walls provided
they are readily identifiable during construction.
3. Cracks, voids, protrusions, spalls or non-uniform color or
texture are not acceptable. Replace any unit which is not
acceptable to Contracting Officer.
4. Replace any unit which exhibits damage to surfaces, finish,
corners or edges which will be exposed to view after setting
in place, or which is broken or cracked due to shrinkage,
temperature, transportation, handling or erection.
a. When approved in ~riting by Contracting Officer, unit may
be repaired in place.
b. Perform such work at no additional expense to Owner.
01
O2
O4
05
06
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
04
O5
03430-4
c. Acceptan'ce of units, repaired pursuant to written
approval, is contingent upon final approval by
Contracting Officer.
5. Remove and replace other work damaged by removal of
defective members, at no additional cost to Owner.
01
02
03
O4
O5
08 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
O8
11
12
13
14
16
18
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. Physical samples, 12 x 12 IN (300 x 300 mm) for finish
selection.
1. Resubmit until approval is received.
2. Refer to 1.02, I, 2 for additional requirements.
B. Concrete and structural design data.
C. Test reports certifying compliance with referenced standards.
D. Shop drawings indicating the following: 1. Unit dimensions including blockouts; profiles, Joints,
arrangement of units; details of special designs or shapes.
2. Location and size of reinforcing and embedded plates,
inserts and anchors.
3. Connection details.
4. Locations and details of all electrical, mechanical,
architectural and other items embedded in concrete. ~
5. Erection sequence plans.
31' 1.04 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
11
12
13
14
16
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
31
34
36
A. Store to protect from damage.
B. Handle only with proper equipment.
34
36
39 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
39
42
A. Protect against weather.
42
46 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
46
49
51
52
53
A. General: See Division 3 for concrete requirements.
B. Concrete: See Section 03300. 1. Cement color to match approved sample.
2. Aggregate size and color to match approved sample.
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.H.F.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
2O
21
. 23
24
26
28
3O
32
33
34
36
37
03430-5
3. For bidding purposes use white cement and "salt and pepper"
granite aggregate. Size of aggregate to be A-B blend (40
percent A, 60 percent B).
4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days, 4000 psi.
5. Minimum compressive strength at stripping, 2500 psi.
C. Bond.breaker: Polymerized solution containing no components
which would affect bond of applied finishes or appearance of
exposed surfaces.
D. Anchors and inserts: 1. Structural shapes; ASTM A36, galvanized.
2. Tension ties; stainless steel.
3. Iron'and steel anchors, inserts: ASTM A153.
E. Curing compounds: Fugitive type leaving no residual
contaminants or colorants.
F. Forms: 1. Material as required to achieve approved finishes.
2. Braced as required to maintain tolerances.
G. Insulation for insulated units:
1. 1 1/2 IN (37 mm) thick urethane or isocyanurate.
H. Rust inhibitive paint: Tnemec 10-99 primer.
I. Grout: 212 by Sika Corporation.
J. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.
K. Galvanizing. 1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A123 applied after welding.
2. Wire mesh: Coating G60.
L. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: As specified in Section
05120.
O1
02
03
04
05
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
2O
21
23
24
26
28
3O
32
33
34
36
37
41 PART 3 EXEC~3TION
41
44 3.01 INSPECTION
44
47
49
51
52
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept work.
B. Verify that anchors are correct.
C. Verify finish of casting surface to produce desired panel
finish.
47
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03430-6
D. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and
responsibility for performance.
05 3.02 FABRICATION - GENERAL
O1
O2
O5
O8
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
2O
21
23
25
26
A. Provide units of sizes and shapes as indicated.
B. Cure concrete surfaces upon which wall panels are to be cast
and steel trowel finish as specified in Division 3 Concrete,
except do not use paper or other curing sheet unless approved
by Contracting Officer.
C. If panel is to be cast on panel, cure 48 hours by fog spray
curing. Use curing compound certified to have qualities as a
bond breaker, applied in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Provide units having mitred joints with 3/4 IN (19 mm) quirk at
external angles.
g. Mark each unit for identification and date of casting.
F. Top edge of units forming parapets to be free of holes or
lifting devices.
O8
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
23
25
26
29 3.03 FORMS
32
33
35
36
-A. Place forms carefully to prevent damage to casting slab
surfaces.
B. Erect and brace forms to receive reinforcing steel, anchors,
inserts and other cast-in items.
32
33
35
36
39 3.04 REINFORCING AND INSERTS
39
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
52
53
54
A. Set and tie reinforcing steel as specified in concrete
sections.
B. Extend reinforcing as required for later connections to other
concrete.
C. Provide connection items, anchors, angles, plates, and other
items secured to or embedded in site cast units or other work
and necessary to support and anchor site cast units.
D. Perform welding in compliance with American Welding Society AWS
DI.1 and AWS
1. For welding use g70 electrodes complying with AWS ~5.1.
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & VoM.F.
O1
03
04
O5
03430-7
2. gmploy certified welders to perform welding.
E. Weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors to steel using
automatic gun welding applicator, in accord with manufacturer's
instructions.
01
03
04
05
08 3.05 CASTING
O8
11
12
14
16
17
19
2O
22
23
24
26
27
A. Cast panels individually on concrete floor slab of building, or
temporary casting platform, at Contractor's option.
B. Comply with applicable requirements of Concrete Sections.
C. Vibrate thoroughly to produce maximum density throughout entire
panel thickness without voids.
D. Take care not to displace reinforcement or inserts, or to score
forms, liners, or casting slab.
E. For insulated units: Cast exterior wythe first and carefully
locate all hardware and reinforcing and fasten in place prior
to placing concrete.
F. Allow a minimum of 24 hours between casting of exterior wythe
and placing insulation and concrete in second wythe. '
30 3.06 FINISH
11
12
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
24
26
27
3O
33
35
36
37
39
41
42
A. Match approved sample for color and texture.
B. Vail panels: 1. Interior surface:
2. Exterior surface:
Smooth.
Rough textured (sandblasted).
C. Finish floor slabs in accordance with Section 03312.
D. Cracks, voids, protrusions, spalls, or non uniform color or
texture not acceptable.
33
35
36
37
39
41
42
45 3.07 CURING
45
48
50
51
A. As specified in Division 3, Concrete.
B. Curing may be completed with panels in vertical position when
sufficient strength is attained for lifting without damage.
48
5O
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03430-8
O1 3.08 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
O1
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
A. General: 1. Perform erection under supervision of qualified
superintendent.
2. Employ only skilled and experienced personnel and equipment
capable of properly installing units,
3. Erect units in accord with approved submittals and erection
sequence plans.
4. Install each unit in position assigned.
B. Erection:
1. Do not erect walls until minimum concrete compressive
strength reaches 2,500 psi and modulus of rupture reaches
500 psi.
2. Carefully lift panels from casting slab and erect plumb in
accurate location and alignment within specified tolerance
limits.
3. Anchor in place.
4. Use wedges where required for correct positioning.
5. Shim units as required for level uniform bearing.
6. Provide grout to fill joints between panels as indicated and
between panel and foundation system.
7. After placing, provide temporary braces and shoring supports
~o securely hold panels in position.
8. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed unt{1
closures, columns or other supporting structures have been
installed and are capable of supporting panels.
9. Weld panels to supports wh~re indicated.
10. Comply with requirements of AWS D 1.09 for welded
connections.
11. After units have been erected, grout connections where
indicated. Apply one coat of rust inhibitive paint to
connections not otherwise protected.
04
05
06
07
08
09'
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
~27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
38 3.09 PATCHING
38
41
42
44
45
A. Comply with the concrete surface repair requirements of
Division 3, Concrete.
B. Patch holes in panel surfaces caused by lifting and bracing
devices.
41
42
44
45
48 3.10 JOINT SEALANT
48
51
A. Seal work as specified in Section 07900.
51
U.S.P.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
O1 3.11 PROTECTION
04
03430-9
A. Protect work against damage from cutting or welding operations.
O1
O4
07 3.12 CLEANING
O7
10
11
12
14
16
17
19
20
A. After completion of setting, pointing and calking, clean work
thoroughly by scrubbing with fiber brushes, detergent, and
clear water from hose.
B. Start at top of building and proceed downward.
C. Leave units clean, free of traces of cleaning compound and with
joints watertight.
D. Coordinate cleaning of units with cleaning of glass and other
work.
10
11
12
14
16
17
19
2O
23 3.13 OPTIONAL FABRICATION
23
26
27
28
29
30.
31
33
34
35
37
A. If work included in this Section is provided by precast
concrete manufacturer, comply with requirements of PCI Manual
for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural
Concrete Products, Design Handbook, Precast and Prestressed
Concrete, and Precast and Prestressed Concrete for Justice
Facilities.
B. Precast manufacturer supply revised plan and details of all
changes due to use of precast concrete for approval by the
Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
37
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6D18, 8F23
SECTION 03450
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
03450-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENEI~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all architectural precast concrete as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2o Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. See Section 03430 Concrete Tilt Up Wall Panels as a
substitute for work performed under this section at
Contractor's option. Contractor to provide all concrete
wall panels under Section 03430 Concrete Tilt Up Wall Panels
or 03450 Architectural Precast Concrete. No interming%ing~
of specifications allowed.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete formwork: Section 03100.
2. Structural steel: Section 05120.
3. Building insulation: Section 07210.
4. Concrete: Division 3.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
36 1.02 QUALITY ASSUI~CE
36
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Material standards: 1. ASTM A108-81: Standard 0uality Cold Finished Carbon Steel
Bars.
2. ASTM A123-84: Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes,
Plates, Bars and Strip.
3. ASTM A185-85: Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement.
4. ASTM A496-85: Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete
Reinforcement.
5. ASTM A615-85: Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
6. ASTM C33-86: Concrete Aggregates..
7. ASTM C150-85a: Portland Cement.
8. ASTM C260-86: Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures
for Concrete.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03450-2
02
03
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
B. Testing standards:'
1. ASTM C39-86: Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
2. ASTM C97-83: Tests for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity
of Natural Building Stone.
3. ASTM C236-80: Test Method for Steady-State Thermal
Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot
BOX.
4. ASTM C231-82: Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method.
C. Manufacturer qualifications:
1. More than 5 years successful experience in manufacturing
architectural precast concrete similar to units required.
2. Have sufficient production capacity and experienced
personnel to produce required units without causing delay in
work.
3. Ail manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
D. Contracting Officer has right to make shop inspections of
manufacturing procedures and of units.
1. Provide access and facilities for such inspections.
E. Discontinue manufacture of rejected units until defects in
materials or workmanship have been corrected and approva~ given
to proceed.
F. Comply with or exceed requirements of PCI Manual for Quality
Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast
Concrete Products.
G. Testing: Employ and pay for independent testing laboratory to
perform tests. Precast manufacturer may perform tests after
showing proof of reliable and adequate testing facilities and
obtaining approval of the Contracting Officer.
1. Before production of units make, cure, and test one set of
cylinders and cubes for each type of concrete required.
2. Make cylinders and cubes of same design mix and materials as
proposed for use in actual production of units. Test cubes
for water absorption in accord with ASTM C97.
3. Durin~ production of units, make, cure and test one set of
cylinders for each 50 CY of concrete~.but not less than one
set for each day's pour.
4. Make sets of 3 standard 6 x 12 IN cylinders.
5. Cure cylinders in same manner as precast units they
represent.
6. Test cylinders in accord with ASTM C39. One at 7 days and 2
at 28 days.
7o Test for air content each time cylinders are made, in accord
with ASTM C231.
B. Tolerances for manufacturing:
02
03
O4
05
O6
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
03450-3
1. Manufacture so faces exposed to view after erection comply
with following dimensional requirements.
a. Warpage: One corner out of plane of other three (1 in
200) from nearest adjacent corner.
b. Bowing: (Length of Bow/360) to maximum of 3/4 IN (19
mm).
c. Differential bowing between adjacent members: 1/4 IN (6
mm).
d. Overall height and width:
1) 10 FT (3 M) or under: Plus or minus 1/8 IN (3 mm).
2) 10 FT (3 M) to 20 FT (6 M): Plus 1/8 IN (3 mm), minus
3/16 IN (2 mm).
3) 20 FT (6 M) to 30 FT (9 M): Plus 1/8 IN (3 mm), minus
1/4 IN (6 mm).
4) Each additional 10 FT (3 M): Plus or minus (1 in
2000) to maximum 1/16 IN (1.5 mm).
e. Thickness: Plus 1/4 IN (6 mm), minus 1/8 IN (3 mm).
f. Angular deviation of plane of side mold: (1 in 100) to
maximum 1/16 IN (1.5 mm).
g. Deviation from square:
1) In any length: (1 in 600).
2) Maximum: 1/4 IN (6 mm).
h. Blockouts and openings within 1 unit: Plus or minus 1/4
IN (6 mm).
i. Dimensions not listed above: In any length: (1 in 2000)
to maximum 1/8 IN (3 mm). .
I. Tolerances for erection:
.1. Maximum equal to maximum specified for structural frame.
2. Clearances between precast'and structural frame: 1-1/2 IN
(38 mm) minimum.
3. Joints:
a. Face width: Plus or minus 3/16 IN (4.5 mm).
b. Taper in any length: (1 in 500) to maximum 1/4 IN (1
mm).
c. Step in face: 1/4 IN (6 mm).
d. Jog in alignment of edge: 1/4 IN (6 mm).
J. Design responsibility and criteria:
1. Design units in compliance with ACI 318-83.
2. Provide engineering design and calculations, performed by
registered Professional Engineer, licensed in State of
construction site and bearing his seal, as part of this
work.
3. Show, by engineering calculations, embedded connections can
adequately support anticipated loads. When approved by
Contracting Officer, load tests may be substituted for
calculations.
4. Design, detail and provide internal reinforcing and embedded
connection hardware, whether or not indicated, for precast
units.
5. Design, detail and provide connection hardware and anchors
fOr structural steel frame associated with precast unit
connections.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
03450-4
6. Design units and connections to withstand:
a. Wind pressure: 30 PSF positive and negative~
b. Dead load of unit plus superimposed loads.
c. Erection forces.
d. Temperature and shrinkage stresses.
eo Earthquake lateral forces.
7. Reinforce units with welded wire fabric or reinforcing bars
as needed to satisfy design criteria or provide following
minimum reinforcing, whichever is greater:
a. Unit thickness over 4 IN (100 mm): 2 layers 4 x 4 - W4.5
x W4.5.
8. When unit is supported from rigid base design connections to
permit reasonable amount of independent vertical movement of
structural frame.
9. Attach connections placing lateral loads on structural
members to elements capable of safely resisting forces
without reinforcing, unless such reinforcing is provided by
erector at no additional cost to Owner and in manner
acceptable to Contracting Officer, unless detailed and
accommodated otherwise.
10. Design units and connections to'load supporting steel
sections at centerline of web creating no torsion in
supporting member unless detailed otherwise.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
26 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
· 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. Shop drawings: 1. For review of interface between architectural precast and
building structural frame:
2. Unit dimensions including blockouts; profiles, joints,
arrangement of units; details of special designs or shapes.
3. Connection locations and loads.
4. Location and size of reinforcing and embedded plates,
inserts and anchors.
5. Details and location of hardware installed on structural
steel.
6. Erection and lifting insert location and type.
41 Bo Product data: Not required.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
C. Samples:
1. Before fabrication, 3, 12 IN x 12 IN x 2 IN (300 x 300 x 50
mm), samples of precast concrete unit for approval of
appearance.
a. Label samples to indicate name of project; fabricator;
finish; type, color and source of cement and aggregate.
2. Before fabrication, one full-sized sample of precast
concrete unit for review of appearance.
a. After Contracting Officer's review, approved samples may
be incorporated in work, and serve as standard of
comparison for other units.
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N° Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
03450-5
D. Project information: 1. Test reports.
2. Engineering design calculations.
3. Certification calculations have been prepared by a
Professional Engineer, licensed in State of construction
site.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
09 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O9
12
13
15
16
A. Deliver to site in quantities and at times to ensure continuity
of installation.
B. Store and handle to ensure against cracking, distortion,
staining, or other damage.
12
13
15
16
19 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
19
22
23
24
25
26
27.
A. Before installation, check dimensions, and inspect supporting
structure for tolerances, conditions or surfaces, which may
interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.
1. Do not proceed until defects and conditions are corrected.
2. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of surfacgs and
conditions.
22
23
24
25
26
27
31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
31
34 2.01 MATERIALS
34
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
54
A. Manufacturer's not listed below comply with Section 00440.
B. Architectural precast concrete: Match sample at job site and
office of Contracting Officer.
1. Portland cement for face and backing mixes: ASTM C150, type
I or III, white from one source.
2. Aggregate for facing mix:
a. "Salt & Pepper" granite.
b. Size of aggregate to be A-B blend (40 percent A, 60
percent B).
3. Aggregates for backing mix: ASTM C33.
a. Obtain aggregates from source approved by appropriate
state agency for use in highway structures.
C. Water: Clean, fresh, free from oil, acid, organic matter or
other deleterious substsnces; potable.
D. Admixtures, air entraining: ASTM C260.
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. ; N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03450-6
O2
O4
05
07
08
09
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23
24
E. Welded wire reinforcing: ASTM A185.
F. Reinforcing bars: Welded: ASTM A706; nonwelded: ASTM A615,
grade 60.
G. Galvanizing: 1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A123 applied after welding.
2. Wire mesh: Coating G60.
H. Flashing reglets: Polyvinyl chloride 0.06 IN (1.5 mm) thick.
I. Metal anchors, inserts and anchorages:
1. Galvanized per ASTM A123.
2. Provide, as part of precast work, embedded inserts and
anchorage items necessary for attachment of units to'
supporting and adjacent work.
3. Coordinate locations of embedded items with work of other
trades.
J. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.
K. Rust inhibitive paint: Tnemec "90-97"; ZRC Chemical Products
Co. "ZRC Compound"; equivalent product by Heintzen.
02
04
O5
07
O8
09
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23
24
27 2.02 MIX DESIGNS
30
31
33
34
A. Provide concrete having compressive strength not less than 5000
PSI at 28 days.
B. Provide concrete containing air entraining admixture producing
air content between 6 and 8 percent including entrapped air.
27
30
31
33
34
37 2.03 FABRICATION
37
40
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
5t .
52
53
54
A. Provide architectural precast concrete unit sizes and shapes as
indicated.
B. Provide connection items, anchors, angles, plates, and other
items secured to or embedded in precast or other work and
necessary to support and anchor precast units.
C. Provide clip angles, bolts, washers, shims, nuts, and other
accessories necessary for attachment of units to structure or
other work.
D. Perform welding in compliance with American Welding Society AWS
DI.1 and AWS Dlo4.
1. For welding use E70 electrodes complying with AWS A5.1.
2. Employ certified welders to perform welding.
U.S.P.S. % N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
4O
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
03450-7
02
03
O4
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
14
15
17
E. Vhere headed studs' or deformed bar anchors are indicated or
proposed for use, Use standard items manufactured by Nelson
Stud; Gregory Industries, Inc.; or KSM Division Omark
Industries, Inc.
1. Headed studs having minimum tensile strength of 60,000 PSI,
minimum yield strength of 52,000 PSI, ASTM Al08.
2. Deformed bar anchors having minimum tensile strength of
80,000 PSI, minimum yield strength of 70,000 PSI, ASTM A496.
F. Weld studs and anchors to steel using automatic gun welding
applicator, in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Provide units having mitred Joints with 3/4 IN (19 mm) quirk at
external angles.
H. Mark each unit for identification and date of casting.
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
11
12
14
15
17
20 2.04 FINISHES
2O
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
A. Architectural precast concrete: Match sample at jobsite and
office of Contracting Officer.
1. Provide specified finish on all surfaces exposed to view
including top of parapet.
B. As cast:
1. Smooth off the mold:
a. Flat: Inside finish.
C. Treated after cast 1. Face up; outside finish: Sand blasted.
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION
36
39 3.01 ERECTION
39
42
47
48
50
52
54
A. Perform erection under supervision of qualified superintendent.
B. Employ only skilled and experienced personnel and equipment
capable of properly installing units.
C. Erect units in accord with approved submittals and erection
schedules.
D. Install each unit in position assigned.
E. Make joints 5/8 IN (15 mm) except as otherwise indicated.
F. Erect units within specified tolerance limits.
42
44
45
47
48
50
52
54
U.S.P.S. -_ N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
03450-8
02
O4
O6
O8
10
11
G. Secure Units by welding and bolting as indicated.
H. Provide one flat and one lock washer with each bolt and nut.
I. Shim units as required for level, uniform bearing.
J. Employ only certified and experienced welders.
K. After units have been erected and welded and bolted apply rust
inhibitive paint in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
02
O4
O6
O8
10
11
14 3.02 JOINT SEALANT
14
17 A. Seal using materials and methods as specified in Section 07900.
17
20 3.03 PROTECTION
2O
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
A. Protect work against damage from cutting or welding operations.
B. Replace any unit which exhibits damage to surfaces, finish,
corners or edges which will be exposed to view after setting in
place, or which is broken or-cracked due to shrinkage,
temperature, transportation, handling or erection.
1. When approved in writing by Contracting Officer, unit may be
repaired in place.
2. Perform such work at no additional expense to Contracting
Officer.
3. Acceptance of units, repaired pursuant to written approval,
is contingent upon repairs being skillfully done so as to be
sound, permanent, flush with adjacent surfaces and of color
and texture matching similar adjoining surfaces and showing
no apparent line of demarcation between original and
repaired work.
C. Remove and replace other work damaged by removal of defective
precast members, at no additional cost to Contracting Officer.
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
44 3.04 CLEANING
44
47
48
49
51
53
54
A. After completion of setting, pointing and calking, clean
precast work thoroughly by scrubbing with fiber brushes,
detergent, and clear water from hose.
B. Start at top of building .and proceed downward.
C. Leave precast units clean, free of traces of cleaning compound
and with Joints watertight.
47
48
49
51
53
54 -
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
02
03
O5
03450-9
D. Coordinate cleaning of precast units with cleaning of glass and
other work.
END OF SECTION
02
O3
O5
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
03
6G25, 8C01
SECTION 04050
COLD WEATHER MASONRY PROCEDURES
'04050-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GRNIERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for cold weather masonry procedures as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Cold weather protection for concrete:
2. Concrete masonry: Section 04220.
Division 3.
29 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
29
33 PART 3 - ~CI/TION
33
36 3.01 GENERAL
36
39
44
45
A. Do not use frozen or ice coated materials.
B. At end of each day or at shutdown, cover tops of all walls not
enclosed or sheltered.
C. Remove and replace frozen or damaged masonry to satisfaction of
Contracting Officer.
39
44
45
48 3.02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
48
51
52
54
A. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit
continuous and orderly progress of work.
B. Provide heat sufficient for indicated temperatures.
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
04050-2
02
03
C. Provide sufficient temporary lighting to permit work to be
correctly performed.
02
O3
06 3.03 PROCEDURES
06
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
A. Air temperature: 32 to 40 degF (0 to 5 degC):
1. Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 degF (5 and 48 degC).
2. Protect walls from rain or snow, minimum 24 hours, by
covering with weather resistive membrane.
B. Air temperature: 25 to 32 degF (-4 to 0 degC): 1. Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 degF (5 and 48 degC).
2. Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing.
3. Completely cover with weather resistive membrane for not
less than 24 hours.
C. Air temperature: 20 to 25 degF (-7 to -4 degC): 1. Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 degF (5 and 48 degC).
2. Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing.
3. Provide heat on both sides of walls.
4. Provide windbreaks or shelters when wind exceeds 15 MP~ (21
KPH).
5. Completely protect walls with insulating blankets, minimum
24 hours.
D. Air temperature: below 20 degF (-7 degC): 1. Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar
temperatures between 40 and 120 degF (5 and 48 degC).
2. Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing.
3. Maintain temperature of units until laid at not less than 25
degF (-4 degC).
4. Maintain walls above 32 degF (0 degC) for 24 hours.
5. Do not allow rapid drop in temperature after removal of
heat.
END OF SECTION
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
U.SoP.S.
N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V:M.F.
01
O3
6K26, 8C01
SECTION 04110
CEMENT AND LIME MORTARS
04110-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all masonry mortars and grout for all masonry
construction, and grouting of hollow metal, as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2o Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Concrete masonry: Section 04220.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
28
31
33
34
36
38
39
40
A. Materials standards: ASTM Standards indicated.
B. Mortar standards and testing: Brick Institute of America
(BIA).
C. Mortar for unit masonry: ASTM C270-86a.
D. Mortar testing: 1. Perform in accord with ASTM C780-80;A6.
2. Retest when initial test fails.
31
33
34
36
38
39
40
43 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
43
46
48
49
50
51
53
54
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: 1. Design mix reports for each type of mortar used.
2. Include description of contents, proportions, and results of
tests specified in Quality Assurance.
C. Samples:
.1. Color samples of colored mortar.
46
48
49
5O
51
53
54
U.S.P°S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
.04110-2
O2
O3
O4
D. Project information: 1. Field quality control reports.
2. See paragraph Field Quality Control.
02
03
04
08 PARr 2 - PRODUC'rs
O8
11 2.01 MATERIALS
11
14
15
16
17
19
21
23
25
27
A. Portland cement: ASTM C150-84, Type I, II or III. 1. No air entrainment.
2. Natural color.
3. Maximum percent of alkalies: 0.60.
B. Hydrated lime: ASTM C207-79 (1984), Type S.
C. Mortar aggregate: ASTM C144-84.
D. Grout: ASTM C476-83.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Mortar pigments: Commercially compounded types.
30 2.02 MIXES
14
15
16
17
19
21
23
25
27
3O
33
34
3~
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
A. Mortar mixes: ASTM C270 Type S, minimum 1800 FSI. 1. Wherever a fire resistance rating is shown for masonry wall
provide mortar of type which has been tested and listed for
such construction.
2. Comply with BIA Standard MI-72.
3. Mix materials between 3 and 5 minutes.
4. Adjust consistency to satisfaction of mason.
5. Do not use antifreeze additives.
6o DO NOT USE MASONRY CEMENT.
B. Grout mixes: Comply with ASTM C476. 1. Mix 5 MIN.
2. Adjust consistency to satisfaction of mason.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
49 PART 3 - EXECHTION
49
52 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O!
O2
04
O5
07
09
10
12
04110-3
A. Comply with requirements specified for materials being set or
grouted.
B, If mortar begins to stiffen within 2-1/2 hours, it may be
retempered by adding water and remixing.
C. Use grout within 2 hours after initial mixing.
D. Use coarse grout in spaces with least dimension over 2 IN (50
mm).
E. Use fine grout for grouting hollow metal in masonry.
15 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
18
19
21
23
A. Perform 1 set of specified tests on each mortar type used, at
direction of Contracting Officer.
B. Perform 1 field test of mortar per 1000 block.
END OF SECTION
01
02
04
05
07
09
10
12
15
18
19
21
23
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6G25, 8G14
SECTION 04150
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04150-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
29 1.02
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for masonry accessories, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Installation of various masonry units and accessories is
specified in Sections applicable masonry type.
2. Insulation: Section 07210.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
29
32
33
35
36
A. Welder's Qualifications: Qualify welders in.accord with AWS
Standard B3.0 to perform specified work.
B. Welding Standard: Perform welding in accord with applicable
provisions of AWS Structural Welding Code DI.1.
32
33
35
36
39 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
39
42
43
44
46
47
A. Samples:
1. Upon request of Contracting Officer, submit actual samples
of items proposed for use under this Section.
B. Project information:
1. List of products proposed for use.
42
43
44
46
47
50 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
5O
53
54
A. Store materials under cover in a dry place and in a manner to
prevent damage.
53
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
04150-2
02
03
B. Immediately before placing, clean reinforcement of substances
detrimental to good bond.
02
O3
07 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
O7
10 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
10
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
39
4O
42
43
44
45
A. Manufacturer's not listed below comply with Section 00440.
B. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Masonry anchors and horizontal joint reinforcing:
ao Base: AA Wire Products Co.; Southern Slag; Dur-O-Wall;
Ty-Walll and Gateway.
2. Through wall flashing:
a. Base: Rubber and Plastics Compound Co; B.F. Goodrich;
Sandell; and Wasco Prod, Inc.
3. Premolded control Joint strips:
a. Base: Dur-O-Vall~ Ty-Vall; AA Wire Products.
4. Metal expansion joint strips:
a. Base: Dur-O-Wall~ Ty-Wall; AA Wire Products.
C. Joint reinforcing, horizontal: 1. Cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A82.
2. 3/16 IN (4.5mm) side rods.
3. 9 GA cross rods.
4. In interior walls; mill finish.
5. Truss design.
6. Prefabricated corner and tee sections, minimum legs 32 IN
(810 mm)
7. Single walls: AA Wire; AA600.
D. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615-82, Grade 60.
E. Bond breaker strips: Asphalt saturated felt, unperforated;
ASTM D226-82, 15 LB.
F. Premolded control joint strips: Solid rubber strips with a
Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit
standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry
wall, size and configuration as indicated.
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
39
4O
42
43
44
45
49 PiedlT 3 - EXRCUTION
49
52 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGES
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01
03
04
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
13
04150-3
A. Meeting and Intersection Masonry Walls:
1. Where bearing walls meet or intersect, erect walls
separately and anchor together with rigid steel anchors
spaced not more than 24 IN (600 mm) apart vertically.
2. Embed end bends of anchors in cores of masonry units filled
with mortar or grout.
3. Where nonbearing walls meet or intersect other walls, erect
walls separately and anchor together with wire mesh ties
spaced not more than 16 IN (400 mm) apart vertically.
4. Embed ties in middle of mortar within joint.
END OF SECTION
O1
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
13
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6G25, 8G19
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY
04220-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all concrete masonry construction (CMU or CCB) as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Cold weather protection: Section 04050.
2. Cement and lime mortars: Section 04110.
3. Masonry accessories: Section 04150.
4. Masonry cleaning: Section 04510.
5. Water repellent coating: Section 07176.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
31 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
A. Construct sample wall for Contracting Officer review. 1. 4 x 6 FT (1200 x 1800 mm) minimum.
2. If not acceptable, construct additional sample walls.
3. Sample wall constitutes standard of quality for actual
construction.
4. Maintain sample wall during construction.
5. Remove when directed.
6. Sample wall may be built into permanent wall, provided
sample area is identifiable during construction.
B. Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces
of columns, walls and arrises:
a. 1/4 IN (6 mm) in 10 FT (3 M).
b. 3/8 IN (9 mm) in a story height not to exceed 20 FT (6
M).
2. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion
joints and other conspicuous lines:
a. 1/4 IN (6 mm) in any story or 20 FT (6 M) maximum.
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
04220-2
3. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels,
sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous
lines:
a. 1/4 IN (6 mm) in any bay or 20 FT (6 M).
4. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of
columns, walls and partitions:
a. 1/2 IN (12 mm) in any bay or 20 FT (6 M).
5. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns
and thicknesses of walls from dimensions shown on drawings:
a. Plus/minus 1/4 IN (6 mm).
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O7
08
09
10
13 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
13
16
17
19
20
21
A. Shop drawings: Proposed locations of vertical expansion,
control and isolation joints, and reinforcing.
B. Samples: Provide sample units for color verification.
Contracting Officer reserves right to request custom batching
and additional samples to arrive at acceptable blend.
16
17
19
20
21
24 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
24
27
28
3O
Ao Deliver units on pallets with tight covers or deliver in gubes
and store on dunnage.
B. Protect all materials from elements.
27
28
3O
33 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
33
36
38
39
41
A. Protect against weather, when work is not in progress.
B. Cover top of walls with waterproof membrane, extend at least 4
FT (1.2 M) down both sides of walls; anchor in place.
C. Provide cold weather protection; Section 04050.
36
38
39
41
45 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
45
48 2.01 MATERIALS
48
51
52
53
A. Normal and ground face concrete masonry units:
1. Modular units, ASTM C90-75 (1981), Grade N, Type I, and
C145-75 (1981).
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
3O
32
34
36
37
042'20-3
2. Color equal to Trendwyth Industry "Trendstone" natural, or
Featherlite Industries "Lonestar gray (TA-388)".
3. Provide aggregate in accord with ASTM C33.
4. Provide factory applied heat treated acrylic coating to all
ground and polished surfaces, ASTM C744-85 and ASTM C67-85.
5. Sizes and shapes as indicated or required for conditions.
6. Face shell and web thickness: Table 3.
7. Moisture content: Table 1.
8. Fire resistive units: U/L rated.
9. Provide all units made from same materials and from one
manufacturer.
a. Provide units as required to present ground faces at all
surfaces exposed to view per Room Finish Schedule.
b. Typically, surfaces not exposed to view and surfaces not
addressed in 2.01 9a above need not be ground.
10. Use square nose units at external corners and at jambs of
openings.
11. Provide solid units, or grouted hollow units, under
lintels.
12. Provide matching concrete bricks where required.
13. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled, or imperfect units
exposed in finish work.
14. Provide reinforced concrete masonry lintels fabricated from
ground face concrete masonry units, filled and reinforced as
indicated.
15. Units required to receive ground faces per 2.01.9 to
receive factory score at midpoint, (16 IN side only) to
provide 3/8 IN wide 3/8 IN deep vertical reveal.
B. Accessories: See Section 04150.
C. Mortar and grout: See Section 04110.
D. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.
g. Reinforcing bars: As specified in Section Section 04150 and
indicated on drawings.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
3O
32
34
36
37
41 PART 3 EX~CI~TION
41
44 3.01 INSPECTION
44
47
49
51
52
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept work.
B. Verify that anchors and flashings are correct.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and
responsibility for performance.
47
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
04220-4
O1 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
O1
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
25
A. Build walls to thickness indicated.
B. Build single wythe walls to actual masonry thickness.
C. Build in reinforcing and related items.
D. Perform all cutting with masonry saws.
E. Cut as required to provide pattern indicated.
F. Use solid units where cutting or laying would expose holes.
G. Install in running bond.
H. Avoid use of less than half size units.
I. Do not install damaged units.
J. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
K. Build chases and recesses as indicated and required for work of
other trades.
04
06
08
10
12
14.
16
18
20
22
24
25
28 3.03 LAYING AND TOOLING
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
53
54
A. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of
bond patterns and joints..
B. Properly locate openings, movement type joints and offsets.
C. Lay masonry units with completely filled bed and head Joints. 1. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and
shove into place.
2. Do not slush head joints.
D. Maintain nominal 3/8 IN (9 mm) joint widths. 1. Cut joints flush where concealed.
2. Rake exposed joints to 3/8 IN at areas where ground faces
are exposed.
3. Tool joints concave at areas where exposed ground faces are
not required.
4. Compress mortar in below ground joint~.
5. Align end joints over reveals (2.001A.15).
E. During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except
weepholes, and completely fill with mortar.
F. Point up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to
provide neat, uniform appearance.
28
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
04220-5
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
G. Remove masonry disturbed after laying. 1. Clean and relay in fresh mortar.
2. Do not pound units to fit.
3. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset
in fresh mortar.
H. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rack back 1/2 masonry
unit length in each course.
1. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
I. As work progresses, build-in items indicated and specified. 1. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in items.
2. Grout fill space between metal frames and masonry.
3. Where built in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow
masonry units, place layer of metal lath in joint below and
fill core with grout.
J. Install insulation in walls as scheduled.
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
22 3.04 REINFORCING
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
A. Provide continuous horizontal Joint reinforcing as indicated.. 1. Embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire length
with minimum cover of 5/8 IN (15 mm) on exterior side of
walls and 1/2 IN (12 mm) at other locations.
2. Lap reinforcement minimum 6 IN (150 mm) at ends.
3. Do not bridge control or expansion joints with reinforcing
except at wall openings.
4. Make corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated
"L" and "T" sections.
5. Cut and bend as required.
6. Install reinforcing at 16 IN (400 mm) on center vertically.
7. Install reinforcing 8 IN (200 mm) on center in starter
courses and over openings.
8. Use continuous joint reinforcing for bond tie between
wythes.
B. Reinforce masonry openings over 12 IN (300 mm) wide, with
horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints
above lintel and below sill.
1. Extend reinforcing minimum of 24 IN (600 mm) beyond jambs of
opening.
2. Bridge control joints where provided.
C. Install no. 5 at 16 IN vertically in grouted cell unless noted
otherwise on plans or sections.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
52 3.05 LINTELS, CONTROL JOINTS, AND SEALANTS
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
06
O7
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
04220-6
A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints where
indicated.
1. Where not indicated, provide at maximum 30 FT (10 M) on
center.
2. Rake out all mortar in joint.
3. Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in
masonry.
B. See Section 07900 for sealant installation requirements. 1. Rake out all mortar in joint under relieving lintel.
2. Seal joints between concrete masonry unit and relieving
lintels.
3. Seal expansion and control joints.
C. Provide masonry lintels wherever openings more than 12 IN (300
mm) wide are indicated without other structural support or
other supporting lintels.
1~ Thoroughly cure lintels before handling and installation.
2. See lintel schedule for size and type required.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
22 3.06 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
22
25
26
27
28
3O
32
33
34
36
A. Remove and replace loose, stained, or damaged units. 1. Provide new units to match.
2. Install in fresh mortar.
3. Point to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Clean in accord with Section 04510.
C. Apply acrylic coating containing minimum 20 percent solids
(Ref. Paint 09900) to all walls as scheduled after cleaning
(Ref. Masonry Cleaning 04510).
END OF SECTION
25
26
27
28
3O
32
33
34
36
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
6G25, 8C01
SECTION 04510
MASONRY CLEANING
04510-1
01
O3
06 PART 1 - GI~IRRAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all masonry cleaning as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Concrete masonry: Section 04220.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
27
30
31
A. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials below from damage due
to cleaning operations.
30
31
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
38 2.01 MATERIALS
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Cleaning solution: Detergent type.
a. Base: Pro So Co., Sure Clean No.600 Detergent Masonry
Cleaner.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440,
41
42
43
44
45
46
50 PART 3 - EXECUTION
5O
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
04
06
08
10
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
04510-2
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Carefully check masonry surfaces.
B. If necessary point with mortar.
C. Allow 4 days before start of cleaning.
D. Remove excess mortar using wooden paddles and scrapers.
13 3.02 CLEANING
A. Do not use wire brushes.
B. Thoroughly rinse and pre-soak walls.
C. Flush all loose mortar and dirt from surface.
D. Wet to prevent "runoff" streaking.
E. Apply solution using fibered wall washing brush.
F. Scrape off mortar and re-apply cleaning solution.
G. After scrubbing, clean thoroughly with pressurized water.
END OF SECTION
01
04
06
08
10
13
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
UoSoP,S. -_ N. Texas/N. Georgia G,M.F. & V.M.F.
O1 4L14, 8C16
03
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-1
01
O3
06 PAI~T 1 - GEI~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all structural steel as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
A. Quality standards:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
a. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection
of Structural Steel for Buildings (referred to herein as
AISC Specification).
b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
(referred to as AISC Code of Standard Practice). Only
those sections referred to are a part of this
specification.
c. Quality Certification Program.
2. American Welding Society AWS DI.1, Structural Welding Code
Steel (referred to as AWS Code).
3. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
bolts (referred to as Specification for Structural Joints).
4. Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC): Standards
indicated.
B. Qualifications:
1. Steel fabricator:
a. Minimum 10 years experience in fabrication of structural
steel.
b. Certified in Category II by AISC Quality Certification
Program°
2. Steel erector: Minimum 10 years experience in erection of
structural steel.
C. Source quality control:
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. _- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
05120-2
1. Provide access and facilities for Contracting Officer shop
and field inspections.
2. Replace or make acceptable repair to rejected work.
D. Testing: Employ and pay for services of an independent testing
agency acceptable to Contracting Officer, to inspect all
structural steel work for compliance with specifications, and
perform following:
1. Inspect quality of base material.
2. Inspect shop fabricated structural steel members.
3. Inspect shop and field welding in accord with Section 6 of
AWS Code, including qualification tests of welders and
following non-destructive testing.
a. Test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 10 percent
of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant.
b. Test 20 percent of full penetration welds with
ultrasonic, radiographic, or magnetic particle testing.
4. Inspect high strength bolting in accord with Section 6 of
the Specification for Structural Joints.
5..Inspect structural steel which has been erected.
6. Inspect stud welding in accord with Article 4.26, AVS Code.
7. Inspect shop painting.
8. Prepare and submit test reports to Contracting Officer.
Cooperate with Contracting Officer to determine corrective
measures necessary for defective work.
9. Upon completion certify that fabrication and erection ~omply
with Contract Documents.
E. Provide testing agency with sufficient notification and access
so that inspection and testing can be accomplished.
F. Previous acceptance of any material or finished members by
testing agency or Contracting Officer shall not prevent its
rejection at later date if it does not comply with
specifications.
G. Tolerances:
1. For fabrication: See AISC Code of Standard Practice.
2. Frame placement, after assembly and before welding or
tightening:
a. Deviation from plumb, level and alignment: 1 in 500,
maximum.
b. Displacement of centerlines of columns: 1 IN (25 mm),
maximum, each side of centerline.
c. Displacement of centerllnes of exterior columns and
columns adjacent to elevator shafts: 1/2 IN (12 mm),
maximum.
H. Complete final design of connections not defined on Contract
Documents.
1. Design connections at each end of member for loads (in Kips)
noted in parenthesis. If load is not indicated, design for
capacity of member.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
O4
05
O6
07
O8
O9
05120-3
2. Connection arrangement and detail Shall be consistent with
similar connections where shown on Contract Documents.
3. Adequacy and appropriateness of connection design is
Contractor's responsibility.
4. Connection design shall be performed by a Professional
Engineer registered in ~State of construction-site.
5. Connection design shall satisfy all applicable Building
Codes and shall use latest approach to design as offered by
the AISC.
01
O2
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
12 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
28
1.04
A. Shop drawings: 1. Show all details including cuts, copes, connections, hOles
and welds.
2. Indicate all shop and field welds using AVS symbols.
3. Indicate connections where high strength bolts are required.
B. Project information:
1. Test reports.
2. Connection design calculations, as specified in "Quality
Assurance", which have been Signed and sealed by the
designer.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
28
31
32
34
35
A. Handle and store steel members above ground on platforms, skids
or other ~upports.
B. Keep members free of dirt, grease and other foreign material
and protect against corrosion.
31
32
34
35
39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39
42 2.01 MATERIALS
42
45
47
49
5O
52
54
A. Manufacturers not listed below comply with Section 00440.
B. Steel, structural shapes and plate: ASTM A36.
C. Bolts, nuts and washers, high strength: ASTM A325.
1. Provide washers for all nuts.
D. Pipe, round: ASTM A53,. Grade B.
E. Tubing, structural: ASTM A500, ASO1 or A618 (46 KSI, minimum).
45
47
49
50
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05120-4
02
04
06
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
F. Washers, plain: ANSI B18.22.1, Type B.
G. Washers, beveled: ANSI B27.4.
H. Anchor bolts, except high strength: ASTM A307.
I. Anchor bolts, high strength: ASTM A687, with A325 nuts and
load-indicator washers.
J. Welding electrodes: 1. Shielded metal arc: AWS AS.1 or AWS A5.5, E70XX.
2. Submerged arc: AWS A5.17 or A5.23, F7X-EXXX.
3. Gas metal arc: AWS A5.18, E7OS-X or E70U-1.
4. Flux cored arc: AWS A5.20, E70T-X (except 2, 3, 10, GS).
K. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors:
1. Studs: ASTM Al08 cold drawn bar, complying with AWS Code,
4.23.
a. Uniform diameter.
b. Heads: Concentric and normal to shaft.
c. Weld end: Chamfered and solid flux.
2. Deformed anchor bars: ASTM A496, cold drawn wire.
ao Straight, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Solid flux.
3. After welding, free from any substance which would intgrfere
with function as anchor or bond to deformed anchor bars.
4. Acceptable manufacturers: Erico/Jones Stud Welding Div.,
Dayton, OH; TRW, Inc./Nelson Div., Lorain, OH; and Omark
Industries, Inc./KSM Fastening Systems Div., Moorestown, NJ.
L.' Grout: Dry pack; 1 part Portland cement, 2-1/2 parts sand, and
no more water than needed to make grout cohesive when squeezed
in hand.
1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type III.
2. Sand: Graded as follows:
a. Passing No.8 sieve: 95-100 percent.
b. Passing No.16 sieve: 65-90 percent.
c. Passing No.50 sieve: 10-30 percent.
d. Passing No.lO0 sieve: 3-10 percent.
02
O4
06
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43 2.02 FABRICATION - WELDING
43
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. All welding, techniques of welding employed, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used to correct defective work
shall comply with AWS Code, and requirements indicated.
Contractor's attention is called to following particular items:
B. Test and qualify welding operators and tackers in compliance
with AWS Code for position and type of welding to which they
will be assigned.
1. Conduct tests in presence of approved testing agency.
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
06
08
09
11
12
14
15
17
18
20
21
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
05120-5
2. Certification within last 12 months from a welding inspector
will be acceptable provided samples of welder's work are
satisfactory.
3. At discretion of testing agency, shop personnel continuously
employed at welding process for which they have been
qualified may be accepted from older qualification tests.
C. Qualify joint welding procedures or test in accord with AWS
qualification procedures.
D. Before start of welding work, meet with testing agency and
welders to review and verify procedures.
E. Comply with AWS Code to minimize shrinkage and distortion
stress.
F. Where groove welds have back-up plates, make first 3 passes
with 1/8 IN (3 mm) round electrodes.
G. Use back-up plates in accord with AWS Code, extending minimum
of 1 IN (25 mm) either side of Joint.
H. Make flange welds before making web welds.
I. For manual shielded metal arc welding: Comply with Article 4.6
of AWS Code.
J. Low hydrogen electrodes: Dry and store electrodes in
compliance with AWS Code.
K. Do not perform welding when ambient temperature is lower than 0
degF (minus 18 degC), or where surfaces are wet or exposed to
rain, snow, or high wind, or when welders are exposed to
inclement conditions.
L. Before starting welding:
1. Carefully plumb and align members in compliance with AISC
Code of Standard Practice.
2. Preheat base metal to temperature stated in Table 4.2 of AWS
Code.
a. When no preheat temperature is given in Table 4.2 and
base metal is below 32 degF (0 degC), preheat base metal
to at least 70 degF (21 deg C).
b. Maintain temperature during welding.
c. Preheating shall bring surface of all base metal within
distance from point of welding equal to thickness of
thicker part being welded or 3 IN (75 mm), whichever is
greater, to specified preheat temperature.
d. Maintain this temperature during welding.
3. Fully tighten bolts.
4. Assembly and surface preparation shall comply with section 3
of AWS Code. -
5. Each welder use identifying mark at welds where he has
worked.
01
02
03
O4
O5
06
08
O9
11
12
14
15
17
18
2O
21
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05120-6
03 2.03 FABRICATION
06
07
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
23
24
26
27
29
30
32
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
49
51
52
53
54
A. Comply with requirements of AISC specification with
modifications and additional requirements specified herein.
B. Fabricate and assemble material in shop to greatest extent
possible.
C. Make connections as indicated. 1. Shop connections may be bolted or welded.
2. Bolt field connections unless shown otherwise.
3. Use A325 bolt, friction type connections for all bolted
connections.
D. One sided or other types of eccentric connections not
indicated, will not be permitted without prior approval.
Weld in accord with paragraph "Fabrication - Welding".
F. Bevels for field welds may be flame cut provided such cutting
is done automatically. Leave free of burrs and slag.
Grind flush web fillets at webs notched to receive backup.
plates for flange groove welds.
H. Flame cut edges of stiffener plates at field or shop butt
welds. Do not shear.
I. Accurately mill bearing ends of columns.
J. Camber trusses and beams to amounts indicated on Drawings,
otherwise fabricate in accord with AISC Code, Section 1.19.1.
Fabricate and erect beams without specified camber in accord
with AISC code, Section 1.19.3.
K. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. 1. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Make holes clean cut, without torn or ragged edges.
3. Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling or reaming
operations with tool making 1/16 IN (1.5 mTM) bevel.
4. Provide holes in members to permit connection of work of
other trades.
L. Make allowance for draw in of all tension bracing.
M. Make splices only where indicated.
N. Headed stud type shear connectors and rebar anchors:
Automatically end welded in accord with the AWS Code.
1. When headed stud type shear connectors are to be field
applied, clean top surface of beam flanges in shop to remove
06
07
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
23
24
26
27
29
30
32
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
O2
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1'7
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
05120-7
oil, scale, rust, dirt and other materials injurious to
satisfactory welding.
O. Studs and deformed bar anchors designated D.A., on the
Drawings: Automatically end welded in accord with the AWS
Code..
1. Fillet welding of headed studs and deformed anchors is not
allowed.
2. Do not weld studs when temperature is below 0 degF or
surface is wet with rain or snow.
3. Quality control: Weld minimum of 2 studs shall be at start
of each production period to determine proper generator,
control unit, and stud welder settings.
a. These studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees
from vertical without weld failure.
b. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that sound
weld or full 360 degree fillet has not been obtained for
a particular stud, that stud shall be struck with hammer
and bent approximately 15 degrees off perpendicular to
the nearest end of the beam.
c. Studs meeting this test shall be considered acceptable
and shall be left in this position.
d. Studs failing under this test shall be replaced.
e. When the temperature is below 32 degF one'stud in each
100 shall be tested after cooling.
28 2.04 SHOP PREPARATION - SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
28
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
A. Do not coat following surfaces:
1. Machined surfaces, surfaces adjacent to field welds, contact
surfaces of bolt connections, and top flanges of beams to
receive shear connectors.
2. Ail other members for which no coating is specified.
B. Clean thoroughly before shipping; remove loose mill scale,
rust, dirt, oil and grease.
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
41 2.05 SHOP COATING - GALVANIZING
41
44
45
46
47
48
5O
52
A. Galvanize the following members:
1. Members set in, or in contact with, exterior surface
material, including:
a. Embedded items in exterior surfaces.
2. Other members indicated.
B. Clean thoroughly before galvanizing.
C. Galvanize in accord with ASTM A123.
44
45
46
47
48
5O
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
05120-8
O1 2.06 SHOP COATING - COAL TAR EPOXY
O1
04
O5
07
09
11
12
13
A. Apply coal tar epoxy to following surfaces:
1. Steel'in contact with soil and not galvanized.
B. Coal tar epoxy: Tnemec 46H-413 High-Build Tneme-Tar.
C. Clean in accord with SSPC-SP10, Near White Blast Cleaning.
D. Apply in accord with paint manufacturer's instructions. 1. Apply minimum of 9 mils, dry film thickness, per coat.
2. Apply 2 coats.
04
O5
O7
09
11
12
13
16 2.07 SHOP'COATING - PRIMER FOR EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT
16
19
20
22
24
26
27
A. Apply primer for exterior finish paint to following surfaces:
1. Steel exposed permanently to weather' and not galvanized.
B. Primer for exterior finish paint: Tnemec 37 series Chem-Prime.
C. Clean in accord with SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
D. Apply in accord with paint manufacturer's instructions.
1. Apply minimum 2.5 mils, dry film thickness.
30 2.08 SHOP COATING PRIMER FOR INTERIOR FINISH PAINT
19
20
22
24
26
27
3O
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
42
43
45
46
A. Apply primer for interior finish paint to following surfaces
not receiving other coating:
1. Surfaces exposed on interior.
B. Primer for interior finish paint: Fast dry alkyd primer,
Glidden 5210; or equivalent product of Pratt & Lambert,
Sherwin-Williams, PPG, Fuller-0'Brien, Mobil Chemical, or
Tnemec.
C. Clean thoroughly before priming; remove mill scale, rust, dirt,
oil, and grease in accord with SSPC-SP3.
D. Apply in accord with paint manufacturer's instructions.
1. Apply minimum 1.5 mils, dry film thickness.
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
42
43
45
46
50 PART 3 - R'A'Rcln'ION
5O
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01 3.01 GENERAL
04
05
06
07
09
10
1I
12
13
14
15
05120-9
A. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many
structural members is not realized until structural assembly is
complete; that is, until slabs, decks and diagonal bracing are
installed.
B. Use temporary bracing to take care of all loads to which
structure may be subjected, including erection equipment and
its operation.
1. Keep bracing in place as long as required for safety.
2. As erection progresses, securely fasten work to take care of
all dead load, wind and erection stresses.
3. Remove temporary bracing after completion of work.
01
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
18 3.02 ERECTION
18
21
23
24
25
26
28
30
31
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
52
A..Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC.
B. Set base and bearing plates accurately and grout immediately as
indicated.
1. Use metal wedges, shims or setting nuts as required.
2. Pack grout solidly between plate and bearing surface.
C. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly.
D. Install A325F bolts with washers. Install and tighten in
accord with Section 5 of Specifications for Structural Joints.
E. Field weld as specified in paragraph "Weldinff".
F. Do not use ffas cutting to correct fabrication errors on any
major members.
1. Gas cutting on minor members may be permitted when members
are not loaded, only after approval by Contracting Officer.
G. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in welded
construction.
H. Provide beveled washers to give full bearin~ to bolt head or
nut where bolts are to be used on surfaces havin~ slopes
~reater than 1 in 20 with a plane normal to bolt axis.
I. After installation, touch up all damaged or abraded areas of
primed steel using same materials used for shop priming.
1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas
before touching Upo
END OF SECTION
21
23
24.
25
26
28
30
31
33
35
36
37
38
4O
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
5H02, 8G12
SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS
05210-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GEN-I~
06-
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all steel joists as indicated, in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
A. Fabrication standards for joists and accessories: Steel Joist
Institute "Standard Specification and Load Tables" for open
web, long span and deep long span steel joists; American
Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings," (referred to as AISC Specifications).
B. Standard for welders and welding work: AWS "Standard
Qualification Procedure".
C. Contracting Officer reserves the right to observe joists in
manufacturer's shop during fabrication.
D. Contracting Officer reserves the right to observe and require
testing of joists welded in place.
1. Remove and replace any work found not to comply with
Contract requirements.
2. Owner will pay for removal and replacement of work found to
be satisfactory.
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
48 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
48
51
52
53
A. Shop drawings:
1. Show complete details including layout, special connections,
bridging, jointing'and accessories.
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05210-2
O1 B. Project information:
02 1. Manufacturer's certification that Steel joists comply with
03 specified requirements.
01
02
03
06 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
06
09
10
12
13
15
16
17
A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended by SJI
and AISC.
B. Store joists clear of earth on platforms, skids or other
supports.
C. Provide anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete
masonry, with templates as required, in time for incorporation
into the work.
09
10
12
13
15
16
17
20 1.O5 JOB CONDITIONS
2O
23
24
A. Do not overload joists. Note: Joists may not be able to carry
design loads until deck is fully installed.
23
24
28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
31 2.01 MATERIALS
31
34
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
51
A. Steel: Comply with SJI and AISC Specifications.
B. High-strength threaded fasteners: ASTM A325 or A490 as
required, heavy hexagon structural bolts with nuts and hardened
washers.
C. Prime paint: Comply with SJI and AISC except that asphalt type
paint is not acceptable.
1. Shop coat of red lead or rust-inhibitive paint standard with
manufacturer.
2. Comply with SSPC 15.
D. Bedding mortar:
1. Portland cement and sand, mixed at a ratio of 1 part cement
to 3 parts sand, measured by volume, with only enough water
for placement and hydration.
2. Shrinkage-resistant compound complying with Corp of
Engineer's CRD-C588, Type M.
34
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
UoS.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1 2.02 FABRICATION
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
22
23
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
39
05210-3
A. Fabricate in accord with SJI and AISC specifications and as
follows:
1. Do not splice principal tension members. Use only full
length pieces.
2. Make shop connections and splices using either arc or
resistance welding. Do not shop bolt connections.
3. Design and fabricate for maximum deflection of 1/360 of
clear span under design live load.
4. Shop holes, field holes, and enlargement of holes will not
be permitted unless approved by Contracting Officer.
5. Fabricate bearing ends to provide following minimum bearing
unless otherwise indicated.
a. On masonry: 4 IN, minimum.
b. On steel: 2-1/2 IN, minimum.
B. Where special or concentrated loads are indicated, reinforce
joist and develop details as necessary for support.
C. Provide extended bottom chords where indicated. Comply with
SJI and AISC requirements and load tables.
D. Provide extended top chords where indicated. Comply with SJI
and AISC requirements and load-tables.
E. Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached
directly to joist bottom chord.
1. Provide either an extended bottom chord or a separat~ unit
of sufficient strength to support ceiling construction.
2. Extend ends to within 1/2 IN of wall surface.
F. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials
from fabricated joists and accessories.
G. Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists
and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide
continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil.
O1
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
22
23
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
39
43 PART 3 - RxxcItrlON
43
46 3.01 INSPECTION
46
49
50
51
53
54
A. Examine areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be
installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of work.
B. Do not proceed with work until 'unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
49
5O
51
53
54
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05210-4
02
O3
C. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is
in place and secured.
02
03
06 3~02 ERECTION
06
09
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20.
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
A. Do not install joists damaged so that strength is impaired.
B. Where not specifically indicated otherwise, place and secure
steel joists in accord with SJI and AISC "Specifications" and
as herein specified.
C. Field weld Joists to supporting steel framework in accord with
SJI and AISC - Specifications for type of joists used.
Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of
joists.
D. Secure joists resting on masonry or concrete bearing surfaces
by bedding in mortar and anchoring to masonry or concrete
construction as specified in SjI and AISC Specifications for
type of steel joist used.
E. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate
location and spacing before permanently fastening.
1. Provide end bearing and anchorages to secure joists t~
supporting members or walls in accord with SJI and AISC
Specifications, unless otherwise indicated.
2. When joists do not bear flush on supporting member or wall,
take corrective measures to ensure full bearing, as directed
by Contracting Officer.
F. Provide bridging in accord with SJI and AISC Specifications,
where not specifically indicated otherwise, except as modified
herein.
1. Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging as indicated.
2. Provide additional bridging at each line between exterior
and first interior joist and then at every 12th joist space.
3. Do not use sag rods as substitute for bridging.
G. Completely install bridging immediately after erection, before
any loads are applied.
1. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where'
terminating at walls or beams.
2. Provide bridging connections at top and bottom chords
capable of safely resisting a force of 500, 1000 and 1500 LB
for open web, long span and deep long span joists
respectively.
H. Remove or repair damaged joists or other work, to satisfaction
of Contracting Officer.
09'
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
U.S.P.So - No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.Fo
01
O2
03
O4
O5
07
05210-5
I. After installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, welds
and abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting
members.
1. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting.
2. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION~
O1
02
03
04
05
O7
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia GoMoF. & V.MoF.
01
O3
7K10, 8G14
SECTION 05305
ACOUSTIC METAL DECK (MTL)
05305-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GEI~IIAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
35
36
37
38
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all acoustic metal deck as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Preformed wall panels: Section 07411.
2. Look out galleries: Section 13100.
3. Sheet metal trim: Section 07600.
4. Suspension system for soffit application:
Section 09250.
C. Work furnished but not installed:
1. Look out galleries: Section 13100.
D. Work installed but specified elsewhere:
1. Furring channels: Section 09110.
E. Description of system:
1. Acoustic metal deck system installed vertically and
horizontally as a room finish system to include decking,
insulation, fasteners, and supports.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
35
36
37
38
41 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
41
44
45
A. Applicator/erector qualifications:
1. Approved by manufacturer.
44
45
48 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
48
51
52
53
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. r No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05305-2
01 B. Certificates:
02 1. Certify that system proposed meets or exceeds required NRC
03 rating.
O1
O2
03
06 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O6
09 A. Deliver to site and protec~ from damage during storage.
O9
12 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
A. Sequencing:
1. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades, to locate
penetrations for duct, pipe conduit, etc. Install acoustic
metal deck prior to installation of above items and cut
opening. Provide trim as detailed to provide finished
opening.
15
16
17
18
19
20
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
27 2.01 MATERIALS
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
41
42
44
45
46
48
49
51
52
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Acoustic metal deck:
a. Base: Vulcraft, Type 1.5 BA; Bowman Div./Cyclops Corp.,
Type FM2; Inryco, Type B Acoustideck.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Acoustic metal deck: 1. 1-1/2 IN deep, 22 GA, factory primed, light gray.
2. Perforated vertical webs.
C. Fiber insulation:
1. Nonorganic mineral fiber, semi rigid batts.
D. Supports:
1. Furring channels, and suspension system per Sections 09110
and 09250.
E. Fasteners:
1. Self tapping screws of manufacturers recommendation.
F. Trim:
1. 24 GA, factory painted sheet metal.
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
41
42
44
45
46
48
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05305-3
2. Configurations as detailed and as required to provide
finished product. Provide trim units at all penetrations of
acoustic metal deck.
O1
O2
03
07 PART 3- R~RCUTION.
07
10 3.01 INSPECTION
10
13
14
A. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
13
14
17 3.02 PREPARATION
17
20 A. Correct unsatisfactory substrates prior to start of work.
2O
23 3.03 INSTALLATION - VERTICAL
23
26
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
A. Install furring channels horizontally 24 IN on center maximum
to substrate by others.
1. Provide additional furring as backing for all trim pieces.
B. Attach acoustic metal panels to furring per manufacturer's
recommendations at iow flutes only.
1. Coordinate installation of trim pieces
C. Install insulation in narrow flutes, continuous, full length of
panel.
1. Install prior to erection of metal panels where necessary.
2. Where acoustic metal deck system is not detailed as
installed in conjunction with preformed wall panels or other
similar continuous backing; provide continuous layer
"chicken wire", attached to front face of furring and held
up tight against insulation.
D. Install tkim pieces.
26
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
46 3.04 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL
46
49
5O
52
53
54
A. Install suspension system in accordance with Section 09250.
Furring channels to be maximum 24 iN on center.
B. Attach metal decking to furring per manufacturer's
recommendation.
1. Install with sufficient fasteners to prevent sagging.
49
5O
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
05
06
07
08
10
12
05305-4
2. Use panels of sufficient length as to require no end to end
splices.
3. Coordinate installation of trim pieces.
C. Install insulation in narrow flutes, continuous, full length of
panel.
1o. Where necessary, install insulation in 2 layers and offset
splices.
D. Install trim pieces.
END OF SECTION
01
02
03
O5
06
07
O8
10
12
UoSoP.S° - No Texas/N° Georgia GoMoF. & V.M.Fo
O1
O3
7B13, 8C16
SECTION 05310
METAL ROOF'DECKING
05310-1
O1
03
'06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 .1'.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
24
1.02
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all metal roof decking, as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation..
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
A. Comply with provisions of following codes and standards, ~xeept
as otherwise indicated.
1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members".
2. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Steel Roof Decking Design
Manual".
3. AWS "Sheet Steel in Structures, Specification for Welding"
AWS D1.3.
B. Qualify welding processes and operations in accord with AWS
"Standard Qualification Procedure".
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
40 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
4O
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
A. Shop drawings:
1. Complete layout showing types of deck panels, anchorage,
supplementary framing, cut openings, accessories., deck
gauges and thicknesses.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer's load tables for deck to be furnished on this
project.
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05310-2
O1 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
01
O4
A. Protect materials from rusting, denting or crushing.
04
07 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
O7
10
11
12
A. Do not overload supporting members. Until the entire assembly
is complete, the structural elements may not be stable or
capable of supporting code or stated design loads.
10
11
12
16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16
19 2.01 METAL ROOF DECKING - 1-1/2 IN DEEP
19
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
A. Acceptable products:
1. Netal roof decking, 1-1/2 IN deep:
a. Base:
1) Vulcraft, Type IoSBA.
2) Bowman Construction Products, Type FM2.
3) Inryco, Type B acoustideck. -
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Metal roof decking, 1-1/2 IN deep: Rib type, sheet steel, 20
GA, minimum, with minimum uncoated thickness of 0.0358 IN,
manufactures standard painted finish. Where exposed to view
prime deck per Section 05305.
1. Paint decking: ASTM A611, Grade C.
C. Fiber insulation:
1. Nonorganic mineral fiber, semirigid batts.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
41 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
41
44
46
47
49
51
53
54
A. Welding rod: 3/16 Lincoln Electric LH3800, E-7028.
B. Screws: Stitch Teks, 12-14 x 3/4 hex washer head with pilot
point.
C. Steel shapes, miscellaneous: ASTM A36.
D~ Galvanizing for metal accessories: ASTM A525 G60.
go Galvanizing repair pa{nt: High zinc-dust content paint,
Mil-P-21035 (ships).
44
46
47
49
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05310-3
O2
O3
O4
06
07
08
F. Metal closure strips: Painted sheet steel, minimum 0.034 IN
thick before coating, ASTM A525 G60 galvanized. See Part 3 -
Execution for locations.
· G. Paint for metal deck: Deck unit manufacturer's baked on, rust
inhibitive paint, applied to chemically cleaned and phosphate
treated, metal surfaces.
02
03
04
O6
O7
O8
11 2.03 FABRICATION
11
14
15
16
17
19
2O
A. Form in lengths to span 3 or more support spacings, with flush,
telescoped or nested 2 IN end laps.
1. Use deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design
Specifications" and as indicated.
B. Form metal closure strips to configuration required to provide
tight fitting closures at open ends and sides of decking.
14
15
16
17
19
2O
24 PAI{T 3 - EXECUTION
24
27 3.01 INSPECTION
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
A. Examine areas and conditions under which deck units are to be
installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of work.
B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
C. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
for correct installation and performance.
27
'30
31
32
34
35
37
38
41 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
41
44
46
49
50
51
52
53
A. Install roof deck units and accessories as indicated.
B. Do not start placement of roof deck units until all supporting
members are installed complete.
C. Place each deck unit on supporting structural frame, adjust to
final position, accurately align with ends bearing on
supporting members.
1. Lap units at ends na less than 2 IN.
2. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
44
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20~
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
05310-4
3. Place deck units flat and square and secure to framing
without warp or excessive deflection.
D. Plug weld sizes specified are effective fusion diameter of
welds.
1o Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material at
ends laps and have good fusion to supporting members.
E. Remove and replace decking which is structurally weak or
unsound or which has burn holes due to improper welding or
which Contracting Officer declares defective.
F. Cut and fit roof units and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to roof decking.
1. Make cutting and fitting neat, square and trim.
2. Neatly and accurately install reinforcing at all openings
except:
a. Circular openings less than 6 IN diameter.
b. Rectangular openings having no side dimension greater
than 6 IN.
3. Reinforce openings between 6 and 12 IN with 20 GA flat steel
sheet 12 IN greater in each dimension than opening. Place
sheet around opening and fusion weld to top surface of deck
at each corner and each side midway between each corner.
G. Install metal closure strips for support of roof insulation. 1. Provide where rib openings in top surface of roof deckfng
occur adjacent to edge and openings.
2. Weld closure strips intp position.
H. Install metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and
edges of roof decking, and in voids between decking and other
construction.
1. Weld into position to provide a complete decking
installation.
01
O2
O4
O5
O6
O7
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
38 3.03 FASTENING OF 1-1/2 IN DEEP DECKING
38
41
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
52
A. Secure deck units to supporting frame and side laps as follows:
B. At all interior supports and at ends of deck use:
1. For 24 IN wide deck: Three (3) 5/8 IN round plug welds per
deck unit.
2. For 30 IN and 36 IN wide deck: Four (4) 5/8 IN round plug
welds per deck unit.
C. At perimeter supports use 5/8 IN round plug welds at 12 IN on
center.
D. At side laps use NO.12 Hex Head screws at 24 IN on center.
41
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01 3.04 CLEAN AND TOUCH-UP
04
O5
'07
08
10
11
13
05310-5
A. Wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots
on top surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.
B. Touch-up damaged galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair
paint applied in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Touch-up shop painted surfaces with same paint used in shop, as
recommended by deck manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
O1
O4
O5
07
08
10
11
13
U.S.P.S. -_N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
7B13, 8C01
SECTION 05321
COMPOSITE METAL FORM DECK
05321-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GEN~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all composite metal form deck as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General RequirementS.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
4O
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. Comply with provisions of following codes and standards: 1. AISI; Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members.
2. AWS; Code for Welding ~n Building Construction.
3. SDI; Design manual for composite decks, form decks and roof
decks.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accord with
AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
C. Minimum deck thickness. Where gage of metal is indicated,
provide the following minimum uncoated decimal thickness.
Gage Minimum thickness
20 .0359
D. Performance requirements:
1. Provide form deck to act as bottom form for cast in'place
concrete slabs and which will become positive slab
reinforcement through mechanical anchorage after concrete
hardens.
2. Fabricate deck for maximum deflection of 1/360 of clear span
under total uniform dead and live loads.
52 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
38
4O
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
52
U.S.P.S. --N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
O6
O7
O8
05321-2
A. Shop drawings:
1. Complete layout showing types of deck paneIs, anchorage,
supplementary framing, cut openings, accessories, deck gages
and thicknesses.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer's load tables for deck to be furnished on this
project.
01
O2
03
O4
O6
11 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
11
14 A. Protect materials from rusting, denting, or crushing.
14
17 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
17
2O
22
A. Do not overload supporting members.
B. Coordinate location of decking bundles.
20
22
26 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
26
29 2.01 MATERIALS
29 --
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Composite metal form deck:
a. Base: Wheeling Corrugating Co., Type Super-Bond; Roll
Form Products Inc., Type Lock-Form P15; Vulcraft, Type
1.5 VL; Consolidated Systems Inc., Type CFD-1.5-6.
2. Composite metal form deck:
a. Base: H.H.Robertson Co., Type 3-QL-99-20; Wheeling
Corrugating Co., Type Super-Bond 300; Roll Form Products
Inc., Type Lock-Form P31LF; Vulcraft, Type 3 VL;
Consolidated Systems Inc., Type CFD-3; Verco
Manufacturing Inc., Type W-3 Formlok.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Composite metal form deck: 20 GA, minimum; 3 IN deep or 1-1/2
IN deep (nominal).
1. Where possible, have deck units span four or more supports.
2. Configuration, physical and chemical properties, and load
carrying capacity conforming to manufacturer's catalog
current at time bids are received.
3. Manufacturer's standard painted finish.
Co Metal flashing and closure strips: Minimum 18 GA steel.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O8
10
12
13
15
17
18
19.
05321-3
1. Use to close all openings and gaps between floor decking and
other construction, at objects projecting through deck,
between units and framing members, and at open ends of deck
units where units terminate.
2. Form to configuration required to provide mortartight
closures.
D. Deck reinforcement: 18 GA steel.
E. Miscellaneous steel shapes: ASTM A36.
F. Sheet metal accessories: ASTM A526, commercial quality.
1. Rust inhibitive paint coated.
G. Screws: Standard No.12 self drilling type.
H. Faint for metal deck: Deck unit manufacturer's baked on, rust
inhibitive paint, applied to chemically cleaned and phosphate
treated, metal surfaces.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
O8
10
12
13
15
17
18
19
23 PAI~T 3 - R~I~C~TION
23
26 3.01 INSPECTION
29
30
31
33
A. Examine areas and conditions under which deck units are to be
installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timel%
completion of work.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
26
29
3O
31
33
36 3.02 INSTALLATION
36
39
40
42
43
44
46
47
49
5O
52
53
54
A. Provide composite metal form deck for all concrete slabs
supported directly or indirectly by structural steel frame.
B. Install deck units and accessories in accord with
manufacturer's recommendations, final shop drawings, and as
specified herein.
C. Employ only welders, qualified under AWS qualification
procedures, experienced in welding light gage metal.
D. Do not start placing units before supporting members are
installed and completely fastened in place.
E. Bear units on supporting members minimum of 2 IN.
1o Butt ends of units tightly together at center line of
support.
39
4O
42
43
44
46
47
49
5O
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
OZ
O3
O5
06
08
09
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
05321-4
2. Place units in accurate and close alignment for entire
length of run and with close registration of flutes of one
unit with those of abutting unit.
F. Neatly cut and fit units, closures, and accessories around
other work projecting through or adjacent to decking.
G. Reinforce as required for strength, continuity of decking, and
support of other work.
H. Reinforce decking around openings 6 to 12 IN in size. 1. Place reinforcing sheet on top of floor deck and fasten to
deck.
2. Provide sheet at least 12 IN longer and wider than opening.
I. Puddle welds shall have effective fusion diameter not less than
1/2 IN.
1. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material at
end laps and be thoroughly fused to supporting members.
J. Fasten deck units as follows:
1. At end of each unit and at intermediate supports: Puddle
welds at 12 IN on center with not less than 2 welds per
support°
2. At perimeter parallel to supports: Puddle welds or 1-1/4 IN
seam welds at 24 IN on center.
3. At side laps: Self-drilling sheet metal screws spaced'not
more than 2 FT on center.
4. At side laps of floor decks: Button punching.
5. At sheet metal closures used at ends or side~: Self-drilling
sheet metal screws or tack welds at 2 FT on center.
6. At deck reinforcing around openings not greater than 12 IN
in size: Self-drilling sheet metal screws or tack welds at
each corner and between corners at not more than 12 IN on
center.
01
O2
03
05
06
08
09
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
38 3.03 CLEAN
38
41
42
43
44
45
47
A. Wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots
on the top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting
steel members.
1. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint
applied in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
41
42
43
44
45
47
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
03
6D18, 8G14
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all metal fabrications as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
A. Materials and operat'ions standardsi 1. AAMA, Contracting Officer Aluminum Manufacturer's
Association.
2. AHDGA, American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association.
3. AISC, American Institute of Steel Construction.
4. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
5. AWS, American Welding Society.
6. F.S., Federal Specifications.
7. NAAMM, National Association of Architectural Metals
Manufacturers.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
39
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
A. Shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings and engineering design calculations for all
components of stairs, landings, and ladders with design live
loads noted, sealed by Professional Engineer licensed in
State of construction site, to be reviewed for general
compliance with intent of information given in Contract
Documents.
B. Product data: Describing manufacturers line intended for use
where factory manufactured systems are indicated.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
05500-2
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
01
04
05
06
O8
A. Provide sleeves, embedded anchors and other built in items in
time for installation, or pay costs of cutting in items later,
and grouting.
B. Verify field conditions prior to fabrication.
04
O5
O6
08
12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
12
15 2.01 MATERIALS
15
18
19
20
21
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
45
47
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1o Materials listed:
a. Base: As noted.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Structural steel: ASTM A36, ASO1, A575 or Al08.
Co Cast steel: ASTM A27, Grade 65-35; and A148, Grade 80-50.
Do Steel forgings: ASTM A668.
Eo Rivet steel: ASTM A502.
F. Bolts: ASTM A307, A325, A354.
Go Filler metal: AWS Standards.
H. Cast iron: ASTM A48, Class 30, min. 30,000 PSI tensile.
I. Malleable iron: ASTM A47 and A197.
J. Steel pipe: ASTM A53.
K. Galvanizing: ASTM A123, A386, or A525.
L. Aluminum: ASTM B308 for particular alloy in standard shapes
and extrusions, B26 for castings.
M. Stainless steel: ASTM A484 and A276, Type 302.
N. Anchorage devices, masonry: Standard manufactured items.
1~ Lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts 1/4 IN
(6 mm) and smaller: Head out embedded nut type.
2° For machine screws and bolts larger than 1/4 IN (6 mm):
Manufacturers' standard.
18
19
20
21
22
24
26
28
3O
32
34
36
38
4O
42
44
45
47
49
50
51
52
53
U.SoP.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
2O
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
3O
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
'47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
05500-3
3. Bolt anchor expansion shields for lag bolts: Zinc alloy,
long shield anchors.
4. Bolt anchor expansion shields for bolts: Closed end bottom
bearing type.
O. Fasteners: Zinc coated where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for type, grade and class required.
1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head ASTM A307, Grade-A.
2. Lag Bolts: Square head type.
3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel.
4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel.
5. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel.
6. Lock Washers: Helical spring carbon steel.
P. Primer: Rust Inhibiting. 1. Use primer compatible with finish coats of paint.
2. Coordinate metal primer with finish paint requirements
specified in Section 09900.
Q. Galvanizing repair paint: 1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and
abrasions in galvanized steel.
2. Z.R.C. by ZRC Co.
3. Inorganic zinc coating by Tnemec, or Hentzen.
R. Dissimilar metal protection coating: 1. Tnemec Theme-Tar 413.
2. Coal tar epoxy by Glidden or Porter.
S. Grout, non-shr£nk: Sika; 5 Star; or Sauereisen.
T. Expansion joint covers: Aluminum, anodized; Construction
Specialties, Inc; Balco; MM Systems width of joint as
indicated.
1. CCB wall/CCB wall: MM, Model UX-A200.
2. Corner CCB wall/CCB wall: MM, Model UX-C200.
3. GWB wall/GWB wall: MM, Model KX-200.
4. Interior aluminum framing system: MM, Model FX-K125.
5. GWB ceiling/GWB ceiling: MM, Model KX-200.
6. Concrete floor/concrete floor: MM, Model FX-B1.
7. RVT floor/RVT floor: MM, Model FX-T1.
8. CPT floor/CPT floor: MM, Model FX-T1.
9. Asphalt plank floor/asphalt plank floor: MM, Model FX-T14.
10. Concrete floor/asphalt plank floor: MM, Model FX-B1/T14.
I1. L.O.G. floor: MM, Model FX-T1M.
12. Concrete floor/wall: MM, Model FX-E1BM.
13. RVT floor/wall: MM, Model FX-E1M.
14. Asphalt plank floor/wall: MM, Model FX-E14M.
15. Fire rated walls: Add MM, thermo-flex shield fire
barriers.
U. Stair nosings for concrete stairs: Abrasive type with steel
wing anchors and recessed screws.to allow replacement of units:
1. Space anchors not over 24 IN (600 mm) on center.
2. Minimum 3 anchors per nosing.
01
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
3O
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05500-4
3. Furnish units full width of treads.
4. Balco, Inc., XH 300 modified; American Abrasive Metals Co.,
131-A; or Wooster Products, Inc., WP3T.
01
02
03
06 2.02 FABRICATION
O6
09
10
12
13
15
16
18
20
22
24
25
27
28
A. Form to shapes indicated with straight lines,· sharp angles,
smooth curves.
B. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges for temporary field
connections and attachment of work by other trades.
C. Make permanent shop and field connections with continuous
fillet type welds.
D. Grind exposed welds smooth.
E. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
F. Shop fabricate in as large assemblies as practicable.
G. Meet requirements specified under Structural Steel for
fabricating items of structural nature or use.
H. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accor~ with
AVS.
09
10
12
13
15
16
18
2O
22
24
25
'27
28
31 2.03 SHOP PRIMING
31
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
52
53
A. Galvanize all items set in, or on, exterior surface.
B. Apply shop primer to all ferrous metal not indicated to be set
tn or receive concrete.
1. Apply 2 shop coats to metals that will be inaccessible after
erection.
2. Do not prime stainless steel, aluminum, copper, brass, or
bronze unless specifically indicated.
C. Remove scale, rust and deleterious materials before priming. 1. Clean off rust and loose mill scale in accord with SSPC
SP-2, SP-3, or SSPC SP-7.
2. Remove contaminants in accord with SSPC SP-1.
D. Immediately after surface preparation, prime in accord with
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Provide uniform dry film thickness of 1.0 mil.
E. Provide dissimilar metal protection coating:
1. When dissimilar metals come in contact.
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
06
05500-5
2. When metal or aluminum is anchored to or in contact with
concrete or masonry.
F. Retouch any scraped, abraded, and unprimed surfaces. 1. Use primer specified for shop coats.
2. Priming does not count as a coat for finish painting.
01
02
O4
O5
O6
09 2.04 METAL FABRICATIONS - PARTIAL LIST
O9
12
14
15
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Verify completeness of following listing.
B. Supply all items required to complete construction and
installation.
C. Anchorage accessories: Required to secure wood to metal, wood
to masonry, metals to masonry or concrete, metal to metal or
metal to other items.
D. Ladders:
1. Type 1:
a. Galvanized steel.
b. Side rail dimension of minimum 1/2 x 2 IN (12 x 50 mm).
c. Rungs: Minimum 7/8 IN (21 mm) round or square bars.
d. Punch rungs through side rails and weld.
e. Size to support concentrated moving load of 200 LB ~91
KG).
f. Minimum clearance from centerline of rung to wall or
obstruction: 7 IN (175 mm).
g. Minimum ladder width: 24 IN (600 mm) between side rails.
h. Rung spacing: 12 IN (300 mm) on center.
2. Type 2: Miscellaneous configurations.
a. Refer to drawings for ladder configurations.
b. Design Type 2 ladders to support concentrated moving load
of 200 LBS, adhering as much as possible to design as
detailed.
E. Metal gratings: Type 1, Type 2; galvanized steel, nominal
1-1/2 IN (38 mm) thick.
1. Support minimum uniform load of 200 PSF (976 KSM).
2. Provide individual gratinglsections sized to allow removal
by hand.
3. Provide hold down clips.
4. Furnish with frames, support items, and fastening devices.
5. Provide slip resistant tops (Type 1); for catwalks work
platforms, and mechanical mezzanine floors, or where
otherwise exposed to foot traffic.
6. Coordinate installation of light fixtures in Type 2 grating.
F. Stairs, steel pan, factory manufactured: Comply with following
minimum requirements:
1. General arrangement with rise, run, landing dimensions,
etc., as indicated.
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
12
14
15
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27'
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
53
54
05500-6
2. Design auxiliary framing not indicated and modifications to
framing required for stairs.
3. Fabricate and design stair and landing assembly in accord
with NAAMH Metal Stairs Manual and latest AISC Manual of
steel construction for loads specified.
4. Stringers: Minimum 3/16 IN (4.5 mm) steel plate.
5. Treads: Minimum 14 GA (1.9 mm) pans.
6. Risers: Minimum 14 GA (1.9 mm).
7. Landings: Minimum 10 GA (3 mm) pans with angle stiffeners
as required.
8o Form surface of nosings with slip resistant materials.
9. Provide stairs which will accept concrete fill thickness
indicated.
10. Modify standard railings to meet details.
11. Stair and landing assembly shall be designed to support a
1000 PSF (453 KG) concentrated, moving load or 100 PSF (488
KSM), whichever requires stronger components.
G. Handrails, railings, and guardrails:
1. Use galvanized steel pipe for exterior use.
2. Posts manufactured from 1-1/2 IN (38 mm) O.D. 11 GA
structural grade steel pipe.
3. Top railing 1-1/2 IN (38 mm) steel pipe.
4. Intermediate railings 1-1/4 IN O.D. (32 mm) 10 steel pipe°
5. Form to profiles indicated.
6. Mount to provide total projection from walls not excee~ing
3-1/2 IN (88 mm).
7. Set mounting brackets and posts not over 8 FT (2.4 H) on
center or as detailed.
8. Provide sleeves and mounting devices for removable
guardrails where indicated.
9. Installed top rails and railings capable of withstanding a
200 LB (90 KG) force applied in any direction at any point.
10. Return ends of all wall mounted rails to wall.
11. Make all rails smooth with no projections preventing a ha~d
from sliding along entire length.
12. Provide sleeves for anchoring of railings in concrete.
13. Interior intermediate railings at catwalks and mechanical
platforms:
a. 3/4 IN round steel rods, spaced equally as indicated.
b. Insert ends into steel plate tabs on post and weld.
c. Welds shall only occur at post centerlines.
H. Support angles, members and loose lintels: 1. Size as indicated.
2. Galvanize units in exterior walls.
3. Prime interior units.
ASTM A36 steel.
I. Bollards: 6 IN (150 mm) diameter extra strength steel pipe. 1o Size to provide minimum 44 IN (1050 mm) projection above
ground, more if so indicated, and minimum 36 IN (900 mm)
embedment into concrete.
2. Fabricate with welded on anchors.
3. Fill with 3000 psi concrete with rounded top.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29 --
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
53
54 -
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05500-7
02
03
O4
O5
O6
O7
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
J. Expansion joint covers: Aluminum, as required at all wall and
floor expansion joints to provide finished appearance, paint to
match adjacent surfaces.
1. Provide fire rated expansion joint covers which comply with
UL design numbers U90OE, U90OF, U40OA, or U400B as
applicable to wall construction type.
K. Cast iron manhole covers: 1. ASTM A48-74 Class 3OB.
2. Side play: Maximum 1/8 IN per lineal foot in any direction.
3. Seated to provide non-rocking fit.
4. Vulcraft Model VM-37, plain cover.
L. Heavy duty piano hinge: 1. Steel.
2. Size as required to support loads imposed.
3. Braun Manufacturing Co., Wagner; Bronson.
M. Stair nosings: 1. Cast iron.
2. Width: 2 IN, minimum.
3. Barry Craft, B-116; Wooster Products Inc., Type 101;
Safe-T-Metal Co., Style AX.
4. Install flush using manufacturers standard anchorage
devices.
30 PART 3 - EXECDTION
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
3O
33 3.01 INSPECTION
33
36
38
39
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
36
38
39
42 3.02 INSTALLATION
42
45
47
49
51
53
54
A. Set work level, true to line, plumb.
B. Shim and grout as necessary.
C. Weld field connections and grind smooth.
D. Where practical, conceal fastenings.
E. Secure metal to wood with lag screws, of adequate size, with
appropriate washers.
45
47
49
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
05500-8
02
03
O4
O5
07
08
10
11
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
27
F. Secure metal to concrete with embedded anchors, setting
compounds, calking and sleeves, or setting grout.
1. Use expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or screws for light duty
service.
G. Meet structural ~equirements for erecting items of structural
nature.
H. Do not field splice fabricated items unless size requires
splicing.
I. Weld all splices.
J. Furnish all handrails complete with brackets. 1o Wherever pickets or posts are indicated to be set in
sleeves, provide steel sleeves having a minimum wall
thickness of 1/8 IN (3 mm).
2. Set pickets or posts in sleeves with nonshrink grout.
3. Where setting is required for exterior, hold nonshrink grout
back 1/4 IN (6 mm) from surface.
4. Fill flush with sealant.
K. Provide all fabricated items complete with attachment devices
as required to install.
END OF SECTION
02
03
04
O5
07
08
10
11
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
27
U.S.PoS. - No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
03
6A09, 8C01
SECTION 06000
CARPENTRY
06000-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - G]~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
27
30 1.02
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all carpentry not specifically indicated as work of
other sections, as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Architectural cabinetwork: Section 06410.
2. Finishing: Section 09900.
3. Plastic laminate faced cabinetwork: Section 12340.
QUALITY STANDARDS
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
3O
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
A. Lumber grading rules and species: 1. U.S.Department of Commerce, PS 20-70.
2. Western Wood Products Assodiation (WWPA).
3. Southern Forest Products Association (SFPA).
B. Plywood grading rules and recommendations: 1. For softwood plywood: U.S.Department of Commerce PS 1-83.
2. For hardwood plywood: U.S.Department of Commerce PS 51-71.
3. American Plywood Assocation (APA).
C. Factory marking:
1. Identify type, grade, moisture content, inspection service,
producing mill, and other qualities.
2. Marking may be omitted if certificate of inspection is
provided for each shipment.
D. Standards for fire hazard classification for fire retardant
treated material: Underwriters' Laboratories, (U/L) and
American Wood Preservers Institute (AWPI).
1. Test method: ASTM E-84-84.
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
O5
06000- 2
E. Preservative and pressure treatment standards: American Wood
Preservers Association (AWPA).
F. Workmanship: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Premium
Grade Standards.
O1
O2
O4
O5
08 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
O8
11
12
14
15
A. Shop drawings:
1. All fabricated items.
B. Samples:
1. Materials, color and finish.
11
12
14
15
18 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
18
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
32
34
35
A. Store in dry, weathertight, ventilated spaces.
B. Do not bring items into building until receiving spaces are dry
enough, under 15 percent RH.
C. Stack to provide air circulation.
D. Store and protect materials in areas where moisture content can
be maintained.
E. Time delivery and installation to avoid delaying progress of
other work.
F. Handle treated material and repair damage in accord with AWPA
M-4.
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
32
34
35
38 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
38
41
44
45
47
49
50
A. Drawings indicate type, arrangement, and location of items of
finish carpentry and millwork.
B. If variations from arrangement or profile indicated are
required, notify Contracting Officer.
C. Make such variations at no added expense to Owner.
D. Contractor is responsible for fitting to all recesses,
including all trim pieces, fillers and closures.
41
42
44
45
47
49
50
U.S.PoSo : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1 1.06 DEFINITIONS
06000-3
04
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
22
23
A. Exposed surfaces: All surfaces visible when doors and drawers
are closed, including but not limited to:
1. Door and drawer fronts, and their edges.
2. Inside of doors.
3. Exposed ends.
4. Countertop and blacksplash and exposed edges.
5. Face frame (if used).
6. Interior of open cabinets.
7. Toe strip not covered by separate base.
8. Wall mounted adjustable shelves.
9. Bottom of wall case over 4 FT above floor.
10. Top of cases less than 6 FT above floor.
B. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible after installation,
and:
1. Web frames.
2. Dust panels.
C. Semi-exposed surfaces: All other surfaces not exposed or
concealed.
01
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
22
23
27 'PART 2 - PRODUCTS
30 2.01 MATERIALS - ROUGH CARPENTRY
27
3O
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Lumber (for framing, blocking, nailers, furring, bumpers cant
strips, grounds, and similar members): Comply with dry size
requirements of PS-20, Douglas fir WVPA No.3, or SFPA No.2.
1. Thoroughly seasoned, well fabricated materials of longest
practical lengths and sizes.
2. Free of non-correctable warp.
3. Discard material which would impair quality of work.
B. Plywood: PS1, exterior type, A-C Grade.
1. Provide MD0-EXT-APA Plywood, where indicated.
C. Preservative treated material: 1. Provide preservative treated material for all material used
outside building, in roof, and below grade.
2. Treated lumber standard: AWPA C-2.
3. Treated plywood standard: AWPA C-9.
4. Preservative treatment standard: AWPA P-5.
5. Kiln dry treated material to 15 percent moisture content.
6. Where possible, precut material before treatment.
7. Use salt preservative treatment on material used in
conjunction with elastic sheet roofing (ESR).
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. -~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F..& V.M.F.
O!
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
06000-4
D. Fire retardant treated material: 1. Provide fire retardant treated material inside building.
2. Treated lumber standard: AWPA C-20.
3. Treated plywood standard: AWPA C-27.
4. Kiln dry treated material to 15 percent moisture content.
5. Maximum flame spread rating: 25, ASTM E84.
6. Use treatment which will not bleed through or adversely
affect bond of any applied finish.
7. Provide U/L label or certificate on each piece of fire
retardant treated material.
E. Combination fire retardant/preservative treated material:
1. Provide combination fire retardant/preservative treated
material for all material used within exterior walls of
building, including parapets; as well as all structures
within all gardens, and courtyard.
2. Lumber: AWPA C-20 with exterior type decay resistance.
3. Plywood: AWPA C-27 with exterior type decay resistance.
4. Kiln dry ~all treated material to 15 percent moisture
content.
F. Anchorage and fastening materials: Proper type, size, material
and finish for application.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
26 2.02 MATERIALS - FINISH CARPENTRY
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
4O
42
43
45
46
48
49
5O
52
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Finish hardware:
a. Base: K & V Manufacturing Co., or equal.
2. Other materials:
a. Base: As noted.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Plywood exposed: Veneer or particle core, plain sliced Red Oak
with minimum 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick solid hardwood edges, A grade.
C. Hardwood: Solid, S4S, plain sliced Red Oak.
D. Shelves, semi-exposed: A grade, veneer core, Fir plywood, with
minimum 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick solid hardwood edges.
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade l-M-3, made with
formaldehyde free binder. Seal all cuts.
F. Shelf supports, adjustable (not in cabinets): 1. Standards: KV 87, heavy duty, or equal.
2. Supports: KV 186 or 187, or equal.
G. Shelf and rod support:-KV 1195, paint finish, or equal.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
4O
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
52
U.S.P.S..-N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1 2.03 FABRICATION
06000-5
04
O6
O8
09
11
12
14
A. Finish panel edges to match exterior surfaces.
B. Assemble without use of exposed fasteners.
C. Provide access panels if installed work covers mechanical,
electrical or other items requiring access.
D. Provide intermediate supports for shelving exceeding 42 IN
(1.07 M) in length.
E. Dado and glue hardwood edging in place.
O1
04
06
O8
09
11
12
14
18 PART
18
21 3.01 PREPARATION - ROUGH CARPENTRY
21
24
25
27
28
30
32
A. Verify measurements, dimensions and shop drawing details before
proceeding.
B. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, groundl and
similar supports for attached work.
C. Examine conditions under which work is to be installed.
D. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
24
25
27
28
30
32
35 3.02 INSTALLATION ROUGH CARPENTRY
'35
38
39
4O
41
42
44
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Attach work securely by anchoring and fastening as indicated or
required to support applied loading.
1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts.
2. Nail plywood in accord with APA recommendations.
3. Countersink nail heads, fill holes with matching filler.
B. Set work to required levels and lines, plumb, true.
C. Cut and fit accurately.
D. Make connections tight. 1. Use common wire nails or screws for general work.
2. Use finishing nails for finish work.
3. Use fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where
opposite side will be exposed to view or receive finish
materials.
38
39
4O
41
42
44
46
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
O8
09
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
06000-6
4. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
5. Do not drive threaded friction type fasteners.
6. Tighten bolts and lag screws at installation and retighten
as required.
7. Use galvanized nails and fasteners.
E. Provide wood grounds, nailers, or blocking where required for
attachment of other work and surface applied items.
F. Form to shapes indicated.
G. Provide wood blocking between studs at height of door stop,
behind stop, at all door openings. (See Section 08700 for
height.)
H. Grounds: Dressed, key bevelled lumber minimum 1-1/2 IN (38 mm)
wide of thickness required to bring face of ground even with
finish material.
I. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
J. Install wood furring plumb and level with closure strips at all
edges and openings.
K. Shim as required.
L. Field treat cuts and holes in preservative and fire retardant
treated material in accord with AWPA Standard M-4.
M. Install roofing nailers as indicated: 1. Match height of nailers to insulation.
2. Anchor nailers to resist force of 75 PLF (111 KG/M).
3. Use minimum of 3 anchors for each nailer, with 1/2 IN ~12
mm) vent spaces between lengths of nailers.
0!
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
38 3.03 PREPARATION FINISH CARPENTRY
38
41
43
45
46
A. Examine areas to receive work.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
41
43
45
46
49 3.04 INSTALLATION - FINISH CARPENTRY
49
52
53
A. Set items in proper location, assemble, level, neatly fit, and
secure in place.
52
53
UoS.P.So -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V,M.F~
01 3.05 PREPARATION FOR FINISH
04
06
08
10
A. Set all nails.
B. Fill holes.
C. Sand smooth before application of finishes.
D. Leave ready for finishing.
13 3.06 ADJUST AND CLEAN
16
18
20
22
24
26
A; Promptly remove all debris, dirt and rubbish.
B. After installation, adjust all operating parts.
C. Leave items in perfect operating condition.
D. Remove and replace rejected work.
E. Install temporary coverings to protect installed work.
END OF SECTION
06000-7
01
04
06
O8
10
13
16
18
20
22
24
26
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
6K26, 8G14
SECTION 06410
ARCHITECTURAL CABINETWORK
06410-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all architectural cabinetwork as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not s.pecifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. See Drawings for types of countertops required.
C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Carpentry: Section 06000.
2. Mechanical work: Division 15.
3. Electrical work: Division 16.
D. Definitions:
1. Exposed surfaces: Ail surfaces visible when doors and
drawers are closed, inside .of doors, and:
a. Door and drawer fronts, and their edges.
b. Exposed end.
c. Countertop and backsplash and their exposed edges.
d. Face frame (if used).
e. Interior of open cabinets.
f. Toe strip not to be covered by separate base.
g. Wall mounted adjustable shelves.
h. Bottom of wall case over 4 FT above floor.
i. Top of wall and tall cases below 6 FT above floor.
2. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible after
installation, and:
a. Web frames.
b. Dust panels.
3. Semi-exposed surfaces: Ail other surfaces.not exposed or
concealed.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5O
UoS.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
06410-2
A. Construction details, fastening, tolerances and workmanship:
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Custom grade standards,
with exceptions indicated.
B. Wall cabinet load tests: Submit independent testing agency
reports.
1. Test unit: Minimum 36 x 36 IN (900 x 900 mm) with 2
intermediate shelves; test wall: 25 GA (0.5 mm) metal studs
with 5/8 IN (15 mm) thick gypsum wallboard.
2. Attach to test wall in same method proposed for project.
3o Shelf load test: Load with 50 PSF (225 Kg/SM).
4. Cabinet load test: Load each shelf with 50 PSF (225 Kg/SM).
5. At end of each test there shall be no permanent deformation
or damage or failure of anchorage.
O1
O2
O3
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
17 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
17
2O
21
22
24
25
27
28
29
A. Shop drawings:
1. Complete details of construction and elevations of all
cabinets.
B. Samples:
1o Each finish for pattern, finish and color selection.
C. Project information: 1. Wall cabinet load test reports.
2. Maintenance data.
20
21
22
24
25
27
28
29
32 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
32
35
37
39
4O
A. Verify dimensions at site.
B. Verify locations of items furnished in other sections.
C. If necessary to vary from arrangement indicated, make such
variations only after approval of Contracting Officer.
35'
37
39
4O
44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
47 2.01 GENERAL
47
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Cabinetwork: Custom, shop or factory built casework, complete
with all hardware, accessories, countertops and bases, in sizes
and configurations indicated.
1. Style: Flush overlay, with square cornered doors and drawer
fronts overlapping case front with minimum reveal.
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O4
2.02
2. Exterior finish:
MATERIALS
06410-3
Plastic laminate and methyl acrylic.
O1
04
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Methyl acrylic: (Corian, Fountainhead):
a. Base: DuPont; Nevemar.
2. Plastic laminate:
a. Base: Formica Corp.; Nevamar Corp.; Ralph Wilson
Plastics, Co.(WilsonArt).
3. Plastic overlay panel products:
a. Base: Simpson Timber Co.; Sel-Ply Div./Medford Corp.
4. Cabinet hardware:
a. Base: National Lock Co.; Knape & Vogt; Grant; Epco;
Webber-Knapp; Stylmark; Ives; and Stanley.
5. Stains and varnishes:
a. Base: Pratt and Lambert, Inc.; Glidden Div./SCM Corp.;
Sherwin-Williams Co.; Fuller-O'Brien Div./O'Brien Corp.
6. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Methyl acrylic: Nevamar Fountainhead. 1. Countertops and back splashes 3/4 IN thick, double at
exposed edges to 1-1/2 IN. Round edges to 3/8 IN radius.
2. Color: FS-6-2, pewter gray.
C. Plastic laminate: Nevamar or equal.
1. Grade GP28, 0.028 IN (0.7 mm) thick.
2. NEMA LD3-1975 high pressure laminate, textured finish.
3. Color: Dove gray S-6-3T textured.
4. Provide backer sheet on each plastic laminated item.
a. Semi-exposed backer sheet: Grade CL20, 0.020 IN (0.5 mm)
thick; color to match plastic overlay.
b. Concealed backer sheet: Grade BK20, 0.020 IN (0.5 mm)
thick.
5. Color of laminate on edges: Same as surface of the item.
6. See "Fabrication-Case Components" for components requiring
plastic laminate finish.
D. Plastic overlay: Resin impregnated paper overlay hot press
cured onto substrates; with backer/balance sheet.
1. Conform to NEMA L0-1-1977 requirements for "General Purpose"
decorative board (not "Light Duty" liner type).
2. Satin finish, opaque color.
3. Resin: Polyester; phenolic resin may be used on concealed
surfaces.
4. Color: White.
5. Substrates: As indicated below; see "Fabrication-Case
Components" for components requiring plastic overlay finish.
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, mat-formed, 45 PCF density.
1. Type l-M-3 for general use.
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
U.S.P.S._- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
03
O4
O6
08
09
10
12
14
15
16
18
19
21
23
24
25
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
06410-4
2. Type 2-M-2 for counters with sinks.
F. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, medium density wood fiberboard, 48
PCF density, minimum.
G. Hardboard: CS251, tempered, smooth on both sides.
H. Hardwood plywood: PS51-71, red oak plain sliced, with veneer
or particle core, A grade on exposed faces, good grade (1) on
all other faces.
I. Plywood: PS1-83, softwood plywood, AA grade.
J. Hardwood: Solid, S4S. 1. Exposed: Red oak.
2. Other locations: Any hardwood.
K. Pegboard: Tempered hardboard, 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick with 3/16 IN
(5 mm) holes.
L. Stainless steel (for tops): 16 GA (1.5 mm), Type 304.
Table frames: All welded 12 GA (2.6 mm) steel tube; front,
back and side rails; straight legs with adjustable glides;
black baked enamel finish.
N. Footrest (in kneespace units): Stainless steel tube with'
flange attachment.
O. Grilles: Aluminum, satin finish.
1. Type 1: Anemostat AL13. 70 percent free area; 0.2 IN WG
maximum total static pressure loss, or equal, hay.lng same
performance.
2. Type 2: Anemostat X3HOD, opposed blade damper, 70 percent
free area; maximum neck velocity 3000 FPM; 0.2 IN WG maximum
total static pressure loss, or equal, having same
performance.
01
03
O4
O6
08
09
10
12
14
15
16
18
19
21
23
24
25
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40 2.03 HARDVARE
4O
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Hardware for hinged doors:
1. Hinges: Institutional (hospital tip), 5 knuckle, wrap
around type (screwed to back of door and side of
divider/end), with barrel only projecting beyond face of
cabinet.
a. Not less than 2-1/2 IN (62 mm) long.
b. Minimum 3 screws each leaf.
Co For doors up to 48 IN (1200 mm) high: 2 hinges.
d. For doors over 48 IN (1200 mm) high: 3 hinges.
e. Finish: Dull chrome.
2. Pull: Wire, 4 IN (100 nun) centers; satin chrome finish.
3. Catch:
43
44
45
.46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
39
4O
41
06410-5
a. Magnetic, adjustable, 6 - 7 LB (2.7 - 3.2 Kg) pull.
b. On doors over 4 SF (0.4 SM), provide 40 LB (18 Kg) unit.
4. Lock: Provide where indicated.
B. Hardware for drawers:
1. Slides: KV 1600 series or equal; 100 LB (45 Kg) capacity,
nylon wheels/rollers, stainless steel ball bearings,
positive closing and pull out stops, drawer removable
without use of tools; file drawers: Full extension.
2. Pull: Wire, 4 IN (100 mm) centers, satin chrome finish;
provide 2 on drawers over 18 IN (450 mm) wide.
3. Lock: Provide where indicated.
4. For file drawers: Label holder and file hanger frame.
C. Locks: Heavy duty institutional pin tumbler type; latch or cam
suitable for application; National Lock M2-0106 series, or
equal.
1. Provide 2 keys for each lock.
2. Master key and grand master key as directed.
D. Shelf supports (recessed standard type):
1. Standards: Aluminum or zinc coated or plated steel, slotted
at 1 - 2 IN (25 50 mm) OC, for recessed installation.
2. Shelf clips: Plated or zinc coated steel; designed to
engage securely in slots.
E. Shelf supports (for wall mounted shelves): Anochrome or ·
anodized aluminum (natural) finish.
1. Standards: Slotted steel or aluminum.
2. Shelf brackets: Boltless, steel or aluminum, for shelf
depths indicated.
F. Clothes rod: Chrome plated or stainless steel tube, 1 IN (25
mm) diameter minimum, with supports.
G. Coat hook: Stainless steel or satin aluminum; single, double
or ceiling style as indicated.
H. Locks for sliding glass panels:
panels.
1. KV 965.
Provide at all sliding glass
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
39
40
41
44 2.04 FABRICATION-CASE COMPONENTS-PLASTIC FACED
44
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Fini'shes for cabinets: 1. Tops and splashes: Methyl acrylic.
2. Ail other exposed surfaces: Plastic laminate.
3. Ail semi-exposed surfaces not covered with plastic laminate
backer sheet (except hardwood): Plastic overlay°
4. Edges of doors, drawer fronts and case body members: Plastic
laminate.
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
O8
O9
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
06410-g
B. Case body members (except backs not exposed): Minimum 3/4 IN
(18 mm) thick particleboard.
1. Base unit top: Use either full sub-top or web frame.
2. Web frames: Lumber.
3. Provide drawer lock rails at all drawers.
4. Provide backs on all cabinets.
C. Unexposed case back: Minimum 1/4'IN (6 mm) thick hardboard,
particleboard or plywood°
D. Shelves: Minimum 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick particleboard; 1 IN (25
mm) thick over 36 IN (900 mm) between supports.
g. Doors: Particleboard.
1. Up to 26 IN wide or 48 IN high (600 or 1220 mm): 3/4 IN (18
mm) thick.
2. Up to 36 IN wide or 66 IN high (900 or 1680 mm): 1-1/4 IN
(30 mm) thick.
3. Over 36 IN wide or 66 IN high (900 or 1680 mm): 1-3/8 IN
(35 mm) thick, solid-core.
F. Drawers: 1. Fronts: 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick particleboard.
2. Sub-front (if used), sides and back: 1/2 IN (12 mm) thick
hardwood.
3. Bottom: Minimum 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick, hardboard; over 18 IN
(45 mm) wide provide intermediate reinforcing rails.
G. Case base: Separate or integral.
H. Small compartment dividers and dust panels: 1/4 IN (6 mm)
thick hardboard.
I. Filler panels and scribe pieces: Particleboard; provide as
required to fit standard size units to space.
J. Methyl acrylic countertops: 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick, build up to
1-1/2 IN (36 mm) at all edges. 3/8 IN radius edge.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
O8
09
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
41 2.05 FABRICATION
41
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
A. Case body: Ail joints glued. 1. Top and bottom (and fixed horizontals): Lock jointed,
dadoed or rabbetted into ends/dividers; and screwed;
dowelled at approximately 2-1/2 IN (60 mm) OC.
2. Back: Dadoed or rabbetted into top, sides and bottom.
3. Fixed small compartment dividers: Dadoed.
or
B. Drawers (with sub-front): Ail Joints glued.
1. Ail corners: Dovetailed or dowelled; or front corners
dovetailed and back corners lock-Jointed; or sides dadoed
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
06410-7
for front and back and all joints nailed, stapled or
screwed.
2. Bottom: Dadoed into all 4 sides.
3. Front: Screwed onto sub-front.
4. Top edges of drawer box rounded.
C. Drawers (without sub-front): Ail Joints glued. 1o Front corners dovetailed or dowelled.
2. Back corners: Dovetailed, dowelled, or lock-jointed;
sides dadoed for back and corner nailed or screwed.
3. Bottom: Dadoed into all 4 sides.
4. Top edges of drawer sides and back rounded.
or
D. Methyl acrylic countertops: 1. Backsplash: Glued and screwed onto top.
2. Joints in methyl acrylic: Not closer than 24 IN (600 mm) to
sinks.
3. Joints in counter length: Factory fitted, splined, glued,
and mechanically fastened.
E. Use no blocking or fasteners in exposed or semi-exposed
locations.
01
02
03
04
05
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
25 2.06 CASE CONFIGURATION
28
29
3O
32
33
35
36
37
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
A. Similar reveal (approximately 1/4 IN (6 mm)) at all sides, top
and bottom of doors and drawer fronts, and between doors and
drawer fronts in same unit.
B. Double door units: No vertical rail or divider between doors
unless called for or unless locks are called for.
C. Toe space: 4 IN (100 mm) high by approximately 3 IN (75 mm)
deep; provide on front of each base unit unless otherwise
noted.
D. Countertop: Front and exposed ends to align with face of
cabinet unless otherwise noted.
E. Hardware mounting: 1. Drawers: Center pull in front, horizontally.
2. Drawers with 2 pulls: Set pulls at 1/4 points.
3. Swinging doors: Set pull in swing side corner;
at top of base units; at bottom of wall units.
vertically;
F. Adjustable shelves: Use recessed standards. 1. Depth: 1/2 IN (12 mm) less than inside cabinet depth.
2. Width: 1/8 IN (3 mm), maximum, less than inside cabinet
width.
25
28
29
3O
32
33
35
36
37
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
U.S.PoS. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
06410-8
01 PART 3 - ~'~CIITION
01
04 3.01 INSPECTION
04
07
09
10
A. Examine conditions under which products are to be installed.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
O7
09
10
13 3.02 INSTALLATION
13
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
A. Use manufacturer's printed instructions or Drawings in all
cases where items or details are not indicated.
B. Provide all trim, fillers, closures, stands, supports, sleeves,
collars, escutcheons, ferrules, brackets, braces or other
miscellaneous items required for complete installation.
C. Install extra locks where directed; deliver unused locks and
keys to Contracting Officer.
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
27 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
30
31
33
35
37
A. Repair all damage done to premises, and remove all debris left
by this installation.
B. Test and adjust for satisfactory operation.
C. Adjust hinges so doors hang straight.
END OF SECTION
27
30
31
33
35
37
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
7B13, 8C01
SECTION 07162
DAMPPROOFING
07162-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all dampproofing as indicated, in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Division 3.
2. Precast dampproofing: Section 07176.
C. Apply dampproofing to: 1. Exterior of exterior walls below grade.
2. Exterior of walls surrounding areas having lowered floor
slabs.
3. Exterior of tunnel walls.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
34 1,02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
37
38
A. Applicator qualifications: Approved in writing by
manufacturer.
37
38
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
41
44
46
47
A. Product data.
B. Project information:
1. Certification of applicator qualifications.
44
46
47
50 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
5O
53
54
A. Proceed with work only after substrate construction and
penetrating work are complete and defects corrected.
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.N.F.
07162-2
02
03
O4
B. Proceed only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's
recommendations, and will permit materials to be successfully
applied.
02
03
O4
08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
O8
11 2.01 MATERIALS
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
24
25
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Dampproofing:
a. Base: Karnak Chemical Corporation No.920 gmulsion
Dampproofing; Sonneborn Building Products "Hydrocide 700
Mastic".
b. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Primer: As required by manufacturer.
C. Dampproofing: Fiber reinforced asphalt emulsion for trowel
application; ASTM D1227, Type I.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
24
25
29 PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
32 '3.01 INSTALLATION
32
35
36
38
4O
42
43
45
47
48
5O
52
A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to
work.
B. Comply with manufacturers installation instructions.
C. Prime per manufacturer's instructions.
D. Trowel apply in2 coats to minimum finish thickness of 1/8 IN
(3 mm).
E. Allow 24 hour cure period between coats.
F. Where walls intersect footings, lap dampproofing 1FT (300 mm)
onto footing.
Go Allow no dampproofing exposed in finish work°
- END OF SECTION
35
36
38
40
42
43
45
47
48
50
52
U.S.P.So ~ No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & VoH.F.
O1
O3
7F19, 8G19
SECTION 07176
WATER REPELLENT COATING (GC)
07176-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - G~-RRAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all water repellent coating - transparent as indicated,
in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Architectural precast concrete: Section 03450.
2. Concrete masonry: Section 04220.
3. Concrete finishing: Section 03312.
4. Architectural concrete: Section 03350.
5. Concrete tilt-up wall panels: Section 03430.
C. Dampproof surfaces indicated in paragraphs entitled
"Installation".
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
34 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
34
37
38
40
41
A. Proceed with work only after substrate construction and
penetrating work are complete and defects corrected.
B. Proceed only when conditions comply with manufacturer's
recommendations, and allow successful application.
37
38
40
41
44 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
44
47
49
5O
A. Product data: Not required.
B. Project information:
1. Warranty.
47
49
50
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07176-2
01 1o04 WARRANTY (See Section 01750)
O1
04
05
Ao Provide manufacturer's 10 year written warranty of
watertightness, and chloride protection.
04
O5
09 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
O9
12 2.01 MATERIALS
12
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
A. Acceptable manufacturers.
1. Dampproofing:
a. Base: Dynamit Nobel; H.S. Peterson; and L & M
Construction Chemicals, Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Transparent dampproofingo 1. Silane solution, minimum 40 percent solids.
2. L & M: Pentane; Dynamit Nobel: Chem Treat BSM 40;
M.S.Peterson: Isoflex 618.
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
29 PART 3 - EXECUTION
29 ~
32 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
32
35
37
39
41
43
45
A. Apply in 1 coat for all work.
B. Assure that substrates are clean and dry.
C. Apply by airless spray, brush or roller.
D. Protect adjacent areas from dampproofing.
E. Provide adequate ventilation.
F. Minimum coverage: 125 SF/GAL.
35
37
39
41
43
45
48 3.02 INSTALLATION - MASONRY
48
51
53
54
A. Apply to interior concrete masonry surfaces as scheduled.
B. Make all mortar repairs at least 48 hours prior to
dampproofing.
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F°
02
07176-3
C. Allow masonry to cure minimum 10 days prior to dampproofing.
05 3.03 INSTALLATION -' CONCRETE
08
09
11
13
15
16
18
A. Apply to all exterior architectural precast concrete and
concrete tilt-up wall panels.
B. Apply to all exterior cast in place concrete.
C. Apply to interior surfaces of concrete panels as scheduled.
D. Cure concrete and mortar at least 48 hours prior to
dampproofing.
END OF SECTION
02
O5
O8
09
11
13
15
16
18
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
4HO1, 8C01
sEcTION 07190
UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
07190-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all under slab vapor barriers as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated furnish and
install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
24
27
28
A. Install after substrate construction and penetrating worx has
been completed, and all defective work is corrected.
27
28
32 'PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
35 2.01 MATERIALS
35
38
39
4O
41
42
44
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Vapor barrier and tape:
a. Base: As noted.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Vapor barrier: Sro-Cote Products, Inc., Tu-Tuf 4. or
C. Vapor barrier: Polyethylene film. 1. 6 MIL thick.
2. Natural color.
3. Vapor transmission not exceeding 0.15 perm.
D. Vapor barrier tape: Polyethylene tape. 1. 4 IN (100 mm) wide..
2. Griffolyn Co., Grifftape.
38
39
40
41
42
44
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. GeorKia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07190-2
03 PART 3 - EXECUTION
03 --.,
06 3.01 INSTALLATION
O6
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
2O
21
23
25
27
A. Place continuous vapor barrier over subgrade material to
receive concrete slab.
1. Lap vapor barrier 3 IN (75 mm) at ends and edges of sheets
and seal with vapor barrier tape.
2. Extend to extremities of area.
3. Turn up at perimeter walls to form bond breaker and tape in
place.
B. Protect vapor barriers so that work of other trades does not
puncture, damage or deteriorate vapor barrier.
C. Repair all punctures, tears and other damage using vapor
barrier tape, prior to placing concrete.
D. Coordinate with Division 2 and 3 requirements and construction.
E. Trim off excess material after slab is placed.
END OF SECTION
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
20
21
23
25
27
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
7F19~ 8C01
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
07210-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all building insulation as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Roofing insulation: Section 07533.
2. Sound insulation: Section 09250.
3. Underslab Vapor Barrier: Section 07190.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
29 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
32
33
34
35
37
A. Insulation reference standards: 1. U/L requirements.
2. ASTM Ell9.
3. ASTM E84.
B. Insulation value exterior walls: R15.
32
33
34
35
37
40 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
4O
43 ~ A. Product data.
43
47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
47
50 2,01 MATERIALS
5O
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Rigid board insulation:
53
54
U.S.P.S. : No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
50
51
52
53
07210-2
a. Base: Dow Chemical Co.; Amoco; and UC Industries, or
equal.
2. Blanket or bart insulation:
a. Base: Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp.; and United States
Gypsum Co., or equal.
3. Rigid fiber insulation:
a. Base: Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp.; and United States
Gypsum Co., or equal..
4. Vapor barrier and tape:
a. Base: Fortifiber Corp.; Alumiseal Corp., or equal.
5. Other materials:
a. Base: As indicated.
6. Other manufacturers desiring approval, comply with Section
00440.
B. Insulation, rigid board: Foamed, extruded polystyrene. 1o Compressive strength: Min. 25 PSI.
2. Vapor transmission: 0.75 perm-in., max.
3. Water absorption: Max. 0.15 percent.
4. Thermal conductivity (k-value at 75 degF (23 degC)): 0.20.
5. Integral high density skin°
6. Styrofoam, Amocofoam or Foamular.
7. Thickness 2 IN.
C. Insulation, blanket or batt: Inorganic fibers and resinous
binders formed into flexible blankets or semi-rigid sheet~.
1. Thermal conductivity (k-value at 75 degF (23 degC)): 0.32.
2. Foil faced vapor barrier laminated to one face.
3. Unlaced.
4. E84 flame spread: Not greater than 25.
5. Minimum thickness: 3 IN (75 mm).
D. Insulation, rigid fiber: Inorganic fibers and resinous binders
formed into semi-rigid blankets.
1. Minimum thickness: 3 IN (75 mm).
2. E84 flame spread: Not greater than 25.
3. Unlaced, 24 IN (400 {600} mm) wide.
4. Owens-Corning "Pre-engineered Building Insulation" or USG
"Thermafiber Curtainwall Insulation".
Mechanical fasteners: Pronged hangers and slotted washers or
arrow pointed hangers.
1. Sized to fit insulation thickness.
2. Goodloe E.Moore, Inc., Gemco pronged hanger with WP washer;
Stic-Klip Co.; or Insul-Hold.
F. Mastic for use with mechanical fasteners: Goodloe E.Moore,
Inc., Fastener Adhesive; Miracle HT 4620, or equal.
G. Vapor barrier tape: Heavy duty 3 IN (75 mm) wide laminate
consisting of 0.00035 IN aluminum foil, glass fiber reinforced
two directional patterned Kraft paper or aluminum/mylar.
1. U/L listed class A.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
06
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. -_N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & VoM.F.
0!
O2
03
O4
O5
06
07210-3
2. Fasson Div./Avery Products Corp. FasTape 0820 FR-FSK, or
FasTape 0821FR-FSK-30; Zero Perm Pressure Sensitive Tape, or
equal.
3. If vapor barrier tape fails to adhere to any surface, spray
On a Spray Trim Adhesive, No.82130-1 by Norton or a similar
product by 3M to augment adhesion of tape, or equal.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
10 PAler 3 - RXI~CUTION
10
13 3.01 INSPECTION
13
16
18
19
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation indicates acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
16
18
19
22 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
22
25
27
29
31
33
35
36
38
39
4O
42
44
46
48
5O
51
52
53
A. Insulate full thickness over surfaces to be insulated.
B. Fit tightly around obstructions, fill voids.
C. Cover all penetrations with insulation.
D. Seal all joints with sealant or tape as applicable.
E. Seal or tape to abutting materials to maintain vapor tightness.
F. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation unless
more stringent requirements are specified.
G. If manufacturer's instructions are not available, or not
applicable, consult manufacturer's technical representative for
specific recommendations prior to installation.
H. Apply single layer to achieve total thickness.
I. Do not use broken or torn pieces of insulation.
J. Install so that completed installation is vapor tight.
K. Repair any areas to insure vapor tight integrity.
L. At uninsulated panels to receive metal studs and gypsum
wallboard, provide bart insulation at concrete panels which do
not receive metal studs-and gypsum wallboard, provide rigid
board insulation.
25
27
29
31
33
35
36
38
39
4O
42
44
46
48
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. -.N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O4
06
07
O9
11
13
15
17
19
2O
07210-4
3.03 INSTALLATION - RIGID FIBER INSULATION ON METAL DECK
A. Secure insulation by use of mechanical fasteners.
B. Locate fasteners 6 IN (150 mm) from all edges and at 12 IN (300
mm) OC each direction.
C. Thoroughly clean substrate before starting work.
D. Lay out work before installing mechanical fasteners.
E. Lay out fasteners and install in mastic.
F. Allow to set.
G. Test to ensure fasteners are secure.
H. Install insulation with tight joints without voids, pressing
onto fasteners.
01
O4
O6
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
2O
23 3.04 INSTALLATION - BLANKET OR BATT INSULATION
23
26
27
29
31
33
35
36
38
39
4O
41
42
43
A. Set with vapor barrier to inside of building; do not obstruct
ventilation spaces.
B. Secure units using mechanical fasteners.
C. Fill all miscellaneous voids indicated to be insulated.
D. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor barrier.
E. Use vapor barrier tape and seal each area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure vapor tight installation.
F. Where batt insulation is detailed to be installed without
continuous backing support (i.e. gypsum wallboard, plywood,
acoustic metal deck) which would prevent insulation from
deforming and falling out of place. Provide continuous backing
layer of "chicken wire" attached to metal studs or structure
and held tight a~alnst insulation.
26
27
29
31
33
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
46 3.05 INSTALLATION - RIGID BOARD INSULATION IN CAVITY WALLS
46
49
50
52
53
A. Do not proceed with installation until subsequent work which
conceals insulation is ready to be performed.
B. Extend insulation full-thickness in one layer over entire area
to be insulated.
49
50
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O2
O4
O5
07
09
11
07210-5
C. Install solid coating of mastic on outside of inside wythe of
masonry.
D. Press courses of insulation between wall ties (horizontal
reinforcing) with edges butted tightly both .ways.
E. Set units firmly into mastic.
F. Calk all joints.
END OF SECTION
O1
O2
O4
O5
07
O9
11~
U.S.P.S..- N. Texa$/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6D18, 8C01
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
07270-1
01
03
06 PA~T 1 - ~]~NE~AI.
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all firestopping as indicated, in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1. for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Firestopping of mechanical and electrical penetrations:
Divisions 15 and 16.
2. Sealants: Section 07900.
C. Firestop voids unless firestopping is specifically required
under other sections. Provide firestopping including:
1. At top of wall below structure.
2. At building expansion joints not protected by other
construction.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
35 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
35
38
4O
41
42
A. Product data: Not required.
B. Project information: 1. Data substantiating compliance with specified requirements.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
38
40
41
42
46 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
46
49 2.01 MATERIALS
49
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Safing insulation:
a. Base: U.S.Gypsum Co.; Fibrex Corp.
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
07270-2
2. Fill, void or cavity materials:
a. Base: Any manufacturer U/L listed for'systems used.
3. Forming materials:
a. Base: Any manufacturer U/L listed for systems used.
4. Firestop sealant:
a. Base: Any manufacturer U/L listed for systems use.
5. RTV foam:
a. Base: Any manufacturer U/L listed for systems use.
6. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Insulation, safing: Inorganic mineral fibers and binders
formed into semi-rigid blankets.
1. ASTM E84 flame spread: 25, max.
2. ASTM Ell9 tested for assembly and rating indicated.
3. Thickness and density as required to maintain fire rating of
assembly.
4. Retainer: Minimum 20 GA, G60, galvanized closure.
C. Fill, void or cavity, materials:
1. U/L.listed as "Fill, Void or Cavity Materials for use in
through - Penetration Firestop Systems'.
D. Forming materials:
1. U/L listed as "Forming materials" for use in "Through -
Penetration Firestop Systems".
E. Firestop sealant:
1. U/L' listed as "Firestop sealant" for use in expansion joint
sealing.
F. RTV foam:
1. U/L listed as "Firestop sealant" for use in expansion joint
sealing.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
38 PART 3 - RxxCIITION
38
41 3.01 INSTALLATION - SAFING INSULATION
41
44
45
47
48
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions, to maintain
fire separations indicated.
B. Install rigid batts, that resist smoke passage in only one
direction, in proper orientation to resist smoke passage.
44
45
47
48
51 3.02 INSTALLATION - FILL, VOID OR CAVITY MATERIALS
51
UoS.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V~M.F.
O1
O2
07270-3
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions, to maintain
fire separations indicated.
05 3.03 INSTALLATION - FORMING MATERIALS
O1
02
05
08
09
11
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions, to maintain
fire separations indicated.
B. Remove or leave in place in 'accord with U/L system.
08
09
11
14 3.04 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOP SEALANT
14
17
18
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions, maintain
fire separations indicated.
17
18
21 3.05 INSTALLATION - RTV FOAM
21
24
25
27
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions, maintain
fire separations indicated.
END OF SECTION
24
25
27
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MfF, & V.M.F.
O1
O3
7B13, 8C01
SECTION 07411
PREFORMED WALL PANELS
07411-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GEI~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services
for all preformed wall panels as indicated, in accordance
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Sealants: Section 07900.
2. Acoustic metal deck: Section 05305.
C. Work furnished but not installed:
1. Look out galleries: Section 13100.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
27
28
31 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
34
35
37
38
39
40
A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer or installer franchised
or approved in writing by manufacturer.
B. Design criteria: 1. Deflection: Not exceeding 1/180 with wind loading of 5 PSF.
2. Air infiltration: No air leakage with 5 PSF wind load.
3. Test according to ASTM E729-81.
34
35
37
38
39
4O
43 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
43
46
47
48
49
51
52
54
A. Samples: 1. 12 x 12 IN (300 x 300 mm) for color verification.
2. 30 IN (750 mm) x 7 FT 6 IN (2250 mm) sample erected on site
for color verification.
B. Project information:
1. Certification of installer qualifications.
C. Shop drawings.
46
47
48
49
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07411-2
04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
O4
07 2.01 MATERIALS
O7
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
19
2O
21
22
23
25
27
29
31
32
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Preformed wall panel system:
a. Base: Elwin G.Smith; V-Panel system; H.H.Robertson,
Varawall L2-V; Inryco Wall Systems, L21A system.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Panels: ASTM A525 steel sheets, G90 coated.
C. Design: Nominal 12 IN wide. 1. Stucco embossed.
2. Shiplap, tongue and groove edges which interlock.
3. Joints factory calked or gasketed.
4. Vertically installed.
D. Panel profile: 22 GA.
E. Panel finish: Prime coat of manufacturers standard color.'
F. Fastening system: Nonferrous painted to match panels.
G. Insulation: Minimum 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) thick, fiberglass or
mineral fiber.
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
27
29
31
32
36 PART 3 - ~"n~CUTION
36
39 3.01 INSPECTION
39
42
44
45
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
42
44
45
48 3.02 INSTALLATION
48
51
53
A. Erect system, per reviewed shop drawings.
Bo Erect with concealed fasteners.
51
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O4
· 06
07411-3
C. Use fasteners which lock entire unit to structural supports and
prohibit negative load pulloff under design loads.
D. Install where detailed (typically at L.O.G.).
END OF SECTION
01
O2
O4
O6
U.S.PoS. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
7B13, 8G20
SECTION 07413
PREFORMED METAL SIDING (P.M.S.)
07413-1
O1
03
PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
44
45
46
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all preformed metal siding as indicated, in accordance
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. As a portion of this work, provide a complete glazing system
detailed as an integral part of preformed metal siding
system. Glass provided under Section 08800.
3. Design and furnish all structural support members necessary
for installation of system. Allow for additional loads
imposed on support system by the work of others as detailed
in Contract Documents.
4. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
5. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
'and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation. ·
6. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
7. The panel system specified for this project is a
horizontally oriented system with long dimension of panel
spections being oriented horizontally and ends of panel
sections being oriented vertically. Nothing.in these
Contract Documents is to be interpreted as expressing a
preference for one particular panel jointing design over
another "ship-lap" and "tongue and groove" designs are
acceptable. Contractor's proposed system shall be tested
per these specifications in this configuration, no
exceptions.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Sealants: Section 07900.
2. Preformed wall panels: Section 07411.
C. Work installed but not furnished: 1. Glass and glazing: Section 08800.
2. Louvers: Section 10200.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
44
45
46
49 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
49
52
53
A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer or installer franchised
or approved in writing by manufacturer.
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25'
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
53
07413-2
B. Structural design criteria: 1. Deflection: Not exceeding 1/180 at 30 PSF wind load.
2. Test according ~o ANSI/ASTM E72-80.
C. Exterior finish performance criteria:
1. No metalfprimer corrosion or delamination under following
conditions:
a. After 1000 hours at 135 degF (67 degC) and 100 percent
relative humidity.
b. After 2-1/2 hours in a 2 PSI, 212 degF (100 de,C)
autoclave.
c. After 500 cycles from 0 degP to 180 degF (-18 degC to 82
degC) at exterior face, holding 15 minutes at each
extreme.
D. Performance criteria:
1. Provide wall system incorporating a moisture screening
system to provide as a minimum, following:
a. Control of gravity, kinetic energy, surface tension,
capillary action, air currents, and pressure drop.
b. Joint must have outer open skin, air vapor barrier and
separating air space.
2. With liner side seal broken; no water rise in cavity a 10
PSF pressure per ASTM E331.
3. Air infiltration: Maximum air leakage at 6.24 PSF per ASTM
E283: 0.10 CFM/SP.
4. Water penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration °
through wall system at 10 PSF per ASTM E331.
5. Dynamic water penetration:
ao No uncontrolled water penetration through wall system
when dynamically tested in accord with .AAMA Standard
FC-1-76.
b. Minimum water pressure, 10 PSF ~ith dynamic force of'
minimum air stream velocity of 100 MPH.
6. Provide Independent Laboratory Test reports to Contracting
Officer
a. Test report must specifically indicate horizontal panel
configuration for test.
b. No exposed inside or outside sealants for test or in
finish installation.
7. Field testing:
a. Upon completion of building, a minimum of 12 tests of
completed wall system, to include windows, will be
required.
b. Location of tests at direction of Contracting Officer.
c. Test in accord with AAMA FC-1-76, field check of wall
systems for water leakage.
E. Provide engineering design and calculations for structural
support system performed by registered professional engineer,
licensed in State of construction site and bearing his seal.
F. Glazing system performance criteria:
01
02
03
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
53
U.S,P.S. - N.'Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O5
1.03
07413-3
1. Comply with all applicable tests required by Section 08410
1.03 Test Requirements.
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
O1
02
O5
08
'09
10
11
12
13
15
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
A. Shop drawings: 1. Proposed structural framing system to support preformed
metal siding system for aesthetic review.
2. Details of connections to building structure.
3. Glazing system sections and details.
4. Details of framing and waterproofing at roof access doors.
B. Product data.
C. Samples: 1o 12 x 12 IN (300 x 300 mm) for color selection.
2. 60 x 60 IN (1500 x 1500 mm) erected on site for verification
of color selection.
D. Project information: 1. Certification of installer qualifications.
2. Test reports.
3. Warranty.
28 1.04 WARRANTY
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
17
18~
19
20
22
23
24
25
28
31
33
34
36
37
39
40
A. Provide 5 year, no leak, surety bond backed warranty.
B. Warranty signed Jointly by manufacturer, erector and General
Contractor.
C. Warranty to cover wind and water integrity per specified test
standards.
D. Correction of wind and water penetration by calking is not
acceptable.
31
33
34
36
37
39
4O
44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
47 2.01 MATERIALS
47
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Insulated wall panel system:
a. Base: H.H. Robertson. 'Formawall IO00H series".
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07413-4
O2
O3
O4
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
B. Wall panels: Metal inner and outer panels with foam
insulation.
1. Thickness: Minimum 2 IN (50 mm).
2. Width: 30 IN (750 mm) center to center of joints.
3. Core: Foa~ed in place urethane foam with minimum of 95
percent closed cell structure.
4. R Value: Minimum 15.
5. ANSI/ASTM E84 flame spread: Under 75; smoke developed:
Under 450; fuel contributed: Under 50.
6. Joints: Factory gasketed, no exposed wet sealants.
7. Exterior and interior face sheets:
a. 22 GA (0.75 mm) galvanized steel or 0.05 IN (1.5 mm)
thick aluminum.
b. Stucco embossed, non-directional.
c. Profile: Flat.
8. Finishes:
a. Exterior: Minimum 70 percent PVF.
1) Green, equal to Dupont enamel 43757 at employee
entrance arch, main entrance structure, pylon, and
mail box drop arch. All areas below datum 120 FT - 0
IN.
2) Gray, equal to Dupont enamel 93774 at high roof area,
monitors, gardens, outdoor gardens, courtyard and
generally all areas above datum 120 FT - 0 IN.
b. Interior: Primed.
9. Strippable coating: Clear color 2-1/2 mils thick applied to
all exterior face sheets material after finish painting and
prior to embossing and roll forming.
C. Glazing system: Thermally broken system integrally detailed
into metal panel system:
1. Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T6 alloy.
2. Finish: Minimum 70 percent PVF.
3. Structural thermal barrier: Poured in place isocyanurate
self adhering to aluminum members.
4. Fasteners: Anodized aluminum or non-magnetic (300 series)
stainless steel which will not cause electrolytic action or
corrosion.
a. Provide Phillips flathead screws finished to match
aluminum where exposed.
5. Sealants: See Section 07900.
a. Use exposed sealants of color to match aluminum finish.
b. Provide and install all sealants and calking required
within and around glazing system.
6. Glass: See Section 08800 for glass to be installed under
this section.
7o Weeps: Provide system with baffles and weeps to vent all
moisture within system to outside.
D. Perimeter trim pieces, flashing and accessories: 1. As necessary to complete panel installation.
2. Shop fabricated and insulated corners to match panels.
3. Match color and finish of wall panels.
02
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07413-5
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
E. Fastening system: Non-ferrous concealed in finished work.
F. Subgirts and supports: 1. Subgirts and intermediate support system as required for
installation, where said system is not indicated as s6pplied
by structural, refer to Paragraph G leveling system.
2. Use structural tubes where system is exposed to view.
3. Shop prime all ferrous metals. Finish color as selected.
G. Leveling system: Support and shim as required for installation
where support structure is provided by others.
H. Louvers: 1. See Section 10200.
2. Install all louvers adjacent to preformed metal siding.
3. Face of louver to be flush with face of panels.
I. Expandable flashing: 1. 5 IN CPE bellows with 3/8 IN thick insulation, 4 IN
galvanized steel flanges.
2. AFCO, LBH 325; York; Superflasho
02
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
11
12
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
26 PART 3 '- EXEcIrrlON
29 3.01 INSPECTION
26
29
32
34
35
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
32
34
35
38 3.02 ERECTION
38
41
43
44
45
A. Erect system complete, per reviewed shop drawings.
B. Erect with concealed fasteners, locking entire unit to
structural supports to prohibit negative pulloff under design
loads.
41
43
44
45
48 3.03 FIELD TESTING
48
51
A. Perform field water tests as specified.
51
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O4
O5
O7
07413-6
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Provide all required temporary closures and flashings to
maintain weather integrity, during and after erection.
END OF SECTION
O1
04
O5
7
UoS.P.So. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F, & V.M.F.
01
03
6K26, 8C17
SECTION 07533
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
07533-1
Ol
03
06 P~T 1 -
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all elastomertc sheet roofing as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with the work of all other trades°
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work: 1. Concrete wall panels: Section 03430 or 03450.
2. Preformed metal siding: Section 07413.
3. Flashing and sheet metal: Section 07600.
4. Slylights: Section 07813.
5. Sealant: Section 07900.
6. Roof hatch: Section 07727.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23 '
24
25
26
27
28
29
32 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
A. Applicator qualifications: 1. Factory trained and approved by Roofing Manufacturer.
2. Minimum five years experience installing mechanically
attached EPDM roof systems.
3. Installed other mechanically attached EPDM roof system
utilizing this type membrane.
B. Roof assembly design criteria: 1. Wind uplift resistance rating: FM Class 1-60.
2. Fire resistance rating: U/L Class A.
3. Minimum "R" value of 20.
C. Coordinate with Contracting Officer to allow for full time
observation of roofing work by independent roofing consultant
employed by Owner.
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
52 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
52
U.S.P.S. 7 N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
07533-2
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturers standard details edited to show conditions
specific to proposed installation.
B. Product data.
C. Project information:
1. Warranty.
a. Upon notice to proceed, manufacturer file with
Contracting Officer a copy of warranty which will be
executed upon completion of roofing work.
b. With warranty copy, furnish a cover letter signed by an
Official of Company authorized to execute such a Warranty
stating that attached warranty copy will be executed for
this project.
c. Furnish letter at time of preroofing conference.
d. Warranty will commence upon Substantial Completion of
Project.
2. Certification of applicator qualifications.
3. Certificates showing testing agency's approval of assembly
for rating indicated.
24 1.04 WARRANTY
O1
02
03
O5
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. 10 year warranty of watertightness signed by manufacture~ and
General Contractor on attached form.
B. Warranties with exclusions for winds less than 70 MPH will not
be acceptable.
C. CONTRACTOR NOTE:
1. This specification contains a special warranty which must be
executed.
2. Verify specific requirements and notify roofing materials
manufacturer's technical department for warranty costs and
restrictions; prior to bidding.
3. Manufacturer's "standard" warranties will not be accepted.
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
42 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
42
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Prior to beginning of roofing operations, General Contractor
schedule preconstruct'ion conference, at mutually agreeable
time, to include Owner, Contracting Officer, General
Contractor, roofing contractor's superintendent, roofing system
manufacturer's representative, Sheet Metal Contractor
performing metal flashing work, Mechanical Contractor, Plumbing
Contractor, Deck Contractor independent roofing consultant and
anyone else involved in or performing work affecting the
roofing system.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
07533-3
B. Minimum of 2 weeks prior to conference submit installation
drawings, brochures, samples of proposed materials and any
other pertinant information to Contracting Officer for review.
C. Meeting agenda will at a minimum include following items for
detailed discussion:
1. Contract document specifications.
2. Roof plan.
3. Ail roofing and flashing details.
4. Roofing system manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations.
5. Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratory requirements.
6. Roofing insulation manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations.
7. Available areas on site for storage and work.
8. Protection of roofing system during and after construction
by all trades who have access to roof.
D. Preconstruction conference will serve to clarify all
specifications, details, application requirements and what work
should be completed prior to beginning of roofing operation.
g. Required data at time of conference.
1. Letter from roofing manufacturer agreeing to sign attached
warranty.
2. Letter or certification signed jointly by roofing system
manufacturer, installing roofer and suppliers of all
material components of roof system that products to be used
meet specified requirements and that roofing membrane
manufacturer will warrant the roof assembled with such
components.
01
O2
O3
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
38 2.01 MATERIALS
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Roofing materials:
a. Base: Firestone; Goodyear~ Diversitech General.
2. Walking surface (pre-fab rubber pads):
a. Base: Humane Engineering; Roofguard.
3. Other materials:
a. Base: Manufacturers as noted.
4. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Roofing system: 1. Sheathing mechanically fastened to decking.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Overlay board.
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
22
23
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
44
45
07533-4
4. Single ply EPDM rubber membrane mechanically attached;
meeting design criteria specified and complete with all
accessories and sheet metal work required.
C. Roofing:
1. EPDM rubber sheet, 0.060 IN (1.5 mm).
D. Roof insulation: Expanded polystyrene. Flat stock and tapered. 1. Approved by roofing manufacturer.
2. U/L and FM listed for assembly indicated.
3. Thickness: To provide R value indicated.
4. Minimum density: 1.5 LBS per cubic foot, minimum
compressive strength of 25 PSI; certified by insulation
manufacturer.
5. Tapered insulation: Taper at minimum 1/4 IN/LF.
E. Sheathing: 1/2 IN (12 mm) thick fire rated gypsum wallboard or
3/4 IN (18 mm) thick perlite board as required for.fire rating.
1. Fasteners: FM and roofing manufacturer approved
fluorocarbon coated.
F. Flashing: Same material and thickness as roofing, with
compatible adhesive.
G. Adhesives, tapes, cements and sealants: Roofing manufacturer's
standard.
H. Roofing accessories: Use manufacturer's standard prefab
accessories; Provide:
1. Nailing strips: As detailed and required.
2. Pipe flashings: Provide for each pipe penetration; include
all clamps and adhesive.
3. Expansion joint covers.
I. Overlay board:
1. Minimum 1/2 IN thick moisture resistant wood fiber or wood
flake board.
2. Approved by FM and roofing manufacturer as an underlayment
under membrane.
J. Walking surface: Prefab rubber pads: Roof Gard by Humane;
Roofblok by Roof blok Co. Maximum 3/4IN thick.
K. Compressible tube: Tubing manufacturer acceptable to roofing
manufacturer.
O1
02
03
05
O6
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
22
23
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
41
44
45
49 PART 3 - EXECDTION
49
52 3.01 INSPECTION
52
U.S.P.S. No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
O5
O6
O8
09
11
12
07533-5
A. Inspect entire area to be roofed for acceptability.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Verify proper placement and elevations of roof drains, scuppers
and other rain overflow assemblies.
D. General Contractor complete and correct all changes at no
additional cost to Owner.
E. Start of installation indicates acceptance of responsibility
for performance.
O1
O5
06
O8
O9
11
12
15 3.02 PREPARATION
15
18
19
A. Remove standing water from area to be covered prior to starting
roofing work.
18
19
22 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING
25
26
28
29
A. Lay sheathing tightly butted and cut to fit around all
penetrations.
B. Attach sheathing to deck in accord with roofing manufacturer's
and FM requirements, as a minimum use 1 fastener per 2 SF.
22
25
26
28
29
32 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING
32
35
36
38
39
4O
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Install all materials in accord with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
B. Install all nailers required.
1. Install at perimeter of each roof level, curbs, skylights,
expansion joints, and similar penetrations.
C. Install sheathing over entire substrate and mechanically
fasten..
D. Attach insulation to roof surface in accord with roofing
manufacturer's requirements.
1. Cut insulation neatly to fit around all roof penetrations
and projections.
2. Butt joints tightly.
3. Install overlay board over insulation.
4. Fasten through overlay board and insulation to deck in
accord with roofingmanufacturer's, UL and FM requirements,
as a minimum use 1 fastener per 2 SF.
35
36'
38
39
40
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
O1
03
O4
O6
07
O9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
26
28
29
30
32
07533-6
E. Place membrane in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Seal seams in accord with manufacturer's instructions and by
subsequent sealing with lap sealant.
G. Perform installation of lap sealant and seam adhesive so as not
to damage insulation.
H. Remove and replace damaged insulation at no cost to Owner.
I. Attach membrane in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install fastening bars at recommended intervals.
2. Secure batten strips and fastening bars by prepunching
fastener through membrane before anchoring through
insulation into substrate.
3. Use of mechanically attached fastener machines will not be
an acceptable method of initially puncturing membrane.
4. Use only prepunched batten strips and fastening bars as part
of this roof system.
5. Secure membrane at perimeter of each roof level,, curb
flashing, skylights, and other penetrations.
J. Install flashing at ail vertical surfaces, roof interruptions
and penetrations.
K. Install in accord with shop drawings and applicable details.
L. Have technical representative of manufacturer make an
inspection and issue written report to Contracting Officer that
roofing system has been installed properly and is warrantable.
M. Adhere walkways to membrane.
01
O3
O4
O6
07
O9
1!
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
26
28
29
30
32
35 3.05 PATCHING
35
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
A. Patch or repair all wrinkles and punctures in membrane using
following criteria:
1. Do not allow a fishmouth or wrinkle to occur within 18 IN of
a splice or through a splice.
2. Cut out and patch entire wrinkle with roof membrane~material
with no factory seams included.
3. Minimum lap of 3 IN in all directions of patch is required.
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
47 3.06 PROTECTION
47
5O
51
53
A. Protect installed insulation from weather using water cutoffs
in bad weather and at end of work period.
B. Remove and replace wet insulation.
5O
51
53
U.SoP.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
05
O6
O8
10
11
13
07533-7
C. Make water cutoffs by extending membrane beyond insulation and
setting end of membrane in 4 IN (100 mm) wide strip of water
cut off mastic.
D. Remove all temporary water cutoffs prior.to proceeding with
next work period.
E. Cut off portion of membrane in contact with mastic.
F. Provide special protection or barricades to avoid traffic on
completed roof'installation.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
05
06
08
10
11
13
U.SoP.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fe
O1
03
05
O7
09
11
13
15
17
07533 -8
3.07 WARRANTY
Serial No.
Building Owner:
Building:
Location:'
ROOF WAtLRANTY
Date Installation is Completed:
Date Inspection of Installation is Completed:
Roof Approved By:
O1
O3
O5
07
O9
11
13
15
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Roofing materials manufacturer ("manufacturer") warrants to
Building Owner, ("Owner"), of building described above, that
subject to terms, conditions, and limitations stated herein,
manufacturer will repair all leaks in Roofing System, ~aused
by workmanship of manufacturer supplied or approved materials
over life of this Warranty, installed by an authorized roofing
applicator for a period of 10 years commencing with the date
of the final inspection and acceptance of the Roofing SyStem
installation by manufacturer(except as stated in paragraph B.6
below).
B. Terms, Conditions, Limitations:
1. Owner provide manufacturer with written notice within 30
days of discovery of leaks in roofing system.
2. If, upon manufacturer's inspection, manufacturer determines
that leaks in roofing system are caused by defects in
roofing system's material or workmanship of authorized
roofing applicator (except as provided in paragraphs B.3
and 4), Owner's remedies and manufacturer liability shall
be limited to manufacturer's repair of roofing system,
subject to cost limitation set forth above.
3. This Warranty is invalid if any of following occur:
a. Roofing system is damaged by natural disasters, including, but not limited to, lightning, hurricanes,
tornadoes, wind launched debris, winds in excess of 70
MPH, and earthquakes, or:
b. Roofing system is damaged by any acts of negligence,
accidents, or misuse, including but not limited to,
vandalism, civil disobedience, or acts of war.
4. This Warranty shall be null and void if any of following
shall occur:
a. If, after installation of roofing system by an
authorized roofing applicator there are any alterations
or repairs made on or through roof or objects such as,
but not limited to, structures, fixtures, or utilities
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
07533-9
are placed upon or attached to roof without first
obtaining written authorization from manufacturer, or:
-b. Failure by Owner or lessee to use reasonable care in
maintaining roof, or:
c. Owner fails to comply with every term or condition
stated herein.
d. Roof is damaged by special chemical conditions not
disclosed to manufacturer.
e. Roof is damaged by structural failure, including without
limitation, settling or shifting of building or
movement, cracking or deflection of roof deck. This
exclusion does not apply if such movement, settling,
shifting, cracking or deflection is within limitations
of local or state building codes.
5. During term of this Warranty, manufacturer, its agents or
employees, shall have free access to roof during regular
business hours, subject to rights of Owner.
6. Manufacturer shall have no obligation under this Warranty
until all bills for installation, supplies and service have
been paid in full to authorized roofing applicator and
material suppliers.
7. Manufacturer's failure at any time to enforce any terms or
conditions stated herein shall not be construed to be a
waiver of such provision.
8. This Warranty supersedes and is in lieu of any and all
other expressed warranties express or implied that are in
conflict with terms and conditions stated herein incldding
without limitation, warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose.
9. Owner may have emergency repairs made to roof by other than
authorized roofing applicator, if necessary, provided an
authorized roofing applicator is subsequently allowed to
inspect and repair or correct such work. Any costs
associated with removal of temporary repairs or liabilities
flowing from the failure of temporary repairs are
understood to be borne by Owner.
10. Manufacturer shall not be liable for any incidental or
consequential damages resulting from any breach of
warranty.
C. Mediation of Disputes:
1. Any dispute, controversy or claim between Owner and Roofing
Manufacturer arising out of cause for repairs and resulting
expense for same shall be settled by final and binding
arbitration in accordance with American Arbitration
Association's rules for construction industry. An
Arbitrator shall be selected by mutual agreement of parties
hereto; and shall be a person knowledgeable and qualified
in proper roofing installation and inspection. Expenses
for arbitration services shall be apportioned in same
manner as decision of arbitrator concerning responsibility
for repairs and co~t for such repairs.
Manufacturer
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
08
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07533-10
02
03
04
06
O7
09
11
By:
Authorized
Signature:
Title:
Dated:
END OF SECTION
(Seal)
02
O3
O4
06
07
O9
11
UoSoP.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
O3
4HO1, 8G14
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07600-1
01
03
06 pART I - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all architectural flashing and sheet metal work, not
specifically included in work of other sections, as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2o Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. Provide interior sheet metal items as work of this section.
6. "Metal trim" and "sheet metal trim" are synonomous and
covered by this section.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Preformed metal siding: Section 07413.
2. Roofing work: Section 07533.
3. Sealants: Section 07900.
4. Mechanical sheet metal work: Division .15.
5. Acoustic metal panel: Section 05305.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
35 1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
35
38
39
4O
A. Reference standards: As noted.for individual items. 1. ANSI/ASTM Standards.
2. SHACNA architectural sheet metal manual.
38
39
40
43 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
43
46
48
A. Shop drawings.
49
51 Co Project information:
52 1o Warranty. -
B. Samples:
1. For finish, color and color range selection.
46
48
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07600-2
O1 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
01
O4
06
07
A. Coordinate work with roofing.
B. Provide all components necessary to create watertight junctures
between roofing and sheet metal work.
04
06
07
10 1.05 WARRANTY
10
13
14
15
16
17
A. Furnish 5 year warranty on sheet metal work, signed jointly by
Contractor and sheet metal installer.
1. Agree to repair or replace work which leaks water,
deteriorates excessively or otherwise fails to perform as
water tight flashing.
13
14
15
16
17
21 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24 2.01 MATERIALS
21
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
49
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Sheet metal:
a. Base: As noted.
2. Reglets:
a. Base: Fry Reglet Corp.; and Superior.
3. Other materials:
a. Base: Manufacturers as noted.
4. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Sheet metal: Clad steel,.minimum 24 ga (0.6 mm) U.N.O. copper
bearing galvanized iron.
1. ANSI/ASTM A446.
2. Coated on each face with 1 mil fluorocarbon coating.
3. Base: Vincent Brass and Aluminum Co., Color Klad, textured.
4. Optional: Peterson Aluminum Corp., Pac-Clad., Foremost
Mfg. Co. Duranar 200 finished.
5. Color to match adjacent surfaces.
C. Fasteners: Non-ferrous fasteners of same material as sheet
metal which will not rust, corrode or react.
D. Retainer clips: 16 GA (1.5 mm) galvanized or stainless.
E. Solder: ASTM B32 or B486, as applicable to materials joined. 1. Use muriatic acid f.lux killed with zinc for copper.
2. Use rosin flux for other materials.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S..- No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01
02
04
05
06
07
07600-3
F. Dissimilar metal protection: Alkali resistant bitumimous
paint, Tnemec Tneme Tar 413.
G. Reglets: 1. Use,non-ferrous type compatible with sheet metal.
2. Provide interior and exterior preformed corners as required.
3. Fabricate as required to fit special conditions.
O1
O2
04
05
06
07
10 2.02 FABRICATION - SHEET METAL
10
13
14
16
A. Fabricate true and sharp to profiles and sizes indicated.
1. Shop fabricate and weld all corners.
B. Shop fabricate items to maximum extent possible.
13
14
16
20 PART 3 - ~X~CUTION
2O
23 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
23
26
28
29
A. Verify suitability of substrates to accept work.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
26
28
29
32 3.02 INSTALLATION - SHEET METAL
32
35
36
38
39
41
42
44
45
47
48
50
52
54
A. Provide items to be built into other construction to Contractor
in time to allow their installation.
B. If such items are not provided in time for installation, sheet
metal fabricator cut in and install.
C. Fabricate and install in accord with details and
recommendations of SMACNA.
D. Set shop fabricated and welded interior and exterior preformed
corners and intersections.
E. Solder to achieve weathertight joints and required' details; do
not solder slip joints.
F. Set top edges of flashings into reelers as indicated.
G. Fasten materials at recommended intervals.
H. Provide slip joints to allow for thermal movement.
35
36
38
39
41
42
44
45
47
48
50
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
01
02
03
04
06
07
O9
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
07600-4
1. Use'SMACNA plate 68, Alt.2 or 3, detail, with 4 IN (100 mm)
calked lap.
2. Maximum spacing: 10 FT (3M) on center.
3. Provide slip joint 24 IN (600 mm), from corners.
I. Calk joints with 2 beads of sealant on each overlap; see
Section 07900.
J. Turn down cap flashing over base flashings 4 IN (100 mm).
K. Form flashings to provide spring action with exposed edges
hemmed or folded to create tight junctures.
L. Provide dissimilar metals and materials protection where
dissimilar metals come in contact, or where sheet metal
contacts mortar.
M. Provide all miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically
covered elsewhere, as indicated or required to provide a
~eathertight installation.
O1
02
03
04
06
07
O9
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
23 3.03 INSTALLATION - ROOFING EXPANSION JOINT TREATMENT
23
26
27
28
30
31
32
A. Install 16 GA (1.5 mm) galvanized steel at expansion joint
intersections. Anchor only one corner with appropriate a~ount
and size of fasteners.
B. Coordinate installation and associated work to provide a
complete system complying with recommendations of manufacturer
and installer.
26
27
28
30
31
32
35 3.04 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC METAL PANEL TRIM
35
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
A. Install sheet metal trim at all intersections and edges of
acoustic metal panels.
1. Where trim runs perpendicular to corrugation, provide trim 4
IN wide in each direction unless detailed otherwise.
2. Where trim runs parallel to corrugation, provide trim which
overlaps flutes and terminates at low point of panel,
covering acoustic perforations (minimum distance 4 IN).
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
47 3.05 CLEAN-UP
47
50
52
54
A. Upon completion of work, repair all damaged areas.
B. Clean stains and debrtm.
C. Remove any protective coverings.
5O
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N~ Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
07600-5
02
04
D. Leave work broom clean.
END OF SECTION
02
04
U.SoP,S. - No Texas/N. GeorKia G.M,F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
7K05, 8G14
SECTION 07605
METAL ROOFING
07605-1
01
03
06 PAI{T 1 - GENEF, AL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all metal roofing, as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Metal roof decking: Section 05310.
2. Metal joists: Section 05210.
3. Roofing: Section 07533.
4. Flashing and sheet metal: Section 07600.
5. Sealants: Section 07900.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27'
28
31 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
A. Assure compliance with provisions of following codes and
standards:
1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel
Structural Members".
2. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Steel Roof Decking Design
Manual".
3. AWS "Sheet Steel in Structures, Specification for Welding"
AWS D1.3.
4. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO).
5. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
46 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
46
49
50
51
52
54
A. Shop drawings:
1. Complete layout showing types of roofing, anchorage,
supplementary framing, cut openings, accessories, deck
gauges and thicknesses.
B. Product data.
49
50
51
52
54
U.S.P.So r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.MoF.
07605-2
02
O3
O4
O5
C. Samples: 1. Color samples of finishes.
2. Owner reserves the right to require custom color.
3. Provide at no additional cost to Owner.
O2
03
04
O5
08 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O8
11
A. Protect materials from rusting, dirt or damage.
11
14 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
14
17
19
2O
A. Do not overload supporting members.
B. Until entire assembly is complete, structural elements may not
be stable or capable of supporting code or stated design loads.
17
19
2O
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
27 2.01 METAL ROOFING
30'
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
41
A. Acceptable products:
1. Metal roofing material:
a. Base: Peterson Aluminum Co.
b. Optional: Berridge Mfg. Co.; Fashion Inc.; MM Systems
Corp.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Metal roofing: Batten seam type, sheet steel, minimum 24
GA,galvanized and shop finished with minimum 70 percent PVF.
1o ASTM A446, Grade A, with ASTM A525 G60 zinc coating.
2. Finish coating: Minimum 70 percent PVF (Kynar).
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
44 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
44
47
49
50
52
53
A. Galvanizing for metal accessories: ASTM A525 G60.
B. Galvanizing repair paint: High zinc dust content paint ZRC by
ZRC Co. or Tnemeco
C. Metal closure strips: Galvanized sheet steel, minimum 26 GA
thick before coating, ASTM A525 G60 galvanized.
47
49
50
52
53
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
07
O8
10
12
07605-3
D. Sheet metal trim:
1. Custom and manufacturer's standard as detailed to provide
weatherproof enclosure.
2. Minimum 26 GA, galvanized and shop finished with minimum 70
percent PVF (Kynar) color to match metal roofing.
E. Wood substrate: Minimum 5/8 IN thick combination preservative
and fire treated exterior grade wood and plywood.
F. Felt: Minimum 15 LB saturated roofing felt.
G. Z section: 16 GA galvanized.
O1
02
O3
O4
O5
07
O8
10
12
16 PART 3 - EXECUTION
16
19 3.01 INSPECTION
19
22
23
24
26
27
29
30
A. Examine areas and conditions under which roof decking units are
to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of work.
B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected. ,
C. Start of installation constitutes ~cceptance of responsibility
for correct installation and performance.
22
23
24
26
27
29
3O
33 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
33
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
5O
A. Install roof deck units and accessories as indicated.
B. Do not start placement of roof deck units until all supporting
members are installed complete.
C. Place each deck unit on supporting structural frame, adjust to
final position, accurately align with ends bearing on
supporting members.
1. Place deck units square and secure to framing without warp
or excessive deflection.
D. Remove and replace decking which is structurally weak or
unsound or which Contracting Officer declares defective.
E. Use no exposed fasteners.
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
5O
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07605-4
O1 3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL ROOFING
O1
04
05
07
08
10
12
13
15
16
18
~-0
21
A. Install wood substrate with screws spaced nominal 12 IN O.Co,
with joints nominal 1/16 IN.
B. Install felt continuous over wood substrate, lapped minimum 6
IN to weather.
C. Secure felt with nails, nominal 12 IN O.C.
D. If metal roofing is not installed immediately after felt,
provide temporary weather protection.
E. Remove and replace all wood substrate and felt in areas where
warping exceeding 1/4 IN in 12 IN occurs.
F. Install all cleats and battens required.
G. Install metal roofing in accord with manufacturer's
specifications.
04
05
07
08
10
12
13
15
16
18
20
21 '
24 3.04 CLEAN AND TOUCH-UP
24
27
29
3O
32
33
35
A. Clean and retouch scarred areas, welds and rust spots.
B. Touch-up damaged galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair
paint applied in accord with manufacturer's instruction~.
C. Touch-up PVF surfaces with material used in shop, as
recommended by metal roofing material manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
27
29
30
32
33
35
U. SoP.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF, & V.M.F.
01
03
7B13, 8G14
SECTION 07727
ROOF HATCH
07727-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GRNIfllAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for roof hatch as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See. Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Metal roof decking: Section 05310.
2. Roofing: Section 07533.
3. Flashing and sheet metal: Sec.tion 07600.
4. Sealants: Section 07900~
5. Painting: Section 09900.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
32 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
35 2.01 MATERIALS
35
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
49
50
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Roof hatch:
a. Base: Bilco Co.; Wasco Products, Inc.; Milcor Inc.; and
Babcock-Davis Associates Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Curb: 12 iN (300 mm) high insulated.
C. Steel sheet: Zinc coated, galvanized, ASTM A525, G90.
D. Cover: Galvanized metal, with minimum 2-1/2 IN (62 mm) weather
flange.
E. Insulation: Rigid board glass or mineral fiber, laminated
between'sheets of metal.
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
49
5O
52
53
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
O4
O5
07
08
09
10
11
13
15
16
17
07727-2
1. Insulate curbs and covers with minimum 1 IN (25 mm) thick
insulation.
Fo Gaskets: Tubular or fingered design; neoprene, polyvinyl
chloride, or molded block design sponge neoprene.
G. Hardware: 1. Standard self lifting mechanism~and automatic hold open
devices, hinges, latch, and padlock hasp.
2. Operating devices: Handles inside and outside.
3. Finish: Cadmium plated.
H. Construct for 40 PSF (195 KSM) live loading.
I. Finish: 1o Manufacturer's standard primer, minimum 2.0 mils dry.
2. Finish painting by Section 09900.
O1
02
04
O5
07
08
09
10
11
13
15
16
17
20 2.02 FABRICATION
2O
23
24
26
27
A. Fabricate from steel sheet in shop, to sizes indicated; modify
if necessary to comply with requirements.
B. Where standard units are not available for sizes and types
required, provide, custom fabricated units. '
30 2.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
23
24
26
27
3O
33
A. Product data.
33
37 PART 3 - EX~C~'ION
37
40 3.01 INSPECTION
4O
43
45
A. Verify acceptability of substrate for installation.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
43
48 3.02 INSTALLATION
48
51
53
A. Coordinate with decking and roofing.
Bo Securely anchor units gy bolting or welding, as appropriate.
51
53
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
03
07727-3
C. Flash and counterflash to provide weathertight installation.
D. Touch up abraded areas with zinc rich paint.
O1
03
06 3.03 ADJUSTMENT
O6
09
10
12
A. After installation and before acceptance adjust to provide
smooth, easy operation.
END OF SECTION
09
10
12
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6J31, 8G14
SECTION 07813
SKYLIGHT
078'13-1
01
03
06 PART I - GENl~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
2,6
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for skylight as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Roofing: Section 07533.
2. Roof decking: Section 05310.
3. Structural steel: Section 05120.
4. Sealants~ Section 07900.
5. Flashing and sheet metal: Section 07600.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
31 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
34
35
A. Skylight standard: Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's
Association AAMA 1601.1.
34
35
38 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
38
41
42
43
44
45
47
49
50
52
53
A. Shop drawings: 1. Plans, elevations and sections.
2. Structural details for review of interface between skylight
support system and building structural frame.
3. Flashing details.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples:
1. For review and color selection.
D. Project information: .
1. Warranty signed jointly by installer and Contractor.
41
42
43
44
45
47
49
5O
52
53
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07813-2
O1 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
O1
O4
O6
A. Coordinate installation with other trades.
B. Coordinate flashing and curbs with roofing.
O4
O6
09 1.05 WARRANTY
O9
12
13
15
16
18
A. Provide 5 year written warranty on skylight, glazing, calking
and flashing.
B. Warranty to cover repair or replacement in event of leakage;
defective design, materials and construction.
C. Warranty jointly signed by Contractor and supplier.
12
13
15
16
18
22 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
22
25 2.01 MATERIALS
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
4O
42
43
44
45
47
49
50
51
52
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Skylights:
a. Base: Wasco Products, Inc.
b. Optional: Plasteco, Inc.;
Industries, Inc.(PAM).
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
Naturalite, Inc.; Hillsdale
B. Curb: 12 IN (300 mm) high insulated curb consisting of
aluminum outer curb, minimum 1 IN (25 mm) thick fiberglass or
rigid insulation and aluminum inner curb.
C. Framework: 6063T5 aluminum.
D. Extruded neoprene glazing strips: 1. Hardness (Shore A): 50 plus/minus 5 durometer.
2. Tensile strength: 2,000 PSI min.
3. Elongation: 480 percent min.
E. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel.
F. Flashing: 1. Base: Vincent Brass and Aluminum Co., Colorklad.
2. Optional: Peterson Aluminum Co.; Packlad; or minimum 24 GA
stainless steel. .
25
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
4O
42
43
44
45
47
49
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. _- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
07
08
10
11
12
14
15
07813-3
3. Finish: AA-MlOC22A21, or manufacturer's equivalent standard
finish.
4. Outer dome glazing: Clear acrylic. Thickness of outer dome
to comply with requirements of AAMA 1601.1.
5. Inner dome: Opaque acrylic. Provide inner dome which is
same thickness as outer dome.
6. Dissimilar material protection. Protective coating or
isolating material between aluminum and other materials to
prevent electrolytic or corrosive degradation.
7. Design: Support live load of 20 PSF (100 KSM) and 30 PSF
(146 KSM) wind load.
01
02
04
O5
07
08
10
11
12
14
15
18 2.02 FABRICATION
18
21
22
24
25
27
29
30
32
33
34
36
37
'A. Completely shop assemble, to assure proper assembly in field.
Disassemble for shipment, as required.
B. Construct using gasket glazing system. Provide continuous
extruded aluminum frame.
C. Attach with fasteners at maximum of 12 IN (300 mm) o.c.
D. Weld by heliarc process. Grind exposed welds to a minimum of
100 grit finish.
E. Waterproof with continuous neoprene glazing strip. Use
neoprene spacers for separation. Allow no direct acrylic to
metal contact.
F. Units: 60 x 60 IN (1500 x 1500 mm), low profile dome type,
double glazed.
21
22
24
25
27
29
30
32
33
34
36
37
41 PART 3 - gX]~CUTION
41
44 3.01 INSPECTION
44
47
49
5O
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
47
49
5O
UoSoP.S. -~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
07813-4
O1 3.02 ERECTION
O1
04
05
07
08
10
A. Erect in accord with manufacturer's instructions and shop
drawings.
B. Provide all periphery items as required to provide complete
weathertight installation.
END OF SECTION
04
O5
07
08
10
U.SoPoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
6D18; 8G14
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
07900-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
A. General:
'1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all sealant work as indicated, in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Definition: 1. Words "calk" and "caulking" mean sealant work.
2. "Interior wet areas" means toilets, showers, kitchens and
similar areas.
C. Seal all Joints which will permit penetration of moisture,
unless sealing work is specifically required under other
sections.
D. Work included: Provide and install sealants as follows:
1. Flashing reglets and retainers.
2. Exterior wall joints.
3. Masonry control joints, exterior an~ interior and between
masonry and other materials.
4. Flooring joints.
5. Isolation joints.
6. Paving and sidewalk joints.
7. Joints between paving or sidewalks and building.
8. Joints at penetrations of walls, floors and decks by piping
and other services and equipment.
9. Exterior and interior perimeters of all exterior and
interior door and window frames, louvers, grilles, etc.
10. Solidly bed all thresholds at exterior doors.
11. Other joints where calking, sealant or compressible sealant
is indicated.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. For sealing in fire rated assemblies: Section 07270.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O4
07900-2
1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Sealant materials:
ASTM C603 and C510, as they apply.
01
04
07 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
O7
10
11
13
14
16
17
A. Product data: Schedule of materials proposed for use keyed to
applicable areas of use.
B. Samples:
1. Cured sample of each color for color selection.
C. Project information:
1o Warranty.
10
11
13
14
16
17
20 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
2O
23
24
26
28
29
A. Perform sealant work only when ambient temperature is 40 degF
(5 degC) or higher.
B. Apply only to joints free of material which may inhibit bond.
C. Apply to cementitious materials only when thoroughly cured and
dry.
23
24
26
28
29
32 1.05 WARRANTY
32
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
A. Provide written warranty th&t sealant work will remain free of
defects for a period of 3 years from date of substantial
completion.
1. Failure of watertightness constitutes defect.
2. Remove all defective work and materials and replace with new
work and materials.
3. Repair all other work damaged as a result of defective
sealant work at no additional expense to Owner.
4. Warranty signed by applicator and Contractor.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
47
50 2.01 MATERIALS
53
54
Ao Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Polyurethane sealants~ 1 or 2 component:
5O
53
54
U,S.P.So : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
08'
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
43
44.
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
07900-3
a. Base: MAMECO International.
b. Optional: Sika Chemical Corp.; Sonneborn-Contech;
Tremco, Inc.(Dymeric); Pecora (Dynatrol I or Dynatrol
2. Silicone sealants, 1 or 2 component:
a. Base: General Electric Co.
b. Optional: Dow Corning Corp.; Pecora.
3. Acrylic sealants, 1 or 2 component:
a. Base: MAMECO International.
b. Optional: Sonneborn-Contech; Tremco; Pecora.
4. Compressible sealant:
a. Base: Sandell Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Optional: Illbruck Co.; Willseal Co.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Sealants - General:
1. Provide colors matching materials being sealed.
2. Vhere sealant is not exposed to view, use manufacturer's
color which has best performance.
3. Provide nonsagging sealant for vertical Joints.
4. Sealants for horizontal joints may be self leveling.
5. Before use of any sealant, investigate its compatibility
with surfaces, fillers and other materials in joint system.
6. Use only compatible materials.
7. Obtain sealants from manufacturers who will provide
manufacturers' field service representatives at projec~ site
for purpose of advising and instructing installers.
8. Provide such services, at no expense to Owner.
9. For exterior use:
a. Polyurethane, or:
b. Silicone.
10. For interior wet areas use: Silicone.
11. Interior non-wet areas use:
a. Acrylic, or:
b. Polyurethane, or:
c. Silicone.
12. Use compressible sealant where indicated.
C. Joint cleaner, primer, bond breaker: As recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
D. Sealant backer rod: Rod stOck of polyethylene, polyethylene
jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible, nonabsorbent,
non-bituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to:
1. Control joint depth.
2. Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint.
3. Provide proper shape of sealant bead.
4. Provide at all joints wider than 1/4 IN.
E. Sealant, compressible: 1. Provide width of material twice joint width.
2. Foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polymerized
polybutylene waterproofing agent.
01
O2
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35~
36
37
38
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F-.
07900-4
01 3. Coated on front face with non-reactive release agent that
02 will act as bond breaker for applied sealant.
04 F. Adhesive, compressible sealant: As recommended by sealant
05 manufacturer.
O1
02
04
05
09 PAI~T 3 - ]~XI~CUTION
12 3.01 PREPARATION
15
17
18
19
A. Clean all joints.
B. Where finish coating or covering is to be applied to surface,
wait until such coating or covering has been applied before
installing sealant; e.g., paint, wallcovering, glazed coating.
22 3.02 INSTALLATION
25
'27
28
29
31
32
34
35
37
39
41
43
45
46
47
48
50
A. Make all joints water and airtight.
B. Where required by manufacturer, prime Joint surfaces. 1. Limit application to surfaces to receive sealants.
2. Mask off adjacent surfaces.
C. Make depth of sealant not more than one-half width of joint,
but in no case less than 1/4 IN (6 mm).
D. Subcalk joints that are deep, and joints without suitable
backstop, to proper depth.
E. Correctly size backer rods.
F. Apply bond breaker where required.
G. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill all voids.
H. Upon completion, leave calking smooth and even.
I. Install compressible sealant to position at indicated depth. 1. Take care to avoid contamination of sides of joint.
2. Protect side walls of joint to depth of calking).
3. Install with adhesive faces in contact with joint sides.
END OF SECTION
O9
12
15
17
18
19
22
25
27
29
31
32
34
35
37
39
41
43
45
46
47
48
5O
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
0
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
c~
0
;. :.. .........: ---
~~ ~ ~ oo ~oo o ~o~oo~
O1
03
7F19, 8G14
SECTION 08100
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08100-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for all metal doors and frames as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary fo~ a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Finish hardware: Section 08700.
2. Flush wood doors: Section 08211.
3. Sealants: Section 07900.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
29 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
32
33
34
36
37
A. Door and frame standards:
1. Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI 100-83).
B. Fire rated metal doors and frames:
1. U/L tested and listed as fire door assembly, with labels.
32
33
34
36
37
40 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
4O
43
45
46
47
A. Shop drawings: Door schedule.
B. Project information:
1. Manufacturer's Certificate of U/L construction for oversized
fire rated doors and frames.
43
45
46
47
50 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
5O
53
A. Deliver materials cartoned or crated.
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08100-2
01 B. Inspect upon delivery for damage.
03 C. Repair minor damages provided finish is acceptable to
04 Contracting Officer; otherwise, remove and replace.
06 D. Store units off ground in vertical position with spacers to
07 allow air circulation.
01
03
04
06
07
11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
11
14 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
14
17
18
2O
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
35
37
A. Steel sheet and strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, ASTM
A568.
B. Steel sheet, galvanized: ASTM A525, G90 coating, phosphatized.
C. Supports and anchors: 1. Not less than 16 GA (1.5 mm) sheet steel.
2. Galvanize items to be built into exterior walls after
fabrication, ASTM A153, Class B.
D. Inserts, bolts and fasteners: 1. Manufacturer's standard units.
2. Galvanize items to be built into exterior walls ASTM A153,
Class C or D as applicable.
E. Primer: Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, air-drying or baked,
suitable as base for specified finish paints.
F. Galvanizing repair paint: ZRC primer.
G~ Grout: As specified in Section 04110.
17
18
2O
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
35
37
40 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
4O
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Metal doors and frames:
ao Base: American Steel Products Corp.; Ceco Corp.; Curries
Manufacturing Inc.; Pioneer Industries Div./Core Inc.;
Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.; Superior Fireproof Door
Div./Roblin Architectural Products Co.; Trussbilt, Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Doors, metal:
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O2
03~
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
08100-3
1. Hollow metal, 1-3/4 IN (44 mm) thick, with minimum 18 GA
(1.2 mm) face sheets and flush, all joints filled and
ground.
a. Provide rabbeted head sections as indicated.
2. Exterior: SDI Grade III, Model 3 or 4, seamless,
galvanized, insulated.
3. Fire rated: SDI Grade II, Model 3 or 4, full flush,
seamless, labeled. Pairs: Labeled without astragal.
4. Interior (except fire rated): SDI Grade II, Model 3 or 4,
seamless, sound insulated.
C. Lites: 1. Use fixed, integral stops on exterior face.
2. Screwless snap in stops or stops secured with countersunk
Phillps head machine screws on interior face.
D. Frames, metal: Hollow metal, types as indicated.
1. Split type frames are not acceptable.
2. Conceal all fastenings.
3. Face joints: Face welded and ground smooth.
4. Ail other Joints: Filled and ground smooth.
5. Steel boxes at back of all hardware cut-outs, minimum 26 GA
(0.45 mm) welded to frame.
6. Silencers:
a. 3 on strike jamb of single frames, 2 on head of double
frames.
b. Locate and size holes in accord with U/L 63.
c. Use plastic plugs to keep holes clear during
construction.
7. Exterior (up to 4 FT (1.2 M) wide): Minimum 16 GA (1.5 mm)
galvanized steel~
8. Fire rated: U/L labeled, comply with NFPA 80.
9. Interior: 16 GA (1.5 mm) minimum steel.
E. Frame anchors:
1. Jamb anchors: Minimum of 3 anchors of type appropriate to
wall construction per jamb; Minimum 16 GA (1.5 mm), 1 IN (25
mm) Wide corrugated steel.
2. Floor anchors: Two 12 GA (2.6 mm), adjustable 3 IN (75 mm)
wide, flanged floor clips, punched for anchoring.
3. Provide removable spreaders at bottom of door frames.
F. Transoms metal: 1. Hollow metal gauge and thickness to match door below.
2. Rabbeted sill.
G. Louvers in interior doors: Sightproof. 1. Inverted V or Y shaped blades, 18 GA (12 mm) steel.
2. Space blades for minimum 20 percent free air.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
52
2.03
FABRICATION
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
OH
09
11
12
13
14
16
17
08100-4
A. General: 1. Fabricate rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects.
2. Form to indicated sizes and profiles.
3. Fit and assemble in shop, wherever practical.
4. Mark work that cannot be fully assembled in shop, to assure
proper assembly at site.
5. Weld joints continuously, dress exposed joints smooth and
flush.
6. Fit doors to SDI 100 and NPPA clearances.
B. Prepare for finish hardware, in accord with hardware schedule,
templates provided by hardware supplier, and ~NSI All5 series
"Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation".
1. Locate finish hardware in accord with SDI 100.
C. Clean off mill scale and foreign materials, touch-up damaged
galvanized surfaces.
19 D. Shop prime.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
23 PART 3 - F,X~CUTION
23
26 3.01 INSPECTION
26
29
3O
31
33
34
A. Examine structure, substrates, and conditions under which work
is to be installed for conditions detrimental to correct and
timely completion.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
29
3O
31
33
34
37 3.02 INSTALLATION
37
40
41
43
45
46
48
49
51
53
54
A. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and
ceilings.
B. Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanently anchored.
C. After completion of walls, remove temporary braces and
spreaders.
D. Coordinate building in of anchors and frame grouting with other
trades.
g. Install fire rated frames in accord with NFPA No.80.
F. In closed steel stud partitions, attach studs to wall anchors
with self tapping screws.
40
41
43
45
46
48
49
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02
03
05
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
08100-5
G. Grout frames at masonry walls and at double egress doors and
door frames 4 FT wide and larger and as noted on drawings.
H. Immediately 'after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas
of prime coat.
I. Touch up prime coat with compatible primer.
J. Leave smooth for finish painting.
K. Seal frames to walls.
L. Install silencers.
M. Leave work complete and in proper operating condition.
N. Remove and replace defective work.
END OF SgCTION
O2
03
O5
O6
O8
10
12
14
16
18
20
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
7J09, 8G14
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-1
O1
06 PART 1 - GItNgRAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all flush wood doors as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure.and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
23
24
25
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Finish hardware: Section 08700.
2. Metal doors and frames: Section 08100.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
28
31
32
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
A. Manufacturing standards: Architectural Woodwork Institute
(AWI) Quality Standards, Section 1300, Premium Grade.
B. Fitting tolerances: 1. 1/8 IN (3 mm) clearance at jambs, heads and meeting stiles.
2. 1/2 IN (12 mm) clearance at bottom.
3. Fit U/L labeled doors to U/L requirements.
C. Where firerattngs and classifications are indicated or required
by code:
1. U/L tested and listed as fire door assembly, with labels.
2. Comply with NFPA 80.
3. Provide 450 deg temperature rise doors for all stairs.
31
32
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
46 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
46'
49
51
52
53
54
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Sample:
1. 12 x 12 IN (300 X 300 mm) showing finish, resubmit finish
sample to satisfaction of Contracting Officer (figure up to
4 resubmits for bidding purposes).
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08211-2
02
03
04
C. Project information: 1. Warranty.
2. Maintenance data.
02
03
04
07 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O7
10
12
14
A. Deliver doors Just prior to installation.
B. Identify as to type and location.
C. Provide manufacturer's identifying mark on each door.
10
12
14
17 1.05 WARR~Y
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
'32
A. Warrant doOrs in writing for life of installation against
defects including:
1. Delamination.
2. Warp or twist of 1/4 IN (6 mm) or more.
3. Telegraphing of any part of core through face veneer.
4. Surface variation exceeding 1/100 IN (0.4 mm) or more in 3
IN (75 mm) span.
5. Any other defect which may impair or affect performance of
door for purpose for which it is intended.
B. Remove and replace defective doors; include cost of removal of
defective units, rehanging and refinishing of replacement
units.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
36
39 2.01 MATERIALS
39
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Wood doors (except firerated):
a. Base: Algoma Hardwoods Inc.; Eggers Industries,
Architectural Door Div.; and Weyerhaeuser.
2. Firerated wood doors:
a. Base: Weyerhaeuser.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Doors, wood: Flush hardwood veneer faced, factory finished.
1. Face veneer: Plain'sliced select white birch, both faces.
a. Book'matched.
b. Matching solid hardwood edges.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
UoS.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
08211-3
2. Thickness: 1-3/4 IN (45 mm).
3. Non-rated doors: Solid particle core.
4. 20 minute rated doors: Solid particle core.
5. Other firerated doors: Non-combustible core.
6. Factory prefinish to AWI finish system: 3 or 5, sheen not
over 24.
a. See door schedule for type of finish required.
b. Olympic Stain No. 911 gray used for pricing.
c. Contracting Officer reserves right to select color of
stain from manufacturer's full line.
C. Solid wood core: AWI type SLC glued block solid core. 1. Type II water resistant adhesive.
2. Hardwood veneer crossbanding, securely bonded to core.
D. Solid particle core: AW1 Type PC particleboard solid core.
1. Hardwood veneer crossbanding, securely bonded to core.
E. Non-combustible core: U/L.listed, with fire retardent treated
laminated hardwood edges, crossbanding and hardware blocking.
01
O2
03
O4
05
06
07
08
O9
10
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
23 2.02 FABRICATION
23
26
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
A. Factory machine doors for application of hardware.
B. Factory bevel vertical edges, 1/8 IN in 2 IN (1 in 16).
C. Cutouts: 1. Make cutouts accurately and neatly.
2. Seal cut edges with 2 coats of varnish.
3. Provide two sets of metal stop moldings for all openings,
one side removable, to completely cover cut edges.
4. Neatly miter stops at corners.
5. Finish to match door.
D. Seal top and bottom and reseal field cuts.
26
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
42 PART 3 - ~CUTION
42
45 3.01 INSPECTION
45
48
50
51
A. Verify suitability of openings to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
48
5O
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
04
06
08
09
11
12
14
16
08211-4
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not hang damaged, warped, or stained doors.
B. Condition doors to prevailing humidity prior to hanging.
C. Fit doors to frames and machine for hardware, to whatever
extent not previously worked at factory.
D. Install doors in accord with manufacturer's instructions, and
as indicated.
E. Adjust for proper fit and uniform clearance.
END OF SECTION
01
04
O6
08
09
11
12
14
16
U.S,PoS. ~ N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01
03
6Ill, 8G14
SECTION 08333
COUNTER SHUTTER
08333-1
01
03
06 PART
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all counter shutters as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2o Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Work installed but not furnished:
1. Cylinder: Furnished in Section 08700.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
3O
32
34
35
36
37
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Project information: 1. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance data:
1.
2. Owner instruction report.
See Division
27
3O
32
34
35
36
37
40 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
4O
43
44
A. Deliver anchorage accessories and track to site to allow for
timely installation.
43
44
48 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
48
51 2.01 MATERIALS
51
54 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
2O
22
23
08333-2
1. Counter shutters:
a. Base: Atlas Door Corp.
b. Optional: North American; Cornell Iron Works, Inc.; and
Cookson Co.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Counter shutter: Rolling with stainless steel slats, mounted on
face of wall or between jambs as indicated, size as indicated.
1. Counterbalance with helical springs.
2. Lift handles in bottom bar.
3. Curtain: 22 GA (0.75 mm), stainless steel, flat profile,
interlocking slats with end locks.
4. Hood: Stainless steel.
5. Bottom bar: Tubular, with vinyl astragal.
6. Model CF1-SS and CB1-SS.
C. Guides: 6063 T5 aluminum, with pile strips both sides.
D. Finish: All exposed parts, No.4 stainless steel.
E. Locking: Slide locks in bottom bar to accept cylinder lock
keyed to building keying system. '
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
2O
22
23
27 PART 3 - RXECUTION
30 3.01 INSPECTION
27
3O
33
35
36
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
33
35
36
39 3.02 INSTALLATION
39
42
44
45
47
48
50
A. Installation by manufacturer or authorized representative.
B. Install complete with hardware, in accord with shop drawings
and manufacturer's instructions.
C. Upon completion, prior to final acceptance, test and adjust to
operate easily.
END OF SECTION
42
44
45
47
48
50
U.S.P.S. = N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
03
6K26, 8F24
SECTION 08340
COILING GRILLE
08340-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all coiling grilles as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Cylinder: Section 08700.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
30
32
34
36
37
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information:
1. Operating and maintenance data:
See Division 1.
27
30
32
34
36
37
40 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
4O
43 A. Coordinate electrical work with Division 16.
43
47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
47
50 2.01 MATERIALS
50¸
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Coiling grille:
53
54
U.S.P.S.-- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
16
18
19
20
22
08340-2
a. Base: North American; Cornell Iron Works, Inc.; Cookson
Co. and Atlas Corp.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Coiling grille: Upward coiling aluminum grille.
1. Curtain: Pattern G6, horizontal rods at not more than 2 IN
(50 mm) on center running continuously from Jamb to jamb
with flat vertical links 6 IN OC, end links locking into
guides.
2. Bottom rail: Reinforced extruded aluminum.
3. Counterbalance with helical springs.
C. Guides: Extruded aluminum with double wool pile.
D. Finish: All exposed parts, AA MlOC22A21 aluminum.
E. Locking: Slide bolt locks in bottom bar to accept cylinders
keyed to building keying system.
1. Provide electrical interlock for locking devices.
Furnish with all hardware etc. necessary for installation.
O1
O2
03
O4
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
14
16
18
19
20
22
25 2.02 OPERATION
28 A. Operation: Crank, with removal handle.
30 B. Emergency exit operation: Inside pull release to allow manual
31 operation for exiting in case of emergency, or accidental lock
32 in.
25
28
3O
31
32
36 PART 3 - RxRCUTION
36
39 3.01 INSPECTION
39
42
43
45
46
A. Verify suitability of substrate and opening to accept
installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
42
43
45
46
49 3.02 INSTALLATION
52 A. By manufacturer or authorized representative'.
54 B. Prior to occupancy, adjust for smooth operation.
49
52
54
U.S.P.S. *- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.Fo
08340-3
02
END OF SECTION
02
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
6J31, 8G14
SECTION 08356
IMPACT DOOR
08356-1'
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all impact doors as indicated, in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or 'necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Structural steel: Section 05120.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY~ STORAGE AND HANDLING
30
31
A. Deliver anchoring items in time required to permit
installation.
27
30
31
34 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
34
37
39
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
37
39
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43
46 2.01 MATERIALS
46
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Impact doors:
a. Base: Rubbair Door Co.
b. Optional: Frommelt Ind., Inc.; and W.B.McGuire Co., Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. -_ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
08356-2
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
B. Doors, impact: Minimum 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) thick, double action,
shock absorbing construction.
1. Outer surfaces: 2 ply duck reinforced with shore 'A' 60
durometer, rubber.
2. Color: Grey to match Glidden 79-38.
3. Separators: H sections, shore 'A' 70 durometer rubber,
cemented in place.
4. Compartments filled with pads of flexible material,
resistant to vermin, oxidation and collapse.
5. Nose: 2 ply duck reinforced with 2200 PSI, half round
rubber.
6. Style: Standard, with 16 x 18 IN Polycarbonate Lexan vision
panel in each leaf.
7. Bumpers: Black, extra heavy duty, tear drop shaped spring
0.062 steel or polyethylene bumpers.
a. Project 4 IN from face of door.
b. 36 IN high.
c. Attached to each face of door with thrubolts, locknuts
and washers.
8. Hold open pin feature.
9. Air seals at head, nose, Jamb and floor.
C. Door hangers: 62,000 PSI steel tubing. 1. Adjustable spring compensator with steel Jamb guards.
2. Standard top CAM and follower: 1-1/4 IN rise.
3. Top and bottom locking bolts with chain lock sleeves
doors as scheduled.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
32 PART 3 - F~ION
32
35 3.01 INSPECTION
35
38
39
41
42
A. Verify suitability of substrate and mountings to accept
installation of door.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
38
39
41
42
45 3.02 INSTALLATION
45
48
50
52
54
A. Install units on structural frame supports.
B. Provide drilling and tapping required.
Co Adjust doors to provide smooth operation.
END OF SECTION
48
50
52
54
U.S.P.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & VoM.F.
O1
O3
O4
6K26, 8G14
SECTION 08362
OVERHEAD D00R
(Type 4 - Coiling Steel)
08362-1
01
03
04
07 PART 1 - GENERAL
O7
10 1.01 DESCRIPTION
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
29
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
services for all coiling steel overhead doors as indicated,
in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or ne6essary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Cylinder: Section 08700.
2. Overhead door (Type 1, 2, 3):
Section 08363.
1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
29
32
34
36
38
39
40
41
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Certificate of U/L construction.
3. Owner personnel instruction.
32
34
36
38
39
4O
41
45 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
45
48 2.01 MATERIALS
48
5i
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Overhead doors: -
a. Base: Atlas Door Corp.
51
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
06
07
O8
09
10
12
14
15
08362-2
b. Optional: North American; Cookson Co.; and Cornell Iron
Works, Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Door, overhead: Coiling, steel, With stainless steel slats of
sizeslindicated.
1. Finish: Ail exposed parts stainless steel, No. 403; all
concealed parts galvanized G90.
2. Mounting: Face of wall.
C. Guides: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Locking: Slide bolts, to accept cylinder keyed to building's
keying system.
O1
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
15
18 2°02 OPERATION
18
21
22
A. Operation: Chain.
1. Counterbalanced with helical springs.
21
22
26
PART 3 - ~mCb'flON
26
29 3.01 INSPECTION
29
32
33
35
36
A. Verify suitability of substrate and opening to accept
installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and
responsibility for performance.
32
33
35
36
39 3.02 INSTALLATION
39
42
44
46
A. B~ manufacturer or authorized representative.
B. Prior to occupancy, adjust door for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION
42
44
46
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
O4
6J31, 8G14
SECTION 08363
OVERHEAD DOOR
(Type 1, 2, & 3 Sectional Steel)
08363-1
O1
03
04
07 PART 1 - GENERAL
O7
10 1.01 DESCRIPTION
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
29
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
services for all {sectional steel} overhead doors as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
'and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Overhead door (Type 4): Section 08362.
2. Electrical work: Division 16.
1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
29
32
34
36
37
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Project information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
32
34
36
37
41 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
41
44 2.01 MATERIALS
44
47
48
49
50
51
52
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Sectional steel overhead doors:
a. Base: HcKee Door Co., Overhead Door Corp.; Barcol
Overdoor Co., Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
47
48
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S. -~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19.
21
22
08363-2
B. Door: Steel sectional, Commercial grade overhead door, of
sizes and configurations indicated.
1. Door sections: 2 IN (50 mm) nominal thick, with flush
inside and outside faces formed of minimum 16 GA (1.5 mm)
G60 galvanized steel.
2. Insulation: Core filled with polystyrene or polyurethane
with interior face sheet.
3. Wind load resistance: 30 PSF (146 KSM), minimum.
4. Weatherstrip on bottom: Flexible neoprene safety edge.
5. Weatherstrip on top and sides: Adjustable neoprene seal
strip.
6. Air infiltration: 1CFM/FT (156 ccm/SEC/M) of perimeter,
maximum.
7. Vision panels: Glazed, with vinyl frames.
8. Prime painted white.
9. Provide*pass door complete with hardware as indicated. (No
deviation in width of pass door allowed).
10. Refer to drawings for configuration of Type 1, 2, and 3
overhead doors.
C. Track: Vertical lift or high lift, heavy duty, G90
galvanized, to provide maximum clearances inside building.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
25
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
2.02 OPERATION
A. Operation:
1. Type 1 doors:
a. Chain operated.
b. Locking: Inside slide locks.
2. Type 2 and 3 doors:
a. Motor operated, with chain operator back-up.
b. Opening rate: Between 2/3 and 1 FPS (200-300 mm/SEC).
c. Operator: 1/3 HP minimum~ 120/1/60.
d. Standard 3 pushbutton control.
e. Interlock electric with locking device.
25
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
41 PART 3 - I~X~C~TION
41
44 3.01 INSPECTION
44
47
48
50
51
A. Verify suitability of substrate and opening to accept
installation.
Bo Installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and
responsibility for performance°
47
48
50
51
U.SoP.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M°F. & VoM.Fo
01
O4
O6
O7
O9
10
12
3.02 INSTALLATION'
08363-3
A. By. manufacturer or authorized representative.
B. Provide all required mounting and accessory items for complete
installation.
C. Prior to occupancy, adjust door for smooth operation and
specified weather and air sealing.
END OF SECTION
01
O4
O6
07
09
10
12
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
5A25, 8G14
SECTION 08400
MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS
08400-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
A. General:
1. Furnish all materials and services for all miscellaneous
aluminum extrusions as indicated, in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Interior aluminum framing system: Section 10615.
2. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
3. Nonload bearing wall framing systems: Section 09110.
C. Description of system:
1. Provide miscellaneous aluminum extrusions of manufacturer's
standard line or custom designed as necessary to comply with
configurations as detailed.
D. Location of work including but not limited to: 1. Intersections of wall and columns, column trim.
2. Window sills.
3. Observation units at lookout galleries.
4. Closures adjacent to (1) above at storefront applications.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
40 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
4O
43
44
A. Fabrication and finishing standards: Applicable standards of
AA and AAMA.
43
44
47 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See-Division 1)
47
5O
51
52
53
A. Shop drawings: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
2. Profiles.
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08400-2
O1 B. Samples for color verification.
01
04 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O4
07 A. Deliver to jobsite as to not delay construction process.
O7
11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
11
14 2.01 MATERIALS
14
17
18
19
A. Miscellaneous aluminum extrusions: 1. Aluminum; ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy.
2. Finish: Vhite enamel to match DuPont enamel No. 508.
17
18
19
22 2.02 FABRICATION
22
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. General:
1. Minimum wall thickness: 1/8 IN.
B. Column trim:
1. Fabricate to configurations detailed.
2. Provide lengths sufficient to span from finish floor to
bottom of column capitol without intermediate joints.
3. At conditions where no column capitol is indicated, provide
length to span from finish floor to 6 IN above highest
adjacent ceiling.
4. Width of required extrusion is determined by diameter of
column.
a. At 8 IN columns, width equals 7-5/8 IN.
b. At 10 IN columns, width equals 6-5/8 IN.
c. At 12 IN columns, width equals 5-5/8 IN.
25
26
28
29 '-
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
43 PART 3 - R~q~CUTION
43
46 3.01 INSTALLATION - COLUMN TRIM
46
49
51
52
53
54
A. Apply foam tape to column full height floor to ceiling.
B. Attach column trim to column using self tapping screws at 2 FT
OoC. maximum. .
1. Align centerline of column trim with centerline of column.
2. Install column trim plumb.
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S._- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
08400-3
02
04
05
07
C. Apply foam tape to column trim full height floor to ceiling.'
D. Attach interior aluminum framing system to column trim using
self tapping screws at 2 FT O.C. maximum.
END OF SECTION
O2
O4
O5
07
UoS.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
6J31, 8G14
SECTION 08410
STOREFRONT
08410-1
01
03
06 PAI{T I - GENEI{AL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all storefront and entrance as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. It is intent of these specifications that storefront
contractor coordinate specification Sections 08410 and
08521, and be singly responsible for interaction and
operation of both.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Sealants: Section 07900.
2. Finish hardware: Section 08700.
3. Aluminum windows: Section 08521.
C. Work installed but not furnished:
1. Glass: Section 08800.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
36 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
36
39
40
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
51
A. Fabrication, erection and finishing standards: Applicable
standards of AA, AAMA and AWS.
B. Structural considerations: In accord with local building
codes.
C. Comply with all standards and requirements listed under
testing.
D. Welding and welders: 1. Utilize skilled and qualified welders, licensed where
required in accord with local building regulations.
2. Perform welding in conformance with AWS code.
39
40
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
O4
O5
O7
O8
O9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
08410-2
1.03 TEST REQUIREMENTS
A. Utilize independent testing laboratories specifically qualified
to conduct all performance tests required.
B. Performance tests may be conducted in manufacturer's
laboratories provided they are witnessed and certified by
qualified independent testing laboratory personnel.
C. Perform all tests on "Test Unit": Full sized store front unit
for project or a minimum 5 x 8 FT (1.5 x 2.4 M) unit mounted in
test chamber in exact accord with job conditions including
anchorage system, calking, sealing, etc.
D. Test unit to be completely assembled and glazed. Thermal tests
may be conducted on 4 X 6 FT (1.2 x 1.8 M) unit.
g. Test air infiltration first, water resistance second. Other
tests may be in any order.
Air infiltration test:
1. Test in accord with ASTM E283-73.
2. Air infiltration through fixed wall areas: 0.06 CFM/SF (280
ccm/SEC/SM), max., fixed wall area when tested at 6.24 PSF
(30.5 KSH).
G. Water resistance test: 1. Test in accord with ASTM E331-70 (1975).
2. No leakage allowed with a positive pressure drop of 6.24 PSF
(30.5 KSM).
H. Uniform load structural test: 1. Subject unit to load of 30 PSF (147 KSM) applied to outside
of unit.
2. Test in accord with ASTM E330-79.
3. No failure of parts allowed.
I. Thermal tests:
1. Perform all thermal tests on unit sized to reflect most
restrictive situation on project (i.e., worst framing,
glass, spandrel proportions for producing desired thermal
results).
2. Submit elevations indicating which areas were selected from
project along with calculations verifying that test areas
are in fact proportional to area selected.
3. Test in accord with ASTM C236-80.
4. Thermal transmittance of insulated glass and framing areas:
Average U-value of 0.65 BTUH/SF/degF, max.
5~ Average calculated thermal transmittance of composite wall:
U-value of 0.65 BTUH/SF/degF, max.with substantiating test
performed on similar units.
O1
04
O5
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
08410-3
6. Condensation resistance test: Determine CRF values from
data obtained On above mentioned thermal test. Provide CRF
(Condensation Resistance Factor) not less than 50.
J. Structural thermal barrier tests:
1. Test 12 IN (300 mm) insulated section.
2. Heat exterior face to 180 degF (82 deg,) for 5 MIN before
loading, as indicated by thermocouple operated by automatic
controller.
3. Use a Universal Testing machine set in 12,000 LB (4,500 KG)
load range with 2,000 LB (750 KG) load applied at a strain
rate of 0.05 IN/IN/MIN (0.0052 mm/mm/MIN).
4. Tension pull test: Secure interior and exterior faces of
section mechanically in a fixed horizontal position. Apply
direct tension (pull).
5. Shear test: Secure interior face of section mechanically in
a fixed vertical position. Apply load to exterior face by a
bearing plate resting on top of exterior face. Section
shall show no loss of bond during test.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
22 1.04 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
22
25
26
27
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
A. Shop drawings: 1. Elevations and sections.
2. Details for review of support system to building framer
B. Product data:
1. Certified, independant test reports verifying all
requirements.
C. Samples: 1. Construct a 10 FT high by 15 FT wide, fully glazed sample at
site for system and color approval.
2. Include aluminum window sample (Section 08521) in sample.
D. Project information:
1. Warranty.
25
26
27
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
42 1.05 WARRANTY
42
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
A. Written warranty signed jointly by fabricator, installer and
Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace any items of work
performed under this section which fail.
1. Failure includes defects in materials, workmanship, water
tightness of assembly, calking, glazing or any other defects
in storefront system which affects its ability to perform as
weathertight envelope.
2. ~arranty period is ~ years.
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08410-4
01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
01
04 2.01 MATERIALS
04
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
19
20
21-
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Storefront system:
a. Base: Kawneer Co., Inc., 1600 series (805-179).
b. Optional: Wausau Metals Corp., 6000 pressure wall system
(2-1/2 IN face); Vistawall Architectural Products, 2600
series.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
3. Submit all test reports with approval request.
B. Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy.
C. Finish:
1. Base coat: Minimum 70 percent P.V.F.
2. Clear P.V.F. second coat on all doors and operable windows.
3. Color:
a. White; to match Dupont enamel 508.
b. Green; to match Dupont enamel 1317 for all doors and
operable windows.
D. Storefront: ' 1. Complete extruded aluminum framing system and glazing.
Frame profile 2-1/2 x 6 IN, any variation to be submitted
for approval.
2. Include sills, mullions, division bars, anchors and
accessories.
3. Use no through metal connectors.
4. Provide system to receive 1-1/2 IN (38 mm) insulating glass.
5. Interior vestibule components to receive 1/4 IN (6 mm)
glass.
6. Provide complete system under single responsibility.
7. Provide double weather seal system with weeps and positive
drainage for ventilating moisture within system to outside.
8. Provide expansion mullions at 25 FT column centerlines.
E. Doors: 1. Fabricate of extruded sections assembled with tension rods,
or welded corners.
2. Provide doors having nominal 5 IN (125 mm) top and 6-1/2 IN
(167 mm) bottom rail, with minimum 5 IN (125 mm) stiles.
3. Provide single acting doors for butt hinge operation.
4. Provide weatherstripping at all edges.
5. Prepare and reinforce doors to receive hardware specified in
Section 08700.
6. Prepare exterior doors.to receive 1/4 IN tempered glass.
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
U.S.P.S. -.N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
08
09
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
08410-5
F. Fasteners: Anodized aluminum or non-magnetic (300 series)
stainless steel which will not cause electrolytic action or
corrosion.
1. Provide Phillips flat head screws where exposed.
2. Finish exposed aluminum fasteners to match specified
aluminum finish.
G. Sealants: See Section 07900. 1. Use exposed sealants of color to match aluminum finish.
2. Provide and install all sealants and calking required within
and around storefront as work of this section.
H. Glass: See Section 08800 for glass to be installed under this
section.
I. Brackets, anchors and reinforcements:
1. Aluminum wherever possible.
2. Where steel is required, hot dip galvanize after
fabrication, with minimum G-90 zinc coating, ASTM A123, or
use 300 series stainless steel.
J. Flashings: Minimum 0.040 IN (1 mm) aluminum. 1. Finish to match storefront if exposed.
2. Mill finish if concealed.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
27 2.02 FABRICATION
30
31
33
34
36
38
39
41
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
A. Fully degrease and clean members prior to assembly or
application of sealing compound or protective coatings.
B. Weld by methods recommended by manufacturer and AWS to avoid
discoloration at welds.
C. Grind exposed welds smooth and restore finish.
D. Ease corners of cut edges to a radius of approximately 1/64 IN
(0.5 mm).
E. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
F. Fit and assemble work at shop to maximum extent possible.
G. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of
planes and angles.
H. Provide secure attachment and support at joints, with hairline
fit of contacting members.
I. Reinforce work as necessary to withstand wind loadings and to
support system.
27
30
31
33
34
36
38
39
41
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08410-6
O1 J. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or separators
02 to prevent corrosion.
04 K. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts
05 or other non abrasive concealed inserts to prevent freeze-up of
06 joint.
08 L. Reinforce frames for hardware.
10 M. Incorporate aluminum windows (Section 08521) into design of
11 storefront work as indicated in drawings.
01
02
04
05
06
O8
10
11
15 PAP, T 3 - ]~ECDTION
18 3.01 INSPECTION
21
23
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation assumes responsibility for performance.
26 3.02 INSTALLATION
29
30
'32
34
36
37
39
41
43
A. Comply fully with manufacturer's shop drawings, erection
drawings, and recommendations.
B. Set units plumb, level and true to line.
C. Anchor securely.
D. Separate metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action.
E. Set sill and base members in a bed of sealant.
F. Provide joint fillers or gaskets for weathertight construction.
G. Calk all joints within and at perimeter of system.
46 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
49
51
52
A. Clean promptly after installation.
B. Exercise care to avoid damage to finish, wall members,
fastenings, etc., and .to protective coating, if any.
15
18
21
23
26
30
32
34
36
37
39
41
43
46
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoFo & V.M.F.
O1
O2
04
05
07
08410-7
C. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds and dirt and leave
clean.
D. Protect work and take other precautions required to ensure that
work will be without damage at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
04
05
O7
U.S.PoS. ~ No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
6J31, 8G14
SECTION 08521
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08521-1
O1
03
06 PART
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all aluminum windows as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Work installed but not furnished:
1. Glass: Furnished in Section 08800.
C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Sealants: Section 07900.
2. Storefront: Section 08410.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
26
27
28
31 1.02 OUALITY ASSUI~CE
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
A. Window test standards: 1. AAMA 1502.6, 1502.7 and 904.1.
2. ASTM E283-73.
3. ASTM g331-70 (1975).
4. ASTM E330-79.
5. ASTM C236-66 (1971).
6. ASTM E90-75.
7. ASTM E413-73.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
44 1.03 TEST REOUIREMENTS
44
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. General: 1. Provide independent laboratory test report.
2. Submit following test data performed on "Test Unit" with
shop drawings, prior to installation of any window units.
3. Manufacturers requesting approval submit all test data with
request.
4. Condensation Resistance, Thermal, and Temperature Exposure
Tests may be performed on Alternate Test Units.
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. -_ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
08521-2
5. Perform tests for shop drawing sUbmittal on Test Units as
specified.
6. Use of certifiable units larger than tested is allowed
provided calculated deflection does not exceed maximum
listed when using effective moment(s) of inertia and section
properties of window elements obtained from test of smaller
unit and applying them to exact dimensions and conditions of
larger job unit.
7. Test air infiltration first, water resistance second, and
other tests in any order.
B. Test unit:
1. Largest size window unit for project, with largest
ventilator, or minimum 5 x 7 FT (1.5 x 2.1 M) unit, unless
otherwise noted.
2. Completely assembled and glazed as specified.
3. Install in test chamber to simulate and be in accord with
installation details to be used on project.
C. Alternate test unit: Same as test unit except as follows:
1. Window unit as required by AAMA 1502.7, 3 x 4 FT (0.9 x 1.2
M).
2. Unit need not be identical to project unit but must comply
as follows:
a. Same thickness of frame section (front to back).
b. Identical thermal break.
c. Same basic metal mass on outside.
d. Same type of glazing.
3. Submit all information necessary to prove that Alternate
Test Unit complies in above respects.
D. Air infiltration test:
1. With sash and ventilators closed and locked, test in accord
with ASTM E283.
2. Air infiltration: 0.10 CFM/FT of crack length, at pressure
differential of 6.24 PSF (30.5 K/SM).
g. Water resistance test:
1. Mount glazed unit in its vertical position, continuously
supported around outside perimeter with sash and ventilators
closed and locked.
2. Test in accord with ASTM E331.
3. No uncontrolled leakage allowed with pressure differential
of 6.24 PSF (30.5 K/SM}.
F. Uniform load deflection test:
1. Test in accord with ASTM E330.
2. Subject unit to load of 25 PSF (146.5 K/SM) applied to
outside of window and 25 PSF (146.5 K/SM) applied to inside
of window.
3. Maximum allowable deflection unsupported span~ L/175.
4. No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware
parts, support arms, activating mechanisms, or any other
damage which would cause window to be inoperable.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08521-3
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
24
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
G. Uniform load structural test:
1. Test in accord with ASTM E330.
2. Subject unit to loads indicated below.
3. Stabilize pressure and maintain for ten seconds.
4. No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware
parts, support arms, activating mechanisms, or any other
damage which would cause window to be inoperable.
5. Maximum permanent deformation of any main frame, sash or
ventilator member: 0.4 percent of its span.
6. After performing Uniform Load Structural Test, increase
loads 1-1/2 times and perform Safety Test.
7. No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware
parts, support arms, activating mechanisms, or any other
damage which would cause window to be inoperable.
8. Design unit to withstand following design pressures acting
normal to plane of wall, at applicable heights and
locations.
a. At 30 FT (9.1 M) or less:
30 PSF acting inward
30 PSF acting outward
b. At 30 - 50 FT (9.1 - 15.2 M):
35 PSF acting inward
35 PSF acting outward
H. Casement horizontal deflection: 1. Test ventilator installed in window frame, without muntins,
unglazed, with locking hardware in approximate center of
ventilator side rail locked.
2. Apply 20 LB (9 KG) concentrated load, acting at either of
unrestrained corners of ventilator.
3. Deflection: 5/16 IN/FT (24 mm/M) of vent width, max.
4. At conclusion of test, ventilator shall operate properly.
I. Casement vertical deflection: 1. Test completely assembled window, ventilator without
muntins, unglazed, with specified hardware.
2. Apply 60 LB (27 KG) concentrated load acting at lower
unrestrained corner of ventilator opened at 90 degrees.
3. Vertical deflection at lower unrestrained corner: 5/16 IN/FT
(24 mm/M) of vent width, max.
4. At conclusion of test, ventilator shall operate properly.
J. Casement hardware: 1. Apply uniform load of 6.24 PSF (30.5 KG/SM).
2. At conclusion of test operators shall satisfactorily close
ventilators weathertight.
3. No failure of hardware, screws, track or permanent
deformation of arm..
K. Casement torsion:
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
24
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
44
45
46
48
49
50
08521-4 ·
1. Test ventilator without muntins and unglazed.
2. Support ventilator on fulcrums at diagonally opposite
corners, with a corner diagonally opposite loaded corner
secured in same plane by fulcrum support block and clamp.
3. Apply 20 LB (9 KG) concentrated load, acting at unrestrained
corner of ventilator.
4. Deflection at unrestrained corner: 1-1/2 IN (37 mm), max.
L. Condensation resistance test: 1. Perform on Test Unit or Alternate Test Unit.
2. Test in accord with AAMA 1502.6.
3. CRF (Condensation Resistance Factor): Minimum 45.
M. Structural thermal barrier tension test:
1. Test urethane filled, debridged, sections of aluminum.
2. Mechanically secure interior and exterior faces of 12 IN
(300 mm) section in horizontal position.
3. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface
temperature at 180 degF (82 degC) five minutes before
loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an
automatic controller.
4. Apply direct tension (pull) using a Universal Testing
machine set in 12,000 LB (5,400 KG) load range.
5. Test results: No loss of bond at 2,000 LB (900 KG) load
with load applied at a strain rate of 0.05 IN/IN/MIN (0.1
mm/mm/MIN).
N. Structural thermal barrier shear test:
1. Test urethane filled, debridged, sections of aluminum.
2. Mechanically secure interior face of 12 IN (300 mm) section
in vertical position.
3. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface
temperature at 180 degF (82 degC) five minutes before
loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an
automatic controller~
4. Apply load to exterior face by a bearing plate resting on
top of exterior face. Shear to be applied by a Universal
Testing machine set in 12,000 LB (5,400 KG) load range at a
strain rate of 0.050 IN/IN/MIN (0.1 mm/mm/MIN).
5. Test results: No loss of bond at 2,000 LB (900 KG) loading.
0. Ventilator corner load tests:
1. Test each type of ventilator, by loading with a Universal
Testing machine.
2. Vent corner must show no appreciable elongation up to a
yield force of 2,050 LB (900 KG).
P. Acoustical test: 1. Test in accord with ASTM E90 and E413.
2. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 32 or better.
0!
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
U.SoP.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1 1.04 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
04
O5
O6
O8
09
10
12
13
14
16
17
08521-5
A. Shop drawings: 1. Elevations and sections.
2. Details for review of support system to building frame.
B. Product data:
1. Certified independent laboratory test reports verifying all
requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Finished unit installed in storefront system sample
specified in Section 08410.
D. Project information:
1. Warranty.
20 1.05 WARRANTY
23
24
25
26
A. 5 year warranty of weathertightness of installation: Air and
water integrity and structural adequacy of units hardware,
including sealants and calking within and around perimeter of
installation.
30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
36
38
4O
41
43
44
45
46
A. Extruded aluminum: 6063T5 alloy.
B. Glass: As specified in Section 08800.
C. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.
1. Exposed sealants: Match color of aluminum.
D. Thermal insulator: Poured in place polyurethane, ~elf-adhertng
to adjacent aluminum surfaces. Provide a minimum of 1/4 IN (6
mm) separation between exterior and interior metal surfaces
after bridge is removed.
49 2.02 WINDOWS
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturer~:
1. Aluminum windows:
O1
04
O5
06
O8
09
10
12
13
14
16
17
2O
23
24
25
26
3O
33
36
38
4O
41
43
44
45
46
49
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1~
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
08521-6
a. Base: Wausau Metals Corp., 2250T series; Kawneer Co.,
Inc.; gfco.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440 and paragraph "Test Requirements".
B. Windows - General:
1. Coordinate products specified and assemble into complete
window systems under responsibility of one manufacturer,
including flashing, sills, glass, sealants, and spandrel
panels, if required.
2. Shop assemble extruded aluminum frame members and sash
members to form interconnecting interior and exterior
portions of frames separated by continuous solid semi-rigid
vinyl or urethane insulating materials permitting thermal
movement of frames without detrimental shear or tensile
stresses on insulating material.
3. Use no bolts, screws or any other metal fastenings impairing
independent frame movement or bridging thermo-barrier
effectiveness.
4. Finish of all aluminum components: Minimum 70 percent
P.V.Fo with clear P.V.F. second coat°
a. Color: Green to match Dupont enamel 1317.
C. Casement: 1. Mitre members at corners.
2. FaSten together by use of a corner block and permanently
join.by mechanical means, chemical or heliarc welding oR
nonexposed surfaces, leaving only hairline joinery.
3. Seal weathertight.
4. Do not use joinery methods which discolor finish.
D. Window frames; casement: 1. Cope and mechanically fasten together at corners, or mitre
at corners and heliarc weld on nonexposed surfaces, leaving
only hairline joinery.
2. Seal weathertight.
3. Do not use joinery methods which discolor finish.
E. Veatherstripping: 1. Provide 2 rows of fin type extruded neoprene weatherstrtps
extending around perimeter of sash at both inner and outer
overlap contacts.
2. Provide corners which are securely staked and joined.
3. Provide units which are easily replaceable.
F. Window hardware - General:
1. Locking device and strikes: White bronze and/or
non-magnetic stainless steel.
2. Ail hardware elements that bridge sash or frame thermal
barrier: Reinforced Nylon, Delrin or suitable non-metallic,
low conductivity material.
3. Custodial key operation: Secure sash in closed position and
automatically lock in washing position.
4. Safety keys removable only in closed position.
01
O2
03
O4
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08521-7
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
G. Window hardware, casement:
1. Extension or butt hinges for roto-operated windows.
2. Concealed, 300 series, stainless steel 4 bar friction hinges
for manually operated windows.
3. Two locks for all ventilators greater than 4 FT (1.2 M) in
height.
4. Where upper lock is more than 6 FT (1.8 M) above floor,
provide double grip hardware which activates both locks from
lower device.
5. Roto operators: Tested in accord with ASTM E405, method A.
Remove handles for all tests.
a. At 500 cycles: Operating moment: 120 LBF-IN; closing
torque: 60 LBP-IN.
b. At 7500 cycles: Operating moment: 60 LBF-IN; closing
torque: 60 LBF-IN.
H. Glass: See Section 08800 for types of glass to be installed
under this section.
I. Screens: 1. 18 x 16 mesh aluminum wire screens.
2. Secure to aluminum shapes with vinyl spline.
3. Hold in place with spring loaded plungers.
4. Removable to inside of building.
29 PART 3 - ~X~CUTION
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
29
32 3.01 INSPECTION
32
35
36
38
39
A. Verify that openings are plumb, level, clean and provide a
solid anchoring surface.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
35
36
38
39
42 3.02 INSTALLATION
42
45
46
48
49
51
52
A. Erection is responsibility of manufacturer or his
representative.
B. Use only skilled tradesmen and in accord with approved shop
drawings.
C. Plumb and align nominal face of windows in a single plane for
each wall plane.
45
46
48
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
O4
O6
07
O8
10
11
13
14
08521-8
D. Erect units square and true to insure proper alignment of all
openings.
E. Adjust operating sash for proper operation after installation.
F. Provide FSK vapor barrier tape between window perimeter and
adjoining collateral materials and existing wall vapor barrier
to assure continuity.
G. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weathertight
installation at all construction Joints and at perimeter.
H. Wipe off excess material and leave all surfaces and Joints
smooth.
O1
O2
O4
O6
07
O8
10
11
13
14
17 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
17
20
21
22
24
A. Manufacturer visit project at least twice; once at beginning of
installation, and once after installation is complete to assure
continuing quality control.
B. Report visits to Contracting Officer.
2O
21
22
24
27 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
30
31
32
34
35
37
A. After completion of project, adjust all windows for proper
operation, recheck installation, weathersealing, sealants and
other items of complete installation.
B. Completely clean all glass and metal surfaces and remove labels
before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
27
30
31
· 32
34
35
37
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.P.
SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
08700-1
01
03
O6
DESCRIPTION
O9
~4
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all finish hardware, as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, provide
and install supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to, or necessary for, a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work ~specified elsewhere: 1. Weatherstrtpping on aluminum doors: Section 08410.
2. Security access system: Section 16710.
3. Metal doors and frames: Section 08100.
4. Wood doors: Section 08210.
5. Overhead doors: Section 08362.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
31 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
34
35
37
38
A. Finish designations and standards: Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Standard 1301.
B. Installer qualifications: Supervised or inspected by certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
34
35
37
38
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
44
45
46
47
48
A. Product data: 1. Complete hardware schedule by door.
2. Complete list of products and model numbers.
3. Certification that items bear U/L label where required.
4. Keying schedule.
50
51
52
53
54
B. Project information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
a. Parts catalog.
b. Keying records.
2. Owner instruction report.
41
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08700-2
O1 3. Six months maintenance report.
01
04 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O4
07
09
11
13
15
16
18
20
21
A. Tag or package each item identified to hardware schedule.
B. Include installation instructions.
C. Deliver hardware items at times and to locations as directed.
D. Check hardware against schedule, reorder missing items.
go Control items before and after installation so that completion
will not be delayed by hardware losses.
Fo Protect finishes by temporary coverings as required.
G. Deliver extra hardware to Contracting Officer, boxed and
identified.
07
09
11
13
15
16
18
2O
21
24 1,05 JOB CONDITIONS
24
27
A. Coordinate installation with finishing operations.
31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
27
31
34 2.01 MATERIALS
36
37
38
NOTE:
Listing of model numbers indicates base manufacturers
specification is written around; see list below for
additional approved manufacturers:
34
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Locks and latches:
a. Base: Schlage Lock Co.
b. Optional: Sargent; Corbin and Russwin Div./Emhart
Hardware Group.
2. Door closers:
a. Base: LCN Closers.
b. Optional: Norton 7700 series; Yale.
3. Butts and hinges:
a. Base: Hager Hinge Co°
b. Optional: Lawrence Brothers, Inc.; Stanley Hardware
Division/Stanley Works; McKinney Manufacturing Co.
4. Door stops:
a. Base: Glynn-Johnson Corp.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
08700-3
b. Optional: Ives Div./Leigh Products, Inc.; Sargent;
Corbin and Russwin Div./Emhart Corp.
5. Kickplates, door pulls, push plates and bars:
a. Base: Hiawatha, Inc.
b. Optional: Brookline Ind., Inc.; Cipco Corp.; Baldwin
Hardware Manufacturing Corp.; Builders Brass.
6. Automatic flush bolts and coordinators:
a. Base: Base Door Controls, Inc.
b. Optional: Glynn Johnson; Ives.
7. Thresholds and weatherstripping:
a. Base: Reese Enterprises, Inc.
b. Optional: Zero Weatherstripping, Inc.; Pemko
Manufacturing Co.
8. Exit devices:
a. Base: Von Duprin, Inc.
b. Optional= Sargent; Monarch; Yale.
9. Key cabinet:
a. Base: Lund Equipment Co., Inc.
b. Optional: Telkee, Inc.; Keycontrol, Inc.
10. Other materials:
a. Base: As indicated.
11. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440 and submit samples of both specified item and
proposed item for comparison.
B. Hardware - General:
1. Provide hardware for fire rated openings in complianc~ with
U/L and NFPA No.80.
2. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements
for such hardware.
3. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by
U/L for types and sizes of doors.
4. Furnish items of hardware for proper door swing.
5. Provide strikes with curved lips.
6. Provide extended lips when necessary.
7. Provide strike boxes.
8. Provide lock devices which allow doors to be opened from
inside room without a key.
9. On doors which might prove dangerous to blind persons, like
doors to loading platforms, boiler and mechanical rooms,
stages, stairs, electrical closets etc., provide knurling
on knob, or bar of exit device.
10. Provide dustproof strikes for all doors with automatic or
manual flush bolts or other bolts to floor.
11. Finishes:
a. Locks: 626.
b. Door pulls, push bars, push plates: 630.
c. Kick plates: 630.
d. Exit Devices: 626.
e. Butts: 626.
f. Door stops, holders, dead locks, mortise bolts, pivots
and miscellaneous hardware: 626.
g. Exposed arms and covers of closers: 689.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
5O
52
53
54
08700-4
C. Fasteners: 1. Manufacture hardware to conform to templates.
2. Generally, prepare for Phillips oval head machine screw
installation.
3. Exposed screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in
surfaces of other work, to match finish of other work as
closely as possible.
4. For mineral core doors use screws with threads to head to
apply butts.
5. Provide concealed fasteners unless thru bolted.
6. Through bolt closers on labeled doors.
7. Provide non-corrosive fasteners.
D. Locks and latches:
1. ANSI A156.2, Grade 1, mortise with antifriction latchbolt
with 1 IN throw.
Mortise Lock Numbers
ANSI Function Schlage Sargent Corbin Russwin
FO1 Passage L9010 7815 9510 5025
Exit L25D 7813 DL7510
FO2 Privacy L9040 7865 9520 5069
FO4 Office L9050P 7805 9543 5056
Fl4 Store Lock L9466 7826 9522 5022
FO5 Classroom L9070 7837 9555 5045
FO7 Storeroom L9080 7804 9557 5059
Fl7 Deadbolt L9463 7823 427 5003
2. Magnetic lock: Von Duprin 700 Shearlock; 1000 LB force.
E. Door closers: ANSI A156.4, Type C02011, C02021 or C02031 as
required to fit conditions.
1. Size door closers to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for door sizes and locations; adjust to
opening force required by code.
2. Supply arms, brackets, and plates, as required.
3. Mount on room side of corridor doors.
4. All closers with integral back checks.
5. Entrance and vestibule doors: Delayed action closer and
overhead stop.
6. Other exterior outswinging doors: Closer with limiting
cushion stop.
7. Floor closers: Rixson, heavy duty series.
F. Butts and hinges: ANSI A156.1 1. Following table refers to
manufacturers' numbers which are considered equal.
Hager Lawrence Stanley McKlnney
Type 1 SL BBl199 . B5151A FBB199 T4B 3386
Type 2 SL BBl168 B5151 FBB168 T4B 3786
Type 3 SL BB1279 B4101 FBB179 TB 2714
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
5O
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
02
03
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
50
51
08700-5
Type 4 SL 1279 2481 F 179 T 2714
Type 5 SL BBll91 BB4101A FBB191 TB 2314
Type 6 SL BB1268 BB5152 FBB268 T4B3795
1. Flat button tips on all butts.
2. Size butts to door size and weight, and to clear trim and
allow 180 degree door swing.
3. Provide butts with slim line barrel design.
4. Butt types:
a. Exterior outswinging doors: Type 1NRP.
b. Exterior tnswinging doors: Type 2.
c. Interior doors thru 36 IN (900 mm) wide: Type 4.
d. Interior doors with closer: Type 3.
e. Interior doors over 36 IN (900 mm) wide: Type 2.
f. Interior doors thru 36 IN (900 mm) wide, for wet areas:
Type 5.
g. Interior doors over 36 IN (900 mm) wide for wet areas:
Type 1.
5. Butt quantities:
a. Doors up to 60 IN (1.5 M) in height: 2 butts.
b. Doors 61-90 IN (1.5-2.3 M) in height: 3 butts.
c. Doors 91-120 IN (2.3-3 M) in height: 4 butts.
d. Dutch doors: 4 butts.
6. Butt sizes:
a. 1.75 IN (44 mm) doors: 4.5 x 4.5 IN (112 x ll2mm).
b. 1.37 IN (35 mm) doors: 3.5 x 3.5 IN (87 x 87mm).
G. Door stops: Wall mounted, Glynn Johnson WB6OX or WB6OXT. 1. Where door swings more than 105 degrees without
encountering a wall, install overhead stop 360 series.
2. Where exterior door does not have a closer and does not
swing against a wall, install overhead stop 90 MS series.
3. Floor mounted stops not accepted.
H. Kick plates: ANSI A156.6, Type JlO0. 1. 8 IN (200 mm) high x 2 IN (50 mm) LDW.
2. Bevel 3 edges of plates.
3. 0.050 IN (1.2 mm) thick stainless steel.
I. Door pulls, push plates and bars: ANSI A156.6. 1. Push plate: Type 200F, 4 x 16 IN, square corner, flat
plate, with beveled edges.
2. Push bar: Type 1081 round bar.
3. Pull: Type 537A, straight pull with round bar, 12 IN.
4. Provide cutouts as required for cylinders.
J. Thresholds: Reese S204A, S205 1/2A, S207A, T550A, or 720.
1. Provide required bolt cutouts.
K. Hardware, miscellaneous:
1. Standard items by Emhart Corp.; Ives; Sargent.
O1
O2
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
5O
51
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
01
O2
O3
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
52
54
08700-6
L. Flush bolts, automatic: Door Controls, 840 for hollow metal,
or 940 for wood doors; or Glynn Johnson, FB7 for hollow metal,
or FB8 for wood doors; Ives.
M. Strikes, dustproof: Ives 489; Door Controls; Glynn Johnson.
N. Door coordinators: Door Controls, 600 series; Glynn Johnson,
COR series; Ives.
1. If coordinator is provided for door which has stop which
lacks enough surface area to allow proper mounting; provide
shims, bars, etc., as required.
2. Provide solid shim or other fascia piece which will result
surface being flush with edge of coordinator.
O. Exit devices:
1. ANSI A156.3, Grade 1; type and function as indicated.
P. Astragal: Flat steel, U/L listed for labeled doors.
Q. Weatherstripping: '1. At jambs and head: Surface mounted, adjustable, mounted on
stops; Reese 49.
2. At bottoms of hollow metal doors: Reese DB593P, or DB592P.
3. At bottom of aluminum doors: DB591.
4. Meeting edges pairs exterior doors: Reese 275A.
5. Head drip on doors other than main entrance doors: Reese
R201DUR.
6. Head drip on entrance doors: Reese R199A.
R. Key cabinet: Size to permit minimum 50 percent expansion of
system.
S. Horns: 1. Von Duprin L1900 series.
2. 24 VDC, .4 amp.
T. Power booster: 1. Von Duprin MPB800 series.
2. 120 VAC, 1 amp input.
3. 24 VDC, 2 amp output.
4. Mount concealed where possible.
U. Magnetic switch: 1. Von Duprin MS-700 series.
2. Concealed mounting.
3. 24 VDC.
V. Magnetic lock: 1. Von Duprin shearlock 700 series.
2. 24 VDC.
3. 1000 LB holding force.
4. Concealed mounting.-
W. Keyswitch:
O1
O2
03
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
U.S,PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1
02
O5
2.02
1. Von Duprin SS-900 series.
2. Adjustable time delay feature.
EXTRA MATERIAL AND TOOLS
08700-7
O1
02
05
08
10
A. Provide 6 sets of lock tools.
B. Provide 100 key blanks and a key cutting device.
08
10
13 2.03 OPERATION - KEYING
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
28
3O
32.
A. Establish keying schedule using keying schedule at end of this
section as a template.
1o List separately all keys not listed in schedule.
2. Review proposed keying schedule with Owner and Contracting
Officer at construction site prior to submitting persuant
to Section 08700, Paragraph 1.03(A)4.
B. Provide and set up complete visible card indexed system with
key tags and control slips.
C. Tag and identify keys.
D. Provide 3 keys for each lock or cylinder.
g. Master key and key in groups as directed.
F. Provide construction masterkeys for all exterior d6ors.
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
28
3O
32
35
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
2.04 HARDWARE SETS
HW-I:
Butts
Lockset FO4
Stop
HW-2:
Butts
Lockset F04
Stop
Closer
HV-3:
Butts
Lockset FO7
Stop
HW-4:
Butts
Lockset FO7
Stop
Closer
Klckplate
35
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08700-8
02
03
04
06
O7
O8
10
11
12
13
14.
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
HW-5:
HW-7:
HW-8:
HW-10:
HW-12:
HW-14:
HW-16:
HW-18:
Butts
Lockset F02
Stop
Butts
Lockset F05
Stop
Butts
Lockset F05
Stop
Closer
Kickplate
Butts
Latchset FO1
Stop
Butts
Latchset FO1
Stop
Closer
Ktckplate
Butts
Lockset by USPS (Contractor installed) cylindrical
Stop
Butts
Closer
Push 4 x 16 IN
Pull
Stop
Kickplate
Butts
2 Closers
Exit Device 9947EO-F
Exit Device 9947K-F
2 Kickplates
Astragal
2 Mag. Coordinator holds (By Div. 16)
Butts
2 Closers
Flushbolts (Inactive leaf)
Lockset F07
2 Kickplates
Astragal
Coordinator
2 Stops
Thresholds
Weatherstripping
02
03
O4
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
08700-9
02
03
O4
O5
06
O8
O9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
HW-19:
HW-25:
Butts
Schlage B480 Thumbturn deadlatch with rabbeted.face
plate and strike
2 Soss No. 218 hinges
Vision lens: Baldwin No. 335 wide angle
Butts
Dutch door bolt 054
Lockset FO5
2 Stops
HW-26:
Butts
Exit device 9947K-F
Closer
Stop
Kick Plate
Cylinder
HW-26A: Butts
Exit device 9927EO-F
Closer
Stop
Kickplate
Cylinder
HW-29:
Butts
Closer
Exit Device SS99EO
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
Horn
Magnetic switch
Power booster
Keyswitch
HW-29A: Butts
Closer
Exit Device SS99E0
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
HW-30:
Butts
Closer
Exit Device 99K
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
Cylinder
HW-3OA: Butts
Closer
02
03
04
05
06
O8
O9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32.
33
34
35
36
'38
39
4O
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
08700-10
Exit Device SS99-K
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
Cylinder
Horn
Magnetic switch
Power booster
Keyswitch
HW-3OB: Butts
Floor Closer
Exit device 5547TL
Weatherstripping
Pull
Threshold
Cylinder
HW-31:
Butts
Closer
Pull
Pushbar 1073
Lock B460PD
Weatherstripping
Cylinder
HW-31A: Butts
Floor closer
Pushbar
Pull
Weatherstripping
Cylinder
HW-34:
Butts
2 Closers
2 Stops
2 Pulls
2 Push plates
2 Mag locks (1 control by cardkey)
Power booster
HW-35:
Butts
2 Closers
2 Stops
2 Kickplates
Dead Bolt B463PD
HW-36:
Butts
2 Closers
2 Pulls
2 Pushbars
2 Stops .
Weatherstripping
Threshold
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F; & V.M.F.
08700-11
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
HW-37:
Butts
2 Closers
2 Stops
2 Pulls
2 Push plates
2 Magnetic locks
Power booster
H~-38:
Butts
2 Closers
Astragal
2 Exit Devices 9927E0 F
2 Kickplates
2 Mag. Holds (by Division 16)
HW-38A: Butts
2 Closers
2 Exit Devices 9927DT x 697DT
2 Kickplates
2 Stops
1 Magnetic lock
1 Leaf to cardkey
Power booster
HW-40:
HW241:
Butts
2 Closers
Auto Flushbolts (inactive leaf)
Lockset F07
2 Kickplates
Astragal
Codrdinator
2 Stops
Butts
Flush Bolts
Lockset FO5
2 Stops
HW-42:
Butts
2 Closers
Auto Flush Bolts (inactiVe leaf)
Latchset F01
Coordinator
Astragal
2 Stops
HW-43:
Butts
2 Closers
2 Pulls
2 Pushbars
2 Stops
HW-43A: Butts
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
08700-12
2 Closers
2 Pulls
2 Pushbars
2 Stops
Auto flushbolt (inactive leaf)
Cylinder
Deadbolt B463PD
HW-44:
Butts
2 Closers
2 Exit Dev. 9947DT x 697DT
Exit Dev. 8847K F
2 Stops
Cylinder
2 Kickplates
HV-44A: Butts
2 Closers
2 Exit Dev. 9947K-F
2 Stops
Cylinder
2 Kickplates
Coordinator
HW-44B: Butts
2 Closers
Exit Dev. 9947EO-F
Exit Dev. 9947K-F
2 Stops
Cylinder
2 Ktckplates
Coordinator
2 Magnetic locks
Power booster
HW-44C: Butts
2 Closers
Exit Dev. 9927EO-F
Exit Dev. 9927L-F
2 Stops
Cylinder
2 Kickplates
Coordinator
2 Magnetic locks
Power booster
HV-44D: Butts
2 Closers
Exit Dev. 5547EO-F
Exit Dev. 5547K-F
2 Stops
Cylinder
Coordinator
2 Magnetic locks
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. No Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.Fo
O1
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
53
54
Power booster
HW-45:
Butts
2 Closers
Auto Flush Bolt (inactive leaf)
Exit Dev. 9947K-F
Cylinder
Astragal
Coordinator
2 Stops
2 Kickplates
HW-46:
Butts
2 Closers
Auto Flush Bolts (inactive leaf)
Lockset FO5
2 Kickplates
Astragal
Coordinator
2 Stops
HW-47:
Butts
2 Floor closers
2 Exit Dev. 5547TL
1 Cylinder
Coordinator
Veatherstripping
Threshold
HW-47A: Butts
2 Closers
2 Pushbars
2 Pulls
Veatherstripping
Threshold
2 Magnetic locks
Power booster
HW-47B: Butts
2 Closers
2 Exit devices SS9947K-F
Weatherstripping
Threshold
2 Magnetic switches
Horn
Power booster
Keyswitch
HW-47C: Butts
Floor closers
2 Exit Dev. 5547TLL
1 Cylinder
Coordinator
Weatherstripping
08700-13
O1
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F,
01
02
03
O5
07
08
08700-14
Threshold
2 Magnetic switches
Power booster
HW-50: Cylinder to suit
Provide at each wire mesh partition doors and overhead
doors as scheduled.
O1
O2
O3
O5
07
08
12 PART 3 - RXECIITION
12
15 3.01 INSPECTION
15
18
20
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes responsibility for performance.
18
20
23 3.02 INSTALLATION
23
26
27
29
31
32
34
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's installation
instructions, supervised or inspected by an AHC.
B. Fit hardware before final door finishing.
C. Permanently install hardyare after finishing operations are
complete.
D. Use S.D.I.mounting heights for hardware.
26
27
29 --
31
32
34
37 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
37
4O
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to ensure
proper operation or function.
1. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to
operate smoothly.
B. When hardware is installed more than one month prior to final
acceptance or occupancy, during week prior to acceptance or
occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware
items.
1o Clean and lubricate as necessary to assure proper function
and finish.
2o Adjust door control devices to compensate for operation of
heating and ventilating equipment.
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F, & V.M.F.
08700-15
O2
03
O4
06
O7
O8
09
10
11
12
14
C. Instruction of personnel: 1. Operating and maintenance procedures.
2. Key control system.
D. Approximately six months after final acceptance, check and
readjust to assure proper function of doors and hardware.
1. Clean and lubricate operational items.
2. Replace items which have deteriorated or failed.
3. Prepare a written report of current and predictable
problems in operation of hardware.
4. Report visit to Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
KEYING SCHEDULE
MASTER
KEY
CHANGE
SUB
MASTER
KEY
CHANGE
DOOR
NUMBERS
Construction
Document
Door #
OM
WM
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
MiO
Mll
M1
M2
M3
M4
1A003, 1A009, 1A013, 1A016, 1A022, 1A028, 1B039,
1BO39A, 1B045.4. 1B046, 1B047, 1B064, 1C025, 1D005,
1DOOSA
1A014.1, 1A014.2
1A015
1A017, 1A018, 1AO19,'1A020, 1A021, 1B002, 1B003, 1B004,
1B005, 1B006, 1B007, 1B008, 1B011, 1B013, 1B014, 1B017,
1B018, 1B019, 1BO19A, 1BO19B, 1B020
1A025
1A028.2, 1A028.4, 1A028.8
1B040, 1B041, 1B042
1B051, 1B052, 1B053, 1B055, 1B056, 1B056.5, 1B057,
1B058, 1BO58A, 1B059, 1BO59A, 1B060, 1B060.5, 1B061,
1BO61A, 1B062, 1B063, 1BO63A
1C001, 1C021, 1C022A
1C006, 1C007, 1C008, 1C010, 1C011, 1C012, 1C013, 1C015,
1C016, 1C016A, 1C017, 1C018, 1C019
1D003
1AO01C, 1AOOiD, 1F001, 1FOOIA, 1L001, 1LOOiA, 1LOOIB,
1M001, 1M014, 1MO14A, 1R001, 1ROOiA
1B029, 1B031, 1B032, 1B035, 1B036
1D015, 1D016, 1D018, 1D019
1E001, 1EOOIA, 1E003, 1EOO3A, 1EOO3B, 1E003C, 1E005,
1EOOSA, 1F045, 1K015, 1N004
MASTER
KEY
CHANGE
SUB
MASTER
KEY
CHANGE
DOOR
NUMBERS
Construction
Document
Door #
M5
M6
M7
1F025, 1FO25A, 1FO25B, 1F026, 1F028, 1FO28A, 1F029,
1F030, 1F031, 1F031.5, 1F033, 1F034, 1F041, 1F042,
1F043, 1F044, 1F045.5, 1F046, 1F047, 1F048, ALL SAT.
MAINT. DOORS, 1L002, 1LOO2A, 1L004, 1L005, 1L006,
1L007, 1LOO7A, 1L009
1K004, 1K013, 10005, 1Q006, 1Q009, 1QOOgA, 1Q010,
1Q013, 1R002, 1ROO2A
1K014, 1K018, 1K019, 1M002, 1M003, 1MOO3A, 1MOO3B,
1M003C, 1M005C, 1P002, 1P003, 1P004, 1P008, 1P009
EM
M1
M2
M3
M4
1DOOiB, 1DO01C
1D012.5
1DO12.SA, 1DO12.SB
1K001, 1KOOIA, 1KOOIB, 1KO01C, 1KOOID, 1KOOiE, 1P001,
1POOIA, 1POOIB, 1PO01C, 1POOID, 1P001£, 1POOIF, 1POOIG
JM
M1
M2
M3
M4
1A011, 1B020, 1C003
1A023, 1B049, lC024
1A024, 1C023, 1K003.5
1A026, 1B025, 1B048, 1D010, 17037, 1K010, 1M010, 1N007,
1Q002
VM
M1
M2
M3
M4
ViO0, V101, V102, VlO2A, V103.5, V104, VlO4A, V106,
V107, VIO7A, V108, V109
V103, V109, V110, V111, V128, V122A
V!]6, V117, Vl18, Vl19, V120, V121, V122, V123, V124,
V125
V127, V127, V127A, V128
KEYING SYSTEM NOTES
Provide building grand master key for both the GMF and VMF.
Each door to be keyed separately except as noted below.
- Key doors 1A011, 1B020, 1C003 alike.
- Key doors 1A023, 1B049, 1C024 alike.
- Key doors 1A026, 1C023, 1K003.5 alike.
- Key doors 1K001, 1KOOiA, 1KOOiB, 1KO01C, 1KOO1D, 1KOO1E, 1P001, 1POOIA,
1POOiB, 1PO01C, 1POOID, 1POOiE, 1POOIF, 1POOiG alike.
- Key doors 1A011, 1BO2OB, lC003 alike.
- Key doors 1B017, 1BO19A alike.
- Key doors 1B039, 1BO39A alike.
- Key doors lC016, 1C016A alike.
- Key doors 1DOOIB, 1DO01C alike.
- Key doors 1DO12.5A, 1DO12.5B alike.
- Key doors 1E002, 1EOO3A, 1EOO3B, 1E003C, 1E005, 1EOOSA, 1F045, 1K015, 1N004
alike.
- Key doors 1F001, 1FOOiA alike.
- Key doors !F025, 1FO25A, 1FO25G alike.
- Key doors 1L001, 1LOOiA, 1LOOIB alike.
- Key doors 1M002, 1M003, 1MOO3A, 1MOO3B, 1M003C alike.
- Key doors 1L002, 1LOO2A alike. .
- Key doors 1L007, 1LOO7A alike.
- Key doors 1M014, 1MO14A alike.
3. Refer to Graphics and Signage Schedule for room numbers to be stamped on keys
and used in creating index system.
O1
03
6J31, 8G14
SECTION 08720
AUTOMATIC DOOR EQUIPMENT
08720-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all automatic door equipment as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Exterior swinging aluminum doors and storefront: Section
08410.
2. Connection to building electrical system: Division 16.
3. Glass and glazing: Section 08800.
30 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
3O
33
35
36
37
A. Shop drawings.
B. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Owner instruction report.
33
35
36
37
40 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
4O
43
44
A. Coordinate installation and connection with work required under
Division 16, ELECTRICAL.
43
44
48 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
48
51 2.01 MATERIALS
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
51
54
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
04
O5
06
07
O8
08720-2
1. Automatic doors and automatic door operators:
a. Base: Gyro-Tech, Inc.
b. Optional: Keane Monroe Corp.; Besam, Inc.; Dor-O-Matic
Div./Republic Industries, Inc,; Stanley Magic-Door,
Inc.; and Horton Automatics Div./Overhead Door Corp.
2. Use one manufacturer for all automatic doors and operators.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
O1
02
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
11 2.02 ACTUATORS
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
A. Safety mats: Electric mat switches; 7/16 to 1/2 IN (11 to 12
mm) thick recessed vinyl mat.
1. Size as indicated and in accord with ANSI A156.10.
2. Mats function with 50 LB (23 KG) pressure.
3. Safety mats function with 25 LB (11 KG) pressure.
4. Capable of with standing 1000 PSI (70 KG/SOCM) load.
5. Maintain constant sensitivity between temperatures minus 35
to 120 degF (-37 to 49 degC).
6. Color as selected by Contracting Officer.
7. Provide all edge molding and transition trims.
B. Proximity detectors:
1. Capable of detecting an object moving at a rate of 2 to 60
IN/SEC (0.05 to 1.52 M/SEC).
2. Capable of operating in temperature range of minus 20 to 130
degF (-29 to 54 degC).
3. Antivandalism design and concealed adjustments for zone size
and sensitivity.
4. Finish: White, to match Dupont No. 508, 70 percent PVF.
5. Photo electric light source and receiver (for sliding doors
recess in sidelite rail, for swinging doors mount adjacent
to door frame, on side doors do not swing into or across
door opening), which will keep door open in case any object
is motionless while in opening.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29 ---
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40 2.03 HARDWARE FOR AUTOMATIC SWINGING DOORS
4O
43
44
45
47
49
51
53
54
A. Signs: 1. Transparent doors: Double sided IN-OUT decals.
2. Opaque doors: Warning signs on both sides.
B. Finish hardware: Materials as specified in Section 08700.
C. Cylinders: Keyed to keying system specified in Section 08700.
D. Hardware sets:
AUTO-l: Hinges
2 Push plates
43
44
45
47
49
51
53
54 _~
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1 2 Pulls
02 Flushbolts
03 Deadlock, keyed/turn
08720-3
O1
02
03
06 2.04 OPERATORS FOR AUTOMATIC SWINGING DOORS
O6
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
,21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
A.~Operator assembly: Complete, self contained, factory
assembled, electro-mechanical or electro-hydraulic system.
1. Operator housing designed for bottom load system to
facilitate installation and service of all components.
2. Unit serviceable without removing door from frame.
3. Mount with easily replaceable rubber mountings.
4. Operate as door closer in event of power failure.
5. Include safe swing circuit which slows door if safety mat is
activated while door is in operating cycle.
6. Both OPEN and CLOSE speeds adjustable.
7. Motor capable of continuous stalled operation without
overheating; llO-120V AC.
8.-Complete with actuators, safety mats and electrical
controls.
B. Electro-mechanical power operator: Self contained motor
operated gear transmission not requiring fluids or gases (u~der
pressure) for opening and closing door.
1. Unit opens door by energizing motor, and stops door by '
electrically reducing voltage and stalling motor against a
mechanical stop.
2. Unit closes door by means of spring energy, with closing
controlled by gear system and motor used as a dynamic brake
without power.
C. Electro-hydraulic power operator: Self contained motor and
pump assembly, fan assembly, control module, electrical and
operator assembly.
1. Start on demand type.
2. Continuous run or remote location pumps not acceptable.
3. Open door by energizing motor and pump, and stop door by
valving of hydraulic fluid.
4. Close door by means of spring energy, with closing
controlled by valving of hydraulic fluid.
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
45 2.05 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS
45
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Sliding doors: Sliding entrances, consisting of sliding
aluminum doors, carrier frame, track and hanger assembly, trim,
guides, roller assembly, hardware and emergency breakaway
mechanism.
1. Aluminum parts: 6063T5 alloy.
2. Steel components: Per manufacturer's requirements.
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.P.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
~09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21'
23
24
25
26
27
28
08720-4
3. Aluminum finish: Green; to match Dupont enamel No. 1317, 70
percent PVF, to match storefront system.
4. Fabrication: Weld or mechanically reinforce corners to
resist motion forces. Make all joints tight.
5. Pocket jamb:
a. Inner and outer aluminum pocket members with neoprene
weather seal guards full height of door.
b. Outer member hinged for breakaway.
6. Glazing for doors and sidelights: Green tempered .glass
equal to Glass Type 4.
7. Coordinate system with storefront supplier to incorporate
sliding door system into storefront system.
B. Emergency function: Interlocking breakaway assembly permitting
door to swing 90 degrees from closed position.
1. Emergency breakaway feature to comply with requirements of
applicable codes, ordinances, and NFPA.
2. Header of carrier frame to interlock with door top by means
of spring loaded catch releases.
3. Emergency operation deactivates automatic control circuits.
4. Closing of door automatically resets controls.
C. Operator: Electro-mechanical by means of self contained unit~
complete with pressure regulators.
1. Provide adjustments for speed, power and delay.
2. Recycle operation to return door instantly to full open. from
any point in closing cycle.
3. Remote power units not acceptable.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
32 PART 3 - EXECUTION
32
35 3.01 INSPECTION
35
38
4O
41
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
38
4O
41
44 3.02 INSTALLATION
44
47
48
49
51
53
A. Perform complete installation of automatic door control
equipment. Include all electrical connections between
components.
B. Cooperate with electrician on control wiring.
Co Leave work ready to operate.
47
48
49
51
53
U.S.P.S. -. N. Texas/N° Georgia GoM.Fo & VoM.F.
O1
D. Turn over to Owner, adjusted and correctly operating.
08720-5
O1
04 3.03 SCHEDULE OF AUTOMATIC DOORS
O4
07
08
09
11
13
14
16
17
19
21
23
24
26
27
29
A. Automatic swinging doors: 1. See door schedule for U/L label requirements.
2. Provide safety mat on swing side of each door.
Door No. Type
1DO12.SA Pair
Direction/Swing
Same
1DO12.5B Pair Same
B. Automatic sliding doors:
Door No. Type
1DO01 Pair
Actuators
1DOO1A' Pair
Outside: Safety mat
Inside: Proximity
Outside: Proximity
Inside: Safety mat
Actuator
Inside: Proximi{y
Outside: Proximity
Inside: Proximity
Outside: Proximity
END OF SECTION
Hdwe
AUTO-1
AUTO- 1
07
08
09
11
13
14
16
17
19
21
23
24
26
27
29
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
7F19, 8G18
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GI~qlL",AL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all glass and glazing as indicated in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Glass in skylights: Section 07813.
2. Interior aluminum framing system: Section 10615.
3. Metal doors and frames: Section 08100.
4. Storefront: Section 08410.
5. Aluminum windows: Section 08521.
6. Preformed metal siding: Section 07413.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
A. Glass standards: 1. Flat glass ASTM C1036-85.
2. Flat glass, heat treated (coated/uncoated) ASTM C1048-85.
3. F.S.DD-M-OO411B(1) Mirrors, Glass.
4. NFPA No.80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.
5. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association "SIGMA
Specifications for Sealed Insulating Glass Units".
B. Glazing standards: 1. Flat Glass Marketing Association "Glazing Manual".
2. SIGMA "Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass
Units".
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
49 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
49
52
53
54
A. Samples:
1. 12 x 12 IN (300 x 300 mm), of each specified type, insulated
glass unit.
52
53
54
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08800-2
O2
O3
B. Project information:
1. Warranty.
02
03
06 1[04 JOB CONDITIONS
O6
09
10
11
A. Do not proceed with installation under adverse weather
conditions, or when temperatures are below or above
manufacturer's recommended limitations.
09
10
11
14 1.05 WARI~Y
14
17
18
20
21
A. Written 5 year warranty signed by installer to cover weather
tightness of installation including air and water integrity.
B. Written 5 year warranty signed by manufacturer or fabricatOr of
insulating glass units against failure.
17
18
20
21
25 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28 2.01 MATERIALS
25
28
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Glass types:
a. Base: As noted.
2. Low emissivity film:
a. Southwall Technologies; Heat Mirror.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Glass materials: 1. Comply with indicated standards.
2. See Glass Types Schedule for listing of types.
3. Materials specified in Glass Types Schedules are minimum
acceptable products.
4. Manufacturer or fabricator determine if any of these
materials should be heat strengthened or fully tempered to
provide thermal stress protection and provide accordingly.
C~ Glazing compounds: 1. Nonsag, nonstain type.
2. Pigmented to match frame units not requiring painting.
3. Compatible with adjacent surfaces.
4. For use in setting glass: One or two part polyurethane or
silicone sealant.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
UoSoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
08800-3
5. Sealant tape: Butyl rubber sealant tape or ribbon having a
continuous neoprene shim.
6. Gaskets: Polyvinyl chloride or neoprene, extruded,
flexible, of profile and hardness required to receive glass~
and provide a watertight installation.
D. Setting blocks and spacers: 1. Neoprene, compatible with sealants used.
2. Setting blocks: 70-90 durometer.
3. Spacers: 40-50 durometer.
4. Compressible filler stock: Closed cell jacketed rod stock
of synthetic rubber or plastic foam.
5. Provide setting blocks which extend from outside face to
outside face of glass unit.
E..Shims, clips, springs, angles, beads, attachment screws and
other miscellaneous items: As indicated or required.
O1
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
20 2.02 GLASS TYPES SCHEDULE
2O
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
'50
51
52
A. Gla~s Type 1: Clear float, 6 mm thick. 1. PPG.
2. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
3. AFG Industries.
4. Ford Glass Co.
B. Glass Type 2: Clear, tempered tongless float, 6 mm thick. 1. PPG.
2. AFG Industries.
3. Falconer Glass Ind.-
4. Ford Glass Co.
5. Guardian Industries.
6. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
7. Tempglass, Inc.
8. Virginia Glass Prod. Corp.
9. Viracon, Inc.
C. Glass Type 2A: Etched, clear, tempered tongless float, 6 mm
thick.
1. Same manufacturers as Type 2.
2. Obtain copy from Contracting Officer for symbol.
3. Etch glass prior to tempering.
D. Glass Type 3: Green, float, 6 mm thick~ (Blue-green not
acceptable)
1. PPG.
2. AFG Industries.
3. Ford Glass Co.
4. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
5. Tempglass, Inc. .
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
11
12
13
15
· 16
17
18
19
21
22
23-
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
08800-4
E. Glass Type 4: Green, tempered float, 6 mm thick. (Blue- green'
not acceptable)
1. PPG;
2. AFG Industries.
3. Ford Glass Co.
4. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
5. Tempglass, Inc.
F. Glass Type 5: Wire glass, 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick, colorless,
transparent polished, wired glass, Baroque wire pattern.
1. Hordis Bros., Inc.
2. Guardian Industries.
3. Nippon Glass Works.
G. Glass Type 6: Insulating glass unit 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) thick.
Exterior light, Glass Type 3; interior light, Glass Type 1.
Suspended inner layer equal to heat mirror (TM) HMS5. Dual air
spaces of 1/2 IN (12 mm) each separated by white spacers,
hermetically sealed with lifetime desiccant.
H. Glass Type 7: Insulating glass unit 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) thick.
Exterior light, Glass Type 3; interior light, Glass Type 1.
Suspended inner layer equal to heat mirror (TM) HM66. Dual air
spaces of 1/2 IN (12 mm) each separated by white spacers,
hermetically sealed with lifetime desiccant.
I. Glass Type 8: Insulating glass unit 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) thick.
Exterior light, Glass Type 4; interior light, Glass Type 2.
Suspended inner layer equal to heat mirror (TM) HMS5. Dual air
spaces of 1/2 IN (12 mm) each separated by white spacers,
hermetically, sealed with lifetime desiccant.
J. Glass Type 9: Insulating glass unit 1-1/2 IN (37 mm) thick.
Exterior light, glass Type 4; interior light, Glass Type 2.
Suspended inner layer equal to heat mirror (TM) HM66. Dual air
spaces of 1/2 IN (12 mm) each separated by white spacers,
hermetically sealed with lifetime desiccant.
K. Glass Type 10: Insulating glass unit 1 IN (25 mm) thick.
Exterior light, glass type 3; interior light, glass type 1.
Suspended inner layer equal to heat mirror (TM) HMS5. Dual air
spaces 1/4 IN (6 mm) each separated by white spacers,
hermetically sealed'with lifetime desicant.
L. Glass Type 11: Insulating glass unit 1 IN (25 mm) thick.
Exterior light, glass type 3; interior light, glass type 1.
Suspended inner layer equal to heat mirror (TM) HM66. Dual air
spaces 1/4 IN (6 mm) each separated by white spacers,
hermetically sealed with lifetime desicant.
M, Glass Type 12: One way viewing panel; One sheet of 1/4 IN (6
mm) thick tempered clear float glass with a chrome alloy
deposited on mirror side. One way viewing occurs at a light
ratio of 4:1.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
11
12
13
i5
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
O6
07
· 08
08800-5
1. Environmental Glass Products Trans-View Transparent Mirror.'
2. Falconer Glass Inc.
3. Guardian Industries.
4. See Ail Industries, Inc.
N. Glass Type 13: Float Glass Mirror; 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick. 1. Color: Clear.
2. F.S.DD-M-O0411B Class 2, Style C.
O1
02
03
04
06-
07
08
12 PART 3 - EXECUTION
12
15 3.01 INSPECTION
15
18
19
A. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, stop
design, and conditions under which glazing is to be installed.
18
19
22 3.02 INSTALLATION
22
25
27
28
30
31
33
34
36
38
39
4O
42
43
44
46
48
5O
51
52
54
A. Do not install glass with edge damage.
B. Contractor is responsible for correct glass size for each
opening, within tolerances and dimensions established.
C. Comply with recommendations of manufacturers, except where more
stringent requirements are ~ndicated.
D. As a minimum, compl~ with FGMA Glazing Manual and SIGMA Glazing
Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
E. Install sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F. Install setting .blocks in adhesive or sealant. Assure that
setting blocks are of proper width to extend full thickness of
glass unit.
G. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for
all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where
gaskets are used for glazing.
H. Provide 1/8 IN (3 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass.
I. Use thickness equal to sealant width.
J. Prevent sealant exudation from glazing channels. 1. Leave void at heel (Or install filler) at Jambs and head.
2. Do not leave void (o? install filler) at sill.
K. Miter cut and bond gasket ends together at corners.
25
27
28
30
31
33
34
36
38
39
40
42
43
44
46
48
5O
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
08800-6
02
03
05
07
09
10
L. Immediately after installation, attach crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass.
M. Do not apply anything to surfaces of glass.
N. Remove, and replace damaged glass.
O. Install mirrors with Mirror Mastic adhesive applied to back of
mirror and pressed against substrate.
02
03
05
07
09
10
13 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
13
16
17
18
20
21
23
25
A. Maintain glass reasonably clean during construction, so that it
will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute
to deterioration of other materials.
B. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 7 days prior
to Owner's acceptance of work in each area.
C. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
16
17
18
2O
21
23
25
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
~ o o o o, o o, o, ~ o o o o o, o o, o
~ o, o, o, o, o ? o ? ,fi,, o o, o, ? ,:, ? o ? o o
=J d J d J
O1
O3
6G25, 8G14 SECTION 09110
NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS (PARTITIONS)
09110-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENEP,~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all non-load bearing wall framing construction as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenancgs and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Bi Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Carpentry and blocking for surface applied items: Section
06000.
2. Metal furring and lathing: Section 09201.
3. Gypsum dry wall: Section 09250. °
4. Furring for drywall ceilings: Section 09250.
5. Firestopping: Section 07270.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE
32
35
36
37
39
A. Wherever a fire resistance classification is indicated for
walls or partitions, provide studs and accessories of type
tested and listed for construction indicated.
B. Installation in accord with ASTM C754-$2.
35
36
37
39
43 I'ART 2 - I'RODUC'I~S
43
46 2.01 MATERIALS
46
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Non-load bearing framing components:
a. Base: National Gypsum Co.
b. Optional: U.S.Gypsum Co.; Bostwick Steel Framing Co.;
Angeles Metal Systems; Domtar.
2. Framing clips:
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
2O
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
09110-2
a. Base: Parker Devices, Inc., or equal.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Metal studs, screw type: ANSI/ASTM C645, roll formed channel
studs and tracks.
1. Use 25 GA (0.5 mm) studs except as follows:
a. At jambs of openings use two 20 GA (0.9 mm) studs.
b. Where partition height requires heavier section to
accommodate span within 1:240 deflection at load of 5
PSF.
2. Sizes as indicated.
3. Flanges: Minimum 1-1/4 IN (31 mm) wide.
4. Protection: ASTM A525, G60 coated.
C. Furring channels: 25 GA (0.5 mm), screw type: 1. ASTM A525, G60 coated.
2. Hat shaped sections.
D. Wire'ties: 18 GA (1.2 mm) soft annealed, galvanized.
E. Fasteners for runners: Power driven type, to withstand minimum
190 LB (85 KG) shear when driven.
F. Framing clips: Fasteners for attachment to structural steel
members: PDI Snap on framing clips, 24 GA (0.6 mm) steel.
1. When continuous screw application is required for mateCial
attached to clips, provide continuous 3/4 x 3/4 IN (18 x 18
mm) 20 GA (0.9 mm) steel angle from.clip to clip.
2. Ail items ASTM A525, G60 coated.
3. When continuous vapor barrier is required, provide
continuous 20 GA (0.9 mm) galvanized closure to tape vapor
barrier to.
G. Mouldings, reveals, and trim pieces: Manufacturers standard or
custom line to fit detailed application, Fry Reglet Corp.
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
2O
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
40 PAINT 3 - ~CUTION
4O
43 3.01 INSPECTION
43
46
47
49
51
52
A. Examine supporting structure and conditions under which system
will be installed.
B. Correct conditions detrimental to proper installation.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
46
47
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & VoM.Fo
O1 3.02 INSTALLATION
09110-3
O1
04
05
06
07
O8
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
A. Provide continuous runner tracks sized to match studs. 1. Align runners accurately at both floor and top.
2. Secure runner tracks to structure not over 24 IN (600 mm) on
center.
3. Secure at all corners and ends.
B. Where partitions abut horizontal or vertical structural
elements, provide slip or cushion type joint between partition
and structure.
C. Where partition is fire or smoke rated, extend to structure
above, with fire and smoke resistant joint treatment, see
Section 07270.
D. Space studs maximum 16 IN (400 mm) on center°
1. Provide additional studs at corners, partition intersections
and terminations of partitions, and at both sides of control
Joints.
E. Friction fit studs to runners, except at partition corners,
intersections, openings, and fire walls.
1. At those locations, positively attach studs to runners with
3/8 IN (9 mm) self tapping pan head screws or stud clinching
tool on both flanges of each stud, top and bottom, or ~s
required by fire resistance design.
F. At all openings provide 2 full length studs, back to back, at
each jamb.
1. For wall areas above and below openings, cut track to
length, split flanges and bend webs at ends.
2. Overlap and screw attach to jamb studs.
3. Inst~ll cut to length intermediate studs between Jamb studs
at head and sill sections at same spacing as full length
studs.
4. To provide for control joints at openings, install
additional stud, maximum 1/2 IN (12 mm) from jamb studs.
5. Do not fasten extra stud to track or jamb stud.
6. Securely attach jamb studs to door frames.
G. Install screw type metal furring channel system directly
attached to walls, where indicated, to support gypsum drywall.
1. Install channels at maximum 16 IN (400 mm) OC.
2. Provide additional framing at openings, cutouts, corners and
control joints.
3. Fasten to masonry walls with cut nails.
4. Fasten to concrete with power driven fasteners.
5. Space fasteners not more than 24 IN (600 mm) on center,
staggered on opposite flanges of hat channels.
H. Align stud openings to facilitate running of wires and conduit.
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09110-4
01 I. Install snap on framing clips for structural steel members in
02 accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
04 END OF SECTION
O1
02
O4
UoS.P.S. - No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
7B13, 8G14
SECTION 09201
METAL FURRING AND LATHING
09201-1
O1
03
06 PAINT 1 - GENglIAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all metal furring and lathing as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Nonload bearing wall framing: Section 09110.
2. Portland cement plaster: Section 09220.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
28
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
A. Wherever a fire resistance classification is indicated or
scheduled provide materials, accessories and application
procedures which have been listed by U/L or tested according to
ASTM El19-83 for type of construction.
B. Lathing standards: 1. Applicable requirements of governing codes.
2. Applicable requirements of ASTM C841-81.
3. Metal Lath Association recommendations.
C. Materials standards: 1. Lath: ASTM C847-83.
2. Steel: ASTM A525-83.
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
46 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
46
49 A. Shop drawings: Not required.
49
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09201-2
01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
01
04 2.01 MATERIALS
04
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Furring and lathing:
a. Base: Wheeling Corrugating Co.
b. Optional: Bostwick Steel Framing Co.; Ceco Corp.;
Western Metal Lath Co.; U.S.Gypsum Co.; and National
Gypsum Co.
2. Other materials:
a. Base: As noted.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Materials for interior work: Shop painted with manufacturer's
standard rust inhibitive paint.
1. Recoat abraded surfaces before installation.
C. Materials for exterior work (including hangers): 1. Metal lath, inserts, hangers and channels: Galvanized steel
or zinc alloy.
2. Exterior accessories: Zinc alloy.
32 Touch-up abraded surfaces with rust inhibitive paint before
installation. '
.D. Metal lath: ASTM C847.
1. Flat or ribbed lath of w~ight required for type and support
spacing.
E. External corner beads: Small nose corner bead with rigid nose. 1. 3/16 IN (4.5 mm) max., with expanded flanges at least 2-1/2
IN (65 mm) wide.
2. No.1 accessory.
3. Where external corners are curved: Arch type corner bead
designed for cutting and bending in field, No.4 accessory.
F. Casing beads: Minimum 24 GA (0.6 mm).
1. Where plaster abuts dissimilar construction, modified or
semi-square edge: Casing bead No.60 accessory.
2. At perimeters where edges of plaster are exposed square
casing beads: No.66 accessory.
G. Control and/or expansion joints: Minimum 26 GA (0.5 mm). 1; Solid expansion and contraction screed and expanded or
perforated flanges.
2. No.40 accessory.
H. Vents: Extruded aluminum, 0.0625 IN (1.6 mm) thick vented drip
screed.
1o Finish: White, minimum 70 percent PVF.
2. Fry ReEler Corp.
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26.
27
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09201-3
02
03
04
05
06
I. Column collar: Extruded aluminum, .050 IN thick, two piece.
PVC spacer, adjustable band clamp.
1. Finish: Ail components exposed to view painted white.
2. Aluminum trim angles at metal panel soffit conditions.
3. Aluminum plaster screed at plaster soffit conditions.
02
03
O4
O5
O6
10 PART 3 - ~CUTION
10
13 3.01 INSPECTION
13
16
18
19
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
16
18
19
22 3.02 INSTALLATION - FURRING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
22
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
5O
51
A. Provide complete system including hangers, ties and runners, to
provide support for plaster bases, per ASTM requirements.
1. Where control or expansion Joints are indicated, provide
separate supports on each side of Joint.
2. Do not bridge joints with metal furring.
B. Suspend hangers from structure per ASTM C841.
1. Where anchorage, spacing or location does not provide for
acceptable grid support, provide additional carrying
components.
C. Locate hangers plumb in relation to main runners. 1. Avoid contact with pipe and duct insulation.
2. Do not pass hangers through ducts.
3. Alter spacing of hangers or splay hangers to avoid ducts and
other obstructions.
4. Do not exceed maximum allowable ceiling areas to be
supported by each hanger.
5. Offset horizontal forces of splayed hangers by counter
splaying, bracing or other suitable means.
D. Provide extra hangers to support light fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, access panels and other items resting in or on
ceilings.
E. Provide additional ceiling framing as required to form and
frame openings; coordinate with work of other trades.
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
5O
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09201-4
O1 3.03 INSTALLATION - LATH
O1
04
05
06
O8
O9
11
12
13
15
16
A. Use metal lath of type and weight required to comply with ASTM
requirements.
1. Provide intermediate metal furring supports if required.
B. Locate end laps over supports. Lap minimum 1 IN (25 mm).
Stagger end laps over different supports.
C. Wire to lath along edges maximum 12 IN (300 mm) on center.
Where diamond mesh lath is used, cornerite may be omitted if
lath is bent around corners.
D. At metal door frames, insert lath as far as possible into
re-entrant space and notch for jamb anchors.
O4
O5
06
08
09
11
12
13
15
16
19 3.04 INSTALLATION - PLASTER ACCESSORIES
19
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
A. Attach accessories to bases or substrates with galvanized
fasteners spaced maximum 8 IN (200 mm) on center.
1. Nail to masonry or concrete.
B. Use single length beads wherever length of run does not exceed
longest standard stock length available.
1. Miter or cope at corners.
2. Set beads with maximum tolerance of 1 in 100 from plumb or
level.
3. Shim as required and align Joints with concealed splices or
tie plates.
C. Install corner beads at all external corners.
D. In addition to ASTM C841 requirements, provide casing beads.
1. Isolate casing bead from contact with metal window or door
frames with minimum 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick foam insulating tape
or by use of casing bead with integral compressible vinyl
gasket.
E. Install control joints at locations indicated.
1. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Casing bead control joint: Two casing beads back-to-back
with 1/8 to 1/4 IN (3 to 6 mm) open space, with sheet metal
closure at back fastened on one side only, or No.40
accessory.
END OF SECTION
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6G25, 8G14
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all Portland cement plaster{and stucco}as indicated in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Metal furring and lathing: Section 09201.
2. Sealants: Section 07900.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
28
31
32
A. Plastering standards: ANSI A42.2 for "Portland Cement and
Portland Cement Lime Plastering, Exterior and Interior."
31
32
35 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
35
38
40
42
44
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: Not required.
38
40
42
44
47 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
47
5O
51
A. Protect contiguous work from rusting, damage or soiling as a
result of plastering operations. .
5O
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
09220-2
B. Protect exterior plaster against climatic conditions as
specified by ANSI and as required to prevent freezing or uneven
and excessive evaporation from hot dry air.
C. Assure minimum 55 degF (10 degC) temperature in interior spaces
to be plastered for 1 week prior to, during and after
application, until acceptance of building by Owner.
1. Assure natural or mechanical ventilation.
2. Comply with ANSI Standards.
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
13 Pt~RT 2 - PRODUCTS
13
16 2.01 MATERIALS
16
19
20
21
22
23
25
27
29
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Materials:
a. Base: As noted.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Portland cement: ANSI/ASTM C150, Type I or IA.
C. Lime: ANSI/ASTM C206,. Type S.
D. Aggregate: ANSI/ASTM C33.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Portland cement finish coat: Factory prepared product
containing all materials required for finish, except water.
1. Provide product suitable for float finish.
2. Base: U.S.Gypsum Co., Oriental Exterior Finish white
stucco.
3. Optional: Equivalent product by National or Kaiser Gypsum,
or equal.
G. Bonding material: Larsen's Products Corp. Weld Crete.
19
20
21
22
23
25
27
29
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
44 2.02 MIXING AND PROPORTIONING
44
47
49
50
52
53
A. Follow ANSI Standards.
B. Use ready mixed materials in accord with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Mix each batch of plaster in quantity which can be used before
i} starts to set.
47
49
50
52
53
U.S.P.So - No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
D. Discard plaster which has started to set.
E. Do not retemper.
09220-3
O1
03
07 PART 3 - EXECUTION
O7
10 3.01 INSPECTION
10
13
14
16
18
19
A. Examine surfaces to receive plaster; check lath and furring for
completeness and soundness.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of substrates and
responsibility for performance.
13
14
16
18
19
22 3.02 PREPARATION
22
25 A. Clean surfaces and remove loose and deleterious substances.
28 3.03 INSTALLATION
31
33
35
36
37
38
4O
42
44
45
46
48
49
51
53
54
A. Do not use frozen, lumpy, or contaminated materials.
B. Use clean water.
C. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built in items. 1. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads,
cut basecoat free before plaster sets.
2. Groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
D. Make corners square.
E. Wherever permanent grounds are too far apart to serve as guides
for finishing, provide plaster screeds and establish true
surface of screeds before screeds are set.
1. Keep grounds clean.
2. Finish plaster level with grounds.
F. Apply minimum plaster thicknesses as follows:
1. Exterior: 1 IN (25 mm).
G. Apply greater thickness if indicated.
H. Use 3 coat system.
1. Apply at consistency required to achieve uniformity.
25
28
31
33
35
36
37
38
4O
42
44
45
46
48
49
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09220-~
02
I. Apply minimum 1/8 IN (3 mm) thick finish coat.
05 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
02
O5
O8
09
11
13
A. Determine most effective procedures for curing and time lapse
between coats, based on climatic and job conditions.
B. Plaster which is cracked or crazed will not be accepted.
C. Remove and replace unacceptable plaster and base.
08
09
11
13
16 3.05 REPAIR AND CLEANING
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
A. Cut, patch, repair and point up plaster as required and as
directed by Contracting Officer.
1o Repair cracks and indented surfaces by moistening plaster
and filling with new material.
2o Trowel or tamp flush with adjoining surfaces.
3. Point up finish plaster surfaces around items which are
built into or penetrate plaster.
B. Remove misplaced plaster from surfaces not scheduled to be
plastered.
1. Repair surfaces which have been stained, marred or damaged
during plastering work.
2. When plastering is completed, remove unused materials,
containers and equipment.
3. Clean floors and other surfaces of plaster debris.
4. Leave broom clean.
END OF SECTION
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
U.S.P.S. - No Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
03
7F19, 8G14
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM WALLBOARD (GWB)
09250-A
01
03
06 PART 1 - GEI~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
· 27
28
29
30
31
32
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all gypsum wallboard work as indicated, in accord'with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. Provide suspension system to support acoustic metal panel
soffit. Coordinate with manufacturer.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Metal studs and wall furring: Section 09110.
2. Firestopptng~ Section 07270.
3. Sealants: Section 07900.
4. Metal furring and lathing: Section 09201.
5. Portland cement plaster: Section 09220.
6. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
7. Acoustic metal deck soffits: Section 05305.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
35 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
35
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
A. Wall furring and suspended ceiling installation standards: ASTM
C841-81.
B. Finishing of gypsum wallboard: 1. ASTM C840-84.
2. GA-216 Recommended Specifications for Application and
Finishing of Gypsum Board.
C. ASTM Standards: 1. C36-85: Gypsum Wallboard.
2. C475-81: Joint Treatment Materials for GWB.
3. C630-85: Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
4. E84-84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
5. El19-83: Fire Tests. of Building Construction.
D. Fire resistant materials and assembly standards:
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
O1
O2
O3
O4
09250-2
1. Provide materials, accessories and application application
procedures which have been tested in accord with ASTM Ell9,
and listed by U/L, or other approved testing laboratory, for
type of construction and rating indicated.
01
02
03
04
07 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
07
10
12
13
14
15
16
A. Shop drawings: Locate control joints.
B. Project data:
1. Certification sound insulation thickness and density is
suitable for wall system STC rating required.
2. Certification that materials meet or exceed requirements of
referenced standards.
10
12
13
14
15
16
19 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
19
22
23
25
26
A. Coordinate installation with work of other trades to allow time
for correct installation of their work.
B. Assure that areas to receive GWB, installation and finishing
are maintained between 55 and 70 degF.
22
23
25
26
30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33 2.01 MATERIALS
3O
33
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
.51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Gypsum wallboard and accessories; Ceiling furring and
framing systems.
a. Base: U.S.Gypsum Co., and as noted for individual items.
b. Optional manufacturers: National Gypsum Co.; Celotex
Corp.; Flintkote Building Products Co.; Georgia Pacific.
2. Foam tape: Norton sealants.
3. Insulation, sound: U.S.Gypsum Co.; Thermafiber; Owens
Corning Fiberglas Corp.
4. Suspended ceiling system: Gypsum wallboard manufacturers
listed above.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440°
Bo Gypsum wallboard(GWB): Furnish in maximum available lengths
consistent with installation requirements, bevel edged, square
ends. Install vertical.
1o Regular board:
a. 5/8 IN (15 mm) or 1/2 IN thick.
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
5~
53
54
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
16
18
19
2O
09250-3
b. Use where other types are not called for.
2. Fire rated board:
a. 5/8 IN (15 mm) thick.
b. Use for fire rated walls.
3. Gypsum shaft wall liner panel, Type X: 1 IN (25 mm) thick x
24 IN (600mm) wide.
4. Gypsum backer board:
a. Water resistant: 5/8 IN (15 mm) thick.
b. Use fire rated type in fire walls.
c. Use at walls to receive ceramic tile and in areas subject
to high humidity levels.
C. Backing for control and expansion joints: Fire rated board or
firestopping.
D. Adhesive: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer.
21
22
23
24
25
E. Gypsum wallboard accessories: Galvanized for general use, zinc
for wet and exterior areas.
1. Corner bead:
a. Standard type, with perforated flanges.
b. USG 800 or 103 accessory.
2. Trim bead: USG 200 A Series.
3. Control or expansion joints: USG 093.
4. Similar profiles by other listed manufacturers, or equal.
27
28
29
F. Screws: ASTM C1002-83 self tapping, bugle head, length te
penetrate framing member or stud minimum 5/8 IN (15mm). Use
type S for GVB to metal and type G for GVB to GVB.
31
G. Sealants and calking: See section 07900.
33
34
35
36
H. Foam tape: 1. EPDM or PVC; 1/2 x 1/4 IN (12 x 6 mm); pressure sensitive,
adhesive on booth sides.
2. Norton Sealants; Gasket Dynamics; Excelsoir, Inc.
38 I. Joint tape and treatment compound: ASTM C475.
40
41
42
43
J. Insulation, sound: 1. Commercial sound blanket, ASTM C665-84, Type I.
2. Thickness and density required to achieve STC indicated for
sound rating of wall system.
45
46
47
48
K. Calking, sound: 1. AC 20 Acrylic Latex by Pecora.
2. Acoustical sealant by Tremco.
3. USG.
5O
51
52
53
54
L. Metal furring channel ceiling system. 1. Suspension wire, 8 GA.
2. Tie wire.
3. Carrying channel.
4. Furring channel.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
31
33
34
35
36
38
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
50
51
'52
53
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09250-4
O2
04
05
06
O8
09
10
11
12
M. Firestopping: See Section 07270.
N. Sealer for backerboard: 1. Manufacturers standard compound.
2. Use at joints, cut edges and screw penetrations.
O. Trim: Provide moldings wherever ceiling meets walls,
partitions, other vertical elements, and other types of
ceilings or ceiling fixtures; where ceiling mounted fixtures
have integral flange trim, no additional trim is required.
Provide hold down clips at all tile locations.
O2
04
.05
06
08
09
10
11
12
16 PART 3 - XXXCI]TION
16
19 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
19
22
23
25
A. Examine supporting structure and conditions under which
wallboard is to be installed.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
28 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
31
33
35
37
39
40
42
43
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
A. Erect wallboard vertically with edges over supporting members.
B. Secure to each support or framing member with screws.
C. Bring boards into contact but do not force into place.
D. Fit neatly and carefully.
E. Stagger edge joints on opposite side of partition so they occur
on different framing members.
F. Proceed with attachment from center of board toward ends and
edges.
G. Make cuts neatly.
H. Install sound insulation in walls to top of partition or height
indicated in details where sound rated walls are indicated.
1. Install as necessary to achieve sound rating.
2. Pack spaces around electric boxes and other penetrations to
maintain full sound reduction.
3. Provide sound calkipg material for rating required.
22
23
25
28
31
33
35
37
39
4O
42
43
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
UoS.P,S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
09250-5
I. Seal ends, cutouts and screw penetrations at water resistant
boards with sealer.
05 3.03 INSTALLATION (SINGLE LAYER SYSTEM)
01
O2
O5
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
A. Set screws between 3/8 and 1/2 IN (9 to 12 mm) from edges. 1. Space maximum of 12 IN (300 mm) on center at edges and in
field of board.
2. Where drywall butts at wall/ceiling juncture, hold screws
back 6 IN (150 mm) from edges.
3. Space screws closer if required by U/L.
B. Drive screws so head rests in slight dimple without cutting
face paper or fracturing core.
OB
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
19 3.04 INSTALLATION (TWO LAYER SYSTEM)
19
22
23
25
27
A. space screws in base layer maximum of 12 IN (300 mm) on center
at edges and in field of board.
B. Screw apply finish layer.
C. Stagger joints not less than one support from first layer.'
30 3.05 INSTALLATION-SHAFTWALL
33
34
36
37
39
40
42
46
47
49
51
53
A. Install shaft walls in compliance with U/L or Gypsum
Association description.
B. Provide shaft wall systems which permit entire erection
procedure from single side.
C. Provide special metal runner angles and channels, and studs or
splines spaced per manufacturers requirements.
D. Provide number, type and thickness of drywall layers including
air spaces and insulation as required to achieve indicated
ratings for fire resistance and sound reduction.
E. Comply with requirements for gage of metal and thickness of
wall, for heights of wall indicated.
F. Use wallboard of maximum practical lengths.
G. Bring boards into contact but do not force into place.
Fit neatly and earefull~o
22
23
25
27
3O
33
34
36
37
39
40
42
46
47
49
51
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09250-6
O1 I. Seal perimeter and openings with acoustical sealant.
03 J. Provide required firestopping.
01
03
06 3.06 INSTALLATION-CEILING
06
09
10
12
13
A. Install furring ceiling support system and gypsum wallboard in
compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide all required items to trim out neatly around recessed
lighting units and flanges.
O9
10
12
13
16 3.07 CONTROL JOINTS
16
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
39
41
42
A. Install control joints to provide following maximum unjointed
lengths or areas:
1. Partitions and soffits: 30 IrT (9 M), maximum straight run,
and at lock side of jamb from head of each door opening to
top of partition, and each side of cased opening from head
of opening to top of partition.
2. Ceilings: 50 FT (15 M) with perimeter relief, maximum 30 IrT
(9 M) without perimeter relief in one direction, and at
change of direction or irregular shapes.
3. Ceiling area: Maximum 2500 SF (225 SM), with perimeter
relief, maximum 900 SF (81 SM), without perimeter relief.
B. Install plastic control joint trim (white) full height of
partition.
C. Calk control joints behind base sealant color to match base
color as closely as possible.
D. Install suitable backing material to maintain required rating
where control or expansion joints occur in fire or sound rated
assemblies.
E. Install corner bead where partition or ceiling abuts structural
element or dissimilar wall or ceiling.
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
39
41
45 3.08 WALLBOARD FINISHING
45
48
49
51
52
A. Securely attach continuous corner beads to external corners in
accord with manufacturers directions.
B. Where gypsum panels abut dissimilar surfaces securely attach
continuous trim beads in accord with manufacturers directions.
48
49
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O5
O6
07
09
11
13
14
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
3O
31
33
34
36
09250-7
1. Where bead abuts exterior metal window frames or other metal
components, separate from other material by use of foam
tape.
C. Apply joint treatment compound full height of partition in
accord with manufacturer's directions subsequent passes need
extend only to 6 IN above ceiling.
D. Fill joints and internal corners with compound.
E. Embed tape in compound.
F After drying, apply additional compound to joint,
feather out on each side of Joint until smooth, even
surface, free of defects, is obtained.
F. Install other accessories in like manner.
G. Sand as required.
H. Apply joint treatment compound over heads of fasteners.
I. Allow to dry, then lightly sand.
J. Apply second layer and sand.
K. Avoid roughing paper.
L. If wallboard is damaged, or surfaces are roughened, repair, or
remove and replace, to satisfaction of Contracting Officer, at
no additional cost to Owner.
M. After painter has applied primer to wall board surfaces, repair
and refinish areas which show defects.
END OF SECTION
O1
O2
03
O5
O6
07
O9
11
13
14
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
30
31
33
34
36
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6G25, 8G14
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE (CT)
09310-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all ceramic tile as indicated in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. Comply with Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Sealants: Section 07900.
2. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
3. Quarry tile: Section 09330.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
29 1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
29
32
34
35
36
37
38
A. Tile grading and certification: ANSI A137.1-1980.
B. Tile installation standards:
-1. Tile Council of America/Ceramic Tile Institute Handbook for
Ceramic Tile Installation.
2. American National Standards Institute Specifications For The
Installation Of Ceramic Tile, as indicated.
32
34
35
36
37
38
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
41
44
45
46
47
49
5O
A. Samples: 1. Palette of small size colors of each type and class of tile
required, for color verification by Contracting Officer.
2. Grout sample for color verification by Contracting Officer.
B. Project information:
1o Maintenance data.
44
45
46
47
49
50
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09310-2
01 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
01
04
05
O7
A. Deliver materials and store on site in original containers with
seals unbroken and grade labels intact until use.
B. Provide grade identification on each container.
04
05
O7
10 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
10
13
14
A. Maintain temperature at minimum 50 degF (10 degC) during
tilework and for minimum of 7 days after completion.
13
14
18 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
18
21 2.01 MATERIALS
21
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
-35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
52
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Ceramic tile:
a. Base: American Olean Tile Co.
b. Optional: Dal-Tile Corp.; Mid-State Tile Co.; Monarch
Tile Manufacturing, Inc.; and United States Ceramic Tile
Co.
2. Adhesives, mortars, grouts and leveling compounds (except
combination waterproofing and adhesive):
a. Base: Upco Co.
b. Optional: L & M Surco Manufacturing Co.; Laticrete
International Inc.; Mapei Canada, Inc.; and Cambridge
Tile Manufacturing Co.
3. Combination waterproofing and adhesive:
a. Base: Mapei Canada Inc.
b. Optional: Semco Sales Inc.
4. Expansion joint strips:
a. Base: Manhattan Terrazzo Brass Strip Co., Inc.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Combination waterproofing and adhesive: 1. Mapei Canada Inc., "Planicrete W."
2. Semco Sales, Inc., "Waterproof Tile Adhesive."
C. Grout: UPC0 Co., Hydroment tile grout, or equivalent product
by other manufacturer.
1o Mix in accord with manufacturer's instructions using acrylic
latex additive.
2. Color: Gray to match tile.
D. Grout, epoxy: Tile Council of America Formula AAR II.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
48
49
5O
51
52
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
01
02
03
04
O6
07
09
10
12
13
15
16
09310-3
1. Acid alkalai resistant epoxy grout.
2. Mix in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Color: Gray to match tile.
4. Use in all showers.
E. Leveling compound: As required; use only where necessary to
obtain satisfactory installation.
F. Sealant: One or two component, non-sag, polyurethane or
silicone sealant, as specified in Section 07900.
G. Expansion joint strips: Neoprene filler recessed type.
Neoprene thickness: 1/8 mm (3 mm).
H. Stone saddles: White marble with honed face and bevels as
indicated in drawings.
01
02
03
04
O6
07
09
10
12
13
15
16
19 2.02 SCHEDULE OF CERAMIC TILE
19
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
33
34
35
A. Ceramic tile, CT-l:
mosaic units.
1. 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick.
2. Size(s): 2 x 2 IN.
3. Cushion edge, unglazed.
4. Cove based tiles to match.
5. Color: A32 Sterling Silver by American Olean Tile.
Standard grade unglazed porcelain ceramic
B. Ceramic tile, CT-2: Same tile as CT-1 except install over
waterproofing.
C. Ceramic tile, CT-3: Same as CT-1 except color to be AIO Dawn
Gray by American Olean Tile.
1. Mortar set.
22
23
24
2§
26
27
28
3O
31
33
34
35
38 2.03 EXTRA MATERIAL
38
41
43
44
45
46
47
A. Extra tile: Upon completion of work, deliver extra tile of
same size, pattern and color as used on job to Owner for use in
repair and maintenance work.
1. Furnish tile in original boxes, properly marked.
2. Provide 100 SF of each type and color of floor and wall
tiles.
3. Provide 50 LF of each type and color of base.
41
43
44
45
46
47
51 PART 3 - R~'RCUTION
51
U.S.P.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09310-4
O1 3.01 INSPECTION
O1
04
05
O7
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which tile is to be
installed.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
O4
O5
07
10 3.02 INSTALLATION - THINSET
10
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. Provide leveling beds as required for floor tile.
B. Procedures: Unless otherwise indicated, install in accord
with:
1o ANSI A108.5 "Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set
Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar."
2. Optional procedure over gypsum wallboard back-up: ANSI
A108.4 "Installation of Ceramic Tile With Water-Resistant
Organic Adhesive."
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
24 3.03 INSTALLATION - MORTAR SET
24
27
28
29
A. Procedure: '
1o Install in accord with "Tile CoUncil of America Installation
Handbook", most recent edition; Specification Fl12.
27
28
29
32 3.04 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
32
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
A. Setting: 1. Place tile in grid pattern.
2. Align tile joints on adjoining walls.
3. Lay out and center tile fields in both directions on floor,
align base tiles and wall tiles with floor tiles.
4. Avoid use of tile less than 1/2 size.
5. Provide uniform joint widths insofar as practicable.
B. Install expansion joints where indicated and: 1. Place joints 24 - 36 FT (7.5 - 11 M) on center or on column
lines each way (whichever is smaller).
2. Apply over construction or expansion joints in backing.
3. Apply where backing material changes.
4. Apply where floors abut vertical surface.
C. Maintain nominal 1/4 IN (6 mm) wide joint at perimeter of tiled
floor areas and calk with sealant~
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M~F. & V.M.F.
09310-5
01 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TILE ON FLOORS AND WALLS OVER WATERPROOFING
01
O4
05
06
07
08
10
11
13
14
A. Where Schedule of Ceramic Tile calls for tile to be installed
"over waterproofing", CT-2, install in accord with ANSI A108.4
"Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water-Resistant Organic
Adhesives," except use combination waterproofing and adhesive
and follow manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend combination waterproofing and adhesive up walls and
curbs a minimum of 6 IN.
C. Perform water test of waterproofing, without leakage for 12 HRS
prior to installing tile.
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
13
14
17 3.06 PROTECTION
17
20
21
23
25
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other
nonstaining covering during construction to prevent damage.
B. Provide plywood or particle board walkways in traffic paths.
END OF SECTION
20
21
23
25
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1
03
7K13, 8G14
SECTION 09330
QUARRY TILE (QT)
09330-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all quarry tile as indicated in accord with provisions
of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. Cogply with Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Ceramic tile: Section 09310.
2. Sealants: Section 07900.
3. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
29 1.02 0UALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
29
32
34
35
36
37
38
A. Tile grading and certification: ANSI A137.1-1980.
B. Tile installation standards:
1. Tile Council of America/Ceramic Tile Institute Handbook for
Ceramic Tile Installation.
2. American National Standards Institute Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile, as indicated.
32
34
35
36
37
38
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
41
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
A. Shop drawings: Locating expansion joints.
B. Samples: 1. One full size tile for each color, type and class of tile
available, for color verification by Contracting Officer.
2. One full size tile of each type of trim shape and accessory.
3. Manufacturers full range of grout colors for selection by
Contracting Officer~
C. Project information:
1. Maintenance data.
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09330-2
03 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
O3
06
07
O9
A. Deliver materials and store on site in original contaihers with
seals unbroken and grade labels intact until use.
B. Provide grade identification on each container.
06
07
O9
12 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
12
15
16
A. Maintain temperature at minimum 50 degF (10 degC) during
tilework and for minimum of 7 days after completion.
15
16
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2O
23 2.01 MATERIALS
23
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Quarry tile:
a. Base: American Olean Tile Co.
b. Optional: Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2. Adhesives, mortars, grouts and leveling compounds (except
combination waterproofing and adhesive):
a. Base: Bostik Construction Products.
b. Optional: L & M Surco Manufacturing Co.; Laticrete
International Inc.; Mapei Canada, Inc.; and Cambridge
Tile Manufacturing Co.
3. Combination waterproofing and adhesive:
a. Base: Mapei Canada Inc.
b. Optional: Bostik Construction Products and Semco Sales
Inc.
4. Expansion joint strips:
a. Base: Manhatton Terrazzo Brass Strip Co., Inc.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Quarry tile: Standard grade, extruded square edge quarry tile,
minimum 1/2 IN (12 mm) thick, with ribbed or other bonding
features on back.
1. Face size: 6 x 6 IN.
2. Provide necessary matching special shapes for curbs,
depressions and corners and quarry tile base.
3. Provide non-slip resistant "abrasive grain" finish surface°
4. Color: Shadow flash N56 (Gray).
5o Architect will furnish Contractor with schedule showing
location of tile colors and patterns selected.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09330-3
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
29
3O
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
C. Quarry tile base: Standard grade extruded tile. 1. 6 x 5 IN (150 x 130 mm) by 1/2 IN (12 mm) thick.
2. Bonding ribs on back, coved bottom, and top edge square or
round as required.
3. Color: Shadow flash N56 (Gray).
D. Adhesives: 1. Dry set portland cement mortars: ANSI Al18.1.
2. Latex portland cement mortars: ANSI Al18.4.
E. Combination waterproofing and adhesive: 1. Mapei Canada Inc., "Planicrete W".
2. Semco Sales, Inc., "Waterproof Tile Adhesive".
3. Bostik Construction Products, "Hydroment Ultra-Set"
F. Leveling compound: As required; only where it is necessary to
level surfaces to provide satisfactory installation.
G. Grout: Tile Council of America formula AAR II. 1. Acid alkalai resistant epoxy grout.
2. Mix in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Color to match tile color, as selected by Contracting
Officer.
H. Expansion joint strips: Neoprene filler recessed type.
Neoprene thickness 1/8 IN (3 mm).
I. Sealant: One or two component non-sag polyurethane or
silicone. See Section 07900.
J. ~dging: Marble floor edge strips.
1. Provide at exposed edges where there is a change of level.
K. Mortar for mortar setting bed: 1 part Portland cement, 1/5
part lime and 6 parts sand with sufficient water for
workability.
1. Water: Potable.
2. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
3. Lime: Hydrated, ASTM C207, Type S.
4. Sand: ASTM C144.
L. Reinforcing:
1. Wire mesh: 2 x 2 IN (50 x 50 mm), 16 GA (1.5 mm),
galvanized, welded wire mesh; use in floors.
2. Metal lath: Galvanized, expanded metal, 3.4 LB/SY.
use rib lath~ use in walls.
Do not
02
03
04
05
06
O8
09
10
12
13
14
15
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
29
30
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
50 2.02 SCHEDULE OF QUARRY TILE
52 QT - 1: Quarry tile, 6 x 6 IN, mortarset, over waterproofing.
5O
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09330-4
O1 2.03 EXTRA MATERIAL
O1
04
O5
06
O7
O8
09
10
A. Upon completion of work, deliver extra tile of same size,
pattern and colors as used on job to Contracting Officer for
use in repair and maintenance work.
1. Furnish tile in original boxes, properly marked.
2. Provide 10 SF (0.5 SM) of each type and color of floor and
wall tiles.
3. Provide 10 LF (1.5 M) of each type and color of base.
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
14 PART 3 - EXI~CUTION
14
17 3.01 INSPECTION
17
20
21
22
24
26
27
3O
A. Inspect surfaces which are to receive tile for defects or
conditions that will interfere with or prevent a satisfactory
installation.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Starting of installation work constitutes acceptance of
surface and responsibility for performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION - MORTAR SET
2O
21
22
24
26
27
3O
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A. Install mortar setting bed. 1. Place in prepared areas to thickness indicated or required.
2. Place continuous reinforcing, centered in setting bed, with
sheets lapped at least one mesh.
3. Do not run reinforcing through expansion or control joints.
4. Finish setting bed to tolerance not exceeding 1 in 50.
B. Procedure: Unless otherwise indicated, install in accord
with:
1. ANSI Al08.1 "Installation of Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic
Mosaic Tile, 0uarry Tile and Paver Tile with Portland
Cement Mortar".
2. After setting bed has set sufficiently to allow work, apply
skim coat, nominal 1/16 IN (1.5 mm) thick, of neat cement
oPer entire surface.
3. Set and beat tile into place in plastic cement.
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
51
54 A. Setting:
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
~02
03
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
09330-5
1. Avoid tile less than half size.
.2. Align tile joints at right angles to each other and
straight with walls to conform to patterns selected.
3. Verify exact locations of expansion joints and accessories
before installing tile.
4. Set with 3/8 IN (9'mm) joints.
5. Set bases and caps true and level with solid backing.
B. Install expansion joints where indicated and: 1. Place joints 24 - 36 FT (7.5 - 11 M) on center or on column
lines each way (whichever is smaller).
2. Apply over construction or expansion joints in backing.
3. Apply where backing material changes.
4. Apply where floors abut vertical surface.
C. Grout tile joints on same day tile is set.
1. After grouting, remove surplus grout, leave clean.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
20 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TILE ON FLOORS AND WALLS OVER WATERPROOFING
2O
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
A. Where Schedule of Quarry Tile calls for tile to be installed
"over waterproofing" install in accord with ANSI A108.4
"Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water-Resistant Organic
Adhesives," except use combination waterproofing and adhesive
and follow manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend combination waterproofing and adhesive up walls and to
top of base.
C. Perform water test of waterproofing, for 12 HRS prior to
installing tile.
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
36 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TILE WITH EPOXY MORTAR AND GROUT
36
39
4O
41
A. Install in accord with ANSI A108.6 "Installation of Ceramic
Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and
Grouting Epoxy."
39
4O
41
44 3.06 PROTECTION
44
47
49
A. Permit no traffic on floors for 72 hours after grouting.
END OF SECTION
47
49
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
5A25, 8G18
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
SECTION 09334
ASPHALT PLANK FLOORING (AP)
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, a
for all asphalt plank flooring as indicated, in s
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous i!
appurtenances and devices incidental to or neces~
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete work: Division 3.
2. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
3. Ceramic tile: Section 09310.
4. Quarry tile: Section 09330.
5. Resilient tile: Section 09660.
31 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
A. Indentation test:
1. Test'flooring by McBurney Indentation Test.
2. Indentations not exceeding 40 mils at 77 degF wh,
with a 30 LB weight for one minute on a flat pin
IN diameter point.
B. Impact test: 1. No splitting or cracking under drop of 2 LB weig]
IN pin rounded to a hemispherical shape on 6 x 6
at 32 degF.
2. Minimum height of drop: 20 IN.
3. Distance from an edge for impact location: 1.5
48 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
51
52
53
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09334-1
nd services
ccord with
es.
furnish
ems,
ary for a
~n loaded
with a 0.25
~t on 0.225
IN sample
N.
O1
O3
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
31
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
48
51
52
53
09334-2
O1 B. Test reports.
03 C. Warranty.
07 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
10 2.01 MATERIALS
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
35
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Base: Asphalt Plank Flooring; Manville, Inc.; Els:
2. Floor Sealing and Finishing materials:
a. Sealer:
Manufacturer Product
Airwick Industries, Inc. Padlock
Brulin & Company Prep-Floor
Capitol Chem. Ind. Inc. Black Floor
Castle Chemical Co. Satin Floor
(formerly Colorado/Wyoming)
Chemtex Inter. LTD
CRS Industries
Freedom Coating Co. Inc.
Lamont Labs, Inc.
National Chemsearch
Purex Corporation
Sutter US Inc.
Super Sealer
Formula 55-Bli
Duraflex #2501
(Finish/Seal,
Mirror-Seal
Bond-X
Super Grad
Taski P44
b. Finish:
Manufacturer
Product
Airwick Inter. LTD
Brulin & Company
Capitol Chem. Ind.'Inc.
Castle Chemical Co~
(formerly Colorado/Wyoming)
Chemtex Inter. LTD
CRS Industries
Freedom Coating Co. Inc.
Handi-Clean Products, Inc.
Hillyard, Inc.
S.C. Johnson & Sons, Inc.
Lamont Labs Inc.
Masury-Columbia, Inc.
Purex Corporation
Confidence
Classic
Renaissance
SSTX-400
Supershine
Formula 190"
Duraflex #250~
(Finish/Scale
Handi-Coat
Proline Item
Complete
Futura
Paragon "VHS"
De-Fense
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
:o, Inc.
.lm
Lean-Seal
Lck T~le
Ir)
)iamond"
~3680
O1
O3
O7
10
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
O1
02
03
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
Spectrowax
Sutter US Inc.
ZEP Manufacturing Inc.
Clearchrome
Taskt Wtwax
Zep Shield
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Asphalt plank flooring material: 1. Asphalt mastic composed of asphalt and nonasbestol
and fillers.
2. Plank thickness 12 x 24 x 1/2 IN plus or minus 1/~
3. Plank surface smooth and free of surface ripples·
4. Flooring to be free from defects, such as broken
corners, or cracks.
5. Surfaces uniform in appearance and free of ripple
C. Asphalt plank cement: 1. For use in laying plank.
2. Suitable for intended use as recommended by manuf~
plank for conditions involved.
3. If cement is an asphalt emulsion, do not allow to
25 PART 3 - R~CUTION
28 3.01 INSPECTION
31
33
34
36
37
40 3.02
43
44
46
47
48
5O
51
53
54
A. Inspect surfaces to receive asphalt plank flporing.
B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions
corrected.
C. Installation indicates acceptance of responsibility
performance.
PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation: Clean off all oil, dust, dirt,
or other foreign substances before planks are laid.
B. Do not install flooring until building has been encl
temperature of 50 degF or higher has been maintained
minimum of two days.
C. Store planking and cement at temperatures of not les:
degF for three days immediately prior to their use.
D. Assure 50 degF minimum Building temperature for two
flooring is laid.
U.S.P.S. - N; Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09334-3
Section
fibers
2 IN.
~dges,
cturer of
freeze.
been
~or
chemicals,
~sed and a
for a
than 50
ays after
01
02
03
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
25
28
31
33
34
36
37
4O
43
44
46
47
48
5O
51
53
54
09334-4
03 3.03 INSTALLATION
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
A..Asphalt plank: 1. Set plank in asphalt cement using not less than 1.
cement per 100 SF.
2. Apply plank immediately after spreading cement.
3. Cut and trim as necessary for close fit against vi
surfaces.
4. Cut with tungsten carbide tipped saw blades.
5. Fit plank closely around piping, fixtures, or surt
that plates, collars, or coverings, where used, o~
plank.
6. Lay plank in straight lines, staggering joints in
rOWS.
7. Provide rigid horizontal support at all edges whi3
to prevent slippage of individual units under trat
8. Select and place individual planks so that Joint
between planks do not exceed 3/32 IN.
9. Remove cement on surface of plank before it drys.
10. Remove and replace plank on which cement has beer
to dry.
11. Protect tile which has been placed from dirt and
with suitable means to prevent imbedment of forei
in tile or seal tile as it is installed.
B. Finishing consists of cleaning, sealing, and finishi
described below:
1. Assure planking is adhered fully to subfloor prio~
finishing.
2. Preparatory to finishing, sweep floor clean.
3. Scrub with a mild household detergent solution.
4. After scrubbing, rinse thoroughly and allow to dr
application of finishes.
5. Apply two coats of sealer by mopping flood coats.
6. If appearance of floor is not clear black, then s
scrub, and rinse floor as above, and reapply seal~
7. Apply three coats of finish, by mopping flood coat
sealed and dry floor.
8. Allow prior coat to dry before applying subsequent
END OF SECTION
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
.1/2 GAL of
~rtical
!aces so
'erlap
alternate
.e laying
!fic.
:paces
permitted
debris
'n matter
g as
to
before
rip,
r.
ST tO
coat.
O3
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
44
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
O1
O3
6D18, 8G14
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS (AM)
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, al
for all acoustical material and suspension system.
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract i
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous it.
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necess~
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
2. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
3. Sealants: Section 07900.
29 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
A. Standard for installation: ASTM C636-86.
35 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
38
39
41
42
44
45
A. Shop drawings: Reflected ceiling plans coordinating
electrical, mechanical requirements.
B. Samples:
1. For Color selection.
C. Project information:
1. Maintenance data.
48 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
51
52
A. Carefully coordinate ceiling layout with other work
penetrates acoustical qeiling systems.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09510-1
~d services
, as
)ocumen t s.
.~S.
furnish
try for a
~htch
01
03
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
29
32'
35
38
39
41
42
44
45
48
51
52
09510-2
01' PART 2 - PRODUCTS
04 2.01 MATERIALS
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30.
31
32
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Acoustical suspension systems (steel):
a. Base: Chicago Metallic Corp.
b. Optional: Armstrong; Celotex Corp.; Dorm Corp
Building Products, Inc.; and U.S. Gypsum Co.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Acoustical suspension systems - General: Intermediat
systems, ASTM C635.
1. Main runner jointing by spliced, interlocking ends
locks, pin locks, or other suitable connections.
2. Cross runners interlocking with main runners.
3. provide types indicated.
4'. Cross runners at light fixtures and air diffusers.
C. Hangers: 1. Galvanized, soft annealed steel wire for g~neral u
2. Soft stainless steel wire for use in wet areas: ki
etc.
D. Trim: provide moldings wherever ceiling meets walls,
partitions, other vertical elements, and other types
ceilings or ceiling fixtures; where ceiling mounted f
have integral flange trim, no additional trim is requ
Provide hold down clips at all tile locations.
35 2.02 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
37
38
39
42
48
5O
51
53
54
NOTE:
Model and manufacturer indicate system detailed;
similar systems by other listed manufacturers
may be used.
A. Acoustical suspension system, exposed grid, non-rate~
Metallic 500 series. ~
1. Galvanized single web steel, main and cross runne:
2. Finish on exposed surfaces: Smooth, flat white.
2.03
AM - 1:
AM - 2:
SCHEDULE OF ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
NDF mineral fiber ceiling tile, lay-in, 24 x 4~
(600 x 1200mm).
Ceramic ceiling ~ile, lay-in, 24 x 48 IN (600
1200 mm).
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
; Roblin
;ection
e duty
tab
tchens,
)f
[xtures
[red.
]: Chicago
7S.
IN
01
04
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
35
37
38
39
48
5O
51
53
54
42
02
03
O6
O9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43
46
47
49
2.04
AM - 3: NDF mineral fiber ceiling tile, lay-in, 20 x
(500 x 1500 mm).
ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers (Acoustic Materials):
1. Acoustical materials:
a. Base: As indicated for individual products.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply wil
00440.
B. Ceiling tile, mineral fiber:
1. Factory applied vinyl or acrylic paint finish om
fiber tiles.
2. Light reflectance: Not less than 0.75.
3. Noise reduction coefficient: 0.50 - 0.60.
4. Class A incombustible units.
5. Edges uniformly fabricated, true, square.
6. Sizes as required to fit suspension system.
7. Lay-in style:
a. 5/8 IN (15mm) thick.
8. Nondirectional fissured (NDF) pattern: Armstror
Cortega, or equal.
a. Acceptable manufacturers: Armstrong; Celotex
U.S.Gypsum Co.
C. Ceiling tile, ceramic: 1. Face pattern: Fissured.
~. Light reflectance: Not less than 0.75.
3. Noise reduction coefficient: Fissured: Not le~
0.55.
4. Class A incombustible units.
5. Edges uniformly fabricated, true, square.
6. 24 x 48 x 5/8 IN (600 x 1200 x 15 mm) thick.
7. Lay in style.
8. Acceptable manufacturers: Armstrong; Celotex
Gypsum Co.
2.05 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Provide Contracting Officer with one carton of eacl
pattern of material for maintenance purposes.
B. Provide in sealed labeled boxes to facilitate iden'
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09510=3
60 IN
h Section
mineral
Corp.!
s than
,rp.; U.S.
type and
ification.
02
03
O6
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43
46
47
49
O1
04
O7
09
10
13
16
17
19
20
23
26
27
29
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
09510-4
PART 3 - RXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installat
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibili
performance.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Consult other trades involved before start of ceili
determine areas of potential interference.
B. Do not start installation until interferences have
resolved.
3.03 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install suspension system in accord with ASTM C636
manufacturers' instructions.
B. Do not use defective or damaged materials.
C. Provide all hangers and inserts necessary to suppor
acoustical ceilings.
1. Provide in time to avoid delay in progress of wo
2. Locate and align hangers and inserts correctly.
3. Coordinate location and alignment with work of o
trades.
4. Provide supplementary rough suspension system an.
where necessary to support acoustical ceilings b
pipes, ducts, equipment, etc.
5. Do not suspend any part of suspension system or
ceilings from ducts, pipes, conduit, equipment,
D. Space hangers to prevent loads from items in or on
from causing eccentric deflection and rotation.
1. Provide additional hangers to support lighting
2. Provide additional hangers within 6 IN (150 mm)
main runners.
3. Do not bear runners on walls or partitions.
E. Install moldings where ceilings meet walls, partiti
capitals, other vertical elements, and other types
ceilings.
1. Support runners an~ border units on moldings.
U.S.P.S.
N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
[on.
ty for
ag work, to
Ueen
~nd
ther
trapezing
.~neath
mcous t i cal
[xtures.
end of
)ns, column
)f
01
04
O7
09
10
13
16
17
19
20
23
26
27
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
14
17
18
20
22
24
26
29
32
33
34
36
38
39
41
2. Secure moldings to wall construction by fastenin
holes drilled in web.
3. Space holes not more than 3 IN (75 mm) from each
each stud.
4. Draw up fasteners tight against vertical surface
5. Miter cut inside and outside corners.
6. Level to a tolerance not more than 1 in 1000.
7. Install with leg supporting bottom flange of run
F. Leave suspension system ready to accept installatio
acoustic materials.
3.04 INSTALLATION- ACOUSTIC MATERIALS
A. Install acoustic materials into suspension system i
with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Field cut as 'required to fit materials to grid.
C. Make all cuts square and true.
D. Do not install damaged units.
g. Furnish and install hold down clips.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning and replacement of defective units
avoid delay in progress of work and before final ac
work.
B. Carefully clean all soiled surfaces.
C. Remove and replace all irregular, discolored, defec
damaged components at no additional expense to Owne
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09510-5
g through
end and at
S.
ners.
n of
n accord
in time to
ceptance of
tive or
F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
14
17
18
20
22
24
26
29
32
33
34
36
38
39
41
O1
03
6D18, 8G14
SECTION 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE (RVT)
06 PART 1 -.GENERAL
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, a]
all work for all resilient tile (RVT) flooring am
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract I
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad,
3. Although not specifically indicated, furnish and
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenanc
devices incidental to or necessary for sound, sec~
complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Ceramic tile: Section 09310.
2. Asphalt plant flooring: Section 09334.
3. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
4. Quarry tile: Section 09330.
30 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
35
A. Tile standard: F.S.SS-T-312B type IV.
B. Base standard: F.S.SS-W-4OA(1) type I or II.
38 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
41
43
46
47
48
A. Product data.
B. Samples:
1. Full size tile for color verification.
c. Project information: 1. Warranty.
2. Maintenance data.
51 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09660-1
perform
base as
)ocuments.
Lnstall all
and
Ire and
01
O3
06
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
30'
33
35
38
41
43
46
47
48
51
O1
02
04
05
09660-2
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened contaim
indicating name, brand, color and pattern.
B. Store at minimum 70 degF (21 degC) for 72 hours befol
installation.
08 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
11
12
14
A. Maintain work spaces at 70 degF (21. degC) 72 hours p:
during, and 72 hours after installation.
B. Protect adjacent work from damage.
17 1.06 WARRANTY
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
A. Written warranty material will not:
1. Buckle, crack, lift, warp, shrink, change color,
disintegrate.
2. gxude adhesives through joints or show other dele
attributable to materials or workmanship.
B. Remove and replace defective areas to satisfaction oJ
Contracting Officer at no additional expense to Ownei
31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
34 2.01 MATERIALS
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Resilient tile (resilient vinyl tile):
a. Base: Armstrong Cork Co.
b. Optional: Azrock; Tarkett; Kentile Floors, In¢
2. Resilient base:
a. Base: Roppe.
b. Optional: NAFCO; Vinyl Plastics Industries; K~
Floors Inc.; and Johnsonite.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Resilient tile (RVT): 1. Armstrong Stone Tex.
2. 12 IN square x 1/8 IN (300 mm square x 3 mm).
3. Color: 52127 Stone White.
C. Resilient base at hard 'floor surface:
1. Roppe.
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
!rs
:e
:ior,
~r
:ts
~ntile
Section
O1
02
04
O5
O8
11
12
14
17
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
31
34
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
53
54
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
14
2. Rubber, coved type.
3. RB-l=2-1/2 IN H and RB-2=4 H as-per Room Finish S
4. Color: 95 Light Gray.
D. Resilient base at carpet: 1. Roppe.
2. Rubber, straight type.
3. RB-l=2-1/2 IN H and RB-2=4 H as per Room Finish S.
4. Color: 95 Light Gray.
B. Leveling compound: As recommended by manufacturer
with adhesives.
F. Adhesives and primers: As recommended by manufactur.
17 2.02 EXTRA MATERIAL
20
21
23
A. Five full cartons of each type, color and pattern of
for maintenance.
B. Provide materials in clearly labeled containers.
27 PART 3 - m~CUTION
30 3.01 INSPECTION
33
34
36
38
A. Verify substrates are clean, free from moisture, or
which may affect adhesion.
B. Carefully examine surfaces for defects and irregular
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces.
41 3.02 PREPARATION
44
45
47
49
50
51
52
A. Fill cracks, joints, etc., in floors with water resi~
crumbling patching compound.
B. Trowel level.
C. Where resilient flooring abuts other finish flooring
and finished surfaces do not align, feather leveling
for approximately 6 IN (150 mm) so finished surfaces
align. .
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09660-3
:hedule.
:hedule.
)mpatible
material
materials
ties.
:tant non
materials
compound
will
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
14
17
20
21
23
27
3O
33
34
36
38
41
44
45
47
49
50
51
52
O1
04
06
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
09660-4
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Do not start until work of other trades is complete.
B. Coordinate with other floor, wall and ceiling Work.
C. Apply primer and adhesive as recommended by manufact~
D. Lay in patterns selected. 1. Alternate tile 90 DEG if pattern is directional.
2. Bond tile to floor, flush, tight, and in true ali
adjacent tiles and with finished surface.
3. Fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against wall
pipes, and other obstructions.
4. Install edging Strips where tile edge is exposed
flooring terminates.
5. Lay out tile to avoid less than 1/2 tile at perma
6. Perform cutting or drilling of tile as required.
E. 'Roll entire floor.
F. Install base after wall material has dried out thoro~ 1. Provide base at intersections of floor and vertic~
in areas scheduled to receive base where intersec
exposed to view.
2. Set base straight and true.
3. Fit into breaks and recesses.
4. Neatly set or form corners.
5. Scribe to trim at doors and door frame.
6. Make joints tight.
7. Install with top and bottom edge in firm contact
and floor.
36 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
39
40
42
44
46
48
49
51
53
A. Immediately after application and rolling, remove su
adhesive.
B. Damp mop entire floor.
C. Clean floors in accord with manufacturer's recommend
D. Leave floors smooth and clean.
E. Protect with non staining building paper as may be n
prevent dirt and damage.
F. Protect traffic areas with fiberboard or plywood.
G. Prior to final inspection, wash, wax and buff floors
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
{rer.
'nment with
, around
.r where
lent walls.
lghly.
surfaces
~ion {s
;ith wall
~plus
~tions.
~cessary to
O1
04
O6
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
36
39
40
42
44
46
48
49
51
53
O1
02
03
O5
1. After thorough cleaning, apply two coats of wax r
by flooring manufacturer.
2. After each coat, buff floor.
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09660-5
~commended
O1
02
.03
O5
O1
03
6D18, 8G14
06 PA~T 1 - G]~AI.
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
SECTION 09680
CARPET
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, a:
for all carpeting as indicated in accord with pro
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous it
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necess
sound, secure and'complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Resilient tile flooring: Section 09660.
2. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
3. Ceramic tile: Section 09310.
4. Quarry tile: Section 09330.
5. Resilient tile: Section 09660.
31 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
36
38
4O
41
43
45
46
A. Tests for smoke developed: NFPA 258-76 and ASTM E84
B. Test for flame spread: ASTM E84-84.
C. Test for static rating: AATCC 134-1975.
D. Test for critical flux: ASTM E648-86, Flooring Radia:
Test (NBS).
E. Pill test: DOC FF-1-70.
F. Installer qualifications: Trained, skilled mechanic.
supervised by experienced superintendent.
49 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
52
53
54
A. Samples: .
1. 12 x 12 IN sample of each carpet type for color
verification.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09680-1
~d services
zisions of
.~S.
furnish
.~ms,
~ry for a
-84.
~t Panel
O1
03
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
31
34
36
38
40
41
43
45
46
49
52
53
54
O1
02
04
05
06
07
09680-2
2. Manufacturer's full line of carpet accessory colo~
selection.
B. Project information: 1. Warranty.
2. Seaming diagrams.
3. Maintenance data.
10 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
13
15
A. Deliver with mill register numbers attached.
B. Tag and mark accessory items for identification.
18 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
21
22
A. Install after all other finishing operations in area
complete.
25 1.06 WARRANTY
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
38
4O
41
43
A. Warrant that entire carpet installation complies with
specifications, and that damaged, defective,.wrinkles
carpet, or carpet stained by adhesives will be remove
replaced.
B. Warrant that carpet will not shrink or show excessive
a period of 5 years from date of acceptance.
C. Excessive wear is defined as wearing away of face ya~
reduces pile height by more than 10 percent in any az
separation and/or pulling out of nap.
D. Warrant entire cost of carpet replacement, including
and disposal of defective carpet.
E. Written warranty to be jointly signed by Contractor,
and manufacturer.
48 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
51 2.01 MATERIALS
54 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
s for
Lre
shrunken
and
wear for
ns which
ea, seam
removal
installer
O1
02
04
O5
O6
07
10
13
15
18
21
22
25
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
37
38
4O
41
43
48
51
54
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
24
25
27
1. Carpet:
a. Base: As noted for individual types.
b. CPT-1 and CPT-4 are matching broadloom and car
to be from one manufacturer.
2. Other materials:
a. Base: As noted.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Carpet: First quality, no seconds or imperfects.
1. Comply with applicable state and local codes.
2. Static rating: 3.5 KV, max., unless otherwise no
3. ASTM E84 smoke developed: 450, max.
4. In all areas:
a. ASTM E84 flame spread: 75, max.
b. Comply with DOC FF-1-70, standard for surface
flammability of Carpets and Rugs.
C. Vinyl carpet edging: Mercer Plastics, Inc.; Johnson
Kentile.
1. Carpet/resilient vinyl tile: Mercer, Model 150 G
2. Carpet/ceramic tile: Mercer, Model 330 Gray.
D. Leveling compound: Non-crumbling, non-staining type
carpeting manufacturer.
E. Carpet adhesive: Type as recommended by carpet manu
30 2.02 CARPET TYPES
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Carpet CPT-I: Interface: Textured Quantum Plus, No
Systems Six.
1. Tufted text~ured loop pile.
2. Integrated static control. Rating 2.0 KV maximum
3. Yarn: Continuous filament nylon, 100 percent Zef
ZX.
4. Color: 403/401 Silver/Charcoal. Same dyelot as
5. Construction:
a. Tufts per inch 9.3; 2 ply.
b. Face weight 26 OZ/SY minimum; total weight 112
c. Flame spread Class I.
d. Thermoplastic vinyl back.
e. 6 FT wide Broadloom; roll length 90 FT.
6. Installation: Partial direct glue down as per
manufacturer's recommendation.
B. Carpet CPT-2: Bigelow High Dividend. 1. Cut pile, tufted.
2. Integrated static control.
3. Yarn 2 ply anti-soil-lng, continuous filament nylc
B.C.F.
4. Construction:
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09680-3
3et tiles
Section
ed.
Rubber;
ray.
mpproved by
factufer.
7426-760,
:ron 500
:PT-4.
OZ/SQ YD.
~, Anso IV
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
24
25
27
3O
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
54
O1
02
03
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
09680-4
a. Stitches per inch 12.70; gauge 1/10 IN.
b. Face weight 44 OZ/SY minimum.
c. Flame spread: Class 1.
d. Color No. 08122 Groton gray typical. Color No
Glenaire Green at room 1D012.5 service lobby
refer to Sheet A5-9o
e. 12 FT wide Broadloom.
f. Backing: Synthetic Action Back.
5. Installation: Direct glue down.
C. Carpet CPT-3: Bigelow Stati-Tuft Weldlok, No. 4091-I
gray.
1. Textured level loop pile, tufted construction.
2. Static control. Rating 3.5 KV maximum.
3. 100 percent Dupont Antron B.C.F. nylon.
4. Construction:
a. Rows per inch 8.4, 1/8 IN gauge.
b. Face weight 28.30Z/SY minimum.
c. Flame spread Class I.
d. Backing: Primary-synthetic, back coating - we:
e. 12 FT broadloom.
5. Installation: Direct glue down.
6. Alternate: Armstrongs Commendation II 721, No.
carbon gray.
D. Carpet CPT-4: Interface: Textured Quantum Plus, No
1. Carpet tile, tufted textured loop pile.
2. Integrated static control. Rating 2.0 KV maximum.
3. Yarn: Continuous filament nylon, 100 percent Zef
ZX.
4. Color: 403/401 Silver/Charcoal, same dye lot as
5. Construction:
a. Tufts per cm/inch 9.3.
b. Face weight 26 OZ/SY minimum, total weight 132
c. Flame spread: Class I.
d. Backing: Glasbac vinyl.
e. 18 x 18 IN tiles.
6. Installation: Free lay as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Carpet CPT-5: Interface "Foyer" walk-off tile. 1. Cut pile tufted synthetic.
2. Integrated static control.
3. Construction:
a. Face weight: 26 OZ/SY.
b. Flame spread: 1.01 watts/cm c. Color: Grey
c. 18 IN x 18 IN 'carpet tile.
4. Installation: Free lay.
52 2.03 EXTRA MATERIAL
U.S.P.S. --N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09724
)uthwalls,
i6617 smoke
.dlok.
'21-009
742~.
ron 500
~PT-1.
OZ/SQ YD.
o. 501.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
O9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
52
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
34
35
36
37
38
39
01
O2
A. Furnish minimum 3 percent additional carpet of each
pattern and color for maintenance purposes.
06 PART 3 - EXECI/TION
09 3.01 INSPECTION
12
14
15
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept carpeting.
B. Check moisture content of substrate; do not install
moisture is within limits acceptable to manufacture~
18 3.02 PREPARATION
21
23
24
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
A. Thoroughly clean all areas to receive carpet.
B. Fill all cracks, joints, holes or uneven areas with
non-crumbling latex base floor filler and remove ex(
C. Before commencing work, test an area with glue and
determine "open time" and bond.
D. Layout: 1. Use minimum of cross seams or visible fide seams
2. Lay so pile and pattern of adjacent pieces have
direction.
3. Do not piece.
4. Install in longest practicable lengths.
E. Carefully check all dimensions and carefully fit an
carpet.
40 3.03 INSTALLATION
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendatio
B. Glue all carpet to substrate except CPT-4 and CPT-5
free lay.
C. Bind all seams with seam cement on broadlooms but n
tiles.
D. Where carpet terminates at non-carpeted floor surfa
edge stripping. -
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
09680-5
type,
;ntil
.~SS ·
~arpet to
:ame
install
which are
~t at carpet
ce, install
O1
02
06
09
12
14
15
18
21
23
24
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
4O
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
01
04
O5
07
08
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
2O
09680-6
3,04 CLEAN
A, Remove any spillage of adhesive from carpet face or
remover provided by manufacturer,
B, Clean carpet of all spots; remove all loose threads
scissors,
C. Completely and thoroughly vacuum.
D. At completion of work, review with Contracting 0ffic
pieces or remnants of carpet.
1. Turn over to Contracting Officer all such pieces
require for repair.
2. Remove all other scraps from site.
E. Advise maintenance personnel regarding care and main
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.S. -. N, Texas/N. Georgia G,M,F, & V,M,F,
~eam using
,ith sharp
~r all
hat he may
enance.
Ol
04
O5
07
O8
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
2O
01
03
7F19, 8G14
06 PAinT 1 - ~
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
SECTION 09761
SPECIAL FLOOR TREATMENT (CS)
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, aa
for all special floor treatment as indicated, in
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous itl
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necess~
sound, secure and watertight installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Ceramic tile: Section 09310.
2. 0uarry tile: Section 09330.
3. Asphalt plank flooring: Section 09334.
4. Resilient tile flooring: Section 09660.
5. Carpet: Section 09680.
6. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
32 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
35
36
A. Applicator must be a licensee of manufacturer, or aPl
writing.
39 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
42
44
46
48
49
5O
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: 1. Warranty.
2. Maintenance data.
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09761-1
Id services
lccord wi th
furnish
:ms,
~ry for a
,roved in
01
03
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32
35
36
39
42
44
46
48
49
5O
O1
04
O5
O7
09
09761-2
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Install only when surface and ambient temperatures a~
95 and 60 degF.
B. Provide adequate ventilation during installation.
C. Post and enforce No Smoking signs.
12 1.05 WARRANTY
15
17
18
20
21
A. Written warranty signed jointly by applicator and mat
B. Warranty to cover installation for a period of 5 yea~
date of substantial completion.
C. Warranty to include waterproof integrity of installa!
adhesion to substrate and surface degradation.
25 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28 2.01 MATERIALS
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
41
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Sealing compound:
a. Base: L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
b. Optional: Euclid, gucothane "O", Sonneborn, Sc
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval 'comply with
00440.
B. Sealing Compound: 1. Moisture cured urethane type; Durathane.
2. One component urethane sealer.
3. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer.
45 PART 3 - EXECUTION
48 3.01 INSPECTION
51
53
54
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installati<
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
performance.
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
'e between
~ufacturer.
's from
ion,
nothane.
Section
for
O1
04
O5
07
09
12
15
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
41
45
48
51
53
54
28
25
2O
21
17
18
03 3.02
06
07
09
10
12
13
15
16
18
2O
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
33
34
37
4O
42
44
45
47
49
51
3.03
PREPARATION
A. Verify that concrete was steel troweled and hair bro
free of fins, ridges or voids.
B. Assure that curing agents used are compatible with c
system or completely removed.
C. Concrete must be cured for minimum of 30 days, with
content not exceeding 8 percent.
D. Remove all surface contamination by cleaning and san
or acid etching.
E. Patch all holes or voids.
F. Rout out all cracks exceeding 1/16 IN wide and calk.
G. Calk non-moving joints up to 1 IN wide with suitable
sealant.
H. Do not calk or overcoat joints where movement exceed
percent or any joints over 1 IN wide.
I. These joints must receive other joint treatment to a
watertightness.
J. Install test patch.
K. If test patch indicates lack of adhesion, correct su
application.
INSTALLATION
A. Apply by airless spray, long handled roller or brush
B. Install primer.
C. Apply in accord with manufacturer's recommendations;
coats.
D. Apply first coat at 250 SF/GAL.
g. Apply subsequent coat at a coverage rate not over 30~
F. Final minimum dry coverage of 6 mils.
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09761-3
~med and is
~ating
notsture
~blasttng
backer and
25
sure
)strate or
minimum 2
SF/GAL.
O3
06
07
09
10
12
13
15
16
18
20
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
33
34
37
4O
42
44
45
47
49
51
O1
02
03
05
O6
09761-4
G. Architect reserves right to require dry film thickne~
and addition coverage if tests prove coverage does
specification requirements.
H. Allow no traffic on sealed surface for 72 hours afte]
application.
09 3,04 PATCHING AND CLEANING
12
14
16
18
A. Patch all areas which fail to match adjacent work.
B. Clean surface "broom clean" after completion of work.
C. Remove all debris resulting from these operations.
END OF SECTION
U.SoP.S. -_N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.MoF.
~s testing
,t meet
01
02
03
05
06
O9
12
'14
16
18
O1
03
6D18, 8G14
06 PART
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
SECTION 09815
HIGH BUILD GLAZED COATINGS (EPOXY)
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment an
for all high build glazed coatings as indicated,
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous i
appurtenances and devices incidental to or neces.
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Painting: Section 09900.
2. Textured plastic coating: Section 09835.
3. Textured finish: Section 09836.
4. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
30 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
35
36
38
A. Fire rating tests: ASTM E84.
B. Abrasion resistance test: ASTM D1044 or C501, 200
abraser, 500 GM load.
C. Water permeability test: ASTM D1653.
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
44
45
47
48
A. Samples:
1. Colors for selection.
B. Project information:
1. Maintenance data.
51 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F
09815-1
d services
in accord
es.
furnish
ems,
ary for a
:ycles Taber
O1
03
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
3O
33
35
36
38
41
44
45
47
48
51
O1
02
03
09815-2
A. Assure minimum ambient air and surface temperature ot
(13 degC) for 3 days prior, during and 2 weeks after
application.
07 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
10 2.01 MATERIALS
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Glazed coating:
a. Base: Glidden (Epoxide).
b. Optional: Cook Paint & Varnish Co.; Pratt and
Inc.; Mameco International, Inc.; and PPG Indul
Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Glazed coating: A polyester-polyurethane or epoxy-pc
system providing a hard tile like glazed surface.
1. Flame spread: 25, maximum; fuel contributed: 25
smoke developed: 25, maximum (non-toxic).
2. Abrasion resistance: 2 MG loss, maximum.
3. Water permeability: 0.0025 PERM/IN/SF/HR, maximul
C. Block filler: Manufacturer's standard, compatible wi
and substrate.
D. Pri~er: As required; use conversion primer when sho
not compatible with glazed coating·
37 PART 3 - R~C~TION
40 3.01 INSPECTION
43
45
46
A. Verify suitability of substrate.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibilit
performance.
49 3,02 PREPARATION
52
53
A. Do not apply over materials, or under conditions, der
to formation of a durable coating film.
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & VoM.F.
50 degF
Lambert,
tries,
Section
lyester
maximum;
th coating
primer is
for
rimental
O1
02
03
O7
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
32
33
37
4O
43
45
46
49
52
53
01
O2
04
05
06
07
08
09
12
15
17
18
3.03
B. Prepare and clean in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions for particular substrate conditions.
C. Remove hardware, accessories, plates, surface mounte
fixtures, and similar items which are not to be coat.
provide protection during preparation and coating op.
Following completion of coating in each space or are
reinstall removed items, using workmen skilled in tr
involved.
MATERIAL PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare materials per manufacturer's directt
B. Stir all materials to produce a mixture of uniform d
required for application of materials.
21 3.04 APPLICATION
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
53
54
A. Apply uniformly without voids, pinholes, or runs.
1. Use brush, roller or spray in accord with manufac
directions.
2. Provide minimum dry film thickness for special co
system, not including block filler or primers, of
even if manufacturer's "standard" thickness may b
3. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat
4. Sand between coats where required to produce an e
surface.
B. Apply additional coats when undercoats or other cond
through finish coats until film is of uniform finish
appearance.
C. Coat surfaces behind movable items, to match similar
surfaces.
D. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinge
match exposed surfaces.
E. Items whichhave been shop primed and touched-up may
primer omitted provided:
1. Shop primer will not show through succeeding coat
2. Conversion prime coat is not necessary.
F. Before application of finish coats, apply a prime co
material which is required to be coated or finished
has not been prime coated.
1. Recoat primed and sealed substrates, where there
of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat
a uniform finish coat.
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
09815-3
lighting
d, or
.~rations.
~des
)ns.
.,nsf ty as
turer's
~ting'
7 mils,
m less.
has cured.
~en, smooth
tions show
color and
exposed
d covers to
have
s.
at to
and which
is evidence
to assure
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
12
15
17
18
21
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
54
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
14
15
09815-4
G. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, mist or fog or w
relative humidity exceeds 85 percent.
1. Do not apply coatings to damp or wet surfaces, unl
permitted by manufacturer.
2. Coating work may be continued during inclement wea
if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed an
within temperature and humidity limits specified b
manufacturer.
H. Provide.completed work matching samples for color, te
coverage.
I. Remove, refinish and recoat work not in compliance wi
specified requirements.
18 3.05 PROTECTION
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
A. Protect adjacent work, whether to be coated or not, a
damage by coating work. Correct damage by cleaning,
or replacing, as directed by Architect at no addition
to Owner.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required. After coating
-application, remove any temporary protective wrapping
by others for protection of their work.
C. Take precautions to ensure that workmen and work area
adequately protected from fire and health hazards res
from storing, handling, mixing, and applying coatings
35 3.06 CLEAN-UP
38
39
41
42
43
45
A. During progress of work, remove from site all discard.
materials, rubbish, cans and rags resulting from this
B. Upon completion, clean all coating spattered surfaces
spattered materials by proper methods, using care not
scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.S. -N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
hen
ess
ther only
d heated
xture and
th
gainst
repairing
al expense
pr6vtded
are
lting
}d paint
work.
Remove
to
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
14
15
18
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
35
38
39
41
42
43
45
11
12
01
O3
4H01, 8G14
SECTION 09835
TEXTURED PLASTIC COATING (SC)
09835-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - G]~N]~RAI.,
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all textured plastic coating (SC) as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
2. Painting: Section 09900.
3. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
4. High build glazed coating: Section 09815.
5. Textured finish: Section 09836.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
31 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
A. Samples:
1. Finish samples, 12 x 12 IN, showing texture, color, and
pattern, for Contracting Officer approval.
2. Mock-up installation on site of project, minimum 8 FT wide x
floor to ceiling area.
3. This control sample shall meet Contracting Officer's
satisfaction for color and pattern size to serve as standard
of quality from which all production spraying shall meet.
4. Written manufacturer certification verifying contractor is
an approved applicator.
5. Product data, test results, and maintenance instructions.
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
47 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
47
50
52
54
A. Fire rating tests: ASTM E84 Class A.
B. Abrasion resistance: ASTM D4060-84 minimum 400 cycles.
C. Stain Resistance: ASTM D1308-79 (81).
50
52
54
U.S.P.So r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
O1
3.01
INSPECTION
09835-3
O1
04
05
06
07
08
10
12
13
15
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive coating. 1. Substrate to be above dewpoint.
2. Substrate to be thoroughly dry.
3. No cracks, dents, abrasions and other defacements in
substrates allowed.
B. Correct deficiencies.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
D. Coordinate as required.
04
05
06
07
08
10
12
13
15
18 3.02 PREPARATION
18
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
A. Remove or otherwise protect hardware, accessories, device
plates, factory finish work, and similar items; or provide
ample in-place protection.
B. Upon completion of each space carefully reset all removed
items.
C. Use only skilled mechanics for removal, resetting and
protection.
D. Furnish and install all dropcloths and masking in all rooms and
areas where coating work is being done to adequately protect
flooring, trim, ceiling and other work from all damage during
painting.
E. Prepare and clean substrates for application of product per
manufactures recommendations.
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
40 3.03 INSTALLATION
4O
43
46
47
49
51
53
A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
B. Apply primer with as many coats as necessary to completely
cover substrate uniformly.
C. Sand primer coat as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Apply with equipment as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Apply product uniformly, with no voids, pinholes, or runs.
43
46
47
49
51
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
02
09835-2
D. Color Fastness: Federal Test 191 Method 5660.2 200
05 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
08
09
11
A. Assure minimum ambient air and surface temperature o
degrees or maximum 100 degrees.
B. Store in closed labeled containers
15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
18 2.01 MATERIALS
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Textured Plastic Coating:
a. Base: Polomyx.
b. Optional: Zolatone.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Textured Plastic Coating (SC); Zolatone by Randal col
product pattern No. 43-84844. Textured multiple
spray on modified acrylate copolymer base aqua suspel
seamless wall coveri~g.
1. Supply material ready to use, with no mixing, fie2
or thinning required.
2. Supply all component colors in one mixture.
3. No visible break in pattern or color discernable
viewing distance of 4 FT.
C. Primer: 1. As recommended by manufacturer for individual sub~
2. Provide white tinted primer.
43 2.02 EXTRA MATERIALS
46
47
A. Provide Contracting Officer with 5 GAL of each color
instructions.
51 PART 3 - EXECUTION
U.S.PoS. -~N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
ir.
5O
Section
~tract
bed 4 color
mion
.d tinting
~rom a
:trates.
and mixing
02
O5
08
09
11
15
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
4O
43
46
47
51
O1 3.01 INSPECTION
O4
05
06
07
08
10
12
13
15
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive coating. 1. Substrate to be above dewpoint.
2. Substrate to be thoroughly dry.
3. No cracks, dents, abrasions and other defacements
substrates allowed.
B. Correct deficiencies.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibilit
performan~ce.
D. Coordinate as required.
18 3.02 PREPARATION
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
A. Remove or otherwise protect hardware, accessories,
plates, factory finish work, and similar items; or
ample in-place protection.
B. Upon completion of each space carefully reset all r
items.
C. Use only skilled mechanics for removal, resetting ar
protection.
D. FurniSh and install all dropcloths and masking in al
areas where coating work is being done to adequatel]
flooring, trim, ceiling and other work from all dam~
painting.
E. Prepare and clean substrates for application of pro(
manufactures recommendations.
40 3.03 INSTALLATION
43
44
46
47
49
51
53
A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions an~
recommendations.
B. Apply primer with as many coats as necessary to com
cover substrate uniformly.
C. Sand primer coat as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Apply with equipment as recommended by manufacturer
E. Apply product uniformly, with no voids, pinholes, o
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F
09835-3
in
for
evice
rovide
moved
,d
.1 rooms and
' protect
~ge during
[uct per
letely
runs.
O1
04
05
06
07
08
10
12
13
15
18
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
4O
43
44
46
47
49
51
53
01
02
04
O5
06
08
09
11
12
14
15
09835-4
F. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coats
per manufactures recommendations.
G. Apply additional coats when undercoats or other cond!
through finish coats until film is of uniform finish,
appearance.
H. Coat surfaces behind movable items, to match similar
surfaces.
I. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged
match exposed surfaces.
J. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colo
and clean without overlapping.
18 3.04 PROTECTION
21
22
24
25
26
28
30
31
33
34
35
A. Protect adjacent work, whether to be coated or not, a
damage by coating work.
B. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, a
by Contracting Officer at no additional expense to Co
Officer.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required.
D. After coating application, remove any temporary prote
wrappings provided by others for protection of their
E. Take precautions to ensure that workmen and work area
adequately protected from fire and health hazards res
from storing, handling and applying cdatings.
38 3.05 CLEAN-UP
41
42
43
45
47
48
5O
A. During progress or work, remove from site all discard
coating materials, rubbish, cans and rags resulting f
work.
B. Upon completion, clean all coating spattered surfaces
C. Remove spattered materials by proper methods, using c
scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.S. -. N-. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
ve cured
tions show
color and
exposed
covers tO
rs sharp
gainst
s directed
ntracting
ctive
~ork.
s are
ulting
id special
rom this
~re not to
01
02
04
O5
O6
O8
09
11
12
14
15
18
21
22
24
25
26
28
3O
31
33
34
35
38
41
42
43
45
47
48
5O
O1
03
5A25, 8G14
SECTION 09836
TEXTURED FINISH (TF)
09836-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all textured finish as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Painting: Section 09900.
2. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
3. Concrete masonry: Section 04220.
4. Sealants: Section 07900.
5. High build glazed coating: Section 09815.
6. Textured plastic coating: Section 09835.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
35
37
38
4O
42
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
A. Flame spread: Under 25, per ASTM E-84; smoke: under 25.
B. Burn length less than 1 IN, per FAA Vertical Burn Test No. FAR
25.853b.
C. Minimum Barcol Hardness Index: 35.
D. Finish capable of being bent 90 degree over a 1/2 IN mandrel,
without cracking.
E. Applicator/erector qualifications:
1. Approved in writing by manufacturer; furnish copy of
certification letter.
F. Job mockup: 1. Install a minimum 100 SF mockup of each texture and color.
2. Approved mockups will serve~as standard of quality for all
subsequent work. .
35
37
38
4O
42
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
04
O5
O6
08
09
10
11
13
15
17
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
09836-2
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installationand maintenance instr
recommendations.
B. Samples: 1. 12 IN square of each color and texture.
2. Resubmit as necessary until approved.
3. Job mockup to match approved samples.
C. Test reports.
D. Certificates.
E. Maintenance data.
F. Extra material.
G. Warranty(s): 1. Warrant that product will not delaminate from Sub
2. Warrant color integrity of finish, not to exceed
units.
3. Warrant against chalking, mildew, mold and other
degradation.
4. Warranty period 5 years.
5. Remove and replace defective finishes.
31 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
34
36
A. Protect from direct sunlight and freezing.
B. Store in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
39 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
42
43
45
46
A. Environmental requirements:
1. Comply with NIOSH and OSHA standards for applicat
B. Protection:
1. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage and over sp
50 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
actions and
~trate.
NBS ,
uch
[bn.
:ay.
O1
04
O5
O6
08
09
10
11
13
15
17
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
31
34
36
39
42
43
45
46
5O
0! 2.0! MATERIALS
09836-3
01
04
O5
06
07
O8
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Base: Duroplex Interior Finish coating; Triarch Industries,
Inc. (1-800-537-6111).
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
10 B. Texture: Heavy Stomp.
12 C. Colors:
13 1. TF-I:
14 2. TF-2:
15 3. TF-3:
16 4. TF-4:
Where scheduled on room finish schedule.
Duroplex color no. 1, white.
Duroplex color no. 510, sunbeam.
Duroplex color no. 320, sky pool.
Duroplex color no. 130, deep sunset.
04
O5
O6
07
O8
10
12
13
14
15
16
19 2.02 EXTRA MATERIAL
19
22 A. Furnish Contracting Officer 1 50 LB kit of each color.
22
26 PABT 3 - RxRCUTION
26
29 3.01 INSPECTION
29
32
34
A. Verify that substrate is acceptable to receive installation.
B. Installation assumes responsibility for performance.
32
34
37 3.02 PREPARATION
37
40 A. Correct unsatisfactory substrates prior to start of work.
4O
43 3.03 INSTALLATION
43
46
48
49
51
53
A. Install system of Plastek over primer.
B. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions to achieve
approved finish.
C. Mask off and calk control joints.
D. Minimum final thickness: 55 mils.
46
48
49
51
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
09836-4
E. Protect from damage.
04 3.04 CLEANING
O7
09
11
13
A. Remove all masking same day.
B. Clean up all over spray and residue.
C. Leave broom clean.
END OF SECTION
U,S,P,S, -.N, Texas/N, Georgia G,M,F, & V,M,F,
O1
04
07
O9
11
13
O1
O3
6K26, 8G14
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
09900-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GEI~AI.
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all painting as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Textured plastic coating (SC): Section 09835.
2. Finishing architectural cabinet work: Section 06410.
3. Identification of mechanical and electrical work: See
Divisions 15 and 16.
'4. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
5. Textured finish (TF): Section 09836.
6. High build glazed coating: Section 09815.
C. Definitions:
1. "Paint" and "painting" refer to all applied coatings, except
Section 09835.
2. Finished room or space: One that has finish called for on
Room Finish Schedule.
3. Mechanical work (and equipment): All work included in
Division 15.
4. Electrical work (and equipment): Ail work included in
Division 16.
D. Work included:
1. Paint all exterior surfaces and all surfaces in finished
rooms or spaces, unless noted not to be painted or to be
painted under other sections.
E. Mechanical/Electrical Painting:
1. Work included: Paint all:
a. Mechanical and electrical work exposed on roof and
outside.
b. Other mechanical and electrical items not completely
factory finished.
c. Exposed ductwork, piping, insulated piping, conduit,
busways and raceways in finished rooms and spaces.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
'21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S._- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09900-2
03 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
O6
08
09
10
11
12
A. Flame spread testing: ASTM E84-84.
B. Standard of workmanship: Before proceeding, finish
items with specified materials for approval as stand,
quality for completed work:
1. One room in each basic dolor scheme.
2. One area or item of each color.
15 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
18
19
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
A. Shop drawings: Room finish schedule indicating pain
specified for each surface in each room or space.
B. Product data: Not required.
C. Samples: 1. Manufacturers complete range of colors for verifi
2. Gloss samples.
D. Project information:
1. Manufacturer's data showing conformance to speeif
for all products.
a. Name or type number of material; cross referen
appropriate specified product as listed in the
specifications.
b. Manufacturer's name and stock number.
c. Contents by volume, of major constituents.
d. Application instructions.
2. Maintenance data.
39 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
42
44
46
48
5O
52
54
A. Deliver in original labeled containers.
B. Protect from freezing or damage.
C. Store materials in place designated by Contracting
D. Keep storage neat and clean.
E. Repair damage thereto or to surroundings.
F. Remove rags and waste .from building daily.
G. Avoid danger of fire.
U.S.P.S. , N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
~ollowing
~rd of
colors
~tion.
tcations,
ced to
fficer.
O3
06
08
09
10
11
12
15
18
19
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39
42
44
46
48
5O
52
54 -~
09900-3
03 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
03
06
07
09
11
13
14
16
A. Perform no work unless temperature in building is maintained at
minimum 65 degF (18 degC).
B. Assure that adequate ventilation exists.
C. Avoid wide temperature variations.
D. Maintain a rough schedule showing when painter expects to
complete respective coats of paint for various areas.
g. Keep schedule current as job progress dictates.
O6
07
O9
11
13
14
16
20 PAlrf 2 - PRODUCTS
2O
23 2.01 MATERIALS
23
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Provide paint as product of one manufacturer as far as
possible.
2. If necessary provide products by different manufacturers.
3. Contractor may propose products for use, produced by an
approved manufacturer when he believes proposed product is
equivalent to product listed in specification.
4. Contracting Officer must agree that proposed product is
equivalent.
5. If Contracting Officer does not agree that proposed product
is equivalent, Contractor provide product listed in
specification.
6. Paints and coatings listed are Pratt and Lambert unless
Glidden is noted.
7. Use comparable quality paints by approved manufacturers.
8. Paints:
a. Base: As Listed.
b. Optional: Glidden Div./SCM Corp.; Sherwin-Williams Co.;
Cook Paint and Varnish Co.; PPG Industries, Inc.;
Fuller-O'Brien Div./0'Brien Corp.; Mobil Chemical Co.,
Tnemec.
9. Stains:
a. Base: As listed:
b. Optional: Samuel Cabot Inc.; Fuller-O'Brien Div./O'Brien
Corp.; Glidden Div./SCM Corp.; Olympic Stain
Div./Comerco Inc.; PPG Industries, Inc.
10. Structural steel paint (primed in 05120):
a. Base: Tnemec; Hentzen; Porter.
11. Acrylic sealer: Trenwyth Industries, Thorough Seal.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
O1
02
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
09900-4
12. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply witf
00440.
B. Paints and stains: As specified in paragraphs "Painl
Exterior" and "Paint Systems: Interior".
1. Use best quality by approved manufacturers.
2. Unspecified products: Use best quality by reputa[
recognized manufacturers.
3. Colors: As noted below and as indicated in Sectior
paragraph "Pipe Identification".
a. Coordinate with Contracting Officer for colors
not listed below.
b. Ail walls and ceilings scheduled PNT to be Glic
(Off White) unless noted otherwise.
c. Ail hollow metal door and window frames, inter!
exterior surfaces of all overhead doors to be
79-38 (Grey).
d. Interior surfaces of LOG's, i.e. walls, ceilin
railings to be Glidden 79-61 (Black).
e. Exterior surfaces of LOG's and breakouts, i.e.
underside, and supports to be Glidden 79-38 (G
f. At workroom 1HO01 and platforms 1KOO1, 1POOl, i
walls, metal ceilings, structural Joists/girdel
metal grating, P.M.S. support system, miscell~
metal items, and metal stair stringers and tre~
79-38 (Grey).
g. At workroom 1H001 and platforms 1KO01, 1PO01,
columns Glidden 79-13 (Light Grey).
h. At workroom 1HO01 and platforms 1K001, 1PO01,
ducts and mechanical, equipment Glidden 76-82 (
Blue).
i. At workroom 1HO01, paint all railings and ladd,
73-47 (Yellow).
J. Stain all wood bumpers and interior wood decks
Mansard Grey.
k. Paint all bollards Glidden 73-47 (Yellow).
1. Ail columns in areas other than workroom 1HO01
White to match Dupont enamel 508.
m. At emergency exit alcoves (1 at area E, 1 at a
2 at area L) paint exterior door, frame and al
surfaces Dupont enamel 58199 (Yellow). Paint
or metal grating Glidden 70-28 (Off White).
4. Following is a listing of surfaces and type of pa
applied.
5. Ail finish coats shall have a egg shell gloss rat
minimum 15 at 60 dee angle per ASTM D-523-85.
6. Submit gloss samples for approval prior to use.
7. Add flatteners if necessary to achieve specified
52 PART 3 - ~CL~fION
UoS,PoS,-- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
Section
Systems:
le,
15060,
of items
lden 70-28
.or and
;lidden
s, and
walls,
ey).
letal
:s/beams/
leous~
Lds Glidden
)aint all
~aint all
.ight
~rs Glidden
Glidden's
to be
tea F, and
[ block
?CP ceiling
[nt to be
lng of
'loss.
O1
O2
04
05
06
O7
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
52
O1 3.01 INSPECTION
04
O5
O7
O8
A. Examine surfaces carefully for defects which cannot be
corrected and might prevent satisfactory results.
09900-5
B. Commencing of work in a specific area constitutes acceptance of
surfaces, and responsibility for performance.
11 3.02 PREPARATION - GENERAL
14
16
17
19
21
23
25
26
A. Assure that surfaces are clean and dry.
B. Assure that surfaces are free of foreign materials which will
affect adhesion or appearance.
C. Remove mildew and neutralize surface.
D. Eliminate efflorescence before painting.
E. Before painting, test surfaces with moisture meter.
F. Paint when moisture is within paint manufacturers acceptable
limits.
29 3.03 PREPARATION - WOOD
32
34
35
37
A. Sandpaper smooth, then dust.
B. After priming coat has dried, seal all knots, pitch and
resinous sapwood.
C. Putty all nail holes and minor defects, to match wood color.
40 3.04 PREPARATION - FERROUS METAL SURFACES AND HOLLOW METAL
43
45
46
48
50
A. Follow requirements of SSPC-SP 1-63 and 3-63.
B. Wire brush, or grind as necessary to remove shoulders at edge
of sound paint to prevent telegraphing.
C. Touch up damaged shop coats.
D. For surfaces with touched up shop coat, omit first coat.
O1
04
05.
O7
O8
1].
14
16
17
19
21
23
25
26
29
32
34
35
37
4O
43
45
46
48
50
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
O5
O8
11
13
15
17
18
20
22
25
28
30
33
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
49
50
52
53
54
09900-6
3.05 PRgPARATION - GALVANIZED METAL SURFACES AND NONANODI
ALUMINUM
A. Follow requirements of SSPC-SP 1-63; Passivate.
3.06 PREPARATION - DRYWALL
A. Repair minor irregularities left by finishers.
B. Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper.
C. Apply prime coat.
D. Notify drywall finisher to repair and refinish any
show defects after application of primer.
E. Reprime refinished areas.
F.'Apply finish coats.
3.07 PREPARATION - CONCRETE, MASON'BY, STUCCO OR PLASTER
A. Repair minor defects.
B. Remove oil from concrete by washing with xylol.
3.08 APPLICATION - GENERAL
A. Paint surfaces as specified in Paragraphs Schedule
Systems".
B. Provide complete coverage and hide.
1. Ail paint systems are to cover.
2. When color or undercoats show through, apply add
coats at no additional cost until paint film is
finish and color.
C. Employ only skilled mechanics.
D. Mix and apply as recommended by manufacturer.
E. If Contracting Officer so directs, do not apply suc
coats until he has an opportunity to observe previot
F. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fi
finished work, and similar items; or provide ample
protection.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
ZED
[reas which
'Paint
tional
,f uniform
eeding
s coat.
xtures,
n place
O5
08
11
13
15
17
18
2O
22
25
28
30
33
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
52
53
49
50
47
09900-7
02
03
O5
07
09
11
12
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
28
G. Upon completion of painting, carefully replace all removed
items and/or remove protection.
H. Apply all materials under adequate illumination.
I. Evenly spread and smoothly flow on for full, smooth cover.
J. Assure that coats are dry before recoating.
K. Touch up suction or hot spots in plaster, drywall, concrete
block, and concrete before painting.
L. Touch up abraded areas of shop prime coats before subsequent
coats are applied.
M. Surfaces not to be painted: 1. Items having complete factory finish.
2. Anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, glass,
copper, bronze or similar materials.
3. Moving parts of valves, operating units, mechanical and
electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators,
sending devices, motor and fan shafts.
4. Code labels, such as U/L, FM.
5. Equipment identification or rating plates.
3.09 APPLICATION - EXTERIOR
02
03
O5
07
09
11
12
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
28
31
32
33
35
37
A. Do not paint when surface temperature is below 50 degF (10
degC), while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy or frosty
weather.
Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun.
C. Back prime all wood trim with penetrating sealer.
31
32
33
35
37
40 3.10 APPLICATION - INTERIOR
4O
43
45
47
48
A. Back prime all wood trim with penetrating sealer.
B. Finish door edges same as faces of doors.
C. Finish all closets, semi-exposed surfaces behind grilles,
radiation, etc., to match nearest adjoining surfaces.
43
45
47
48
51 3.11 PROTECTION AND CLEANUP
51
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
09900-8
O1 A. Protect adjacent work against damage by painting an
02 work.
04 B. Clean, repair or'replace, and repaint damaged work
05 by Contracting Officer.
07 C. Provide Wet Paint signs.
09 D. Remove temporary protective wrappings, after comple
10 painting operations.
12 E. Clean all paint spattered surfaces.
14 F. Use care not to damage finished surfaces.
16 G. Remove any surplus materials, scaffolding and debri:
18 H. Leave areas broom clean.
21
3.12 SCHEDULE-INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
24 A. Concrete panels
25 1 coat Latex Block Filler Primafil 200
26 1 coat Alkyd Enamel, Satin Cellu-Tone
28 B. Ground face concrete block walls
29 1 coat Acrylic Sealer (AS) 20% Trendwyth Indus~
30 solids by volume Trend Coat
32
33
34
36
37
38
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
5O
51
52
53
54
C. Concrete ceilings
2 coats Acrylic Latex Enamel,
Satin
Aqua-Satin
D. Plaster
1 coat Latex Primer
1 coat Alkyd Enamel, Satin
Vapex Wall Prim,
Cellu-Tone
E. Gypsum Wallboard
1 coat Latex Primer
1 coat Alkyd Enamel, Satin
Vapex Wall Prim~
Cellu-Tone
F. Metals in Mechanical Rooms and Metal Handrails
1 coat Primer recommended by Interior Trim P:
manufacturer
1 coat Alkyd Enamel, Gloss Effecto Enamel
G. Ail other metals
1 coat primer recommended by
manufacturer (delete primer if
primed in other sections)
1 coat Alkyd Enamel, Low Sheen
Interior Trim
Vitralite Enamel
Undercoating
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
finishing
s directed
Cion of
ries
r
r
imer
imer
and
O1
02
04
05
07
09
10
12
14
16
18
21
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
36
37
38
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
54
09900-9
O2
O3
O4
O5
O7
O8
10
H. Wood
1 coat Alkyd Primer
1 coat Acrylic Latex Enamel,
Satin
I. Wood decking
2 Coat waterproof sealer
J. Wood face doors
Interior Trim Primer
Aqua-Satin
Thompson or equal
02
03
04
05
O7
O8
10
13 3.14 SCHEDULE-EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
.13
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
3O
A. Structural steel (primed in Section 05120)
1 coat Epoxy Polyamide Tnemec Series 66
High Build Epoxoline
1 coat Aliphatic Polyurethane Tnemec Series 70
Endura-Shield
B. Metals Galvanized
1 coat Alkyd Primer recommended
by manufacturer
1 coat Alkyd Enamel, Gloss
C. Ferrous Metals Not Galvanized
1 coat Alkyd Enamel, Gloss
Effecto Rust Inhibiting
Primer
Effecto Enamel
Effecto Enamel
END OF SECTION
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
3O
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
04
6D18, 8G14
SECTION 09958
WALL COVERING
(WC-1 & WC-2)
09958-1
01
03
04
07 PART 1 - GENERAL
O7
10 1.01 DESCRIPTION
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
27
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
services for all wall covering as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Room finish schedule: Section 09000.
2. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
3. Painting: Section 09900.
30 1.02 0UALITY ASSURANCE
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
3O
33
A. Fire rating classification test: ASTM E84.
33
36 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
36
39
41
42
44
45
A. Product data:
B. Samples:
1. For verification of color and texture.
C. Project information:
1. Maintenance data.
39
41
42
44
45
48 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
48
51
A. Deliver in rolls with mill registry tags attached.
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
04
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
1.5
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
39
42
43
44
48
51
54
09958-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Wail'covering:
a. WC-1, base: Maharam.
b. WC-2, base: Hytex Manufacturing Co. as ~vail~
Jim Young Co., Houston, Texas.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply wit~
00440.
B. WC-1, wall covering Maharam Tec Wall 1000 (occhrs
Finish Schedule):
1o Style No. 30081, color No. 15 gravel.
2. Woven 100 percent polyolofin fibers.
3. Flame spread: 75, max.
4. Total weight: 22 OZ/LF.
5. 54 IN wide.
6. Backer: Acrylic, fire retardant coated.
7. Class A rating passes ASTM-E84.
C. WC-2, wall covering, Sussex (occurs at Detail 1. Pattern: Newbury.
2. Weight: 15 OZ.
3. Fabric: Latex.
4. Width: 48 IN.
5. Bolt size: 30 YD.
6. Color: .Seagull.
D. Adhesive: As recommended by wall covering manUfact~
Adhesive used shall not affect fire ratings.
E. Sealer: As recommended by wall covering manufacture
2.02 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Provide Contracting Officer with a minimum of ~wo fi
ceiling lengths and full width of fabric for mainten
purposes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3,01 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate for installation.
U.S.PoS. -. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
~ble from
Section
per Room
rer.
oor to
ance
O1
O4
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
39
42
43
44
48
51
54
09958-3
02
03
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
02
03
06 3.02 INSTALLATION
06
09
11
13
14
16
18
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
35
A. Seal substrate with approved sealer.
B. Install by'usual wall covering methods.
C. Before cutting~ assure pattern and color are satisfactory to
Contracting Officer.
D. Install with texture in same direction.
E. Plumb seam lines for vertical alignment.
F. Apply adhesive per manufacturer's instructions.
G. Adhere wall covering at seam and work across roll to provide a
good bond.
1. Eliminate wrinkles or air pockets. Overlap ceiling line
approximately 2 IN (50 mm).
2. Trim at corners with a sharp knife.
3. Remove excess adhesive from adjacent areas.
H. Make edges tight for a firm and even butt joint. 1. Close voids and trim off any ragged or hanging threads.
2. Do not stretch fabric backing.
3. For seaming, straight edge material prior to installation..
4. Do not overlap and doublecut, always trim to a tuft line.
END OF SECTION
O9
11
13
14
16
18
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
35
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
6D18, 8G14
SECTION 10100
CHALKBOARD, TACKBOARDS AND BULLETIN BOARDS
10100-1
01
03
06 PART
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all chalkboards, tackboards and bulletin boards as
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: I. Nonload bearing wall framing systems:
2. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
Section 09110.
28 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
28
31
33
34
36
37
A. Product data.
B. Samples:
1. 8 x 10 IN (200 X 250 mm) samples of sheet materials.
C. Project information:
1. Maintenance data.
31
33
34
36
37
40 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
4O
43
45
46
48
49
5O
52
A. Deliver completely assembled whenever possible.
B. Where dimensions exceed available panel size, provide 2 or more
pieces of length acceptable to Contracting Officer.
C. When dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit at
factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joint at
site.
D. Provide all required packing and unpacking at site.
43
45
46
48
49
50
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10100-2
01 pART 2 - PRODUCTS
01
04 2.01 MATERIALS
04
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
1.6
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Metal chalkboards:
a. Base: Claridge Products and Equipment Inc.; Nelson-Adams
Co.; Carolina Chalkboard Co.
2. Tackboards:
a. Base: Clartdge Products and Equipment, Inc.; Neal Slate
Co.; Nelson-Adams Co.; Weber Costello Co.
3. Furnish all chalkboards and tackboards by one manufacturer
for entire project.
4. Bulletin boards:
a. Base: Nelson-Harkins (ABC Bulletin & Directory Div.),
style 234.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Chalkboards, metal: Balanced, high pressure laminated, 3-ply
construction, with facing sheet, core, and backing sheet.
1. Finish: Porcelain enamel over ground coat on writing
surface with seal coat on reverse side. Comply with the
Porcelain Enamel Institute Specifications S-104.
2. Face sheet: Enameling steel, minimum 24 GA (0.6 mm). °
3. Core: 1/4 IN (6 mm)-thick plywood or hardboard, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Backing sheet: 26 GA (0.4 mm) zinc plated steel, or 28 GA
(0.3 mm) random porcelain coil, or 0.015 IN (0.3 mm)
aluminum sheet.
C. Tackboards, vinyl-fabric-faced: Vinyl fabric complying with
F.S.CCC-W-408, Type II, Class 2, laminated to 1/4 IN (6 mm)
thick cork backing sheet, ASTM C640.
1. Laminate under pressure to 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick treated
plywood or hardboard backing.
D. Bulletin boards: 1. Surface mounted.
2. 36 IN x 36 IN.
3. Overlay design with entire door and frame hinged. Door
swings away to leave only bulletin board on wall (no frame).
4. Square profile aluminum frame painted White.
5. Cork background painted Light Gray.
E. Frames and trim for chalkboards and tackboards: Minimum 0.062 IN (1.5 mm) thick aluminum.
1. Size and shape as indicated.
2. Single length units to minimize Joints.
3. Miter all corners t~ a neat, hairline closure.
4. Satin anodized finish, AA-M30C22A31o
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S°P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
06
07
09
10
10100-3
5. Manufacturer's standard "narrow" trim, approximately 1/2 IN
(12 mm) wide.
6. When structural support accessories are required for
chalkboards in addition to normal trim, provide such
additional support or modify trim as required to provide
necessary support.
7. Slip-on trim.
F. Chalktroughs: Continuous, for each chalkboard.
1. Solid extrusion, manufacturer's standard section.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
14 PART 3 - gX~CI~ION
14
17 3.01 INSPECTION
17
20
21
23
25
26
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which work is to be
performed.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
2O
21
23
25
26
29 3.02 INSTALLATION
29
32
34
35
37
38
4O
41
43
45
46
48
5O
51
53
A..Provide trim at joints between chalkboard and tackboard.
B. Treat vertical joints in chalkboard as follows:
1. Steel units: Use aluminum H-type divider bars.
C. Provide additional backing as indicated or necessary to
properly stiffen and support boards.
D. Install at locations and heights indicated in accord with
manufacturer's instructions.
g. Install with concealed hangers, plumb and level.
F. Coordinate job assembled units with grounds, trim, and
accessories.
G. Join all parts with neat, precision fit.
H. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply
with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
END OF SECTION
32
34
35
37
38
40
41
43
45
46
48
50
51
53
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
4HO1, 8G14
SECTION 10165
TOILET PARTITIONS
10165-1
O1
03
06 PA~T 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all toilet partitions as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Nonload bearing wall framing systems:
2. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
Section 09110.
28 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
28
31
32
A. Samples:
1. Laminate color for verification.
31
32
35 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (See Division 1)
35
38
40
A. Store inside for 48 hours prior to installation.
B. Deliver anchorage items as required to allow installation.
38
40
43 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
43
46
47
A. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication,
wherever possible without delaying project.
46
47
51 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
51
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
04
O5
06
07
O8
09
11
12
13
15
16
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
39
4O
41
42
43
10165-2
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Toilet partitions:
a. Base: Ail American Metal Corp.
b. Optional: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Fiat.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Pace and edging sheets: Minimum NEMA GPSO, 0.050 IN thick, high
pressure laminated plastic; Nevamar ARP surface, Dove Gray, No.
S-6-3T textured.
C. Core material for pilasters: 45 LB density particleboard with
11 GA steel plate core.
D. Core material for doors and panels: 45 LB density resin bonded
particleboard treated for vermin and moisture resistance.
E. Pilaster shoes: Type 302 stainless steel, 18/8, 3 IN (75 mm)
high.
F. Stirrup brackets: Manufacturer's standard heavy duty design
for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, chrome plated, or
Type 302 stainless steel.
G. Latch-strike-keeper:
1. Fit each door with chromium plated brass or stainless steel
slide latch, concealed in door or surface mounted.
2. Fit pilasters with wrap around type strike keeper designed
to properly receive and hold latch.
H. Bumper coat hook: Provide rubber tipped combination bumper and
coat hook for each compartment.
I. Toilet accessories: Specified in Section 10800.
J. Anchorages and fasteners:
1. Provide manufacturer's standard theft proof exposed
fasteners of stainless steel, with finish to match hardware.
2. Provide concealed anchors of galvanized steel, hot dip
~ coated after fabrication complying with ASTM A385-86.
O1
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
15
16
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
37
39
4O
41
42
43
46 2.02 FABRICATION
46
49
5O
52
53
A. Preassemble units at shop to maximum extent possible to
minimize any field cutting and jointtng.
B-. Provide units fabricated in accord with manufacturer's
specifications.
49
50
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
01
03
O4
O5
O6
O8
10
11
12
13
14
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
10165-3
C~ Pressure laminate sheets to faces and edges of core material.
D. Provide concealed reinforcement for installation of hardware,
fittings, brackets, and required accessories.
1. Reinforce partition panels for attachment of grab bars, when
bars'are indicated.
E. Doors: 1 IN (25 mm) thick.
F. Floor mounted pilasters: 1. Minimum 1-1/4 IN (30 mm) thick.
2. Stainless steel anchorage devices for securing to floor.
3. Complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling
adjustment nuts, and shoes.
G. Panels: Minimum 1 IN (25 mm) thick.
H. Floor supported screens: 1. Minimum 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick panel and 1-1/4 IN (30 mm)
thick pilaster units.
2. Size as indicated.
3. Same construction and finish as toilet compartments.
4. Wall brackets and pilaster base anchorages and shoes to
match compartment units.
01
03
O4
05
06
08
10
11
12
13
14
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
28 PART 3 - gXECUTION
28
31 3.01 INSPECTION
31
34
36
38
39
A. Verify suitability of substrates to accept installation.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
34
36
38
39
42 3.02 INSTALLATION
42
45
46
48
49
5O
51
53
54
A. Install partitions in a rigid, straight, plumb and level
manner, laid out as indicated.
B. Clearances: 1. Between pilasters and panels: 1/2 IN (12 mm), max.
2. Between panels and walls: 1 IN (25 mm), max.
3. Between doors and pilasters: 3/16 IN (4.5 mm), max.
C. Secure panels to walls with minimum of two stirrup brackets
attached near top and bottom of panel.
45
46
48
49
50
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10165-4
1. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur
in masonry or tile joints.
2. Use manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
D. Secure pilasters to floor system with indicated anchorage
devices.
1. Level, plumb and tighten installation with leveling devices.
2. Set tops of doors level with tops of pilasters when doors
are in closed position.
3. Set pilaster units with anchorages having minimum 2 IN (50
mm) penetration into floor.
g. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after
installation.
1. Set hinges on in-swing doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched.
2. Set hinges on out-swing doors and entrance swing doors, to
return to fully closed position.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09.'
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
22 3,03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
22
25
26
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
39
A. Protect units after erection so that there will be no
indication of use or damage at time of acceptance by Owner.
B. Replace damaged work as directed.
C. Perform all final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices,
door hardware, and other operating parts of assembly just prior
to final inspection.
D. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and
accessories, and touch up minor scratches and other finish
imperfections using materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
25
26
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
39
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
7K13, 8G14
SECTION 10191
CUBICLE TRACKS AND CURTAINS
10191-1
01
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
09 1.01 GENERAL
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all cubicle tracks and curtains as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4.~ See Division'l for General Requirements.
23
24
25
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1o Acoustic materials: Section 09510.
2. Gypsum wallboard: Section 09250.
28 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
28
31
33
35
36
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Samples:
1. Curtain samples for color selection.
31
33
35
36
39 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
39
42 A. Coordinate location and setting of blocking.
42
46 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
46
49 2.01 MATERIALS
49
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Cubicle track and curtains:
a. Base: Capital Cubicle Co., Inc.
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21~
22
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
10191-2
b. Optional: General Cubicle Co.; Imperial Fastez
Inc.; A.R.Nelson Co., Inc.(ARNC0); OB/Masco Dr~
Hardware Co.; Watrous, Inc.; Automatic Device~
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Track: 6063-T5 aluminum with AA-C22A21 finish.
1. Capital, Standard Ceiling Track.
2o'General, Standard Ceiling Track.
3° Imperial, IFC-98 Ceiling Track.
4° ARNCO, 1200 Line Ceiling Track.
5. OB/Masco, 46-7000 Ceiling Track.
6. Watrous, 36-4102 Ceiling Track.
7. ADC, Model 110.
C. Carriers: 2 wheel, roller type, with plated metal
steel hooks, 3 per FT (10 per M) of track.
1o Capital, 2 Wheel Carrier.
2. General, 2 Wheel Carrier 1062N.
3. Imperial, 2 Wheel Carrier IFC-100.
4o Arnco, 2 Wheel Carrier No.12.
5. OB/Masco, 2 Wheel Carrier No.46-7011.
6. Watrous, 2 Wheel Carrier No.36-4191.
7° ADC, 2 Wheel Carrier No.llO1.
D. Provide curved track sections, end stops, splicers.
Cubicle curtains: Pre-shrunk, yarn dyed, permanentl]
flame-proofed, manufacturer's standard pattern and t~
1. Top 18 IN (450 mm) of heavy nylon mesh sewn to mai
2. Form top and bottom hems by triple fold securely ~
edges and panel seams 1 IN (25 mm) over-lapped ant
stitched.
3. Provide stainless steel eyes in top hem for hangi~
4. Colors and patterns as selected by Architect.
5. Size curtains so bottom is 15 IN (375 mm) from fl(
6. Width determined by length of track to provide coq
enclosure.
42 PART 3 - gX~CUTION
45 3.01 INSPECTION
48
50
A. Examine surfaces and conditions.
Bo Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
U.S.P.So N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
let Co.,
~pery
CO.
Sec t i on
stainless
xture.
:erial.
:ewn with
lock
g.
~oro
~plete
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
42
45
48
50
04
06
08
O9
11
13
O1 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated, level, plumb, secure.
B. Repair or replace damaged or defective units.
C. Protect units so they will be operable and undamaged at
completion of project.
D. Install 'curtains just before final inspection.
END OF SECTION
10191-3
01
O4
O6
O8
O9
11
13
U.S.P.S.-- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6J31, 8G14
SECTION 10200
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-1
O1
03
06 PART
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all exterior louvers and vents as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Pneumatic louver control: Division 15.
2. Sealants: Section 07900.
3. Painting: Section 09900.
29 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
29
32 A. Coordinate with mechanical ductwork as required.
32
35 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
35
38
40
A. Shop drawings: Profiles and installation details.
B. Product data: Air flow data.
38
4O
44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
47 2.01 MATERIALS
47
50
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Louvers:
a. Base: Airolite Co.
b. Optional: Construction Specialties, Inc.; and Industrial
Louvers.
50
51
52
53
54
UoS.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
37
38
40
41
42
44
46
10200-2
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Louvers Type 1:4 IN (100 mm) thick, stormproof, with
continuous blade appearance.
1. Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063T5, minimum 0.081 IN (2 mm)
thick.
2. Double integral drain blades system.
3. Minimum free area: 12.63 SF for 4 x 9 FT (1.22 x 2.74 M)
louver.
4. Maximum pressure drop: 0.10 IN (0.4 mm) of water at 900 CFM
(424,800 CCM/SEC).
C. Louvers Type 2: Operating, insulated, airfoil profile.
1. Blades: One piece, extruded, hollow aluminum, alloy 6063T5,
minimum .081 IN (2 mm) thick, seamless.
2. Insulation: Foamed in place polyurethane U valve (closed
position) 0.15.
3. Gaskets: Vinyl, double seal, full length of blades,
neoprene closure gaskets fully covering blade ends.
4. Operating system: Pneumatic, 2 position, power open, spring
closed.
D. Louvers Type 3: 2 IN (50 mm) thick, stormproof, with
continuous blade appearance.
1. Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063T5, minimum 0.081 IN (2 my)
thick.
2. Minimum free area: 12.63 SF for 4 x 9 FT (1.22 x 2.74 M)
louver.
3. Maximum pressure drop: 0.10 IN (0.4 mm) of water at 900 CFM
(424,800 CCM/SEC).
E. Bird screen: 1. 1/2 IN (12 mm) square mesh, 16 GA (1.5 mm) aluminum.
2. Install in manufacturer's standard folded frame.
F. Accessories: Fabricate anchors, reinforcing, and required
ancillary items of compatible material.
G. Finish: 1. Minimum 70 percent P.V.F. paint (Kynar).
2. Colors as selected.
H. Blank off plates: Aluminum sheet, 0.050 IN (1.5 mm), min.
I. Paint plates flat black prior to installation.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
37
38
4O
41
42
44
46
50 PART 3 - ID[gCI~ION
5O
U.S.PoS. -. N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1 3.01 INSPECTION
04
06
O8
09
A. Verify suitability of openings to accept units.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
12 3.02 INSTALLATION
15
17
19
21
23
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install anchoring and bracing accessories as required.
C. Install all required blank off plates.
D. Adjust pneumatic operators for smooth, quiet operation.
END OF SECTION
10200-3
O1
04
06
08
O9
12
15
17
19
21
23
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
4HO1, 8G14
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLE
10350-1
01
O3
06 PAINT ! - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for flagpole as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete work: Division 3.
2. Sealants: Section 07900.
28 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
28
31
32
A. Provide flagpole and base constructed to-withstand not less
than 80 MPH wind when flying a 10 FT x 15 FT flag.
31
32
35 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
35
38
39
41
42
43
44
A. Shop drawings:
1. Show flagpole, base and all required fittings.
B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications for all materials.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions and procedures,
including standard details of flagpole.
38
39
41
42
43
44
47 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
47
50
51
52
A. Spiral wrap pole with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable
wrapping, burlap cover wood strip and steel band prior to
shipment.
50
51
52
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N, Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10350-2
O1 B. Deliver flagpole and accessories completely identified for
02 installation.
C. Handle and store to prevent damage.
O1
02
O4
07 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
O7
10 A. Coordinate setting of base with other affected Contractors.
10
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
14
17 2.01 MATERIALS
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Flagpoles:
ao Base: Aabec Pole Div.
b. Optional: Morgan-Francis Co., Inc.; Acme Flagpole
Co. Div., John E.Lingo & Son, Inc.; American Flagpole
Equip. Co., Hapco Div.; Baartol Co., Inc.; Babcock-Davis
Associates, Inc.; Concord Industries, Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Tubing for flagpole: Seamless aluminum tubing, alloy 6063-T6. 1. Minimum wall thickness: 1/~ IN (6.0 mm).
2. Tensile strength: Not less than 30,000 PSI. (2100
KG/SQCM).
3. Yield point: 25,000 PSI (1750 KG/SQCM).
4. Heat treat and age-harden.
C. Flagpole: 1. Exposed height:. 60 FT.
2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard Venetian Entasis tapered,
convex curved section above cylindrical butt section.
3. Butt diameter of pole: 12 IN outside diameter.
4. Provide with internal Halyard system.
D. Base: Manufacturer's standard base system for type of
installation.
1. Minimum 16 GA (1.5 mm) galvanized corrugated steel tube,
sized to suit flagpole and installation.
2. Welded steel bottom base and support plate, lightning ground
spike, and steel centering wedges.
3° All welded construction.
4o Provide loose hardwood wedges at top for plumbing pole after
erection.
5. Galvanize all parts.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
10350-3
E. Finish: 1. Air dry acrylic enamel.
2. Color: White.
F. Provide following fittings for pole:
1. Truck: Manufacturer's stand~rd cast aluminum, revolving
truck assembly.
2. Internal halyard: 1/8 IN diameter stainless steel aircraft
cable; winch system.
3. Flag snaps: 2 chrome-plated bronze swivel snaps with
neoprene snap hook covers.
4. Flash collar: Manufacturer's standard; match with flagpole
tubing.
5. Ball: ManufactUrer's standard ball at top of flagpole
finish to match pole.
G. Suggested flag size: 10 FT x 15 FT.
01
02
03
05
O6
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
20 2.02 FABRICATION
2O
23
25
26
27
A. Fabricate and ship in one piece if possible.
B. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug fitting,
precision joints with self aligning, internal splicing sleeve
arrangement for weather tight, invisible field joints.
23
25
26
27
31 .PAINT 3 - KXECUTION
31
34 3.01 INSPECTION
34
37
39
4O
A. Verify that substrate is acceptable for installation of base.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
37
39
4O
43 3.02 iNSTALLATION
43
46
48
49
51
53
54
A. Install as indicated.
B. Paint all portions of flagpole below grade with heavy coat of
bituminous paint.
C. Provide positive lightning ground for flagpole installation.
D. Install concrete flagpole foundation; see Division 3
"Concrete".
46
48
49
51
53
54
U.SoPoSo .- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10350-4
02
END OF SECTION
02
U.SoP.S, ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6D18, 8G20
SECTION 10444
SIGNS
10444-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all signs as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Gypsum wallboard; Section 09250.
2. Painting: Section 09900.
3. Signage schedule: Section 10445.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
29 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
32
33
34
36
38
39
4O
A. ANSI Al17.1.~ Specifications for Making Buildings and
Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped
People.
B. DHEW 4.12: Design of Barrier Free facilities.
C.U.S.P.S.: Standards for facility accessibility by the
physically handicapped handbook RE-4. A copy will be made
available by the Contracting Officer.
32
33
34
36
38
39
40
43 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
43
46
48
5O
51
53
54
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Samples:
1. Colors and font for approval.
D. Project information: Complete signage schedule indicating
types, graphics, and verbage for each sign.
46
48
5O
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10444-2
04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
04
07 2.01 MATERIALS
07
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Signs:
a. Base: Vomar Products, Inc.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Interior signs:
1. PFIO0 series.
2. 6 IN signs:
a..125 IN thick solid acrylic plaque and frame. 1) Satin matte finish.
2) 1/16 IN outer radius on frame.
3) 1/16 IN reveal between frame and plaque.
b. Plaque and frame color; White.
c. Copy colors:
1) Green to match Glidden 76-00.
2) Gray to match Glidden 79-16.
3) All copy to be Gray unless noted otherwise. '
d. Mounting:
1) Foam tape on non-porous surfaces.
2) Liquid adhesive on porous surfaces.
3. 2 FT - 6 IN signs.
.. a. Same proportions as 6 IN signs.
b. Copy color: Black.
c. Plaque color: White.
d. Mounting: Foam tape applied to mechanically fastened
spacers (1 IN nominal).
C. Exterior signs:
1. R.P. series.
2. Nonilluminated.
3. Molded fiberglass.
4. Structural honeycomb core.
5. Structure:
a. 6 IN diameter aluminum posts welded to tubular aluminum
frame encapsulated within fiberglass.
6. Copy color: As detailed, all copy to be gray unless noted
otherwise.
a. Gray to match Glidden 79-16.
b. Green to match Dupont 43757.
c. Fiberglass color: White.
D. Building identification graphics: 1. Cast aluminum with white baked enamel finish.
2. Helvetica medium caps and lower case.
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
05
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
10444-3
3. 6 IN and 8 IN letters as detailed.
4. Mounting: Manufacturers suggested method of flush mounting.
5. Manufacturer: The Southwell Co.
E. Vinyl die-cut letters:
1. 3.5 mil thick.
2. Helvetica medium.
3. Adhesive back.
4. Coordinate sizes of letters with Contracting Officer.
5. Location:
a. Overhead doors:
1) As indicated on exterior elevations.
2) Provide corresponding copy on interior side of door.
b. As indicated on signage schedule.
6. Color; gray.
F. Building directory: 1. 400 series.
2. Clear acrylic cover panel.
3. Hinged door with lock.
4. Dust seal.
5. Directory strips.
a..125 IN thick satin matte finish acrylic; white.
b. 1 IN x 18 IN x 1/8 IN.
c. Vinyl die cut letters, size as detailed; gray.
d. Integral header panel.
6. White aluminum frame.
G. Owner's equipment:
1. Provide sign making equipment and training to enable 0whir
to produce interior signage equipment to include:
a. Reynolds/Leteron Co.; BP150 electric sign machine.
b. 1 cartridge white letter tape.
c. Helvetica medium upper and lower case and numeral dies in
sizes to match signage provided as part of this section.
d. 20 blank plaques as described in 2.0lB of this section.
2. Ail equipment to be new and unused.
H. Adhesive: 3M double coated urethane foam tape. 1. 4032 for smooth surfaces.
2. 4016 for rough surfaces.
01
O2
03
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
45 PART 3 - R~RCUTION
45
48 3.01 INSTALLATION
48
51
52
53
A. Interior signage.
1. Mount on wall on latch side of door, 54 IN (1370 mm) to
bottom of sign.
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.P.
10444-4
O1 B. Exterior signage.
02 1. Per manufacturers standard details.
04 C. Coordinate location of signs with Contracting Officer.
O1
02
04
07 3.02 SCHEDULE
07
10
12
13
14
16
17
19
A. Provide interior signs for every interior door.
B. Refer to signage schedule following this section for typical
verbage content and special signage requirements (over size
signs, multiple signs, direct applied vinyl letters, etc.).
C. Coordinate with Contracting Officer to determine actual signage
requirements prior to fabrication.
END OF SECTION
10
12
13
14
16
17
19
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoFo & V.M.Fo
w
o ~ ~ o
0 0 0 0 0 CD 0
~ ° ~ °
o
o
4.-}
N
C~ CD CD
'~- c.~ ~- ~
0 0 0 0
w
0
I..-
~., I--- ~ 0 .--J
CD,
~1..
OIkl $1&N
:, 8upen/Jsor ~
supervisor
HELVETICA
7'2, HR ALL. L.0WE't¢ CA~,~
I, rl
authorized
personnel onlbl
H~LV15TICA
,4.0 ~ ALL
!
ON $i~N {~
INTEI~.NATiOKJAL
~S Y~
janitor, .._..._
I/2~
1'11
tO~
1111
TYF~
Z
b
Typ_~ .~
TYF'~ ~
TYP~ G
TYP~ T
TYPE
~ /~ z~
5~DE ~
INTEP_.AIATIOAI,~,L S YI'"IB~I,.
oE ACCNSI~IL. IT'T'
( BLU~
~0 T~ :
'rills ~/6Aff TQ BE tOCAT~.P
~ ~__.~PT I~1~ TN c~PPQ$1T~ AP-J~Ol~
OK/ ~I~/-/T SIDe.
EX TEt~IO,e' $1~IVA6E TYPE Io
5YMBOL
?yP6 II
O1
O3
8C03, 8G14
SECTION 10450
SECURITY TURNSTILES
10450-1
O1
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all security turnstiles as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Metal fabrications: Section 05500.
2. Plastic laminate faced casework (PLC): Section 12340.
3.'Security access system: Section 16710.
4. Pedestrian control device (rope): Section 10990.
C. Description of system:
1. Security turnstiles and handicapped access gates integrated
with security access system to provide controlled access to
building.
O9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
34 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
34
37
38
A. Installer qualifications:
1. Factory certified and approved.
37
38
41 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
41
44
45
46
48
5O
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
B. Operating and maintenance data.
C. Warranties.
44
45
46
48
5O
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10450-2
01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
01
04 2.01 MATERIALS
04
07
O8
0g
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Ao Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Security turnstiles:
a. Base: Alvarado Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2. Optional manufacturers:
a. Base: Perey Manufacturing Co., Inc., Model HD; Sentronic
International Inc., Model CW79 with stainless steel
custom manufacturing housing.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Security turnstiles: 1. Alvarado Model EDC.
2. Cabinet: Stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish, all exposed
welds ground and polished smooth.
3. Arms: 1.5 IN OoD. stainless steel tubing, ends plug welded,
welded to head assembly, No. 4 satin finish.
4. Electronic lock: 24 VDC solenoid activation, integrated
with security access system.
C. Handicapped access security gates: 1. Alvarado Model GDFX.
2. Provide housing to match security turnstile cabinet.
3. Electronic lock: 24 VDC solenoid activation, integrated
with security access system.
4. 1-1/2 IN O.D. stainless steel tubing, ends plug welded, No.
4 s~tin finish.
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION
36
39 3.01 PREPARATION
39
42 A. Correct unsatisfactory substrates prior to start of work.
42
45 3.02 INSTALLATION
45
48
49
51
53
54
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and
Contract Documents.
B. Adjust to leave in smooth operating order.
C. Coordinate installation of cardreader and power supply with
security access system manufacturer.
48
49
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10450-3
O2
END OF SECTION
02
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
6A09, 8G14
SECTION 10500
LOCKER BENCHES
10500-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GI~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all locker benches as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Sealants: Section 07900.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
27
3O
A. Shop drawings: Showing construction and anchorage.
3O
34 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
34
37 2.01 MATERIALS
37
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Locker benches:
a. Base: Interior Steel Equipment Co.
b. Optional: Lyon Metal Products; Medart, Inc.; Penco
Products; Republic Steel Corp.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
49 2.02 LOCKER BENCH
49
52
53
54
A. Bench top: Single or laminated board 1-1/8 IN (28 mm) thick. 1. "B" and better Southern Yellow Pine.
2. Ail edges and corners rounded, and sanded on all surfaces.
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10500-2
01 3. Width: 9-1/2 IN (240 mm).
02 4. Length: As indicated.
04 B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard type.
06 C. Pedestal: Minimum 10 GA (3 mm) steel tubing 1-1/4 IN (30 mm)
07 O.D.
08 1o Floor flanges and top anchors.
09 2. Finish with manufacturer's standard finish.
11 D. Sealant: See Section 07900.
O1
02
04
06
07
08
09
11
15 PART 3 - KIECUTION
15
18 3.01 INSPECTION
18
21
22
24
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which locker benches
are to be installed.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
21
22
24
27 3.02 INSTALLATION
27
30
31
33
A. Install benches by anchoring to floor construction.
1. Seal flange to floor with sealant.
END OF SECTION
30
31
33
U.S.PoSo - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V°M.F.
01
O~
7F19, 8G14
SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10520-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for fire protection specialties, as indicated, in accord
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Fire protection system: Section 15300.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
27 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
3O
32
33
A. Deliver cabinets in time to allow installation.
B. Deliver and install filled and charged extinguishers just prior
to building occupancy.
27
3O
32
33
36 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
36
39 A. Product data.
39
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43
46 2.01 MATERIALS
46
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Fire extinguishers, cabinets.
a. Base: J.L.Industries.
b. Optional: Larse~'s Manufacturing Co.;
Extinguisher; Badger.
Standard Fire
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
10520-2
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. FEC-I: Fire extinguisher cabinet Model Ambassador 1015B20. 1. Fully recessed mounting.
2. 22 GA (0.75 mm) steel box.
3. Slim line 1-1/4 IN (32 mm) flat trim with custom metal trim
3-3/4 IN for total width of 5 IN.
4. Door with break glass insert with glass breaker and chain;
maximum glass size: 25 SQ IN (16,000 SQ mm).
5. Provide FIRE EXTINGUISHER decal for each cabinet.
6. Finish: Electric statically applied red epoxy.
7. "Fire" handle.
C. Wall brackets: 1. Bracket type to fit specified extinguisher, with correct
mounting accessories to fit substrate.
2. Furnish bracket for each extinguisher not in cabinet.
D. Fire extinguishers (FE): Steel bodied, U/L Rated, 4A-6OBC, with
all metal top (head) and valve, Cosmic Model IOE.o
1. Provide hose and horn on each.
2. Furnish one extinguisher for each extinguisher cabinet
(FEC), and fire extinguisher (FE) location.
3. Finish: Red, in accord with OSHA requirements.
4. Provide FIRE EXTINGUISHER decal for each extinguisher.
E. Halon fire extinguishers (HFE): Steel bodied, U/L rated,
1Arl0BC, with all metal top (head) and valve, Knight model 9.
1. Provide hose and horn on each:
2. Furnish one extinguisher at each location marked HFE.
3. Finish: Red in accord with OSHA requirements.
4. Provide FIRE EXTINGUISHER decal for each extinguisher.
O1
O2
O4
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
37 PART 3 - ~CUTION
37
40 3.01 INSPECTION
4O
43
45
46
A. Verify suitability of substrates to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
43
45
46
49 3.02 INSTALLATION
49
52
54
A. Install in accord with.manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide all required closures.
52
54
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoFo & V.M.F.
10520-3
02
O3
O5
C. Install with extinguisher top not over 60 IN (1.5 M), above
floor.
END OF SECTION
02
03
05
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
4L27, 8G14
SECTION 10605
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10605-1
01
03
06 PART
06
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all wire mesh partitions as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division t for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Finish hardware: Section 08700.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
3O
A. Shop drawings.
27
3O
34 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
34
37 2.01 MATERIALS
37
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Wire mesh partitions:
a. Base: Acorn Wire and Iron Works, Inc.(Baltimore MD).
b. Optional: Kentucky Metal Products Co.(Louisville KY);
Miller Wire Works, Inc.(Birmingham AL); Logan
Co.(Louisville KY); Superior Wire and Metal Products,
Inc.(Harvey IL); Wire and Iron Products, Inc.(Detroit
MI).
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Partitions, wire mesh: Modular steel woven wire mesh panels,
assembled into co~figurations indicated.
1. Partition height: 10 FTo
2. Panel width: As required to fit layouts.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ? N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
-30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
10605-2
3. Panel style: Ail mesh woven thru intermediate horizontal
framing member.
4. Top channel: Continuous for length of partition; 2-1/4 x 1
IN, MIN, steel channel; bolted to panels.
5. Provide corner post at each corner: Steel angle or tube.
6. Provide vertical stiffeners for free standing partitions
over 10 FT high or over 20 FT long: As recommended by
manufacturer.
7. Provide all fittings, fasteners, hardware and bracing
necessary for complete installation.
8. Provide all accessories indicated.
9. Provide ceiling panels for all fully enclosed areas.
10. Finish: One coat enamel; black.
C. Wire mesh panels: Steel channel frame with wire mesh stretched
and securely clinched to frame°
1. Wire mesh: 10 GA (0.135 IN) minimum steel wire, woven into
1-1/2 IN mesh.
2. Vertical frame members: 1-1/4 x 5/8 IN, min., "C" channel.
3. Horizontal frame members: 1 x 1/2 IN, min., channel.
4. Frame joints: Mortise and tenoned.
D. Wire mesh door panel, swinging: Same as fixed panels except: 1o Frame of door: Tube or channel with flat plate.
2o Lock side: Angle welded to frame°
3. Hinges: 3 ball bearing butt hinges, riveted or bolted to
panel frame and frame of. door. '
4. Lock: Mortise type to match building hardware, with knob
inside, key outside.
5. Keying: Keyed to building keying system; cylinder furnished
in Section 08700.
E. Wire mesh door panel, sliding: Same as fixed panels, except: 1. Frame of door: Tube or channel with flat plate.
2. Track: Box type.
3. Hangers: 4 wheel roller bearing trolleys.
4. Provide bottom guide channel; keep door opening clear for
traffic.
5. Lock: Mortise type, with recessed knob inside.
6. Keying: Keyed to building keying system; cylinder furnished
in Section 08700.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
45 PART 3 - E~COTION
45
48 3o01 PREPARATION
48
51
52
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which material will be
installed.
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
O1
02
10605-3
B. Start of work indicates acceptance of responsibility for
performance and any required remedial work.
05 3.02 INSTALLATION
08
10
12
13
15
17
18
A. Install partitions rigid, plumb and level.
B. Secure with appropriate brackets and fasteners.
C. Set floor sockets with anchorages having minimum 2 IN (50 mm)
penetration into floor.
D. Install ceiling panels.
E. Protect partitions from damage; repair or replace damaged
units.
21 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
24 A. Perform final adjustments just prior to final acceptance.
26 B. Clean all surfaces.
28 C. Touch-up scratches and other finish imperfections using
29 materials and methods recommended by manufacturer.
31
END OF SECTION
O1
02
05
08
10
12
13
15
17
18
21
24
26
28
29
31
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.P. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6D18, 8G14
SECTION 10615
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM (ALUM)
10615-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, material tools, equipment and services
for all interior aluminum framing system as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Finish hardware: Section 08700.
2. Glass and glazing: Section 08800.
9. Doors: Section 08210.
4. Gypsum.wall board:. Section 09250.
5. Electrical: Division 16.
6. Nonload bearing wall framing systems: Section 09110.
7. Aluminum doors: Section 08410.
33 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
33
36
37
38
39
A. Shop drawings:
1. Elevations and details of proposed installation including
all window walls (partition Type 10 indicating glazing and
location of butt joints).
36
37
38
39
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43
46 2.01 MATERIALS
46
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Base: Ragland Manufacturing Company (Raco).
2. Optional: VT Industries, Inc. (Versatrac).
3. Other manufacturers, desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O5
07
08
09
10
11
13
10615-2
B. Extrusions: 1. Manufacturer's standard aluminum extrusions.
2. Finish: Factory applied lacquer.
3. Provide rated frames where required by door schedule.
4. Color to be Glidden ?9-38 (Gray).
C. Accessories:
1.' Provide gaskets, stops, etc. to install glass and doors
supplied by others.
2. Ail necessary anchorage devices to provide complete
installation.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
13
U.S.P.S. -N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6K26, 8G14
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
2,3
A. General 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
services for all toilet and bath accessories as indicated, in
accord with~provisions of Contract Documents.
1. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
3. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Toilet partitions: Section 10165.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
26 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
29
A. Deliver anchorage items in time to allow installation.
26
29
33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33
36 2.01 GENERAL
36
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
A.'Acceptable manufacturers:
1. As noted for individual items.
2. Not all manufacturers are approved for each item.
3. Provide equipment from one manufacturer as far as is
practicable.
4. Manufacturers listed are:
a. Base: American Specialties, Inc.
b. Optional: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc,; Bradley
Corp.; Tubular Specialties Manufacturing Co.;
Parker-Scovill.
5. Other manufacturers of a complete line of stainless steel
accessories desiring approval comply with Section 00440.
B. Toilet accessories - General: Stainless steel; except items
TA-2 and TA-3, which may be aluminum or Zamac coated.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
10800-2
1. See accessory schedule or drawings for items, quantities and
locations required.
C. Grab Bars: 1-1/2 IN (38 mm) OD, satin finish stainless steel.
1. Concealed mounting.
2. 1/1-2 IN (38 mm) clearance between bar and wall.
. 3. Modify manufacturer's standard units if required.
4. Fully weld bars to flanges.
5. Provide anchoring devices to withstand minimum concentrated
load of 250 LB (115 KG).
6. Mounting devices for gypsum wallboard: Bobrtck Type 256
Bradley Type 899-014 Parker Type BP-10 American Specialties
7002C Tubular Specialties TSM-BP-10A.
7.' Mounting devices for concrete block walls: Bobrick Type 257
Bradley Type 899-016 Parker Type BP-9N American Specialties
7003 Tubular Specialties TSM-TB-6, TB-8, SP-4C.
8. Mounting devices for toilet partitions: Bobrick Type 258
Bradley Type 899-021 Parker Type BP-3N American Specialties
7002MP Tubular Specialties TSM-BP-2~
9. Mounting on other surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer.
O1
02
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
23 2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES (TA NUMBERS)
25
26
27
28
3O
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
'39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
TA-I:
Robe Hook
American Specialties 7340-S
Parker 1226N
Tubular Specialties 806S
54
TA-2:
Toilet Tissue Dispenser
Bobrick 686
Bradley 5234
Parker 965
American Specialties 835
McKinney Washroom Accessories 1032D
TA-4:
Feminine Napkin-Tampon Dispenser (25 cent Operation)
Bobrick B-282
Bradley 420
Parker 693 SM
American Specialties 864
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM 5100
TA-5:
Feminine Napkin Disposer
Bobrick B-270
Bradley 478
Parker 606
American Specialties 852
McKinney Washroom Accessories 626
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM 5130
TA-6: Not Used
TA-7: Paper Towel Dispenser (Single Fold)
23
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
45
46
~7
48
49
5O
52
53
54
TA-8:
TA-9:
TA-IO:
TA-12:
TA-13:
TA-14:
TA-15:
10800-3
Bobrick B-262
American Specialties 0210/0230
Parker 694
McKinney Washroom Accessories 610
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM 5230
Waste Receptacle
Bobrick Model B-279
Bradley Model 357
Parker Model 603A
American Specialties 0828
McKinney Washroom Accessories 632
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM 5240-12
Powder Soap Dispenser
Bobrtck B-32
Bradley 658
Parker 70-SS
American Specialties 71
McKinney Washroom Accessories 304-H
Mop and Broom Rack (36 IN (900 mm), 4 Holders)
Bobrick B-223 x 36
Bradley 9954
Parker 608-4
American Specialties 0796B
McKinney Washroom Accessories 233
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM 892
Soap Dish (without bar or soap lip)
Bradley 9401
American Specialties 407-HDR
Parker 15
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM 827
Mirror (welded and ground corners,
(18 x 24 IN (450 x 600 mm))
Bobrick B-290
Bradley 700
Parker 3020S
American Specialties 0600A
McKinney Washroom Accessories 150
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM M-1 Series
Tilted Mirror (16 x 30 IN (400 x 750 mm))
Bobrick B-293
Bradley 740
Parker 4020
American Specialties 0535
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM M-4 Series
Electric Hand.Drier
Bobrick B-200
Bradley 2921-33
U.S.P.S.. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.MoF.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
O1
O2
04
O5
06
07
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
10800-4
TA-16:
TA-26:
TA-30:
TA-31:
American Specialties 881N
Parker 1W
Towel Bar (18 IN (450 mm))
Bobrick B-205
Bradley 908
Parker 4421
American Specialties 0755-SS
Grab Bar (36 IN (900 mm) Horiz.))
Bobrick B-6206
Bradley 812S 001
Parker 825S-10-CZ
American Specialties 3201-Z
MeKinney Washroom Accessories 9604 F36
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM-H-361CS-1
Grab Bar (42 IN Horiz.)
Bobrick B-6291
Bradley 812S 003
Parker 825S 24 CZ
American Specialties 3224-Z
McKinney Washroom Accessories 9604 FF52
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM-52CM/CS-1
Grab Bar (Custom Bar, 30 x 60 IN, 90 degree bend,
horizontal)
Parker 825-30CZ
McKinney Washroom Accessories 9604 E
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. TSM-H-1632/CS-1
O1
02
04
O5
O6
07
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
34 PART 3 - RX]~CUTION
34
37 3.01 INSPECTION
37
4O
42
43
45
46
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Where item is mounted on or in a toilet partition, verify that
suitable interior reinforcing is in place.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
4O
42
43
45
46
49 3.02 INSTALLATION
49
52
54
A. Coordinate accessory locations to fit spaces.
B. Coordinate items to avoid mounting conflicts.
52
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G,M.F. & V.M.F.
O2
O4
O6
08
10
10800-5
C. Provide all additional accessories indicated on drawings,
D. Mount handicap items in accord with Handicap Code.
g. Moun~ at height indicated on drawings.
F. Mount all items with theft proof fasteners,
END OF SECTION
O2
O4
O6
08
10
U.SoP.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
5A25, 8G14
06 PART
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
SECTION 10880
P.A.U. SCALE
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, a
for P.A.U. scale as indicated, in accord with pro
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous it
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necess
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
24 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
27
A. Applicator/erector qualifications:
30 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
33
34
35
37
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
re6ommendations.
B. Operating and maintenance data.
40 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
43
44
46
A. Deliver to site crated in a manner to prevent damage
components or marring of surfaces.
B. Store in clean, dry area, load flat and blocked off
50 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10880-1
ad services
visions of
MS.
furnish
Gms,
ary for a
tO
ground.
O1
03
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
27
3O
33
34
35
37
4O
43
44
46
5O
O1
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
14
16
17
18
10880-2
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Scale:
a. Base: Fairbanks Weighing Division of Colt Industries.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Scale: Model 23-2500. 1. Platform size: 5 FT x 5 FT.
2. Capacity: 5000 LBS.
C. Frame: Pit builder.
D. Digital weight indicator: Model 90-162-1. 1. Mounting bracket H099.
2. Provide 2 indicators located per plans.
01
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
14
16
17
18
22 PAINT 3 - R~CUTION
22
25 3.01 INSTALLATION
28 A. Install scale and digital weight indicator in accordance with
29 manufacturer's instructions.
25
28
29
32 3.02 ADJUSTMENT
32
35
37
A. Adjust and calibrate for proper, accurate operation.
END OF SECTION
35
37
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
4HO1, 8G14
SECTION 10990
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
10990-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all miscellaneous specialty items as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
24
27
29
30
31
A. Product data.
B. Samples:
1. Items, finishes, colors or other items as requested by
Contracting Officer.
27
29
30
31
34 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
34
37
38
A. Deliver anchorage items as required to allow timely
installation.
37
38
42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
42
45 2.01 MATERIALS
45
48
49
50
51
52
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Materials listed:
a. Base: As noted.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440. -
48
49
50
51
52
U.SoP.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
10990-2
O1 2.02 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS
O1
04
05
06
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
A. Pedestrian control device:
1. Type NR white nylon rope with chrome hook by Alvarado
Manufacturing Company; Chino, California, length as
required.
2. Provide all anchorage devices necessary for complete
installation.
B. Banners: 1. Integrated Ceilings, Inc.
2. ].90Z fire retardant nylon ripstop fabric (Howe and
Bainbridge No. S/N19WLK BB.
3. 1 IN diameter aluminum hanger tube with end caps.
4. Weight rod.
5. Chrome plated hanger clips and hanging devices (including
wire).
6. Size: 5 FT wide x 20 FT longo
7. Fabric sewn to create space for pocket for insertion of
hanger and weight rods.
8. 0uantity: Provide 5 at each garden, colors as scheduled
below.
9. Schedule:
a. Garden 1B028 and 1P012; Purple no. 120.
b. Garden 1C027 and 1NO01; Yellow no. 135.
c. Garden 1C005 and 1NO13; Light Blue no. 113.
d. Garden 1MO06 and 1DO14; Red no. 155.
C. Metal storage shelving:- 1. Free standing metal shelving system with enclosed ends and
backs and heavy duty shelves.
2. 36 IN W x 88 IN H x 12 IN D units or system which provides
equivalent storage configuration.
3. Approved manufacturers: Lundia; Republic Storage Systems.
D. Nylon rail: 1. Nominal 1-1/2 IN diameter.
2. Integral color throughout.
3. Continuous steel core.
4. Concealed fasteners, no rosettes.
5. Color: White.
6. As manufactured by Hewi Inc.; Allendale, N.J.
E. Public telephone units: American Specialties, Inc.; Phillips &
Brooks, Inc.; Redy Ref Pressed and Welded~ Inc.
1. Base: Phillips & Brooks, Model PB-201 ABE.
2. 16 GA stainless steel~ welded, seamless frame.
3. Recessed with writing and directory shelves.
04
O5
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
48
49
UoS.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01 PART 3 - g~C~TION
04 3.01 INSPECTION
07
09
11
12
14
17 3.02
2O
21
10990-3
23
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive items.
B. Do not install until deficiencies are corrected.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
D. Coordinate as required.
INSTALLATION
A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
O1
04
07
09
11
12
14
17
20
21
23
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
5H02, 8C03
SECTION 11021
VAULT DOOR
11021-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and perform
all work and services for all vault doors as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
24
27
29
31
32
A. U/L label - 2 hour fire resistive rating label.
B. U/L label - relocking device label.
C. Manufacture in accordance with Federal Specification AA-D-6OOB
and Amendment 4.
27
29
31
32
35 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
35
38
40
42
43
A. Base: Mosler.
B. Optional: Diebold, Inc.; McGulnn Safe Co.
C. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
38
40
42
43
46 1.04 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
46
49
51
53
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Project fnformation:
49
51
53
U.S.P.S. : N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
11021-2
1. The vault door (and frame assembly) should meet the
requirements as described below.
2. Affix certification label to inside face of door frame.
Text as follows:
a. "This is a U.S. Government Class 5 vault door which has
been tested and approved by Government under Federal
Specification AA-D-6OOB, and Amendment 4. It affords the
following security protection:'
1) 30 man-minutes against surrepitious entry.
2) 10 man-minutes against forced entry.
3) 20 man-hours against lock manipulation.
4) 20 man-hours against radiology techniques.
b. The protection certified above applies only to the door
and not the vault proper.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
17 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
17
20
22
24
2.5
26
28
29
A. Deliver unit cartoned or crated.
B. Inspect upon delivery for damage.
C. Minor damage in finish may be repaired provided results are
acceptable to the Contracting Officer; otherwise, remove and
replace damaged items.
D. Store off ground in vertical position with spacers to allow air
circulation.
20
22
24
25
26
28
29
32 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
32
35
36
37
39
A. Examine structure, substrates, and conditions under which work
is to be installed for conditions detrimental to correct and
timely completion.
B. Installation assumes responsibility for performance.
35
36
37
39
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43¸
46 2.01 MATERIALS
46
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Vault, Door, Frame and Hardware: 1o Mosler Class 5 security vault door.
2. Design door to provide protections listed in Paragraph
1.04(C)2a. .
3. Provide 2 hour Fire Resistive U/L Rating Label, and
Relocking Device Label.
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
4. Minimum clear opening, 40 IN wide by 78 IN high.
5. Entrance of door flush with finished floor level.
6. Fill door and frame with fire resistive insulation.
7. Provide key change combination lock.
8. Install escape device on interior side of vault door.
11021-3
01
02
03
04
05
09 PAI{T 3 - i~q~CUTION
12 3.01 INSTALLATION
15
16
18
2O
22
24
26
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and
approved shop drawings.
B. Readjust operation just prior to final inspection.
C. Leave in complete and proper operating condition.
D. Remove and replace defective work.
E. Deliver change key to Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
09
12
15
16
18
20
22
24
26
U,S.P.S..- N, Texas/N, Georgia G,M,Fo & V.M,F,
O1
03
5A25, 8G19
SECTION 11140
UNDERGROUND FUEL AND OIL STORAGE TANKS
lll&0-1
O1
03
06 PART
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all underground fuel. and oil storage tanks as indicated,
in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Fuel island equipment: Section 11143.
2. Gasoline and diesel fuel piping system:
3. Fuel management system: Section 11142.
4. Concrete:. Division 3.
5. Lube handling system: Section 11147.
6. Electrical wiring: Division 16.
Section 11146.
C. Description of system: 1. Gasoline storage tank, one - 12,000 GAL.
2. Diesel storage tank, two - 12,000 GALl
3. Engine grade oil storage tank, one 1000 GAL.
4. Waste oil storage tank, one - 500 GAL.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
38 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. Governing standards: 1. ASTM D4021-81.
2. UL certified tank per UL MH-9061 for storage of flammable
liquids.
3. NFPA 30 flammable and combustible liquids code.
4. NFPA 31 standards for installation of oil burning equipment.
5. Factory Mutual Systems approval 1M7AOAF.
6. National Electrical Code Article 515 Class I.
7. Surface load H-20 axle.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
52 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
05
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
11140-2
A. Shop drawings:
1. Tank and piping layout showing location of all fittings,
accessories and critical dimensions.
B. Product data.
C. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data: See Division 1.
2. Owner instruction report: See Divisionl.
3. Test reports.
D. Warranty:
1. Thirty year warranty against i:nternal and external
corrosion, or'structural failure.
O1
O2
O3
05
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
17 1.04 WARRANTY
17
21 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
24 2.01 FUEL STORAGE TANKS
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
· 51
52
53
54
A. Tank, fuel storage: Horizontal fiberglass reinforced plastic
cylindrical UL labeled standard below ground fuel storage
tank(s) compatible with products stored.
1. Double wall construction.
2. Sizes: See Part 1, Paragraph 1.0lC.
3. Provide outlets as indicated under Part 2, paragraph 2.0lB.
4. Construct tank and fittings in strict accord with applicable
codes.
5. Provide with listing lugs.
6. Anchor straps per manufacturer's standard FRP, not less than
four per tank.
7. Tanks to be minimum 4 FT below grade.
B. Steel NPT fittings with temporary cast iron plugs for tank
connections (12, 000 gallon tank):
1. 6 IN fill line, double tapped 6 x 4 IN reducer with 4 IN
fill tube.
2. 4 IN vapor recovery primary tank to truck (plugged for two
diesel fuel tanks).
3. 4 IN vent line for secondary tank to vent.
4. 6 IN insertion for monitoring secondary tank condition with
6 IN x 4 IN reducing bushing.
5. 4 IN connection in manhole cover to vent line for primary
tank to vent.
6. 4 IN connection for fuel pump.
7. 4 IN for level indicator with 4 IN x 2 IN threaded reducer
in manhole cover.
8. 4 IN for vapor return from dispensers.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35'
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
.54
U.S.P.S.
N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F..
11140-3
O2
O3
O4
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
C. Two fiberglass manway, 22 IN ID with UL listed gaskets, 20 IN
extension and carbon steel bolted covers. One cover with three
4 IN threaded fittings.
D. Accessories: Following items are required to complete
installation of three fuel tanks, ready for service. These
items may not be provided by tank manufacturer and need to be
purchased from an outfitter.
1. Three fill-up assemblies:
a. Three extension pipe, 4 IN NPT at each end. Length to
suit.
b. Three drop tube, 14 FT long to fit inside extension and
fill tube in tank.
c. Three fill pipe adaptor, 4 IN diameter by 4 IN female
threaded for connection to transport truck.
d. Three 4 IN toggle type cap to close fill pipe.
e. Three cast iron manholes, 18 IN size, heavy duty, water
tight, with a leak tight steel holding well, not less
than 3 CU FT holding capacity, under cover.
2. Vapor recovery connections to delivery truck (gasoline tank
only):
a. One extension pipe, 4 IN NPT at each end, length to suit.
b. One 3 IN x 4 IN vapor recovery adaptors rated to 10 PSI
pressure for connection to transport truck.
c. One 3 IN toggle type cap to close adaptors.
d. One cast iron manholes, 12 IN size, heavy duty, wat%r
tight.
3. Three level indicators:
a. Three extension pipe, 2 IN NPT at each end, length to
suit.
b. Three 2 IN threa~ed 150 LB flange to switch flange
connection.
c. Three cast iron manholes, 12 IN size, heavy duty, water
tight.
d. Three sets of probes for level indication per Sections
11142 and 11143.
4. Three secondary tank vapor monitors:
a. Detection system per Specification 11146, Paragraph 2.02.
b. Three cast iron manholes, 9 IN size, heavy duty, water
tight.
5. Markers:
a. Two identification markers for diesel fuel (set in
concrete).
b. One identification marker for unleaded gasoline (set in
concrete).
c. One dip stick, graduated to direct gallon reading.
6. Tank vents: Three pressure-vacuum vents, set to 80Z
pressure and 0.50Z vacuum; 2 IN threaded connection.
Located on ends of vent pipes.
Factory test: Pressure-vacuum test tanks at factory per
manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Primary tank test to 11.5 IN mercury vacuum.
O2
O3
O4
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
11140-4
2. Secondary tank test to 9.5 IN mercury vacuum.
3. Primary and secondary tank test to 5 PSI pressure; 5:1
safety factor required.
01
02
03
06 2.02 OIL STORAGE TANKS
O6
O9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
A. Tank connections (1,000 gallon engine oil tank): 1. 4 IN fill.
2. 2 IN suction.
3. 2 IN vent.
4. 4 IN water removal.
5. 24 IN manhole.
B. Tank connection (500 gallon waste oil tank): 1. 4 IN waste oil connection.
2. 2 IN vent.
3. 4 IN waste removal.
4. 24 IN manhole.
C. Tank accessories: Provide for each tank: 1. Remote reading electric level indicator.
2. 4 IN gauge stick opening.
3. 4 IN gravity fill and vapor return assembly.
4. 2 IN vent (pressure-vacuum).
5. Dip stick: Graduated to read gallons of material in~ t~nks.
(one only)
6. Sensor device with remote alarm to warn of low fuel
availability.
D. Factory tes~: Pressure-vacuum test tanks at factory per
manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Primary tank test to 11.5 IN mercury vacuum.
2. Secondary tank test to 9.5 IN mercury vacuum.
3. Primary and secondary tank test to 5 PSI pressure; 5:1
safety factor required.
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
41 PART 3 - EXECUTION
41
44 3.01 INSTALLATION
44
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Provide manufacturer's trained service engineer, to observe
installation of each tank and to certify that tanks have been
installed per manufacturer's specifications and performance
warranties are in force.
1. Service Engineer shall inform Contractor of all
unsatisfactory conditions that will void warranties.
2. Contractor shall correct all unsatisfactory conditions.
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.Fo
O1 3.02 iNSPECTION
04
11140-5
A. Visually inspect tank delivered to site for evidence of damage.
01
04
07 3.03 FIELD TEST
O7
10
11
12
A. Contractor shall individually test each tank prior to
installation.
1. Air test to 5 PSI using soap on all areas of tank.
10
11
12
15 3.04 TANK INSTALLATION
15
18
19
21
22
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
45
46
47
48
50
51
A. Excavation shall be free from material that may cause damage to
tank coating.
B. Care shall be taken during installation that foreign matter is
not introduced into excavation or backfill.
C. Place tank over, not directly on a concrete pad for anchoring.
D. Before placing tank in excavation, clean all dirt clods agd
similar foreign matter from tank and repair any damages per
manufacturers recommendations.
E. Use adequate size equipment to lift and lower tank without
dragging and dropping to ensure no damage to tank and coating.
1. Carefully lift and lower tank using cables or chains of
adequate length attached to lifting lugs.
2. Do not use chains or slings around tank shell.
F. When installing hold down straps per manufacturer's
recommendations, ensure straps are separated from tank by
separating pad made of an inert insulating dielectric material.
1. Separating pad to be at least 2 IN wider than hold down
straps width and placed anywhere on tank where hold down
straps would come into direct contact with tank shell.
G. Backfill per manufacturer's recommendation.
H. Remove plugs at unused tank openings, add pipe compound and
reinstall plugs in unused openings.
1. Do not remove dielectric bushings or flange isolation
devices from unused openings in STI-P3.
I. Take care not to cross thread or damage nonmetallic bushings
when replacing plugs or installing'required tank piping.
18
19
21
22
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
45
46
47
48
50
51
U.S.P.S..- N.~ Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
04
O6
07
11140-6
3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Pitch all piping toward tank at 1/8 IN in 10 FT.
B. After weldings and testing, coat or wrap all underground pipe
fittings and joints.
10 3.06 TANK CLEANING
i3
14
16
18
A. Before tank is filled, pump all accumulated water and
condensate from tank.
B. Mop tank dry.
END OF SECTION
01
04
06
07
10
13
14
16
18
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N° Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.F.
01
03
7JlO, 8G19
SECTION 11141
VEHICLE LIFTS
11141-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all vehicle lifts as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure .and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1.' Lube handling system: Section 11147.
2. Compressed air system: Section 15481.
3. Concrete work: Division 3.
C. Description of system:
1. Lift shall basically consist of two individual lifting
cylinder assemblies in line with longitudinal axis of
vehicle, each lifting cylinder so equipped as to engage axle
or suspension as specified herein. One of two lifting
cylinder assemblies will be movable along this same axis to
effect variable spacing between lifting cylinder assemblies.
Movable unit will hereinafter be referred to as "front post"
and stationary unit will be called "rear post".
2. In addition to other requirements outlined herein, lift, or
lifts, shall comply with requirements of ANSI Standard
B153.1 "Safety Requirements for Construction, Care and Use
of Automotive Lifts", as published by American National
Standards institute.
3. While primarily intended for heavy duty truck and bus use,
design shall be such that necessary clearances will be
provided to also handle passenger vehicles without need for
major modification or subsequent purchase of additional
lifting equipment other than minor units such as adapters
which might be required for specialized type applications.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50 1,02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5O
53
54
A. Installer:
1. Manufacturer certified and approved.
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11141-2
03 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Section 01340)
03 --
O6
07
O8
10
12
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
B. Certificates.
C. Operating and maintenance data: See Division 1.
O6
07
O8
10
12
15 1.04 W~d~Y
15
18
20
A. Five year warranty covering equipment by manufacturer.
B. One year warranty for installation by Contractor.
18
20
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
27 2.01 MATERIALS
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Vehicle lifts:
a. Manufacturer shall be one who has been supplying vehicle
lifts for at least 10 years and who is established that
prompt service and availability of spare parts is
assured.
B. Heavy duty vehicle lifts:
1. Capacity and dimensions:
a. Capacity:
1) Electric-oil, full hydraulic type. Lift shall be
capable of raising 36,O00 LBS (18,0OO LBS per post).
b. Wheel base adjustment:
1) Front post movable to provide prope~ engagement with
vehicles length 80 IN minimum to 204 IN maximum.
c. Adapter adjustments:
1) Adapters adjustable so that they will provide a
maximum spread and retract to following dimensions:
a. Front adapters for independent suspension; 57 IN
maximum, 42 IN minimum. Vehicle engagement surface
not less than 10 IN.
b.. Front adapters for straight axles; 56-3/4 IN
maximum, 4t-3/4 IN minimum (by reversing adapters,
smaller minimum spread is possible).
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
11141-3
c. Rear adapters adjustable to provide from 24 IN to
36 IN of spread.
d. Hydraulic power unit: Hydraulic unit shall be
specified by gallons displaced when all lifts are
operated simultaneously plus 20 percent additional
capacity.
e. Electrical requirements: 7-1/2 HP, 460 volt, 60
cycle, 3 phase.
f. Plunger stroke and diameter:
1. Front post: 62-1/4 plus/minus 1/4 IN stroke,
10-5/8 IN diameter.
2. Rear post: 70-1/2 plus/minus 1/4 IN, 10-5/8 IN
diameter.
C. Light duty lifts:
1. Capacity and dimensions:
a. Capacity:
1) Air operated, full hydraulic type. Lift shall be
capable of raising 16,500 pounds (5,500 LBS front
piston and 11,000 LBS rear piston) with all lifts
operating simultaneously when supplied with a
sufficient amount of compressed air at 150 PSI.
b. Wheel base adjustment:
1) Front post shall be movable to provide proper
engagement with vehicles ranging in wheel base from 80
IN minimum to 152 IN maximum.
c. Adapter adjustment: '
1) Adapters shall be adjustable so that they will provide
a maximum spread and retract to following dimensions:
(a) Front adapters for independent suspension; 60 IN
maximum, 38 IN minimum. Vehicle engagement surface
will not be less than 10 IN. (b) Front adapters for
straight axles; 44 IN maximum, 22 IN minimum. (c)
Rear adapters will be adjustable to provide from
23-1/2 IN to 44 IN of spread.
d. Air oil reservoir ASME approved, provide sufficient oil
volume to allow minimum 10 percent reserve oil when lift
is fully raised. Provide iow oil lock device to prevent
use without proper amount of oil.
e. Plunger stroke and diameter:
1) Front post: 65-3/4 plus/minus 1/4 IN stroke, 7-1/2 IN
diameter.
2) Rear post: 70-1/2 plus/minus 1/4 IN stroke, 10-5/8 IN
diameter.
01
02
03
O4
05
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
47 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
47
50
51
52
53
54-
A. Front lifting unit:
1. Saddle and adapters:
a. Heavy duty lift~ Saddle and adapters shall be so
designed as to provide width (spread) adjustment without
necessity of operator bodily getting under vehicle.
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & VoM.F.
11141-4
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
1) Use of extension handles, etc., is acceptable if use
does not require undue agility or manipulation.
Adapters will be restrained to prevent accidental
excessive extension. When front post is in fully
lowered position highest point of saddle and adapter
assembly shall not be more than 6-1/2 IN above frame
guide bars not included for use when additional saddle
to vehicle clearance is required (and shall not drag
on floor when post is moved for wheel base
adjustment).
b. Light duty lift: Saddle and adapters shall be so
designed as to provide with (spread) adjustment without
necessity of operator bodily getting under vehicle.
1) Use of extension handles, etc., is acceptable if use
does not require undue agility or manipulation.
Adapters will be restrained to prevent accidental
excessive extension. When front post is in fully
lowered position highest point of saddle and adapter
assembly shall not be more than 5-1/2 IN above frame
guide bars. Height extension adapters shall be
furnished which will provide additional contact height
of not less than 7-1/2 IN in iow position. Saddle in
iow position shall not drag on floor when post is
moved for wheel base adjustment.
2. Front post (plunger and cylinder assembly):
a. Heavy duty lift:
1) Front post shall be equipped with a nonadJustabl~
packing gland which will include upper bearing
surface. Seal unit will utilize chevron type packings
and shall not require adjustment during life of
packings. Bottom bearing surface shall be a permanent
part of piston so as to provide increasing bearing
spread as lift is lowered. Minimum bearing spread
will not be less than 21-1/4 IN. Provision shall be
made so that plunger is easily removable for
inspection, maintenance or replacement purposes.
b. Light duty lift:
1) Front post shall be equipped with a nonadjustable
packing gland which will include upper bearing
surface. Seal unit will utilize chevron type packings
and shall not require adjustment during life of
packings. Bottom bearing surface shall be a permanent
part of piston so as to provide increasing bearing
spread as lift is lowered. Minimum bearing spread
will not be less than 15-3/4 IN.
2) Provision shall be made so that plunger is easily
removable for inspection, maintenance, or replacement
purposes.
3. Front post (carriage and trench):
a. Carriage which supports front post shall be equipped with
roller bearing wheels rolling in formed channel tracks.
Provision for wheel to be provided. Channel tracks will
be essentially flush with floor surface. Cover plates
shall move with carriage so as to keep trench opening
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
O3
'05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
11141-5
covered at all times. Cover plates will be of sufficient
strength as to support a wheel loading of one quarter of
design capacity without permanent deformation.
B. Rear lifting unit:
1. Saddle and adapters:
a. Design shall be such as to allow saddle and two removable
axle adapters to recede beneath floor and allow floor
level cover plates to automatically close over same when
piston is lowered and automatically uncover when piston
is raised.
2. Rear post (plunger and cylinder assembly):
a. Heavy duty lift:
1) Front post shall be equipped with a nonadjustable
packing gland which will include upper bearing
surface. Seal unit will utilize chevron type packings
and shall not require adjustment during life of
packings. Bottom bearing surface shall be a permanent
part of pis. ton so as to provide increasing bearing
spread as lift is lowered. Minimum bearing spread
will not be less than 21-1/4 IN. Provision shall be
'made so that plunger is easily removable for
inspection, maintenance or replacement purposes.
b. Light duty lift:
1) Rear post shall be equipped with a nonadjustable
packing gland which will include upper bearing
surface. Seal unit will utilize chevron type pa~kings
and shall not require adjustment during life of
packings. Bottom bearing surface shall be a permanent
part of piston so as to provide increasing bearing
spread as lift is lowered. Minimum bearing spread
will not be less than 21-3/4 IN. Provision shall be
made so that plunger is easily removable for
inspection, maintenance, or replacement purposes.
3. Rear frame unit:
a. Frame will provide integral wheel chocks at floor level
in order to accurately locate vehicle axles over lifting
saddle and adapters. Frame assembly shall also provide a
recess beneath floor for rear saddle and standard
adapters when piston is in lowered position. Frame
following reasonable floor slope when cylinder and piston
assembly is made plumb at installation.
C. Controls:
1. Lift controls:
a. Hydraulic control valve will be of composite design
providing for individual or simultaneous control of front
and rear plungers. Valves will have a hold open future
for locking lever in exhaust (down) position. Valve
body: Bronze with cadmium plated cast iron handle.
Valves to be mounted along building walls as shown on
drawings. .
2. Wheel base adjustments:
O1
02
03
05
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O2
03
O4
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
11141-6
a. Adjustment is to be accomplished by lever engaging in
rachet located adjacent to control box. Not more than 50
pounds of force shall be required by operator when
adjusting wheelbase.
D. Plumbing:
1. Ail plumbing components within lift frame will be supplied
by manufacturer. Pipe supplied will be cut to length and
threaded. Unions will be provided as necessary for ease of
assembly or disassembly. Ail plumbing components with
exception of lines between power source and control valve
will be accessible for repair, replacement, or inspection
after installation of lift. Provision will be made for
replacement of control valve seals without removal of valve
from control box.
Lift locks:
1. There will be supplied a positive, ratcheting, spring
loaded, automatic lift lock leg on both front and rear post
to prevent accidental lowering. Lift lock legs will have
multiple locking positions spaced at 6 IN on center and
starting 24 IN A.F.F. and continuing throughout lift range.
Release for lowering to be accomplished by an air actuated,
remote, push valve at control box°
2. Lift locks to be indexed to saddle to prevent rotation
insuring proper location of releases at all times. Lift
locks are to prevent rotation of piston assembly preventing
bypass of stop lugs in cylinder assembly.
01
02
03
04
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
32 PART 3 - RXECUTION
32
35 3.01 INSPECTION
35
38
39
A. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
38
39
42 3.02 PREPARATION
42
45
46
47
A. Ail concrete work and associated under ground air piping should
be installed, inspected, and approved by Contractor prior to
start of mechanical components installation.
45
46
47
50 3.03 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION
5O
53
54
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved shop drawings.
53
54
U.S.P.So .- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
11141-7
03 3.04 ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING
O3
06
O8
A. Adjust for smooth operation just prior to final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
06
08
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
5A25, 8C17
SECTION 11142
FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
11142-1
O1
03
07 PART 1 - GENERAL
O7
10 1.01 DESCRIPTION
10
13
1-4
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for a fuel management system as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
.sound, secure'and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Gasoline and diesel fuel piping systems:
2. Fuel island equipment: Section 11143.
Section 11146.
C. Description of system:
1.'System will control and record individual dispensing of
fuel.
2. System shall provide accurate and timely equipment data
while accounting for all fuel and related products being
dispensed.
3. It shall be a stand alone, dial-up, user oriented, fully
automated system able to operate completely unattended 24
hours a day, 7 days a week.
4. Access to products shall be restricted to operators and
equipment with valid keys and who perform a predetermined
series of data entry operations.
5. In addition, there shall be provision to enter manually, any
and all data that system is designed to collect.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
44 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
44
47
A. Installer qualifications: Approved by manufacturer.
47
50 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Section 01340)
53 A. Shop drawings:
50
53
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O4
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
11142-2
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
B. Operating and maintenance data: See Section 01730.
C. Training:
1. Training will be provided for Owner personnel.
a. Operation of key reader terminals.
'b. Preventative maintenance of key reader terminals.
c. Operation of any external devices including key encoder,
computer interfaces and any other computer equipment.
D. Warranty:
1. Provide 1 year warranty on all parts and labor.
2. Warrant system to be free from defects during warranty
period and assume sole responsibility for performance of all
equipment, materials, labor, software and programs supplied
by subcontractors during this period.
3. Certify that a local Engineer or electronics technician
trained in operation and repair of system is available to
perform warranty work.
O1
02
O4
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
24
28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
31 2.01 MATERIALS
31
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. (Product):
a. Base: Trak Engineering, Inc., Tallahassee, Florida.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. System configuration: System shall be composed of two
hierarchical levels of processing. General description of each
of these levels is as follows:
1. Level 1 - Central Controller (CC):
a. Network controller for polling of data from each key
reader.
b. Accumulation of daily fuel issue data received from each
key reader.
c. Passing updated system files to each key reader to
reflect new system parameters.
d. Entry of manual fueling data and maintenance of fuel
access key database.
eo Generation of daily and monthly fuel reports.
2o Level 2 - Key Access Reader:
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
52
53
54
11142-3
a. Verification of key access number and fuel type selection
against fuel access key database.
b. Limitation of amount of fuel dispensed based on quantity
limits specified for vehicle associated with a given key.
c. Entry of odometer reading and employees' identification
number.
d. Pump control point.
e. Retention of fuel access transactions until polled by the
CC processor.
C. Hardware:
1. Central Controller (CC):
a. Located at dispatch Vl19.
b. IBM PS/2 Model 30 or equal.
c. Minimum 640K storage.
d. 1-20 MB hard drive.
e. 1-720K floppy drive.
f. 80 column CRT display.
g. 160 CPS dot matrix printer (thermal printing not allowed.
h. Data link capabilities.
2. Key access terminal:
a. Unattended 24 hour key activated.
b. One and two key operation.
c. Control simultaneous access to all dispensers.
d. Read fuel quantity from each dispenser in 1/10 gallon
increments.
e. Storage of up to 975 transactions.
f. Communicate with CC.
g. Manual override switch.
h. No loss of data upon loss of power.
i. Number keypad, LCD display (L.E.D. or indicator lights
not acceptable) capable of operation in ambient outdoor
conditions.
J. Fiber optic communication and control lines.
k. Provide surge protectors.
3. Fuel access key:
a. Impervious to otl, gasoline, salt water, extreme heat and
cold.
b. Capable of containing following minimum data:
4. System identification number (3 digits).
5. Key number (5 digits).
6. Unit number (10 digits).
7. Authorized fuel type (15213 fuel types).
8. Fuel limit (3 digits).
9. Key encoder:
a. Controlled by CC.
b. For manipulating data within system and generating custom
reports defined by Owner.
D. Software:
1. CC software: Following specifications are minimum required
for reporting functions:
a. Initiate polling and support communication to each key
reader.
01
02
O3
O4
05
06
07
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11142-4
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
b. Generate a daily report for each key reader showing
number of transactions polled, pump and tank inventory,
time of polling, error messages and system parameters.
c. Report tank dippings and flag for reorder.
d. Generate a daily report showing all transactions of
polling.
e. Be able to sort daily transaction listing by date and
time, key number, vehicle number, personnel number or
personnel data.
f. Be able to print daily a list of each individual
department's fueling record and a total fuel use of each
type fuel for each department.
g. Be able to store and use a list of a minimum of 40
individual departments along with complete alpha numeric
labels for each department.
h. Be able to print on request a total key list and each
individual vehicle's fueling history.
i. Be able to set polling times and have CC poll each key
reader without operator assistance.
J. Change directly any system parameter at any key reader.
k. Change, enter, create or eliminate information pertaining
to key and vehicle data.
1. Add, delete or lockout keys.
m. Set prices by tank and pump and assign to quantity of
fuel dispensed to show price per transaction.
2. Key reader software:
a. Be able to communicate with CC over standard dial u~
phone lines.
b. Key reader must have an operator section that allows
station operator to enter data such as fuel receipts,
lockouts and system parameters.
c. Must have a 4 digit security code to prevent unauthorized
entry into operation section.
d. Must be able to automatically reset all system parameters
upon resumption of power after a power failure.
e. Each pump will have a "time out" feature which will
remove power from pump if it is selected but not
activated by user. Time out must be variable from 1 to
99 seconds in one second increments.
f. A "missing pulse detector" will be incorporated into
circuit controlling each pump. This detector will remove
power from pump if pulses indicating fuel flow are not
received at regular intervals. Time out must be variable
form 1 to 99 second increments.
g. In event of CC failure, system should be capable of being
polled by another computer (Vendor's).
O1
O2
03
04
05
06
07
08
0g
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
50 PART 3 - EXECDTION
5O
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01 3.01 INSTALLATION
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
1!
13
11142-5
A. Installation criteria: Installation shall include all cost
necessary to make e~tire system fully functional as described
in these specifications:
1. Key readers:
a. Wiring and construction conform to all applicable
Federal, State and Local laws and regulations.
b. Power lines from key readers to pumps enclosed in steel
conduit.
END 0P SECTION
0!
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6D18, 8G19
SECTION 11143
FUEL ISLAND EQUIPMENT
11143-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all fuel island equipment as indicated in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Section 15010 for special mechanical requirements.
5. Provide system which will interface with fuel management
system.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Excavation and backfill: Division 2.
2. Electrical: Division 16.
3. Gasoline and diesel fuel piping system: Section 11146.
4. Fuel management system: Section 11142.
5. Underground fuel storage tank: Section 11140.
C. Description o~ work:
1. Provide fuel island including, but not limited to,
following:
a. Two diesel dispensers with filter unit.
b. Gas dispenser.
c. Fuel island steel form for 3 dispensers piped ready for
vapor recovery.
d. Three submersible fuel pumps.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
42 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. Applicable standards: Comply with following: 1. NFPA No.22, 30 and 31.
2. UL-58: Standard for Construction of Underground Tanks.
3. API Standards.
4. ASME Code.
5. National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
6. Ail components U/L labeled.
7. Installation and materials' in accord with local codes.
8. EPA regulations.
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. = N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11143-2
O1 1.03 SUBMITTALS (Division 1)
O1
O4
O6
08
09
10
11
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Project information: 1. Test reports.
2. Operating and maintenance data.
3. Warranty.
O4
O6
O8
09
10
11
14 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE
14
17
18
2O
21
23
24
26
A. Delivery: Receive, unload and deliver equipment to
installation site, or to storage and then installation site.
B. Inspect equipment when received and immediately report any
damage or shortage.
C. Storage: Store equipment which cannot be installed immediately
after delivery in a safe location protected against moisture.
D. Protect stored products from damage or loss.
17
18
20
21
23
24
26
30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3O
33 2.01 PUMPS AND DISPENSING EQUIPMENT
33
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Fuel dispensers:
1. Fuel dispenser: UL listed remote type, single.
2. Base: Stamped steel with bonderized primer and weather
resistant, baked enamel finish.
3. Frame: Heavy gage steel bolted to base with baked
anti-corrosion prime finish.
4. Housing: Minimum 18 GA steel, baked enamel finish.
5. Equip dispenser with 10 pulse per gallon, non reset type
pulser.
6. Each hose individually controlled by electrically operated
solenoid valve.
7. Accessories: 16 FT length of 5/8 IN ID hose, connected to
an automatic, shut off.
8. High hose spring arm retractor adapted for vapor recovery.
9. Provide a safe shut off valve similar to OPW NoolOMRS into
supply line for each dispenser.
10. Product plate: Provide plate designated Diesel or
unleaded.
11. Dispenser: Gilbarco unlighted, for gas and diesel.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
11143-3
12. Provide with automatic dispensing nozzles, one for each
hose, vapor recovery type, high capacity.
B. Pump: Submersible, remote.
1. 208 volt, single phase, UL listed, Class I, Group D.
2. Provide one pump for each tank and dedicate to one
dispenser.
3.~Provide a complete pump assembly including, but not limited
to following:
a. Pump.
b. Check valve.
c. Air eliminator.
d. Expansion relief valve.
e. Syphon nozzle.
f. Venturi.
go Syphon check valve.
ho Pressure test screw.
4. Fit into standard 4 IN NPT tank openings.
5. Bayonet - type electrical connector.
6. Test plugs.
7. Thermal over current protection.
8. Permanent split-phase capacitor.
9. 4 IN thick diameter riser pipe.
10. Hydraulically balanced impeller floats.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
27 2.02 STEgL FORM
30
31
33
A. Steel form for fuel islands: Am-Fab Series 200, or equal knock
down steel form, 13 IN high with adjustable pump box.
B. Provide one coat of zinc chromate primer on outside surfaces.
27
30
31
33
37 PART 3 - g~ECI]TION
37
40 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION
4O
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Metal piping: 1. Ail pipe and fittings: Schedule 40 galvanized steel with
malleable iron fittings.
2. Ail unions with brass to metal ground joint seats.
3. Ream burrs from pipe ends.
4. Comply with applicable portions of Section 15060.
5. Make all screwed joints with Buckeye No.838 Join-Seal,
Permatex Form-A-Gasket No.2, or Key's Pipe Compound, or
equal.
6. Install flexible connectors and swing joints at:
a. Tank connections.
b. Underground below pump islands.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S.'- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
O5
06
07
08
09
10
11'
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
11143-4
c. Changes in direction.
d. Underground below vent risers.
7. Exposed vent risers: One piece from elbow swing joint to
top of vent.
8. Properly vent tanks and plug spare tank openings, securely
with screw type plugs.
9. Pump vault and connecting piping self supporting.
10. Hold away from tank.
11o Do not place brick or other spacing materials on top of
tank for any reason.
12. Perform Tests before burying pipe.
13. Ail horizontal piping to have minimum cover of 18 IN to
finished grade.
14. Run in fiberglass conduit which drains back to manhole.
15. Backfill lines for a minimum of 6 IN on all sides with
clean sand.
16. DO NOT conceal piping until all required tests have been
satisfactorily completed and work has been approved by
Contracting Officer and all authorities having Jurisdiction.
B. Vents: 1. Install vent lines by most direct route with minimum bends
and pitched uniformly back to tanks.
2. Securely block vent lines and support at proper intervals to
prevent displacement during backfilling.
3. Extend vent risers a minimum of 12 FT above grade.
4. Locate vents to prevent discharge of vapors into buildings.
30 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
3O
33
34
36
A. Install pumps and associated equipment to conform to approved
shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
33
34
36
U.S.P.S..- No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.Fo & V.M.Fo
01 5A25, 8G19
03
SECTION 11144
PAINT SPRAY BOOTH
11144-1
O1
03
06 PAI{T 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all paint spray booths as indicated, in accord' with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Description of system:
1. Complete paint spray booth systems including but.not limited
to; air make up unit, exhaust fan, trench grating, filters,
and booth housing, ductwork, etc. to provide complete spray
painting operation. Design system to comply with NFPA'33,
13, EPA, OSHA and NEC.
2. Meet Class I, Division 1 requirements where applicable.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Section 01340)
32
35
36
37
39
41
42
43
45
46
48
49
5O
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
B. Operating and maintenance data: See Section 01730.
C. Extra material.
1. Filters: Provide complete set of filters for start-up and 1
additional complete set for replacement.
D. Warranty:
1. Manufacturer's standard 1 year warranty.
E. Product data:
1. Certificate of compliance with NFPA 33, 13, EPA OSHA and
NEC.
35
36
37
39
41
42
43
45
46
48
49
50
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
04
O5
11144-2
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Sequencing: Provide trench frame to contractor in a
manner so as 'to not delay construction of floor slab
09 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
12 2.01 MATERIALS
15
16
17
18
19
2O
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. (ProdUct):
a. BaSe: Binks Manufacturing Co.
b. Optional: Devilbiss, Protectaire.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Down draft booth: (located at V.M.F.):
1. Booth panels:
ao 18 GA galvanized panels, factory painted gray
sides.
b. Provide all fastening devices, caulking, floor
etc. necessary for installation.
c. Size: 16 FT - 0 IN wide x 48 FT - 0 IN long x
IN tall (clear inside dimensions).
2. Access door:
a. Minimum 30 IN x 81 IN.
b. Explosion venting latches.
c. Observation window.
3. Entrance doors:
a. Bifold type.
b. Provide minimum clear opening of 10 FT - 6 IN
10 IN H with doors in full open condition.
c. Explosion venting latches.
4. Filters:
a. U.L. listed.
b. F.M. approved.
c. Ceiling supply air filters.
d. Paint arrestor exhaust filter~.
e. Make-up unit filters.
f. Manometers.
5. Exhaust fan:
a. Capacity: 32,000 CFM, minimum static pressure
b. Motor: 10 HOP., 460 V, 60 HZ, 3 PH, open type
bearing.
Co Double mounted ring type.
.d. 48 IN diameter.
e. Belt guard. -
6. Air make up unit:
a. Provide 70 degree temperature rise.
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
timely
Section
)n both
chanpels,
16 FT - 0
W x 13 FT -
3/4 IN V.C.
)all
01
04
O5
09
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
11144-3
b. 2,420,000 BTU/HR.
c. Gas fired, 30:1 turn down, F.M. approved.
d. Motor: 15 HP, 460 V, 60 HZ, 3 PH.
e. Capacity: 32,000 CFM, minimum static pressure 1 IN W.C.
f. Insulated roof curb.
g. Motorized discharge damper.
h. Remote control thermostat.
i. Remote control station with indicating lights.
J. Exhaust fan starter and makeup air starter in panel°
k. 16 GA weatherproof housing.
1. Maximum 2,500 FPM discharge velocity.
m. Intake hood with bird screen.
n. Filter section with dirty filter light.
o. Discharge louver section.
p. Supports.
7. Exhaust stack:
a. 48 IN diameter.
b. Minimum 6 FT length to discharge top above roof.
c. Access door at fan and where required for cleaning.
d. Combination automatic damper and.weather canopy, up
discharge.
8. Lights:
a. l15V, 4 tube fluourescent lamp fixtures (quantity=26).
b. 40 watts per lamp.
c. Provide lamps as part of contract.
d. U.L. listed.
9. Safety equipment:
a. Time delay switches on all access doors.
b. 3 way solenoid valve on compressed air line to assure
exhaust fan is running before compressed air is available
to operator.
C. Top exhaust spray booth (located in paint shop 1LO05):
1. Booth panels:
a. 18 GA galvanized panels, factory painted gray on both
sides.
b. Provide all fastening devices, caulking, floor channels
etc. necessary for installation.
c. Size: 9 FT - 8 IN wide x 10 FT - 0 IN high x 7 FT - 6 IN
deep (inside clear working dimensions).
2. Filters:
a. U.L. listed.
b. F.M. approved.
c. Paint arrestor exhaust.
3. Fire deflector curtain.
4. Draft gauge.
5. Exhaust fan:
a. 34 IN diameter double ring exhaust fan.
b. 3 HP open type ball bearing motor 460 V, 3 PH.
c. Combination motor starter and disconnect.
d. Capacity: 12,500 CFM at .50 IN static pressure, 125 FPM.
e. Combination automatic damper and weather hood minimum 6
FT from roof to discharge top.
f. Roof curb as required.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S..- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
11144-4
g. Belt guard.
h. Access door.
6. Lighting equipment:
a. 4 tube, 40 watt, 120 V, enclosed and gasketed fluorescent
fixture. Provide lamps.
b. Explosion proof light switch.
c. 16 IN x 54 IN wire glass windows,
7. Safety equipment:
a. Time delay switches on all access doors.
b. 3 way solenoid valve on compressed air line to assure
exhaust fan is running before compressed air is available
to operator.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
16 PAINT 3 - R~RCUTION
16
19 3.01 PREPARATION
19
22
A. Correct unsatisfactory substrates prior to start of work.
22
25
27
3.02
ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING
END OF SECTION
25
27
UoS.PoS. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
01
O3
6D18, 8G19
SECTION 11146
GASOLINE AND DIESEL FUEL PIPING SYSTEMS
11146-1
O1
O3
06 PAI~ I - ~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
for gasoline and diesel fuel piping systems as indicated, in
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, Secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Work included. Work of this section includes but is not
necessarily limited to following:
1. Fuel piping from storage tank to dispenser.
2. Supply and return piping from storage tank to dispenser and
vapor recovery system piping.
C. All hazardous liquids, chemicals and petroleum products shall
be transported in prefabricated engineered double pipe type
containment systems. Secondary containment piping shall
contain all hazardous material discharged from a service pipe
for a period of time equal to or longer than maximum
anticipated time sufficient to allow recovery of discharged
material. Ail service pipes shall be protected from effects of
exterior environment by secondary containment pipe. System
supplier shall have at least three years experience in
manufacture and technology of double pipe systems with leak
detection and location. Ail straight sections, fittings and
other accessories shall be factory prefabricated to job
dimensions and designed to minimize number of field
connections. Secondary containment pipe joints completed at
fac~tory shall be 100 percent air tested. System shall be
fabricated to allow placement of leak detection cable after all
secondary containment closures are completed. Ail secondary
containment piping shall be sized such that it will contain 100
percent of volume of largest service pipe. Secondary
containment internal pressure shall not exceed values
recommended by system manufacturer.
D. All double pipe systems shall be equipped with a leak detection
and location system, and must be supplied by manufacturer of
double containment system. System shall be capable of
detecting and annunciating leaks by audio/visual alarms.
12
13
14
15
1'6
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
11146-2
Detection of shorts or breaks in cable shall also be
annunciated.
05 1.02 QUALITY ASSUI~CE
O1
02
O5
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
A. Regulatory requirements:
1. Equipment and accessories shall meet or exceed applicable
federal, state, local building code requirements, and be in
full conformity with local fire department requirements, and
all authorities or Regulatory Agencies having Jurisdiction.
B. Code compliance:
1. UL compliance: Accessories and ancillary equipment
furnished shall be UL labeled.
2. NFPA compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of
NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
21 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
21
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
33
A. Shop drawings:
1. Showing exact location of all tanks and piping and related
systems.
B. Contractor must provide complete submittals, including product
data, installation, maintenance, operating and testing
instructions for underground piping and leak detection system.
C. Contractor must provide a copy of all local and state
regulations for underground storage piping and leak monitoring.
24
25
26
28
29
30
32
33
37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
40 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
4O
43 '
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Piping must be installed in accordance with acceptable
practices in a manner to avoid damage during installation,
testing, or operation. Material must be compatible with
products stored (diesel, fuel oil, motor oil, gasoline, gasohol
10 percent ethanol, and gasohol 5 percent methonol plus
cosolvent) and must be installed per manufacturer's
recommendation.
B. Piping materials must be as follows:
1. Metalic piping must.be minimum Schedule 40 galvanized or
wrapped black wrought iron pipe with minimum 150 LB
malleable iron fittings, and 250 LB unions underground.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
11146-3
Buried metallic piping systems must be independently
protected from corrosion by a properly engineered and
installed cathodic protection system with monitor station,
designed for 30 year minimum life.
2. Non-metallic piping must be installed according to
manufacturer's instructions. Piping materials and epoxies
must be compatible with products stored. Piping must be UL
listed. Pipe must have minimum 30 year life.
C. Distribution piping must be provided with a secondary
containment system independent of underground tank. Secondary
containment must be either single wall pipe with membrane liner
system or double wall piping system installed as per
manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Double wall pipe system must:
a. Be tested at minimum 50 PSIG.
b. Be cathodically protected if metallic piping is used.
c. Have a monitoring system to detect leaks, independent of
tank monitoring.
2. Membrane liner must:
a. Have permeability with substance to be contained not
greater than 0.25 0Z per square foot per 24 hour period.
b. Have a design life of 30 years.
c. Have a monitoring system and well to detect releases.
d. Provide 360 degree containment.
e. Withstand temperature 0 degF to 120 degF.
f. Withstand humidity, mildew, bacteria attack and chemical
resistant to product stored.
3. Membrane liner must comply with following standards:
a. Federal Standard 191, Material Testing of Protective
Coated Industrial Textiles.
b. ASTM 0751-73, Method of Testing Coated Fabrics.
c. MIL-I-4520, Quality Control Inspection and Testing for
Fabrication of Flexible Membrane Materials.
D. Installation:
1. Tank and piping systems must be installed as per
manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 30A and NFPA 31.
2. Excavation and trenching must comply with OSHA 2226, dated
1975.
3. Installation of underground systems must comply with API
Publication 1651, November 1979, "Installation of
Underground Storage Systems".
4. Ail pipes within outer casing shall be supported at not more
than 10 FT intervals. These supports shall be designed to
allow for continuous airflow and drainage of conduit in
place. Straight supports shall be designed to occupy not
more than 10 percent of annular air space.
5. Piping must be installed at least a minimum of 18 IN below
grade and sloped at a minimum 1/8 IN per foot down to
storage tank.
6. Piping must be tested (except for fill piping) at 150
percent of maximum operating pressure, or 50 PSIG air
01
02
O3
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
07
08
09
11146-4
pressure, whichever is greater for a period of one hour
while all joints are soaped.
WARNING: Piping must be isolated from tanks and dispensers
prior to testing.
7. At least three days prior to performing pressure testing for
piping, contractor must submit to Contracting Officer a
schedule for his approval.
O1
02
04
05
07
O8
09
12 2.02 VALVES
12
15 A. Stop valves: Gate or ball valves, UL listed.
15
18 2.03 LEAK LOCATION - DETECTION SYSTEM
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
-53
A. Leak location/detection system shall consist of a monitoring
unit and continuous sensor cable. Alarm unit shall be capable
of checking entire length of system, including three secondary
fuel storage tanks, displaying location(s) of leak(s).
1. Alarm unit shall have a display providing status and alarm
data. Monitoring unit will be field connected to an alarm
horn at a location designated by Owner.
2. In event of power failure, system conditions and parameters
shall be stored on nonvolatile memory allowing unit to
resume monitoring, without resetting, upon restoration of
power.
3. Monitoring unit shall be enclosed in a NEMA enclosure
suitable for installation environment. Monitoring unit
power requirements shall be 110/220 VAC, 60 HZ, single
phase.
4. Leak location/detection system shall be cable of monitoring
entire sensing string for additional faults or leaks during
a current leak-fault event.
5. System shall be capable of accounting for installation
irregularities, static moisture and puddles (such as
condensation) with no loss in accuracy or sensitivity.
System shall locate point of origin of leak or fault within
plus/minus 1 percent of distance from last calibration, point
to leak or plus/minus 5 FT, whichever is greater.
Monitoring unit shall report and record type of fault,
distance, date, and time of an alarm.'
6. Sensor cable, connectors, probes and jumpers shall be
supplied by manufacturer of monitoring unit. System
manufacturer shall provide a factory trained representative
at two on-site meetings for preconstruction and
sensor/electronics installation°
7. System manufacturer.shall have at least three years of
experience with leak location/detection technology°
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
11146-5
8. Manufacturer: PermAlert AT by PermAlert Environmental
Specialty Products, Inc.
9. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
10. Trained field representatives of piping supplier shall
provide technical field support during critical periods of
installation and shall be present in final check out of leak
detection and location components.
B. Submittals:
1. Contractor must provide complete submittals, including
product data, installation, maintenance, operating and
testing instructions for underground piping and leak
detection system.
2. Contractor must provide a copy of all local and state
regulations for underground storage piping and leak
monitoring.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
21 ,PART 3 - EXECifrlON
21
24 3.01 INSTALLATION
24
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
A. Perform excavation, bedding and backfill in accordance with
requirements of Division 2.
B. Equipment:
1. Perform installation and start up of equipment in accord
with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Provide all additional fittings and specialties required to
provide complete operable systems.
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
38 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
38
41
43
45
46
48
A. Testing: Air test piping systems at 150 PSIG (1034 kPa).
B. Disconnect piping from tanks and cap during testing.
C. Test installed equipment in accord with manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
41
43
45
46
48
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
7H27, 8G19
SECTION 11147
LUBE HANDLING SYSTEM
11147-1
O1
03
06 PAI~T 1 - G]~
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all lube handling system as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other.trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
B. Description of work: '
1. Service reel assembly for following service product:
a. EO: Engine oil.
b. ATF:' Automatic transmission fluid.
c. GO: Gear oil.
d. W: Water.
e. A: Air.
f. CL: Chassis lubricant.
g. E: Electrical light cord.
2. Piping for service reel assembly.
3. Pumping and control equipment for service products.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31.
32
33
36 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
36
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. Manufacturer's qualifications:
1. Regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment for commercial
use for period of five years.
B. Regulatory requirements:
1. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories,
Inc., provide with label attached.
2. Applicable standards of National Electrical Manufacturer's
Association shall establish minimum acceptable standards of
quality.
3. Comply with National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
39
4O
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
52 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
03
04
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18~
19
20
11147-2
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings for scheduled items.
2. Detail and dimension overall size of each item arrangements
of grouped items such as shelving, points of connection to
utility service systems or structure and location of each
item relative to walls or columns in immediate area as well
as to any other equipment items scheduled on equipment
drawings.
3. Furnish wiring diagrams and details for utility connections.
4. Detail necessary foundation or other below floor
requirements and drawings in sufficient detail to permit
construction. Coordinate delivery of requirements and
drawings to permit construction of foundations during
regular construction schedule.
C. Product data:
1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature; maintenance,
operation, and installation instructions and manuals.
O1
O3
04
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
27 2.01 REEL ASSEMBLY
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
A. General: Ail reels to be heavy duty equipped with following: 1. Counter balancing spring.
2. O11 less bearings.
3. Steel roolers for hose guiding.
4. Hose stop.
5. Connection and hose.
6. Union coupling.
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39 2.02 SEVEN REEL ASSEMBLY (L.R.-1)
39
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. Reel assembly to include for dispensing: 1. Engine oil (EO).
2. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
3. Gear oil (GO).
4. Chassis lubricant (CL).
5. Compressed air (A).
6. Water (V).
7. Electric light cord (E).
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
52 2.03 2 REEL ASSEMBLY (L.R.~2)
52
U.S.P.So.- N. Texas/N~ Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
'02
03
A. Reel assembly to include for dispensing: 1. Engine oil (EO).
2. Compressed air (A).
11147-3
01
02
03
06 2.04 REEL BANK EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
O6
O9
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
A. Mounting channel (seven and two reel).
B. Engine oil service reel assembly (EO)':
1. Reel assembly, complete with dispenser, 16 quart totalizing
metering valve, swivel inlet, non-drip nozzle and 40 FT of
1/2 IN ID hose.
C. Automatic transmission fluid service reel assembly (ATF):
1. Reel assembly, complete with dispenser, 16 quart totalizing
meter valve, swivel inlet, non-drip nozzle, rubber whip
hose, and 40 FT of 1/2 IN ID hose.
D. Gear oil service reel assembly (GO):
1. Reel assembly, complete with dispenser, 8 pint totalizing
meter valve, swivel inlet, non-drip nozzle, and 40 FT of 1/2
IN ID hose.
E. Compressed air service reel assembly (A):
1. Reel assembly, complete with air chuck quick coupling and 40
FT of 3/8 IN ID hose.
F. Water service reel assembly:
1. Reel assembly, complete with chrome plated valve and nozzle
and 65 FT of 3/8 IN ID hose.
G. Electric light cord reel: Reel assembly with 3 pronged
grounded receptacle, hand lamp, bulb shield, switch and 60 FT
of 3 wire cable with adjustable ball stop.
H. Chassis lubricant service reel assembly (CL):
1. Reel assembly, complete with dispenser, high pressure
control handle with 3 way swivel and 40 FT of 1/4 IN ID
hose.
O9
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
30
31
.32
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
44 2.05 AIR OPERATED PUMPS
44
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
A. General:
1. Provide air operated pumps, auxiliary equipment and
accessories to provide for pumping of products from
underground and above ground storage tanks and 55 GAL drums
to respective product dispensers.
B. Engine oil (T-7), automatic transmission fluid and gear oil
pumps:
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M%F.
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
11147-4
1. High volume 10:1 ratio stub pump, double acting, with bung
adapter, and muffler.
2. Air regulator, gage and oiler.
3. Product and air connecting hoses, adapters and couplers as
required.
4. No. 44218 air lift.
5. No. 43983 drum cover for 55 GAL drums.
C. Chassis service pump:
1. 50:1 pressure ratio pump, double acting, with drum cover for
120 gallon drum, follower plate, hoses, adapters, muffler,
couplers and pressure relief valve set to 5500 psig direct
discharge back to drum.
2. Air lift to chassis service pump in 120 gallon drum.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
O9
10
11
12
13
14
17 2.06 DIRECTOR SYSTEM - PETROLEUM PRODUCT CONTROL WITH MASTER
18 AND REMOTE INTERCOM
17
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A. Description:
1. Director system for product dispensing consists of
following:
a. Control module (at WBE drum storage V126)
b. Impulse meters (at pump locations)
c. Fluid solenoids (at' reel locations)
d. Ready lights (at reel locations)
e. Air solenoids (at pump locations)
f. Master intercom (locate per Contracting Officer's
direction)
g. Remote intercom (in shop bays)
2. System to permit simultaneous remote dispensing of 5-
products to individual product reels with accurate,
controlled flow providing complete inventory control and
record.
3. 24V low voltage interwiring system with 120V power voltage.
B. Operation: Five step operation:
1. Power ON: Switch controls 120 VAC power supply to all
control modules.
2. Station selector: Positive selection switch for desired
station outlet.
3. Pre-set dial: Select desired quantity to be dispensed and
metered.
4. Start button: Push start button to initiate complete
operation. System will automatically terminate delivery
when correct amount is reached.
5. Totalizer: Three digit totalizing counter.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51
54
2.07 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. EO, ATF, and GO piping systems, on discharge side of pumps.
51
54
U.S.P.S. ~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
O7
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
11147-5
1. Pipe: Schedule 80 black iron.
2. Fittings:
a. 2 IN (50 mm) and smaller: 2,000 LB forged steel,
ANSI/ASTM Al05 screwed, ANSI B16-11.
b. 2-1/2 IN (62 mm) and larger: 150 LB steel butt welding
fittings and flanges, or 300 LB black screwed malleable
iron fittings and unions.
3. Joints:
a. 2 IN (50 mm) and smaller: Screwed.
b. 2-1/2 IN (62 mm) and larger: Welded or screwed.
B. A and W piping systems:
1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel.
2. Fittings:
a. 2 IN (50 mm) and smaller: 300 LB black screwed
malleable iron fittings and unions.
b. 2-1/2 IN (62 mm) and larger: 150 LB steel butt welding
fittings and flanges, or 300 LB black screwed malleable
iron fittings and unions.
3. Joints:
a. 2 IN (50 mm) and smaller: screwed.
b. 2-1/2 IN (62 mm) and larger: Welded or screwed.
%
C. CL piping systems:
1. Pipe: 7/8 IN OD high pressure seamless or electric
resistance welded carbon steel hydraulic tubing 10,000 psig
rated. Safety factor 2:1.
2. Fittings: Steel combustion fittings.
a. With seamless tubing: Swagelock compression fittings.
b. With ERW tubing: Lenz compression fittings with O-ring
seal and TFE back-up~
3. Joints: Compression.
O1
02
03
04
-05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
35 2.08 VALVES
35
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Stop valves:
1. EO, ATF, and GO piping systems on discharge side of pump.
a. 2500 LB at 38 degC (100 degF) screwed end ball valves.
b. 316 stainless steel body, ball, stem, gland and flanges.
c. Swing out body secured between 2 flanges with cadmium
plated steel bolts and sealed with Viton O-rings.
d. Ceramic filled TFE glands and thrust washer, TFE stem
packing and ball seats.
e. Acceptable product: Series 63 and 65i Whitey.
2. A and W piping systems:
a. 500 LB at 38 degC (100 degF) screwed end ball valves.
b. Forged brass two piece body, brass ball, stem and end
plug.
c. TFE seats and thrust washer.
3. CL piping systems:.
a. 10,000 LB threaded end needle valves.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
11147-6
B. Check valves:
1. A and W piping systems:
a. Class 350, screwed end "Y" swing check valves.
b. Bronze body, bronze renewable disc, brass pin and .plug.
'01
02
03
04
08 PAIIT 3 - R~CUTION
O8
11 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION
11
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
39
4O
41
A. Conform to requirements and recommendations of pipe, tube and
fitting manufacturer.
B. Pipe sizes:
1. Pipe sizes indicated are minimum. Manufacturer verify
adequacy of pipe sizes and pipe layout prior to
installation.
2. Increase pipe sizes if 'recommended by equipment
manufacturer, at no additional cost.
C. Steel hydraulic tubing:
1. Store tubing in safe area and protect from surface
scratching, and denting or rusting.
2. Handle tubing with care to avoid damages which impair'
joining integrity.
3. Use only tubing and fittings which are certified in writing
by pipe and fitting manufacturer as suitable for use with.
each other at working pressures which each system will
experience.
D. Support spacing:
1. EO, ATF, AF, GO, W, A and CL piping:
spacing of 7 FT (2.1 M) on center.
prevent, swaying.
Support at a maximum
Brace as required to
E. Pipe coating:
1. Coat underground piping and fittings in accordance with
requirements of Section 15060.
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29 ~
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
44 3.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
44
47
48
49
A. Make connections to all equipment served by process piping
systems in accordance with recommendations of equipment
manufacturer.
47
48
49
52 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
11147-7
A. Cleaning and flushing: Perform in accordance with
requirements of Section 15010.
B. Testi'ng:
1. Test piping systems in accordance with requirements of
Section 15040, except test all piping systems with water or
system process fluid/product.
2. Provide Contracting Officer with 3 days advance notice of
all testing procedures.
3. Provide certified test reports to Contracting Officer.
4. Test pressures:
a. EO, ATF, and GO piping systems of: 2000 psig.
b. EO, ATF, and GO piping systems on suction side of pump:
150 psig.
c. A and W piping systems: 150 psig.
d. CL piping systems: 8000 psig.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
U.S.P.S..-- N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
03
5A25, 8C22
SECTION 11148-
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
11148-1
01
O3
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all miscellaneous equipment as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Section 01340)
24
27
28
29
31
33
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
B. Certificates.
C. Operating and maintenance data: See Section 01730.
27
28
29
31
33
37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
40 2.01 MATERIALS
4O
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. As noted for individual products.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Truck wash system:
1. A truck wash system with water reclaim and recycle will be
supplied and installed by the U.S.P.S. Contractor to
provide utilities and under ground structures as detailed
and coordinate with the Contracting Officer regarding
installation.
2. Install and perform all hookups.
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11148-2
02
03
O4
O5
06
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
C. Anchor pots: 1. Location: V.M.F. body shop.
2. Manufacturer: Blackhawk Division; Applied Power, Inc.
model 93075.
3. Install units per drawings.
D. Welding curtain: 1. Mid-Mountain Materials Inc., Redman, WA; Janos Industrial
Insulation Corp., Moonachir, N.J.; Ka-Lor Cubicle and Supply
COo, Inc., Fair Lawn, N.Jo
2. Flameproof in accordance with NFPA 701.
3. Silicon coated fiberglass curtain.
4. Manufacturers standard means of installation, cubicle track
or rod.
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
19 PART 3 - ~X~C~TION
19
22 3.01 INSTALLATION
22
25
26
28
A. Installation of each item shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
25
26
28
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
6K26, 8G14
SECTION 11150
PARKING EQUIPMENT
11150-1
01
03
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all parking equipment as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1o Electrical hook up: Division 16.
2. Security access system: Section 16710.
28 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
28
.31
33
35
37
38
39
A. Shop drawings: Not required.
B. PrOduct data: Not required.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Owner instruction reports.
31
33
35
37
38
39
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43
46 2.01 MATERIALS
46
49
50
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Parking equipment:
a. Base: Federal APD (313-447-2700).
b. Optional: Cincinnati Time Recorder Co.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11150-2
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32~
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
B. Cabinets for exterior mounted equipment: Weatherproof. 1. Construct of cold rolled steel sheet, with welded seams and
welded steel angle internal frame.
2. Mounting anchors accessible only from inside cabinet.
3. Access doors and panels: Gasketed, with flush mounted
T-handle locks.
4. Provide 2 keys for all locks.
5. Key all locks alike.
6. Provide internal heating elements sufficient to maintain
proper operation at temperatures below 0 degF.
7. Finish: 2 coats textured baked enamel; color: White.
8. Provide cabinets large enough to contain all components and
to allow convenient maintenance.
9. Ail exposed parts: Finished to resist rust.
C. Electrical - General:
1. Control components in factory sealed, plug in
interchangeable units.
a. Cadmium plated wiring connection box.
b. Identify all terminal lugs properly and clearly.
2. Plug in connections between equipment components.
D. Auto gate: Model G-89, for 1 way traffic.
1. Cabinet: 12 GA steel; 42 IN high.
2. Arm: 10 FT long, 1 IN clear wood, easily replaceable without
use of tools. '
a. Finish: Painted white.
b. Locate on far side of cabinet from traffic control.
3. Operation: By Kard Kontrol station and loop detector; close
automatically by loop detector.
a. Auto-Manual and On-Off switches.
4. Motor for arm: 1/3 HP, 115 VAC, single phase, instant
reversing.
a. Connected by double V-belts; direct gear or chain drive
not allowed.
b. Cranks, connecting rods and main shaft: Cadmium plated,
steel bar.
c. Provide adjustable cams to allow adjustment of gate
travel.
d. Built in overload protection.
5. Power requirements: 115 VAC, 15 amp.
6. Provide internal 115 VAC grounded convenience outlet.
Gate controller: Programmable magnetic card reader (See Section
16710).
1. 14 GA steel cabinet, mounted on gooseneck stand, convenient
to motorist.
2. Operation: Activate gate if card inserted has valid code.
a. Allow changeable code by replacement of matrix card in
reader.
b. Operate in temperatures from minus 40 to 140 degF.
3. glectrical requirements: No power supply° Output: 115 VAC,
15 amp.
02
03
O4
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. - No Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01-
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
11150-3
4. Use cards as specified in Section 16710.
F. Loop detector: Model LD-iOB, automatic solid state electronic
device designed to detect presence or transit of vehicle over
embedded loop of wire.
1. Detect any type of vehicle or movement.
2. Automatically maintain peak sensitivity regardless of rain,
snow or other environmental changes.
3. Presence of vehicle indicated by light on front.
4. Ail aluminum enclosure with cover removable by no more than
2 pins.
5. Operate in temperatures from minus 40 to 160 degF.
6. Tune unit to loop, not loop to crystal controlled
frequencies.
7. No tools or meters necessary for setting.
8. Three position sensitivity switch.
9. Power requirements: 120 VAC/60 HZ, 5 watts. Output: 5 amp
to relays.
10. Lightning protection with loop fuse.
11. Over voltage protection zener diode and neon flash.
12. Line filter and loop isolation transformer.
13. 3 FT long wired harness assembly.
14. Loop: No.16 THNN single conductor, stranded wire.
01
03
04
05
06
07
08
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
27 PART 3 - RXI~CUTION
30 3.01 INSTALLATION.
27
3O
33
34
36
A. Install all equipment as indicated and in accord with
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
B. Provide all electrical work between components.
33
34
36
39 3.02 ADJUST
39
42
44
A. Put all equipment in proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION
42
44
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
4J03, 8G14
SECTION 11161
DOCK LEVELERS
11161-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - ~AI.
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for dock levelers as indicated, in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Division 3.
2. Dock seals: Section 11164.
28 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
31
33
35
37
38
39
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Samples: Not required.
D. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Instruction reports.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
28
31
33
35
37
38
39
42 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
42
45
46
48
50
51
53
A. Furnish unit as a complete assembly, ready to install per
manufacturer's recommendations in preformed concrete pit.
B. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be set in concrete.
C. Provide setting Drawings, templates, instructions and
directions for installation of anchorage devices.
D. Coordinate delivery to avoid delay.
45
46
48
50
51
53
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11161-2
01 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
01
04
05
06
A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings
and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of
work. Do not delay job progress.
O4
O5
06
10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
10
13 2.01 MATERIALS
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Dock levelers:
a. Base: Kelley Co., Inc.
b. Optional: Rite Hite Corp.; Serco Engineering Corp.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
3. Ail components by same manufacturer.
B. Dock leveler: Mechanical, spring or counterbalance operated,
complete with platform, hinged lip, toe guards, bumpers and
safety stop, complying with ANSI MH 14.1 and CS 202.
1. Size: Type 1 and 2; 6 FT x 10 FT; Type 3, 6 FT x 6 FT.'
2. Capacity: 20,000 LB (9100 KG) live load, for rollover and
cross traffic, with ultimate static capacity at least 150
percent of rated capacity without permanent deflection or
distortion.
3. Vertical travel:
a. Type 1:12 IN (300 mm), min., above and below platform
level for dock heights greater than 24 IN (600 mm).
b. Type 2:12 IN (300 mm), minimum, above and 8 IN (200 mm)
below for dock heights equal to 24 IN (600 mm).
4. Automatic vertical compensation: Not less than 8 IN (200
mm), floating travel between dock leveler lip and truck bed,
during loading and unloading.
5. Lateral compensation: At least 1 to 18, automatic for out
of level conditions.
6. Metal work exposed to view: Smooth and free of surface
blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks and
roughness.
a. Deck steel plate: safety plate, with minimum yield of
55,000 PSI.
bo Structural steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A36.
c. Structural steel tubing: ASTM AS01o
7. Finish:
a. Manufacturer's standard prime coat and minimum of one
coat baked enamel finish.
b. Finish coat smoQth, even surface not blistered, peeled,
chipped, or have embedded foreign materials.
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
U.S.P.So N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
04
O5
O6
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
3O
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
11161-3
C. Platform frame: Steel, welded and reinforced to meet
performance requirements and to provide'rigid support.
D. Platform: 1. One piece deck steel plate unit with non-skid surface,
mounted to frame.
2. Construct sufficiently rigid to accommodate rated capacity. ~
g. Lip: Minimum 16 IN (400 mm) extension, one piece deck steel
plate of skid resistant material platform surface.
1. Reinforce to prevent deformation.
2. Full width of platform lip to act as a vertical cover for
actuating mechanism when in stored position.
3. Chamfer lip edge to provide minimum obstruction to wheels of
vehicles.
4o Position lip so that it will be parallel with truck bed and
lie flat on it when platform is 8 IN or more above dock
level position.
F. Toe guard: Provide toe guard at sides of platform which rises
above dock, of sufficient depth to provide protection of open
sides throughout operating range.
G. Safety stop: Manufacturers standard safety stop device, to
limit downward travel of loaded platform to floor level or 1 IN
below floor level if carrier bed is suddenly withdrawn.
H. Bumpers: Laminated rubber tire type bumpers. 1. Provide on each side.
2. 4 IN ~rojection.
3. Manufacturers standard size and shape.
I. Communication system: For visual communication between truck
driver and personnel inside the platform.
1. Red and Green lights.
ao Mount on dock shelter frame or building to allow viewing
by truck driver inside truck cab. Coordinate location
with Contracting Officer.
2. Safety signs:
a. Yellow and Black, correct and reverse reading.
b. Verbage: CAUTION: BACK IN OR PULL OUT ON GREEN LIGHT
ONLY.
c. Mount similar to lights.
3. Switch.
a. Coordinate with electrical contractor for connection to
door position switch.
b. Provide indicator lights in opposing mode to outside
lights.
O1
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51 2.02 OPgRATION ~
51
U.S.P.S. r N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
O5
06
07
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
26
27
28
11161-4
A. Operation: Manual control. Operating cycle is complete
sequence of operation, beginning and ending with leveler in
cross traffic position and operating through its entire range.
B. Operate leveler by activating release mechanism which
disengages integral locking hold down device permitting leveler
platform to raise.
C. During travel, hinged lip automatically extends to working
position. Lip shall lock in position and not yield under a
weight less than 200 pounds until it comes in contact with.
carrier bed.
D. To lower, apply weight to platform with lip remaining locked
until it comes in contact with carrier bed. Maximum weight
required to lower unit will be 150 LBS.
g. With lip resting on carrier bed, automatic vertical
compensation will occur for variations in height of carrier
bed.
F. When carrier bed support is removed, lip will fall to stored
position with platform returning to dock level position upon
application of a maximum weight of 150 pounds.
G. Platform adjustable below dock level with lip in retracted
position to service minimum 3 positions and with lip extefided;
platform shall service any position within the specified range.
01
02
03
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
20
22
23
24
26
27
28
32 PART 3 - R~CUTION
32
35 3.01 INSPECTION
35
38
39
41
43
44
A. Verify suitability of substrate and opening to accept
installation.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for
performance.
38
39
41
43
44
47 3.02 INSTALLATION
47
5O
52
53
A. Install in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Test to ensure proper operation (Contractor to provide all
necessary equipment):
5O
52
53
U.S.PoS. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
1'1
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
49
11161-5
1. Testing: Contracting Officer shall select one dock leveler
for testing. Leveler shall be installed as shown in
applicable installation instructions supplied with the unit
by manufacturer. A fork lift truck with a wheelbase less
than width of dock ramp, carrying a load so that total
weight of truck and load is at least 20,000 LBS, shall be
driven across width of ramp while ramp is in level position
to determine conformance of unit with capacity requirements.
A carrier with a bed height of at least 12 IN above dock
level shall be brought to position to be served by dock
ramp. Ramp shall then be operated as detailed in Paragraph
3.5 and brought to rest on carrier bed. Fork lift truck,
loaded as above, shall then be driven up ramp onto carrier
and back to dock. Carrier shall then be moved away from
dock and ramp returned to its level position. Another
carrier with a maximum bed height of 12 IN below dock level
shall be brought to dock to be served by ramp. Ramp shall
be brought to 12 IN below-level position, once with extended
lip and once with retracted lip. Above test shall be
repeated for each of three full-capacity, below-level
positions with retracted lip using carriers of appropriate
bell height. A carrier of any bed height between 12 IN
above and 12 IN below dock level shall-be brought to a
lateral out-of-level condition of not less than 1 IN in 18
IN of width of carrier by using an unbalanced load on
carrier to determine conformance of unit to Paragraph 3.3.4.
Same carrier then shall be loaded or unloaded in such ~
quantity to make it possible to effectively determine
conformance of unit to required float capability.
2. Inspection and testing failure: Failure of unit to meet any
requirements specified herein during and as a result of
inspection or testing specified in Paragraph 1 above shall'
be cause for rejection of all dock levelers until measures
have been taken to correct deficiencies, modifications have
been made to all levelers, and test are successfully
completed.
3. Previously tested ramps: If dock ramp model being supplied
has been previously tested and approved by Postal Service in
accordance with requirements of this specification and no
significant changes have been made since, test requirements
may be waived. This does not waive other requirements of
specification.
4. Verify lip extension length.
C. Adjust for safe, efficient operation.
D. Restore marred or abraded surfaces.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
45
47
49
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O3
4HO1, 8F23
SECTION 11163
SCISSORS LIFT
11163-1
O1
03
06 PART 1 - GENE1L&L
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment and services
for scissors lift as indicated, in accord with provision of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Electrical connection: Divison 16.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
27 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE·
3O
32
33
A. Design of scissors lift:
B. Installer qualifications:
installer.
Conform to OSHA Standards.
Manufacturer or authorized
27
3O
32
33
36 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
36
39
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
A. Shop drawings.
B. Product data.
C. Project information:
1. Operating and maintenance instructions: Successful bidder
shall furnish a complete set of operating and maintenance
instructions with each platform lift covering:
a. General description of equipment item and its functions,
with photograph or photographs.
b. Instructions for operating, including safety provisions.
c. Repair and adjustment procedures in step-by- step detail,
including'replacement of parts, motors and other
components.
39
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
18
21
24
25
26
27.
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5O
51
53
54
11163-2
d. Trouble-shooting procedures in columnar form
headings of "symptom", "probable cause", "corr
action".
e. Parts lists, both complete and for stocking pu
Parts shall be referenced to exploded views an
f. Procurement information: Description of parts
permit identification of standard nuts, bolts,
screws and other hardware, as well as of compo
appropriate.
ader
mctive
~poses.
drawings.
shall
washers,
cents when
g. Warranty shall show total period covered and dmtail
coverage as to parts, shipping costs and cost ~f labor
used in making replacement. Contractor-operated service
points shall be listed. :
2. Warranty: 1 year, signed by manufacturer and Con ractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Scissor lift:
a. Base: Autoquip Corp., Model PLT 6050.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
3. Capacity: 5000 LB.
4. Size: 72 x 98 IN.
5. Vertical travel: 50 IN.
B. Side rails and toe boards: 42 IN high side rails, 4 IN high
toe boards on 98 IN sides, removable.
C. Hinged throw over plate: Checkered plate 1/4 IN
D. Protective skirt: Accordian pleated cover to protec
items. Extend at least 8 IN below top surface of pl
Taper inward 80 degrees from vertical.
E. Control: Constant pressure deadman type, two button up and
down weatherproof pendant control.
1. Voltage ll0V unless code requires other voltage.
2. Provide all internal wiring.
3. Provide 20 FT coil type cord mounted to power unit.
4. Pendant to have hanging clip, for hanging on handrails or
wall mounted hook.
F. Warning bell: Integral, continuous operation automatically
upon'activation of lift mechanism up or down.
Go Safety leg: To hold piatform in raised position for
maintenance.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
~m) thick.
t operating
~tform.
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
18
21
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
36
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
53
54
11163-3
02
03
O4
O6
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
H. Safety device: Hydraulic device to limit vertical travel of
platform to 1-IN at any lift height under rated load upon
sudden loss of hydraulic pressure.
I. Platform: Nonskid steel plate.
J. Bridge plate: 66 IN wide x 24 IN long nonskid plate hinged to
side of platform. Operating range from at least 90 degrees
downward from horizontal, and 95 to 100 degrees upward from
horizontal. Provide chain type restraining mechanism to
prevent accidental falling of plate. No portion of plate or
hinge mechanism shall project above the platform or below its
horizontal position~ Design to support 5,000 LB rolling load
without distortion, buckling, or evidence of failure.
K. Power unit:
1. Power for lifting shall be provided by an electric motor
driven hydraulic unit operating a hydraulic cylinder.
Motor, pump, solenoid valve, starter and sump shall be
remote mounted as a compact unit on a single base, external
to the complete elevating platform and designed for either
, floor or wall mounting, as specified. Suitable lengths of
hose, wiring and connections shall be provided as required
between remote mounted power unit and installed unit.
L. Motor:
1. Motor shall be Type II, Class II, style B-2 motor in
accordance with Federal Specification CC-M-641. Unless
otherwise specified, motor shall be designed for 3 phase 60
Hz, 230/460 volt operation and shall have overload and under
voltage protection. Motor shall not be less than 5 HP rated
for intermittent duty. Motor starter shall be completely
wired for operation for same electrical supply as motor.
Ail control components shall be prewired and mounted
integral with power unit NEMA 3 enclosure.
02
03
O4
O6
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39 2.02 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
39
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Repairs and maintenance:
1. Provision shall be made for ready adjustment, service and
replacement of all electric assemblies and components, and
wearing parts of lift mechanism power unit. There shall be
no interference to servicing or 'draining of oils and
lubricants to or from any assembly or component by frame
members of other obstructions.
2. Finish: Prepare surface and paint safety yellow.
3. Marking: Each unit shall be stenciled with words "U.S.
POSTAL SERVICE" using durable black enamel, lettering shall
be a minimum 1 IN ~igh.
4. Nameplate: Manufacturer shall provide and install a
corrosion resistant metal nameplate in a visible and safe
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
11163-4
location on platform lift. In addition to manufacturer"s
name and address, following information shall be indented or
-embossed on plate:
Platform, Elevating, Electro-Hydraulic
Capacity .......... 5000 Pounds-
Serial Number ........
Model Number ~ .......
Delivery Date ....... Month and Year
Contract or Order Number . .
Inspected .......... Date, Name of Inspection
Office
Service Weight ....... Pounds
O1
02
03
05
06
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
17 PART 3 - RXRCUTION
17
20 3.01 INSPECTION
2O
,23
25
27
28
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive unit.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for'
performance.
23
25
27
28
31 3.02 INSTALLATION
31
34
35
37
39
A. Install so unit in full lowered position is level with adjacent
surface.
B. Adjust as necessary to assure correct operation.
C. Coordinate electric hook-up with Division 16.
34
35
37
39
42 3.03 TESTING
42
4'5
46
47
48
50
51
52
A. Supplier is responsible to insure equipment is capable of
performing following quality assurance tests. Provide
certification of performance or perform tests under observation
of Contracting Officer.
B. Capacity test:
1. Operate elevating platform several times up and down to
ensure controls are. operating properly.
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
11163-5
2. Lower platform.to fully lowered position. Measure vertical
height from ground to top of platform for compliance with
2.01, A.5.
3. Place 5,000 pounds on platform so that it is uniformly
distributed over length and width of platform.
4. Observe, record and reject unit if there is any noticeable
instability, jerks or other evidence of faulty operation on
either raise or lower cycles.
5. Measure vertical height from top of platform to ground level
to determine compliance with Paragraph 2.01, A.5.
6. Raise platform to not less than 4 intermediate positions
between 8-1/2 IN and 50 IN. Hold at each position for at
least 1 minute, Reject if there is any evidence of
instability to hold load or other evidence of faulty
operation.
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
C. Instability test:
1. Load platform with uniformly distributed load of 3,500
pounds.
2. Raise platforTM to 50 IN height.
3. Exert a horizontal force of 200 pounds respectively to each
side of platform. Examine for any evidence of instability
and reject unit if there is any such evidence.
4. Repeat (1) with a horizontal pull of 200 pounds on each side
of platform.
27
28
29
30
Overtravel: With platform loaded uniformly with 5,000 pounds,
raise unit to fill lift height and hold lifting control button
for at least 1 minute. Reject unit if overtravel device fails
to function properly.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
E. Leveling:
1. Place a load of 5,000 pounds on platform so that center of
gravity is 2 FT forward of center of platform.
2. Raise platform slowly to full lift height. Examine flor
instability or misalignment or any other malfunctioning.
Reject unit if there is any such evidence.
3. Repeat (1) and (2) with center of gravity of load 2 FT to
rear of platform center; then 2 FT to right of platform
center; and, finally, 2 FT to left of platform center.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
F. Overload prevention:
1. Lower elevating platform to fully lowered position. Place a
load of 6,300 pounds uniformly distributed over width and
length of platform.
2. Actuate lift control button and hold for at least 1 minute.
3. Reject unit if overload by-pass does not function.
4. Remove load. Raise platform and inspect for leaks in
hydraulic system of any other sign of malfunctioning.
Reject unit if there is any such evidence.
52
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
01
O3
4HO1, 8G14
SECTION 11164
DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS
11164-1
O1
03
06 PAIr~ 1 - (]ENEi~A~.
O6
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services
for all dock seals and shelters as indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and'complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Division 3.
2. Dock levelers: Section 11161.
28 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
28
31
33
34
35
A. Shop idrawings.
B. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Instruction reports.
31
33
34
35
38 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
38
41
43
45
A. Deliver in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Protect as required before, during and after installation.
C. Deliver in time for coordination with other work.
41
43
45
48 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
48
51
52
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
Installation assumes r~sponsibility for performance.
51
52
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11164-2
01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
01
04 2.01 MATERIALS
04
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Dock seal:
a. Base: Frommelt Industries Inc.
b. Optional: Kelly; Blue Giant.
2. Dock shelter:
a. Base: Frommelt Industries Inc.
b. Optional:Kelly; Blue Giant.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section
00440.
B. Dock seal: 1. Cover material; 40 OZ hypalon coated nylon.
2. Shingles: 40 OZ neoprene, 4 IN exposure.
3. Side pads: 12 IN projection, wear pads on entire inside
edge. Bevel pads from 10 IN to 12 IN (front side), inside
edge.
4. Color: Dark Gray.
5. Foam core: High density polyurethane.
6. Head pad: 12 IN projection, 18 IN height.
C. Dock shelter:
1. Frame: 1-1/4 IN SO galvanized steel.
2. Side panels: Translucent fiberglass.
3. Common member side panels.
4. Cover fabric: 40 OZ hypalon coated nylon, two neoprene
rubber wind straps fastened to head curtain and frame. Head
curtain overlap side curtains.
5. Color: Dark gray.
6. Flexible stays: 1-1/4 IN, 14 IN on center in reinforced
pockets.
7. Neoprene rod: Full length of side curtain, glued and sewn
in place.
8. Armor pleats: 4 armor pleats minimum 24 IN wide by 13-1/2
IN long with 6-1/2 IN exposure and 7 IN overlap.
9. Buffer flap: Located at bottom of curtain with 6 IN wide
yellow nylon guide strip.
10. Foam bottom seals: Tapered, vented covered in color
coordinated nylon. Do not provide at doors where dock
shelters are used in conjunction with dock seals.
11. Frame protectors: 3/8 IN steel, projecting full distance
of shelter projection. Provide minimum 8 IN ~ide contact
surface.
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
52 PART 3 - RXECIITION
52
U.S.P.So N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
11164-3
01 3.01 INSPECTION
01
04
05
A. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
04
O5
08 3.02 INSTALLATION
08
11
A. Install in accord with manufacturers recommendations.
11
13
END OF SECTION
13
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
O1
03
4HO1, 8G14
SECTION 11400
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, ~
for all food service equipment as indicated in ac
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trad
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous i!
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necess
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Rough-ins and final connections to water supply,
steam supply and return piping, and ventilating
Division 15.
2. Rough-ins and final connections to electrical wi
Division 16.
3. Sealants% Section 07900.
4. Coordinate electrical requirements of equipment %
electrical service supplied in Division 16. Pro~
equiment which utilizes service supplied or bear
revising electrical service.
36 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A. Standards for manufacture and installation: 1. Ail applicable codes.
2. National Electric Code (NEC).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) requt
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (0f
requirements.
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) standards.
6. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) requirements
construction and installation of food service eqt
prepared by the Committee on Food Equipment Stand
51
54
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Shop drawings:
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11400-1
nd services
cord with
es.
furnish
ems,
ary for a
gas, drain,
uctwork:
lng: °
ith
ide
cost of
rements.
HA)
for the
ipment
ards.
01
03
O6
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
36
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51
54
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
10
11
13
14
15
16
11400-2
1. Large scale details of custom built equipment, si
locations of mechanical and electrical services a
bases.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer's data for standard manufactured equ
Fully identify and describe to show compliance.
complete index to data provided.
C. Samples:
1. Finishes.
D. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Owner instruction reports.
3. Warranty.
19 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
22
23
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
A. Verify water, gas, steam and other utility service 1
capacities and pressures.
B. Furnish all technical data required by other trades.
C. Coordinate this work with that of all other trades,
mechanical, electrical and general building work
and partition locations, raised bases and depression
floors.
1. Provide all sleeves, supports and backing plates
installed in other work to other trades in suffic
for installation.
2. If such inserts are not provided in time, perform
cutting and patching required for their installat
D. Dimensions indicated on Contract Documents are appro
space available must be verified at building site.
1. Submit written notice of any deviations from Cont
Documents which may be required to permit install
equipment specified.
2. Obtain written permission prior to proceeding wit
deviation or modification so indicated.
3. Correction of rough-in or building work shall be
the respective trade responsible.
E. Verify. accessibility to the areas where equipment is
installed.
F. Check all mechanical and electrical rough-ins to ass
sufficient clearances have been allowed to facilitat
and orderly connection to equipment and that such ro
will not interfere with operation of individual equi
or facility.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
~es and
ad masonry,
[pment.
?rovide
O1
O2
03
05
06
07
08
10
11
13
14
15
16
19
=cations, 22
23
25
including 27
luding wall 28
in 29
3O
o be 31
tent time 32
33
all 34
ion. 35
ximate and 37
38
tact 39
.tion of 40
41
any 42
43
)aid for by 44
45
to be
ire that
e a neat
ugh-ins
)ment items
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
03 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
06
O7
O8
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
A. If items of equipment are too large to be moved thro
permanent openings in building, make arrangements to
suitable temporary openings provided.
B. On delivery, inventory and inspect all equipment and
proper claims as required.
C. Provide labor or make local arrangements for the hah
uncrating and setting-in-place of all equipment.
D. Deliver all plumbing trim, electrical components and
items required to make the utility connections plain
and marked, indicating the equipment each piece is
for.
22 1.06 WARRANTY
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A. Warrant material, workmanship, replacement parts an,
equipment against any defects for a period of 1 yeaz
final acceptance.
1. Repair defects and malfunctions, make adjustments
replace defective parts without cost to Owner, wi
hours of written notification by Owner.
2. If not made, Owner may make necessary adjustments
or replacements and charge total cost to Contract
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
38 2.01 GENERAL
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. See Equipment List.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
3. Other manufacturers are responsible for all chan8
rearrangement of rough-in service and all engine¢
required as a result of use of their equipment.
B. Manufacturer's latest model, complete with all stand
features and standard accessories as described and
manufacturer's catalog, unless exceptions are speci
mentioned in Equipment List.
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11400-3
ugh
have
make
dling,
other
ly tagged
equired
new
after
and
thin 48
, repairs
or. ,
Section
es,
ring costs,
ard
hown in the
ically
O3
O6
07
O8
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
22
25
26
27
28
29
3O
31
32
35
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
O1
02
03
04
06
07
O8
09
10
12
13
15
16
17
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
11400-4
C. All materials and products: New, prime quality; fre
defects impairing strength, durability or appearance
structural properties to sustain safety or withstand
and stresses to which normally subjected.
D. Provide all faucets, overflow fittings, quick openin
with rotary handles and tailpieces, special valves,
pressure reducing valves, control valves, thermomete
pressure gauges and other equipment items that are s
with the equipment or required by governing codes.
E. Provide ductwork from collar at equipment to 6 IN ab
finish ceiling.
F. Provide each item of equipment factory wired and plu
internally to a point of single final connection for
utility.
G. Provide all machines fully enclosed with guards bui
with safety codes of local, sate and federal agenci.
Jurisdiction.
H. Identification:
1. Provide all items of equipment with mechanical an
electrical services with corrosion resistant name
permanently attached in conspicuous location, bes
of manufacturer, model number and load rating
characteristics of fixture. Do not use name plat
names of suppliers, fabricators, and contractors.
2. Provide name plates for switches and controls:
mm) stainless steel with etched and painted lett¢
with stainless steel screws.
I. Equipment of standard manufacture:
items as specified:
1. Casters.
2. Identification plates.
40 2.02 MATERIALS GENERAL
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Provide with fol
53
54
A. Stainless steel: 1. Sheets: ASTM A167, type 304, 19 percent chromiun
percent nickel, 0.08 percent carbon maximum.
2. Tubing: ASTM A511, type 304.
3. Legs: 1-5/g IN (41 mm) OD tubing, 16 GA (1.6 mm
4. Crossbraclng: 1-1/4 IN (32 mm) OD tubing, 16 ga
5. Finish:
a. Where exposed: No.4.
b. Where not exposed: No.2B.
B. Plywood: Marine exterior APA grade, closed grain P
IN (20 mm) minimum thickness.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
from
and with
strains
g wastes
regulators,
rs,
tandard
tve the
Ibed
each
t in accord
s having
d/or
plate
ring name
es with
6 GA (1.6
rs secured
lowing
., 10
(1.6 mm).
rwood, 3/4
O1
O2
O3
O4
06
07
O8
09
10
12
13
15
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
4O
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
53
54
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
31
32
35 2.03
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
C. Paint: Rust inhibiting type, applied in 2 coats ove
neutralizing primer coat.
D. Fasteners and sealers:
1. Gaskets: Neoprene, solid or hollow, smooth surfa
removable.
2. Rivets: Solid, type 304 stainless steel. Do not
rivets.
3. Screws: Type 304 stainless steel.
4. Sealant: G.S.Series 1200 silicone base with back
polyethylene rod stock, 25-50 percent larger than
width.
5. Sleeves: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sized to
around pipe and insulation; length so that ends a
with face of wall and 3 IN above finish floor.
6. Sound deadening: Schnee Morehead 5102, butyl sea
IN (13 mm) wide x 1/16 IN (1.6 mm) thick tape.
7. Escutcheons: Chrome plated cast brass, or heavy
plated cast brass, sized to cover hole.
E. Casters: Heavy duty, ball bearing type. 1. Minimum capacity: 250 LB each.
2. 5 IN diameter wheel with replaceable greaseproof
neoprene tire, 1-/2 IN wide tread.
3. Pressure tire grease fittings and tire guards.
F. Sink drains: 3-1/2 IN outlet, grid drain with 1-1/2
GA tailpiece.
G. Sealants: See Section 07900.
1. Colors to match surface being sealed.
ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Wiring of equipment items: 1. Complete internal wiring to junction box on outsi
equipment.
2. Use standard connection terminal, except as indic
3. Include control switch or starter on each motor d
appliance and electrical heating unit.
4. If starters are not integral with equipment, furn
installation by others.
5. Furnish all electrical equipment in balanced load
B. Motors:
1. Over 1/2 HP: 208 V, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, unless ot
indicated.
2. 1/2 HP and under: 120 V, single phase, 60 Hertz
otherwise indicated,
C. Plug-in items:
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
11400-5
ced,
u~e "pop"
er rod of
joint
fit snugly
re flush
lant, 1/2
nickel
rubber or
x 4 IN 20
~e of
ated.
riven
ish for
.erwise
unless
02
O3
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
31
32
35
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
54
O1
O2
03
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
11400-6
1. Suitable length 3-wire cord.
2. Standard 3 prong plug to fit "U" slot grounding
receptacles.
D. Lighting fixtures as part of items: 1. Provide ballasts.
2o Provide warm white lamps.
E. Convenience outlets on items: 1. Integral, recessed mounted box.
2. Duplex receptacle, NEMA S-15R.
3. Stainless steel plate.
15 2.04 EQUIPMENT LIST
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
- 30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A. E-l: Hot food unit:
1. Base: Duke Mfg. Co., Model TDHF-D48E.
B. E-2: .Griddle:
1. Base: Lang Mfg. Co., Model LG-48.
C. E-3: Equipment stand: 1. Base: Duke Mfg. Co. Aerohot.
2. Size: 48 IN long x 30 IN wide x 33 IN high.
D. E-4: Sink unit: 1. Base: Duke Mfg. Co., series 2424.
2. Size: 120 IN long x 27 IN wide x 45 IN high.
3. Three drain compartments.
4. Two lever handle drains.
5. Install disposer in one compartment.
E. E-5: Disposer: 1. Base: Salvajor Co., Model 200.
2. Motor: 2 HP.
3. Water supply: 5 GPM with solenoid valve, flow
vacuum breaker.
F. E-6: Exhaust hood:
1. Base: Gaylord Industries, Inc., Model GX-BDL.
2. Size: 54 IN long x 36 IN wide.
3. All exposed surfaces of 18 GA stainless steel con~
4. NFPA 96 construction, including all joints and se~
externally, continuous and liquid tight.
5. 5/8 IN diameter hanger rods to structure at 48 IN
6. Grease extractor construction, UL listed.
7. Integral grease gutter sloped to drain to grease l
8. Vaporproof UL listed recessed fluorescent light fJ
9. Coordinate with fire control system, and exhaust f~
10. Removable stainless steel'perimeter trim and/or
panels from top of hood of ceiling.
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
,pe
trol and
truction.
.ms welded
maximum.
eceptacle.
xture.
.n system.
losure
O1
02
03
05
O6
O7
09
10
11
12
15
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
O1
O2
O3
04
O5
O6
O7
O8
09
G. E-7: Fire suppression system: 1. Automatic liquid chemical fire control system as
protect exhaust hood and griddle.
2. Ail tanks, control heads, piping, relays, cable,
links, nozzles, and elbows as required for complE
3. Chrome plated nozzles and exposed piping.
4. Remote pull station in accessible location.
5. Installation in accord with code requirements an¢
coordinated with exhaust hood construction and ir
13 PART 3 - ~CUTION
16 3.01 INSPECTION
19
2O
22
24
25
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which equipr
be installed.
B. Verify locations of all utility connections.
C. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of res
for performance.
28 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
A. Perform all work under direction of experienced ins
supervisor.
B. Do not install equipment until all ceilings, lightil
and floors have been installed and room broom clean~
exhaust hoods.
C. Fasten all non-portable equipment to building and a,
equipment.
1. Make the fit to walls, ceiling, floor surfaces a:
tight.
2. Provide selvage to allow for perfect fit.
3. Place bead of sealing compound at enclosures and
to wall (horizontal and vertical), press into a
wipe out excess to a radius fillet.
4. Install all required grouqd anchors, clips, etc.
of actual installation to prevent any delay in t
other trades.
5. On all backsplashes use 4 IN (100 mm) wide "Z" c
IN (600 mm) centers maximum.
D, Trim all items requiring trim with 16 GA (1.6 mm) s
steel angles, concealed fastened to unit and adjoin
surfaces.
U.S.PoS. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
11400-7
required to
fusible
te system.
,stallation.
~ent is to
,onsibility
:allation
~g, walls
~d, except
tjacent
ad corners
turnbacks
ribbon, and
, in advance
ae work of
ips on 24
ainless
ing
01
02
03
04
05
O6
07
O8
09
13
16
19
20
22
24
25
28
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
54
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
15
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
26
11400-8
E. Perform all cutting and patching that may be necessa
accord with General Requirements.
F. Cut all holes in equipment and in building work nece
drainage pipes, electrical conduits, and any other p
necessary.
1. Install escutcheon plates on all pipes passing th
walls, floors and ceiling.
2. Calk space between sleeve or hole and pipe with s
sealant.
G. Touch-up all damaged factory finishes to match origi
H. Install stainless steel enclosures over all water pi
piping, electrical conduits and fire protection syst
provided under this section which are not chrome pla
I. Provide all work involved in making stands and suppc
equipment including any carriers, backing plates and
walls, floors and ceilings.
J. Pipe fire protection medium between master station a
protected areas and components.
K. Extend any and all indirect wastes to open building
29 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
32
33
35
36
A. After installation, inspect and test all equipment
operating conditions.
B. Correct defects, reinspect and retest until equipmem
operating properly.
39 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
42
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
53
54
A. Remove all debris, crates and packaging materials re
from this work.
B. Provide protective covers and wrappings until facilt
are completed.
C. Clean, test, adjust and sanitize all food service e(
items and fixtures.
D. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintem
equipment.
1. Provide qualified t~chnician to spend sufficient
instructing the required personnel to satisfacti¢
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
ry in
ssary for
iping
rough
ilicone
hal finish.
ping, waste
em piping
ted.
rts for
sleeves in
nd
waste.
nder
t 'is
sulting
ty finishes
uipment
nee of
time
n of Owner.
02
03
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
13
15
16
17
19
20
21
23
24
26
29
32
33
35
36
39
42
43
45
46
48
49
51
52
53
54
02
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.Fo
11400-9
02
O1
03
6D18, 8G14
06 PART 1 - GEN~
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
SECTION 12340
PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CASEWORK (PLC)
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, ~
for all plastic laminate faced casework (PLC) as
in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other tra~
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous it
appurtenances and devices incidental to or neces~
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. See drawings for types of countertops required.
C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Architectural cabinetwork: Division 6.
2. Mechanical work: Division 15.
3. Electrical work: Division 16.
D. Definitions:
1. Exposed surfaces: Ail surfaces visible when dool
drawers are closed:
a. Door and drawer fronts, and their edges.
b. Exposed end.
c. Countertop and ~lacksplash and their exposed
d. Face of cabinet body not covered by doors or
fronts.
e. Toe strip not to be covered by separate base.
f. Wall mounted adjustable shelves.
g. Interior of open cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible after
installation, and:
a. Web frames.
b. Dust panels.
3. Semiexposed surfaces: Ail other surfaces not ex
concealed, and:
a. Interior of closed cabinets.
b. Bottom of wall case.
c. Top of wall and tall cases.
d. Drawers°
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
12340-1
nd services
indicated,
es.
furnish
ems,
ary for a
s and
~dges.
rawer
~osed or
01
03
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
'21
23
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
O1
O4
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
12340-2
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer, or manufact
authorized representative.
B. Wall cabinet load tests: Submit independent testing
reports.
1o Test unit: Minimum 36 IN 900 mm wide x 36 IN 900
with 2 intermediate shelves; test wall: 25 GA (0
metal studs with 5/8 IN (15 mm) thick gypsum wall
2. Attach to test wall in same method proposed for p
3. Intermediate shelf load test: Load with 100 PSF
4. Bottom shelf load test: Load with 200 PSF (900 K
5. Cabinet load test: Load each intermediate shelf
PSF; load bottom shelf with 200 PSF (900 KgSM).
6. Lateral load test: Load each shelf with 100 PSF
a. Apply horizontal force at center line of weigh
distribution to pull cabinet off wall.
b. Apply horizontal force perpendicular to wall ~
to wall, separately.
c. Horizontal load: 0.375 x total weight of cabi
7. At end of each test there shall be no permanent d
or damage or failure of anchorage.
27 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
40
41
43
44
45
46
A. Shop drawings: 1. Plan of casework at 1/8 IN = 12 IN (3 mm = 300 mm
larger.
2. Elevations of casework at 1/4 IN = 1FT (6 mm = 3
larger.
3. Cross re~erence all shop drawings to Contract Doc
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer's technical data and specifications
C. Samples:
1. Finishes.
D. Project information: 1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Test reports for plastic overlay and plastic lam
3. Certification of installer qualifications.
49 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
52
54
A. Verify dimensions at site.
B. Verify locations of items furnished in other section
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
urer~s
agency
mm high
.5 mm)
board.
roject.
(450 KgSM).
~SM).
with 100
(450 KgSM).
t
nd Parallel
net.
eformation
) or
O0 mm) or
uments.
nate.
O1
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
4O
41
43
44
45
46
49
52
54
02
03
O4
O5
C. If necessary to vary from arrangement indicated bec~
structural, mechanical, electrical or other considex
make such variations only after approval of Contract
Officer.
09 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
12 2.01 GENERAL
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Plastic laminate faced casework:
a. Base: LSI Corp.of America, Inc.
b. Optional manufacturers: Calmar Manufacturing
Systems Design Corp.; and Lemons Millwork, Inc
equal.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply wit[
00440.
a. Sample of finished base cabinet unit, 18 IN (l
minimum, with one drawer, door and shelf, com[
hardware conforming to all requirements.
b. Catalog of standard units (detailing construct
assembly of all components).
3. Joinery: Use either conventional joinery or mec[
fasteners, as specified.
32 2.02 MATERIALS
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Methyl acrylate (Corian, Fountainhead):
a. Base: DuPont.
b. Optional: Nevamar.
2. Plastic laminate:
a. Base: Formica Corp.
b. Optional: Nevamar Corp.; Ralph Wilson Plasti(
Co.(WilsonArt).
3. Plastic overlay panel products:
a. Base: Simpson Timber Co.
b. Optional: Sel-Ply Div./Medford Corp.; and c~
manufacturer.
4. Cabinet hardware:
a. Base: National Lock Co.
b. Optional: Knape & Vogt; Grant; Epco; Webbex
Stylmark; Kronaflex; HDI; and the casework mar
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply witt
00440.
B. Methyl acrylic: Nevamar Fountainhead.
U.S.P.S.
N. Texas/N, Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
12340-3
,use of
ations,
ing
Co.; TMI
· , or
Section
50 mm) wide
.lete with
ion and
~nical
.sework
'-Knapp;
.ufacturer.
Section
02
03
04
05
O9
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
54
O1
O2
03
05
O6
O7
08
O9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
36
37
39
41
43'
45
47
48
49
51
52
12340-4
1. Countertops and backsplashes: 3/4 IN thick, doub
to 1-1/2 IN. Round edges to 3/8 IN radius.
2. Color: FS-6-2 Pewter Gray.
C. Plastic laminate: Nevamar.
1. NEMA LD3-1983 high pressure laminate, textured fi
2. Color: Dove gray S-6-3T textured.
3. Ail other exposed surfaces: Grade GP28, 0.028 IN
thick.
4. Provide backer sheet on each plastic laminated it
a. Semi-exposed backer sheet: Grade CL20, 0.020
thick; color to match plastic overlay.
= b. Concealed backer sheet: Grade BK20, 0.020 IN
thick.
5. Color of laminate on countertop edges: Same as s
item.
6. See "Fabrication-Case Components" for components
plastic laminate finish.
D. Plastic overlay: Resin impregnated paper overlay ho
cured onto substrates, with backer/balance sheet.
1. Conform to NEMA L0-1-1977 requirements for "Gener
decorative board (not "Light Duty" liner type).
Z. Satin finish, opaque color.
3. Resin: Polyester; or Melamine; phenolic resin ma
on concealed surfaces.
4. Color: Casework manufacturer's standard light, n
solid color.
5. Substrates: As indicated below; see "Fabrication
Components" for components requiring plastic over
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, mat formed, 45 PCF dens 1. Type l-M-3 for general use.
2. Type 2-M-2 for counters with sinks.
F. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, medium density wood fiber[
PCF density, minimum.
G. Hardboard: CS251, tempered, smooth on both sides.
H. Plywood: PS1-83, softwood plywood, NN grade.
I. Hardwood: Any hardwood, S4S.
J. Stainless steel (for tops): 16 GA (1.5 mm), Type 3(
K. Table frames: Ail welded 12 GA (2.6 mm) steel tube
back and side rails; straight legs with adjustable
black baked enamel finish.
L. Footrest (in kneespace units):
flange attachment.
Stainless steel tub
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
Le at edges
~ish.
(0.7 mm)
IN (0.5 mm)
~0.5 mm)
rface of
:equiring
press
L1 Purpose"
y be used
eutra.1,
-Case
lay finish.
ity.
oard, 48
front,
:lides;
wi th
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22'
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
36
37
39
41
43
45
47
48
49
51
52
O1
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
M. Mechanical fasteners: Modular Systems, Inc.; Mod-Ee~
adjustable screw/clip inserts.
1. For concealed installation in side and end of ad'
panels.
2. Designed for particleboard having screw holding
LB (90 Kg), minimum (ANSI A208.1).
3. See Paragraph "Quality Assurance" for tests that
constructed with mechanical fasteners must pass.
11 2.03 HARDWARE
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
A. Hardware for hinged doors:
1. Hinges: Institutional (hospital tip), 5 knuckle
around type (screwed to back of door and side of
divider/end), with barrel only projecting beyond
cabinet.
a. Not less than 2-1/2 (62 mm) IN long.
b. Minimum 3 screws each leaf.
c. For doors up to 48IN (1200 mm) high: 2 hing,
d. For doors over 48 IN (1200 mm) high: 3 hinge~
e. Finish: Dull chrome.
2. Pull: :Wire, 4 IN centers; satin chrome finish·
3. Catch: Magnetic, adjustable, 6-7 LB (2.7-3 Kg)
roller type; provide 40 LB (18 Kg) unit on doors
(0.4 SM).
4. Lock: Provide where indicated.
B. Hardware for drawers:
1. Slides: 100 LB (45 Kg) capacity, nylon wheels/re
stainless steel ball bearings, positive closing
stops, drawer removable without use of tools; fi
Full extension.
2. Pull: Wire, 4 IN (100 mm) centers, satin chrome
provide 2 on drawers over 18 IN (450 mm) wide.
3. Lock: Provide where indicated.
4. For file drawers: Label holder and file hanger
C. Locks: Heavy duty institutional pin tumbler type;
suitable for application.
1. Provide 2 keys for each lock.
2. Master key and grand master key as directed.
D. Shelf supports (recessed standard type):
1. Standards: Aluminum or zinc coated or plated st
at 1 to 2 IN (25 to 50 mm) OC, for recessed inst~
2. Shelf clips: Plated or zinc coated steel; desigr
engage securely in slots.
E. Shelf supports (for wall mounted shelves):
anodized aluminum (natural) finish.
1. Standards: Slotted steel or aluminum.
Anochron
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M·F.
12340-5
,
acent
ower of 200
cabinets
wrap
face of
S.
ull; or
over 4 SF
llers,
nd pull out
e drawers:
finish;
rame.
atch or cam
el, slotted
llation.
ed to
e or
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
20'
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
12340-6
O1 2. Shelf brackets:
02 depths indicated.
Boltess, steel or aluminum, for
05 2.04 FABRICATION-CASE COMPONENTS
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
18
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
4O
41
42
44
45
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
A. Case body members (except backs not exposed): 3/4 I
minimum thick particleboard.
1. Base unit top: Use either full subtop or web frs
2. Web frames: Lumber.
3. Provide drawer lock rails at all drawers.
4. Provide back on all cabinets.
B. Unexposed case back: 1/4 IN (6 mm) minimum thick hz
particleboard or plywood.
C. Shelves: 3/4 IN (18 mm) minimum thick particleboard
mm) thick for over 36 IN (900 mm) between supports.
D. Doors: Partic'leboard: 3/4 IN (18 mm)
E. Drawers:
1. Fronts: 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick particleboard.
2. Sub-front (if used), sides and back: 1/2 IN (12
particleboard or fiberboard.
3. Bottom: 1/4 IN (6 mm) thick, minimum, particlebo
hardboard, or plywood; over 18 IN (45 mm) wide pm
intermediate reinforcing rails.
F. Case base: Integral base for each unit, or separate
base.
G. Small compartment dividers and dust panels: 1/4 IN
thick hardboard.
H. Filler panels and scribe pieces: Particleboard; pro
required to fit standard size units to space.
I. Plastic laminate countertops: 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick
particleboard, radius nose, built up to 1-1/4 IN (31
on all faces.
J. Methyl acrylic countertops: 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick,
1-1/2 IN at all edges. 3/8 IN radius edges.
K. Finishes: 1. Ail exposed surfaces: Plastic laminate or methy
detailed.
2. Ail semi exposed surfaces not covered with plasti
backer sheet: Plastic overlay.
3. Edges of doors and ~rawer fronts: Plastic lamins
4o Edges of case body members: Plastic laminate.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
shelf
N (18 mm)
rdboard,
1 IN (25
,m) thick
ard, o
ovide
continuous
mm)
vide as
mm) thick
~ild up to
acrylic as
c laminate
O1
02
05
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
18
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
37
38
40
41
42
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
O1 2.05 FABRICATION-CONVENTIONAL JOINERY
04
O5
O6
O7
O8
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
A. Case body: All joints glued. 1. Top and bottom (and fixed horizontals): Lock-jo~
dadoed or rabbetted into ends/dividers, and scre~
dowelled at 2-1/2 IN (64 mm) o.c.
2. Back: Dadoed or rabbetted into sides and bottom
3. Fixed small compartment dividers: Dadoed.
B. Drawers (with subfront): All joints glued.
1. Ail corners dovetailed or dowelled at 1-1/4 IN (i
or front corners dovetailed and back corners loci
or sides dadoed for front and back and all joint:
stapled or screwed.
2. Bottom: Dadoed into all 4 sides.
3. Front: Screwed onto subfront.
C. Drawers (without sub-front): Ail Joints glued.
1. Front corners: Dovetailed; or dowelled at 1-1/4
2. Back corners: Dovetailed; or lock jointed; or s:
for back and corner nailed, stapled or screwed;
at 1-1/4 IN (32 mm) ooc.
3. Bottom: Dadoed into all 4 sides.
D. Use no blocking or fasteners in exposed or semiexpo~
locations.
31 2.06 FABRICATION - MECHANICAL FASTENERS
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
A. Use conventional joinery, as specified, for wood dr~
B. Cases:
1. Machine all parts accurately for tight, square f
2. Space mechanical fasteners at 16 IN (400 mm) on
a minimum of 2 per joint maximum. 2 mechanical
each joint, or 16 IN (400 mm) on center.
3. Assemble components into rigid, permanent units.
4. Dado sides and bottom for back and glue and fast
C. Use no blocking or fasteners in exposed locations.
47 2.07 FABRICATION-COUNTERTOPS
5O
51
52
53
A. Methyl acrylate countertops: .1. Backsplash: Glued and screwed onto top.
2. Joints in methyl acrylate: Not closer than 24 I
to sinks.
U.S.P.So - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
12340-7
.nted,
~ed; or
or top.
;2 mm) o.c.;
jointed;
nailed,
IN (32 mm)
Ldes dadoed
or dowelled
~ed '
~wers.
It.
:enter with
[asteners in
(600 mm)
01
04
O5
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
31
34
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
44
47
5O
51
52
53
01
02
03
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
12340-8
3. Joints in counter length: Factory fitted, spltnE
and mechanically fastened.
4. Fill and polish all joints.
B. Stainless steel tops: Fabricate over hardwood peri[]
with 16 GA (1.5 mm) reinforcing channels welded to
1. Coat underside with sound deadening mastic.
2. 1-1/4 IN (31 mm) deep edge, with 1/2 IN (12 mm)
frame.
3. Field joints: Bolted, with hairline seam, unles
otherwise.
4. Backsplashes: Integral 4 IN (100 mm) high; provJ
top abuts wall, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic laminate countertops: 1. Backsplash: Glued and screwed onto top, with scr
2. Joints in plastic laminate: Not closer than 24 I
to sinks.
3. Joints in counter length: Factory fitted, spline
and mechanically fastened.
4. Laminate front edge applied before top laminate.
24 2.08 FABRICATION-CASE CONFIGURATION
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
5O
A. Similar reveal, approximately 1/4 IN (6 mm), at all
and bottom of doors and drawer fronts, and between d
drawer fronts in same unit.
B. Double door units: No vertical rail or divider betw
unless called for or unless locks are called for.
C. Toe space: 4 IN (100 mm) high by approximately 3 IN
deep; provide on front of each base unit unless othe
noted.
D. Countertop: Fronts and exposed ends to align with f,
cabinet.
Hardware mounting:
1. Drawers: Center pull in front, horizontally.
2. Drawers with 2 pulls: Set pulls at 1/4 points.
3. Swinging doors: Set pull in swing side corner;
at top of base units; at bottom of wall units.
F. Adjustable.shelves: Use recessed standards.
1o Depth: 1/2 IN (12 mm) less than inside cabinet d
2. Width: 1/8 IN (3 mm), maximum, less than inside
width.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
d, glued,
eter frame
ottom.
eturn under
indicated
de wherever
ibc edges.
N (600 mm)
d, glued,
sides; top
~ors and
~en doors
(75 mm)
~wise
~ce of
lertically;
~pth.
:abinet
O1
02
03
O5
O6
O7
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
27
28
29
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
01 PART 3 - ~CUTION
04 3.01 INSPECTION
07
09
10
A. Examine conditions under which products are to be in
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responstbilit
performance.
13 3.02 INSTALLATION
16
17
19
2O
21
23
24
A. Use manufacturer's printed instructions or drawings
cases where items or details are not indicated.
B. Provide all trim, fillers, closures, stands, support
collars, escutcheons, ferrules, brackets, braces or
miscellaneous items required for complete installati
C. Install extra locks where directed; deliver unused 1
keys to Contracting Officer.
27 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
30
32
34
35
37
39
A. Repair all damage done to premises as a result of in
B. Remove all debris left by this installation.
C. Test and adjust all items of equipment for satisfact
operation.
D. Adjust hinges so doors hang straight.
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.S. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
12340-9
talled.
for
in all
s, sleeves,
,ther
~n,
,cks and
stallation.
ory
01
O4
O7
09
lO
13
16
17
19
20
'21
23
24
27
30
32
34
35
37
39
O1
03
6112, 8G14
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
SECTION 12512
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, ~
for all horizontal louver blinds as indicated, iz
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other tra(
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated:
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous il
appurtenances and devices incidental to or neces:
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
24 1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
27
29
30
A. Product data.
B. Samples: For enameled units, submit color range saml
verification of color.
33 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
36
37
A. Provide anchorage items required to be built in for
installation.
40 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
43
A. Field verify dimensions as required.
47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
50 2.01 MATERIALS
53
54
A. Acceptable manufactureks:
1. Horizontal louver blinds:
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
12512-1
nd services
accord
es.
furnish
;ems,
~ary for a
~les for
O1
O3
O6
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
27
29
30
33
36
37
4O
43
47
5O
53
54
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4O
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
52
53
12512-2
a. Base: Hunter Douglas, Inc.(Flexalum).
b. Optional: Levolor Lorentzen, Inc.; Marathon C
Co.(Bali).
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Blinds, horizontal louver: Adjustable blinds with h.~adrail,
slats, bottom rail, lift cord, tilter, all hardware md
installation brackets:
1. Slats may be tilted to any angle.
2. Slats may be fully raised and lowered.
3. Slats may be locked in any intermediate position.
4. Finish color: White.
5. Provide bottom rail hold down brackets.
6. Provide with tilter at left, lift cord at right.
7. Design so there is no visible sag after continued use.
C. Headrail: "U" shaped steel channel 1 IN high and 1-[/2 IN
deep, fabricated from 0.025 IN thick sheet steel with rolled
edges at top, with 2 metal end stiffeners, with adjustable tab
to assure secure installation and eliminate all lateral
movement.
1. Provide plastic grommets to protect cords and slaT supports
through bottom of headrail with round edges to prevent wear
and discoloration.
2. Operating hardware mechanically locked into headr~Lil.
3. Prime coat.
4. Finish coat: Baked enamel, White.
D. Bottom rail: Completely enclosed tubular shape, min:
IN thick treated steel.
1. Prime coat: Chromate epoxy primer,
2. Finish coat: Baked enamel.
3. Form bottom rail after coating with locking groow
receive dust cover.
4. Usa thermoplastic protective caps in bottom of ra:
secure tape ends and protect window sill.
5. Hold down bracket pins molded on rail end covers.
Slats: Aluminum slats, nominal 1 IN wide, 0.010 IN
before coating.
1. Prime coat.
2. Baked enamel finish coating.
3. Total coating thickness: 1 mil.
F. Operating hardware, located in headrail: 1. Tilt rod, with cradle at each slat support.
2o Tape drum for each slat support.
3. Lift cord lock, with lift cord.
4o Tilter mechanism, with operator.
G. Cradle: Support tiltiog rod, provide smooth bearing
center tape drum over ladder hole.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
~rey McFall
Section
imum 0.010
to
1 to
:hick
and
O1
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
46
47
48
49
5O
52
53
O1
O2
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
H. Tape drum: Provide smooth rolled edge hole each si8
slat support.
I. Lift cord lock: Low friction type. 1. Crash proof type that locks automatically upon rE
cord.
2. Provide cord separator to prevent cords from twis
J. Lift cord: Braided with polyester jacket and rayon
core.
1. Size of cord: NR 2-1/2.
2. Detachable.
3. Sufficient length to properly control raising or
blind.
4. gquipment lift cord with tassel; ring pull with
when intermediate locking is not allowed.
5. Provide colored lift cord to match slats.
K. Tilter: 1. Tilt rod with worm gear.
2. Gear case: Enclosed type with precision gear.
3. Gear fadtory lubricated.
4. Hold slats at any angle and prevent movement of
vibration.
L. Operating cord: Same size and construction of cord
raise and lower blind.
1. At point where cords come through headrail, protE
cords with a grommet to prevent wear and discolo~
2. Arrange cord guiding mechanism to permit working
removal of tilter.
3. Provide each tilt cord with a tassel.
4. Provide clutch to prevent damage due to over till
M. Tilt rod: Clear acrylic. Bottom of rod no higher
AFF. Hexagonal cross section; support weight of bl
rod.
N. Slat supports: Braided ladder tape.
1. Assure proper control and adequate overlap of sla
2. Distance between end ladder and end of slats not
distance between ladders not over 22 IN.
3. Tape material: Polyester yarn.
a. Vertical component: Between 0.045 and 0.066
provide maximum strength and flexibility with
stretch.
b. Horizontal component, or rungs: Not less tha~
braided into verticals.
c. 15 rungs/FT equally spaced for proper support.
4. Tape clip: Metal clip or barb machine clinched
each slat support to lock in holes of drum.
5. Color to match slats.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
12512-3
e to attach
lease of
ting.
center
lowering of
IN cord,
lats due to
as used to
ct tilt
ation.
without
ing.
hah 72 IN
nd on tilt
ts.
over 6 IN;
N diameter;
minimum
4 threads
o end of
O1
02
04
05
06'
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12512-4
O. Installation brackets: Minimum 0.042 IN thick steel
with hinged covers allowing easy blind removal.
1. Prime coat: Epoxy.
2. Finish coat: Polyester baked enamel in colnr to
headrail.
3. Mark left and right to facilitate installation.
4. Provide intermediate support brackets for blinds
wide; maximum spacing for intermediate support br
IN OC.
5. Provide brackets to suit installation indicated.
14 PAi~ 3 - K~O~
17 3.01 INSPECTION
2O
21
23
25
26
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which materi
be installed.-
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibili
performance.
29 3.02 INSTALLATION
32
33
35
37
38
40
41
43
44
46
48
A. Install blinds in accord with manufacturer's instru.
reviewed shop drawings.
B. Position units plumb and true.
C. Anchor securely in place with proper clips, brackets
for mounting.
D. Provide adequate clearance between sash and blinds
unencumbered operation.
E. Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to pre'
galvanic action.
F. Clean all components.
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.H.F. & V.M.F.
brackets
atch
~ver 60 IN
rockets 48
als are to
for
tions and
and bolts
o permit
mt
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
14
17
2O
21
23
25°
26
29
32
33
35
37
38
4O
41
43
44
46
48
O1
O3
7H18, 8G18
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
SECTION 13070
INTEGRATED CEILINGS (IC)
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
for all integrated ceilings (IC) as indicated, t
with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other tra~
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous it
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necesi
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
5. Provide single source responsibility for all wor~
under this section. Coordinate all components o~
all components from single source to insure propE
interaction of components.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Electrical connection: Division 16.
2. Mechanical connection: Division 15.
3. Fire sprinkler heads: Section 15300.
4. Paging speakers: Section 16770.
5. Acoustical materials: Section 09510.
6. Ballast and lamps: Section 16510.
36 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
39
40
42
A. Standard for suspension systems: ASTM C635-83, intE
duty.
B. Standard for installation: ASTM C636-76 (81).
45 1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
48
49
A. Samples:
1. Materials and components proposed for use.
52 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
U.S.PoS. N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
13070-1
nd services
accord
es.
furnish
ems,
ary for a
provided
purchase
~rmediate
O1
03
O6
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
36
39
4O
42
45
48
49
52
O1
02
13070-2
A. Carefully coordinate ceiling layout with other work
penetrates ceiling systems.
06 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
09 2.01 MATERIALS
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
4O
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Integrated ceilings:
a. Base: Armstrong Modulon 3100 and 3300 series.
b. Optional manufacturers: Dorm Corporation; Chi
Metallic Corp.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
00440.
B. Acoustical suspension systems - General: Heavy duty
ASTM C635.
1. Main runner Jointing by spliced, interlocking end~
locks, pin locks, or other suitable connections.
2. Cross runners interlocking with main runners.
3. Ail runners to be slotted for air handling. Prow!
removable black covers for all runners. Remove cc
runner is to be used for air handling. Deliver uz
covers to Contracting Officer.
4. Provide types indicated.
C. Hangers: 1. Galvanized, soft annealed steel wire for general
2. Soft stainless steel wire for use in wet areas: kJ
etc.
D. Trim: Provide moldings wherever ceiling meets walls
partitions other vertical elements, and other types
or ceiling fixtures; where ceiling mounted fixtures
integral flange trim, no additional trim is required
hold down clips at all tile locations.
E. Lighting fixture:
1. Type 1: Fluorescent wrap around designed to fit ti
system specified, 1-F40 lamp, 20 GA steel housing,
enamel finish, minimum 85 percent reflectance. LE
extruded clear acrylic plastic, tradezoidal shaped
thick, Armstrong No. 642D. 277 volt ballast tandE
with adjacent fixtures where possible. Refer to
16510 for ballast and lamp specifications.
2o Type 1E: Fluorescent wrap around designed to fit
system specified, l-F40 lamp, 20 GA steel housing
enamel finish, minimum 85 percent reflectance. LE
extruded clear acrylic plastic, tradezoidal shaped
thick, Armstrong No. 642D. 277 volt ballast tandE
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
~htch
:ago
Section
systems,
~, tab
.de
,vers where
,used'
tchens,
ceilings
~ve
Provide
ceiling
baked
ns to be
, .110 IN
m wired
ection
he ceiling
baked
ns to be
, .110 IN
m wired
O1
02
06.
O9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
0!
O2
03
04
O5
O6
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
with adjacent fixtures where possible. Self conl
emergency lighting battery pack. Refer to Secti(
ballast, lamp and emergency lighting battery pacl
specifications.
3. Type 2: Fluorescent wrap around designed to fit
system specified, 2-F40 lamps, 20 GA steel housi
enamel finish, minimum 85 percent reflectance.
extruded clear acrylic plastic, .110 IN thick, A
642D. 277 volt ballast tandem wired with adJace~
where possible. Refer to Section 16510 for ball~
specifications.
4. Provide brackets for mounting light fixtures. D~
exposed metal end panels as brackets.
F. Air distribution devices:
1. General:
a. Air supply shall be distributed through modul~
diffuser that shall be an integral part of th~
system.
b. Refer to mechanical sheets for designation, c~
location and details.
c. The air diffusers shall be an integral portiol
grid system.
d. Diffusers shall be sound tested for air diffu
performance index in accordance with ASHRAE 3
ADC 1062-R4.
2. Modular air diffusers:
a. Internally insulated with pattern vanes.
b. Assembly shall be fabricated of 26 GA galvani
c. Inlet collar shall be provided for flexible d
connection.
d. Diffuser shall be no greater than 12 IN high
finished ceiling.
e. Provide volume damper at the inlet collar, ad
from below the ceiling, without removing pane
f. Capacity of diffuser shall allow for a discha
cfm with an NL of 20 or less, and static pres
IN.
g. Provide two individual air pattern control va
control of the discharge angle.
3. Return air baffle:
a. Baffle shall provide a labyrinth for return o
light trap.
b. Return air baffle shall layin modular slotted
and be capable of relocation without tools or
48 2.02 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
51
52
53
A. Exposed grid, non-rated:
1. Chicago Metallic Styline 1900;
System.
Donn Corp.; Coc
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
13070-3
ained
16510 for
he ceiling
Lg, baked
,ens to be
rmstrong No.
~t fixtures
Lst and lamp
not use
.rai r
ceiling
,ac i ty,
of the
ion
iB-72 and
:ed steel.
]ct
[rom
lustable
ls.
cge of 150
sure of O. 1
nes for the
f air and
grid member
fasteners.
rdinator
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O8
O9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
22
23
24
25
2'6
27
28
29
3O
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4O
41
42
43
44
45
48
51
52
53
01
04
O5
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
13070-4
2.03 ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
A. Ceiling tile, mineral fiber:
1. Factory applied vinyl or acrylic paint finish.
2. Light reflectance: Not less than 0.75.
3. Noise reduction coefficient: 0.50 - 0.60.
4. Class A incombustible units.
5. Edges uniformly fabricated, true, square.
6. Sizes as required to fit suspension system.
7. Lay-in style:
a. 5/8 IN (15 mm) thick.
8. Nondirectional fissured (NDF) pattern: Armstron~
to match AM-l, refer to Section 09510.
a. Acceptable manufacturers: Armstrong; Celotex
Gypsum Co.
9. Use for side and end panels. Do not use metal en
20 2.04 SCHEDULE OF INTEGRATED CEILINGS
22 IC: 5 FT x 5 FT grid; coffered ceiling fixtures as
23 indicated on drawings.
26 2.05 EXTRA MATERIAL
29
30
32
36
A. Provide Owner with one carton of each type and pat
material for maintenance purposes.
B. Provide in sealed labeled boxes to facilitate iden
PART 3 - EXE69]TION
39 3.01 INSPECTION
42
44
45
48
51
52
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installat
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibili
performance.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Consult other trades involved before start of ceili
determine areas of potential interference.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
's Cortega
Corp.; U.S.
d panels.
ern of
ification.
ion.
ty for
work, to
01
04
O5
O6
07
O8
Og
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
2O
22
23
26
29
30
32
36
39
42
44
45
48
51
52
O1
O2
05 3.03
08
09
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
48
51
53
54
B. Do not start installation until interferences have
resolved.
INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install suspension system in accord with ASTM C636
manufacturers' instructions.
B. Do not use defective or damaged materials.
C. Provide all hangers and inserts necessary to suppor
acoustical ceilings.
1. Provide in time to avoid delay in progress of we
2. Locate and align hangers and inserts correctly.
3. Coordinate location and alignment with work of
trades.
4. Provide supplementary rough suspension system a
where necessary to support acoustical ceilings
pipes, ducts, equipment, etc.
5. Do not suspend any part of suspension system or
ceilings from ducts, pipes, conduit, equipment,
D. Space hangers to prevent loads from items in or on
from causing eccentric deflection and rotation.
1. Provide additional hangers to support lighting
2. Provide additional hangers within 6 IN (150 mm)
main runners.
3. Do not bear runners on walls or partitions.
E. Install moldings where ceilings meet walls, partit
vertical elements, and other types of ceilings.
1. Support runners and border units on moldings.
2. Secure mdldings to wall construction by fasteni:
holes drilled in web.
3. Space holes not more than 3 IN (75 mm) from eact
each stud.
4. Draw up fasteners tight against vertical surface
5. Miter cut inside and outside corners.
6. Level to a tolerance not more than 1 in 1OOO.
7. Install with leg supporting bottom flange of
F. Leave suspension system ready to accept installati(
acoustic materials.
3.04 INSTALLATION - LIGHTS AND AIR HANDLING DEVICES
A. Install lights and air handling devices in suspens2
B. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical contract,
utility connections.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
13070-5
been
and
t
rk.
ther
.d trapezing
eneath
acoustical
etc.
ceiling
!ixtures.
of end of
ons, other
~g through
end and at
S.
mers.
,n of
.on system.
Dr for
O1
02
05
08
09
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
48
51
53
54
O3
O6
O7
O9
11
13
16
19
20
21
23
25
26
28
13070-6
3.05 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC MATERIALS
A. Install acoustic materials into suspension system, i
with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Field cut as required to fit materials to grid.
C. Make all cuts and square and true.
D. Do not install damaged units.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning and replacement of defective units
avoid delay in progress of work and before final ac
work.
B. Carefully clean all soiled surfaces.
C. Remove and replace all irregular, discolored, defec
damaged components at no additional expense to Owne
END OF SECTION
UoS.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
accord
in time to
:eptance of
tive or
O3
O6
O7
09
11
13
16
19
20
21
23
25~
26.
28
01
O3
5A25, 8F23
SECTION 13100
LOOKOUT GALLERY (L.O.G.)
06 PART 1 - GENI~
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, ~
for all lookout galleries as indicated, in accor~
provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other tra~
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
and install all supplementary of miscellaneous it
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necess
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Non-load bearing wall framing systems:
2. Metal roof decking: Section 05310.
3. Structural steel: Section 05120.
4. Metal fabrications: Section 05500.
5. Concrete: Section 03000.
6. Carpentry: Section 06000.
7. Building insulation: Section 07210.
8. Carpet: Section 09680.
9. Painting: Section 09900.
10. Mechanical work: Division 15.
11. Electrical work: Division 16.
12. Preformed wall panel: Section 07411.
13. Acoustic metal panel: Section 05305.
Section
C. Work installed but furnished by U.S.P.~S.:
1. Wall observation units.
D. Work installed but furnished by others: 1. Preformed wall panels: Section 07411.
2. Acoustic metal deck.: Section 05310.
3. Miscellaneous aluminum extrusions: Section 0840
E. Description of system:
1. The L.O.G. system as designed allows Contractor t
prefabricate portions of work, install work at si
portions of work supplied by others and finish i~
to provide a completed L.O.G. system.
U.S.P.S. - No Texas/N. Georgia G.MoF. & V.M.F.
13100-1
nd services
with
es.
furnish
ems,
ary for a
9110.
te, install
stallation
Ol
03
O6
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2O
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
5O
01
04
13100-2
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Shop drawingk.
07 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
10
11
A. Deliver and install system in a manner as not to del
project.
15 P~RT 2 - PRODIICTS
18 2.01 MATERIALS
21
22
24
25
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Per individual components specification sections.
B. Floor expansion joint covers: Metalines Inc., Type
1. Size as indicated.
29 PART 3 - ~X]~CUTION
32 3.01 PREPARATION
35
A. Correct unsatisfactory substrates prior to start of
38 3.02 INSTALLATION/ERECTION
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
53
A. Steel frame units: 1. Shop fabricate to greatest degree possible.
2. Cope angles and weld frame together per details.
3. Coordinate location and installation of floor and
floor mounted observation units, and light weight
floor slab.
B. Install frame units: 1. Suspend units from structure and secure in place
attaching frame units to each other.
2. Connect frame units to each other.
C. Installation of preformed wall panels:
U.S.P.S~ N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
my overall
1420.
~ork.
roof deck,
concrete
}efore
01
04
O7
10
11
15
18
21
22
24
25
29
32
35
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
53
01
O2
03
O4
O5
O6
07
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
1. Attach insulated preformed wall panels to frame
detailed.
2. Follow wall panel manufacturer's recommendations
attachment of insulated wall panels to each othe~
addition, follow manufacturer's recommendations
installation of furring system and acoustic metal
3. Install acoustic metal deck with insulation.
D. Install all gypsum wallboard and metal stud assemblJ
detailed.
E. Installation of wall observation units:
1. Coordinate location of observation units in prefc
panels.
2. Cut opening and install aluminum trim pieces and
units as detailed.
F. Interior finishes: 1. Install rigid fiber insulation to bottom side of
2. Paint interior surfaces of L.O.G.
3. Install carpet.
END OF SECTION
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia GoM.F. & V.M.F.
13100-3
nit as
for
. In
or
deck.
es ~S
rmed wall
observation
metal deck.
01
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
07
O9
10
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
O1
03
7Cll, 8F23
06 PART 1 - GENERAL
09 1.01 DESCRIPTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
A. General:
SECTION 14600
CRANES AND HOISTS
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated~
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous il
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necem
sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
14600-1
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, ~nd services
for all cranes and hoists as indicated, in accor~ with
provisions of Contract Documents. l
Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
furnish
:ems,
~ary for a
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Concrete work: Division 3.
2. Steel construction: Section 05120.
C. Design criteria:
1. Manufacturer is responsible for design of each t
device, attachment, and rail to assure adequate
lifting specified loads.
33 1.02' SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
36
37
38
4O
A. Shop drawings:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
B. Operating and maintenance data: See Section 01730.
C. Warranties.
42
45 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
48
49
A. Comply with Safety Standards for Top Running Cranes
Monorail Systems.
B. Comply with C.M.A.A. Specification 70, Specificatio
Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes, HMI 100-74 for
Specifications for Mohorails and to Article 510 of
Electric Code.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
51
52
53
54
,pe o~
:upport for
and
~s for
{oists, MMA
the National
O1
O3
O6
09
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
33
36
37
38
4O
42
45
48
49
51
52
53
54
O4
07
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
2~
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
14600-2
PAINT 2- PI~ODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Two ton capacity top running overhead electric crane C.M.A.A.
classic.
1. Bridge drive: A-4 type; rated 30 minutes 50 degC
tenv motors with totally enclosed helical reducer
in a continuous otl bath. Include adjustable bra
starters to be complete with properly sized therm
protection in each phase.
2. Bridge controls: NEMA 4X enclosure; fully magnetic with
mainline disconnect and ll0V control transformer; adjustable
electric ballast resistor or solid state electronic soft
start in primary circuit to provide smooth acceleration to
full operating speed of 60 FPM.
3. Girder: American Standard or wide flange shape, rigidly
attached to end trucks. Approximatley 23 FT span verify in
field.
4. End trucks: One piece welded steel frame; neopre ~e bumpers;
straight tread forged steel wheels with rotating axles on
roller bearings. Drive units to provide direct drive to the
axle with no open gearing.
5. Runway system: Approximately 31FT travel, verifi in field.
Steel runway beams, columns and floor plates as required for
complete installation. No. 40 ASCE rail and end stops.
6. Electrical requirements: 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 crcles.
B. Bridge crane hoist: 1. Base: H-3 class, electric hoist and trolley, chaLn or wire
rope, must be a true vertical lift type.
2. Maximum lift: 15 FT - 9 IN.
3. Hoisting speed: 16 FPM.
4. Trolley speed: 30 FPM.
5. Pendant crane control: 110 volt, 1 phase, 60 cycles. NEMA
4X enclosure.
6. Upper and lower limit switches.
7. Load limiter set to 120 percent load.
8. Dual brakes.
C. Three ton capacity electric monorail, C.M.A.A. Class C. 1. H-3 class electric chain hoist with chain bucket
2. Maximum lift: 14 FT - 0 IN.
3. Hoisting speed: 16 FPM.
4. Trolley speed: 50 FPM.
5. Girder: American Standard I-Beam. Approximatel 70 FT
length, verify in field. Anchor to building structure. End
stops and neoprene ~umpers.
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
squirrel
operating
ke. Motor
al overload
04
O7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
O1
O2
03
O4
05
06
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
6. Control type: NEMA 12 pendant. 110 volt, 1 phas
cycles.
7. Electrical requirements: 460 volt, 4 phase, 60 c
8. Upper and lower limit switches.
9. Load limiter set to 120 percent rated load.
10. Dual hoist breaks.
D. Electrification system:
1. Runway electrification system:
a. Base: Duct-O-Wire Co. Figure 8 system.
b. Complete semi-enclosed, runway system including
limited to hanger clamps, end clamps and power
c. Manufacturer furnish all cords, starters, requ
controls, cables, automatic take up reels, fes
liner as required for electric powered cranes
monorail specified above.
2. Trolley and hoist electrification on bridge:
a. Wire supported festoon cable with rolling carr
main connector to trolley-hoist assembly.
23 PA~T 3 - I~CUTION
26 3.01 INSPECTION
9
30
31
33
35
36
A. Examine areas where work is to be installed to insur
defects exist in work of other trades which would af
installation or proper operation of work under this
B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory condi
been corrected.
39 3.02 INSTALLATION
42
43
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommenda
shop drawings.
46 3.03 INSTRUCTION
49
A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and m
52 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
U.S.P.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & V.M.F.
14600-3
e, 60
'cles.
but not
feeds.
ired
toon tag
and
iers from
m that no
fect
section.
tlons have
tions and
~in tenance.
01
02.
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
23
26
29
30
31
33
35
36
39
42
43
46
49
52
O1
02
03
04
05
O7
14600-4
A. After crane and monorail have been installed and pla,
satisfactory operation, demonstrate in the presence
Contracting Officer that requirements of these speci
have been fulfilled. Ail testing to be at expense o~
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
U.SoP.S. - N. Texas/N. Georgia G.M.F. & VoM.F.
:ed in
)f
:'ications
O1
02
03
04
05
O7